AutodeskRevitBuilding8[1].1Tutorials | Autodesk | Auto Cad

AUTODESK REVIT BUILDING 8.

1
®

Metric Tutorial

August 2005

Copyright © 2005 Autodesk, Inc.
All Rights Reserved
This publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. AUTODESK, INC., MAKES NO WARRANTY, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS, AND MAKES SUCH MATERIALS AVAILABLE SOLELY ON AN "AS-IS" BASIS. IN NO EVENT SHALL AUTODESK, INC., BE LIABLE TO ANYONE FOR SPECIAL, COLLATERAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH OR ARISING OUT OF PURCHASE OR USE OF THESE MATERIALS. THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE LIABILITY TO AUTODESK, INC., REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF ACTION, SHALL NOT EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE MATERIALS DESCRIBED HEREIN. Autodesk, Inc., reserves the right to revise and improve its products as it sees fit. This publication describes the state cation, and may not reflect the product at all times in the future.

Autodesk Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and/or other countries: 3D Props, 3D Studio, 3D Studio MAX, 3D Studio VIZ, 3DSurfer, ActiveShapes, ActiveShapes (logo), Actrix, ADI, AEC Authority (logo), AEC-X, Animator Pro, Animator Studio, ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Map, Autodesk, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk (logo), Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk University (logo), Autodesk View, Autodesk WalkThrough, Autodesk World, AutoLISP, AutoSketch, Biped, bringing information down to earth, CAD Overlay, Character Studio, Cinepak, Cinepak (logo), Codec Central, Combustion, Design Your World, Design Your World (logo), Discreet, EditDV, Education by Design, gmax, Heidi, HOOPS, Hyperwire, i-drop, Inside Track, Kinetix, MaterialSpec, Mechanical Desktop, NAAUG, ObjectARX, PeopleTracker, Physique, Planix, Powered with Autodesk Technology (logo), RadioRay, Revit, Softdesk, Texture Universe, The AEC Authority, The Auto Architect, VISION, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual TugBoat, Visual LISP, Volo, WHIP!, and WHIP! (logo). The following are trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and/or other countries: 3ds max, AutoCAD Architectural Desktop, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT Learning Assistance, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk Map, Autodesk Streamline, AutoSnap, AutoTrack, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, Buzzsaw.com, Cinestream, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Content Explorer, Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignProf, DesignServer, Design Web Format, DWF, DWG Linking, DXF, Extending the Design Team, GDX Driver, gmax (logo), gmax ready (logo),Heads-up Design, IntroDV, jobnet, ObjectDBX, onscreen onair online, Plans & Specs, Plasma, PolarSnap, ProjectPoint, Reactor, Real-time Roto, Render Queue, Visual Bridge, Visual Syllabus, and Where Design Connects.

Autodesk Canada Inc. Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks of Autodesk Canada Inc. in the USA and/or Canada, and/or other countries: discreet, fire, flame, flint, flint RT, frost, glass, inferno, MountStone, riot, river, smoke, sparks, stone, stream, vapour, wire. The following are trademarks of Autodesk Canada Inc., in the USA, Canada, and/or other countries: backburner, backdraft, Multi-Master Editing.

Third Party Trademarks
All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders.

Third Party Software Program Credits
ACIS Copyright © 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright © 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Copyright © 1997 Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved. International CorrectSpell ™ Spelling Correction System © 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield ™ 3.0. Copyright © 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE ® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE ® and other Pantone, Inc. trademarks are the property of Pantone, Inc. © Pantone, Inc., 2002 Pantone, Inc. is the copyright owner of color data and/or software which are licensed to Autodesk, Inc., to distribute for use only in combination with certain Autodesk software products. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright © 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN © RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC © RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin." Typefaces from the Bitstream ® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust © 1996. All rights reserved.

GOVERNMENT USE
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts ............................................................................................... 1
Understanding the Basics ................................................................................................................................. 2 Navigating the Revit Building User Interface ............................................................................................. 4

Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model .................................................................................. 11
Creating Your First Building Model ............................................................................................................... 12 Creating and Modifying the Exterior Walls of the West Wing ................................................................ 12 Adding the Interior Walls of the West Wing ............................................................................................ 24 Dimensioning the Building Model ........................................................................................................... 32 Adding Doors and Windows ..................................................................................................................... 41 Adding Floors and Floor Openings ........................................................................................................... 58 Adding a Roof and Ceiling ........................................................................................................................ 74 Adding Multi-Level Stairs .......................................................................................................................... 80 Creating the East Wing and Passageway .................................................................................................. 87 Scheduling the Building Model .............................................................................................................. 100 Rendering the Building Model ................................................................................................................ 104 Documenting the Building Model .......................................................................................................... 106

Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings .......................................................................... 113
Modifying System Settings ........................................................................................................................... 114 Modifying General System Options ........................................................................................................ 114 Specifying File Locations ......................................................................................................................... 115 Specifying Spelling Options .................................................................................................................... 117 Modifying Snap Settings ......................................................................................................................... 118 Modifying Project Settings ........................................................................................................................... 120 Creating and Applying Materials ............................................................................................................ 120 Creating and Applying Fill Patterns ........................................................................................................ 123 Controlling Object Styles ........................................................................................................................ 125 Modifying Line Patterns and Styles ........................................................................................................ 128 Modifying Annotations ........................................................................................................................... 131 Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options ........................ 133 Modifying Project Browser Organization ............................................................................................... 134 Creating an Office Template ........................................................................................................................ 136 Choosing the Base Template ................................................................................................................... 137 Modifying Project Settings ...................................................................................................................... 137 Loading and Modifying Families and Groups ........................................................................................ 142 Modifying Views and View Templates ................................................................................................... 144 Modifying Render Scene Settings ........................................................................................................... 147 Modifying Import/Export Settings .......................................................................................................... 148 Setting up Shared and Project Parameters .............................................................................................. 149 Creating Named Print Settings ............................................................................................................... 151

Chapter 4 Ceilings ............................................................................................................................... 153
Creating Ceilings .......................................................................................................................................... 154 Creating Automatic Ceilings ................................................................................................................... 154 Creating Compound Ceilings ................................................................................................................. 156

Chapter 5 Openings ............................................................................................................................ 159
Cutting Roof Openings ................................................................................................................................ 160 Cutting a Dormer Opening in a Roof ..................................................................................................... 160 Creating a Perpendicular Roof Opening ................................................................................................. 164

Contents | i

Creating a Vertical Roof Opening ........................................................................................................... 167 Creating Openings in Floors and Ceilings ................................................................................................... 170 Cutting an Opening in a Floor ............................................................................................................... 170 Cutting an Opening in a Ceiling ............................................................................................................ 173 Cutting an Opening Using the Shaft Tool .............................................................................................. 174

Chapter 6 Railings ............................................................................................................................... 177
Creating Railings .......................................................................................................................................... 178 Creating the Railing Layout .................................................................................................................... 178 Adjusting Railing Parameters .................................................................................................................. 180

Chapter 7 Roofs ................................................................................................................................... 185
Creating Roofs .............................................................................................................................................. 186 Creating an Extruded Roof ...................................................................................................................... 186 Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint ................................................................................................. 190 Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint ............................................................... 192 Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint .................................................................................................... 194 Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint ................................................................................................... 197 Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof ...................................................................................................... 199 Aligning Roof Eaves ................................................................................................................................ 201 Creating a Mansard Roof ........................................................................................................................ 202 Creating Fascia, Gutters, and Soffits ............................................................................................................ 204 Creating Roof Fascia ................................................................................................................................ 204 Creating Gutters ...................................................................................................................................... 205 Creating Soffits ........................................................................................................................................ 206

Chapter 8 Stairs .................................................................................................................................. 209
Creating Stairs .............................................................................................................................................. 210 Creating the Main Lobby Stair Run ........................................................................................................ 210 Modifying the Main Lobby Stair Run ..................................................................................................... 215 Creating the Second Floor Lobby Side Stairs .......................................................................................... 221 Creating the Level 2 Landing Railings .................................................................................................... 224 Creating the Emergency Exit Stair Run .................................................................................................. 231 Creating a Semi-circular Exterior Stair Run ............................................................................................ 236 Working with the Stair Calculator .......................................................................................................... 241

Chapter 9 Walls .................................................................................................................................. 247
Creating Walls .............................................................................................................................................. 248 Sketching Walls ....................................................................................................................................... 248 Working with Compound Walls ............................................................................................................ 258 Working with Vertically Compound Walls ............................................................................................ 266 Joining Walls to Floors ............................................................................................................................ 276 Working with Foundation Walls ............................................................................................................ 278 Working with Wall Wraps ...................................................................................................................... 281 Assigning Wall Bottom and Top Attachments ....................................................................................... 283

Chapter 10 Curtain Systems ................................................................................................................ 287
Flat Curtain System ...................................................................................................................................... 288 Creating an Entrance .............................................................................................................................. 288 Adding Mullions to the Curtain System  ................................................................................................ 296 Curved Curtain System ................................................................................................................................ 299 Adding a Curved Curtain System  .......................................................................................................... 299 Adding a Custom Curtain Panel ............................................................................................................. 301 Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel  ...................................................................................... 304 Additional Curtain Systems ......................................................................................................................... 307 Sloped Glazings  ...................................................................................................................................... 307 Storefront System  ................................................................................................................................... 308 Curtain System by Lines  ........................................................................................................................ 311

Chapter 11 Creating Drawings ............................................................................................................ 315
Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project ........................................................................................................... 316 Creating a Drawing Sheet ....................................................................................................................... 316 Adding a Sheet to the Project .................................................................................................................. 323 Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet .......................................................................................... 324

ii | Contents

Creating New Views to Add to Sheets ..................................................................................................... 326 Using Legends .............................................................................................................................................. 333 Creating a Symbol Legend ...................................................................................................................... 333 Creating a Wall Type Legend .................................................................................................................. 335 Using a Legend View to Match Types ..................................................................................................... 337 Using Revision Tracking ............................................................................................................................... 339 Setting Up a Revision Table .................................................................................................................... 339 Sketching Revision Clouds ...................................................................................................................... 340 Tagging Revision Clouds ......................................................................................................................... 341 Working with Revisions .......................................................................................................................... 342

Chapter 12 Detailing ............................................................................................................................. 345
Creating a Detail from a Building Model ..................................................................................................... 346 Creating a Callout View .......................................................................................................................... 346 Detailing the View .................................................................................................................................. 350 Adding Detail Lines ................................................................................................................................. 356 Adding a Vapor Barrier and Insulation ................................................................................................... 359 Adding Break Lines ................................................................................................................................. 360 Adding Text Notes ................................................................................................................................... 363 Changing Component Order and Visibility Settings in Detail Views ......................................................... 364 Changing Detail Component Order in a Detail View ............................................................................ 364 Changing Visibility Settings in a Detail View ........................................................................................ 366 Creating a Drafted Detail ............................................................................................................................. 369 Creating a Drafting View ........................................................................................................................ 369 Creating a Detail in the Drafting View ................................................................................................... 369 Importing a Detail into a Drafting View ................................................................................................. 376 Creating a Reference Callout .................................................................................................................. 379

Chapter 13 Scheduling ......................................................................................................................... 381
Creating Type and Instance Schedules ........................................................................................................ 382 Creating a Window Schedule .................................................................................................................. 382 Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams ..................................................................................................... 385 Creating a Room Schedule ...................................................................................................................... 385 Creating a Room Color Diagram ............................................................................................................ 394 Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes ....................................................................................................... 396 Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions ..................................................................... 396 Scheduling Shared Parameters ..................................................................................................................... 401 Creating a Multi-Category Schedule ....................................................................................................... 401 Using Formulas and Filters in Schedules ...................................................................................................... 406 Creating a Level-Based Door Schedule with a Filter ............................................................................... 406 Creating a Wall Schedule with Filters and a Formula ............................................................................ 408 Scheduling Project Parameters ..................................................................................................................... 409 Creating a Room Schedule with Project Parameters ............................................................................... 410 Exporting Project Information with ODBC ................................................................................................. 411 Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access ............................................................................ 411

Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning ......................................................................................... 413
Setting the Base Elevation of a Project ......................................................................................................... 414 Setting the Base Elevation of a House ..................................................................................................... 414 Dimensioning ............................................................................................................................................... 416 Creating Dimensions .............................................................................................................................. 417 Controlling Witness Line Location ........................................................................................................ 422 Modifying Dimension Properties ............................................................................................................ 425 Working with Alignments and Constraints ........................................................................................... 426 Creating Automatic Linear Wall Dimensions ......................................................................................... 432 Annotating ................................................................................................................................................... 434 Creating Angular Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 434 Sequentially Tagging Rooms ................................................................................................................... 435 Tagging Doors and Windows .................................................................................................................. 437

Chapter 15 Viewing .............................................................................................................................. 441
Viewing a Building Model ............................................................................................................................ 442 Exploring the Building Model ................................................................................................................ 442 Creating a Perspective View with a Camera ........................................................................................... 445

Contents | iii

Creating a Section View .......................................................................................................................... 451 Creating Elevation Views ........................................................................................................................ 453 Controlling Fill Pattern Colors ..................................................................................................................... 455 Controlling the Fill Pattern Color of a Material ..................................................................................... 455 Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type ................................................................... 457 Creating a View Plan Region ........................................................................................................................ 459 Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan ................................................................................................... 459

Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .............................................................. 463
Rendering an Exterior View ......................................................................................................................... 464 Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model ....................................................................... 464 Adding Trees to the Site .......................................................................................................................... 468 Creating a Perspective View .................................................................................................................... 470 Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View ............................................................................................. 473 Rendering an Interior View .......................................................................................................................... 476 Adding RPC People ................................................................................................................................. 476 Creating the Interior Perspective View ................................................................................................... 478 Creating a New Render Scene ................................................................................................................. 481 Defining Daylights and Rendering the View .......................................................................................... 482 Creating and Recording Walkthroughs ....................................................................................................... 484 Creating a Walkthrough ......................................................................................................................... 484 Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position ........................................................................ 487 Recording the Walkthrough ................................................................................................................... 489

Chapter 17 Presentation Views ........................................................................................................... 491
Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique ............................................................................................... 492 Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique .............................................................................................. 492 Using Advanced Model Graphics ............................................................................................................ 494 Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet ............................................................................................................ 496 Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique .............................................................................................. 499 Preparing the Elevation View for the Analytique ................................................................................... 500 Adding a Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet .......................................................... 502 Adding Section Views to the Analytique ..................................................................................................... 504 Preparing a Section View for the Analytique .......................................................................................... 505 Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View ............................................................................... 509 Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique ............................................................................... 510 Working with a Presentation View Template ......................................................................................... 514 Working in a Callout Analytique ............................................................................................................ 517 Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes .................................................................................................. 524 Creating Cutaway Isometric Views ......................................................................................................... 525 Creating Cutaway Perspective Views ...................................................................................................... 531 Annotating the Analytique ..................................................................................................................... 536

Chapter 18 About Families and the Family Editor ........................................................................... 539
Using Families and the Family Editor .......................................................................................................... 540 Introduction to Families ......................................................................................................................... 540 Introduction to the Family Editor .......................................................................................................... 542

Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .................................................................. 545
Creating a Door Family ................................................................................................................................ 546 Drawing the Door Plan View Components ............................................................................................ 546 Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry ................................................................................................. 550 Assigning Materials to the Door Components ....................................................................................... 553 Defining New Door Types ....................................................................................................................... 556 Creating a Window Family .......................................................................................................................... 558 Specifying the New Window Parameters ................................................................................................ 559 Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry ........................................................................................ 560 Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry ........................................................................................... 566 Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry .......................................................................................... 569 Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry ..................................................................................... 574 Assigning Materials to the Window Components ................................................................................. 584 Defining New Window Types ................................................................................................................. 587 Creating a Furniture Family ......................................................................................................................... 591 Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters ......................................................................................... 592

iv | Contents

Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry .................................................................................................... 597 Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry ..................................................................................... 600 Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry ..................................................................................................... 609 Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry .................................................................................................... 614 Defining New Furniture Types ................................................................................................................ 617 Creating a Baluster Family ........................................................................................................................... 619 Drawing a Baluster .................................................................................................................................. 619 Assigning the New Baluster to a Stair Run .............................................................................................. 621 Creating Profile Families .............................................................................................................................. 623 Drawing a Sweep Profile .......................................................................................................................... 623 Drawing a Rail Profile ............................................................................................................................. 624 Drawing a Stair Nosing Profile ................................................................................................................ 624 Drawing a Reveal Profile ......................................................................................................................... 625 Drawing a Host Sweep Profile ................................................................................................................. 626 Applying a Sweep Profile to a 2D Path ................................................................................................... 627 Applying a Host Sweep Profile to Walls .................................................................................................. 629 Creating a Room Tag .................................................................................................................................... 631 Specifying Room Tag Parameters ............................................................................................................ 631 Creating an Annotation Symbol .................................................................................................................. 633 Creating a Custom North Arrow Annotation Symbol ............................................................................ 633 Adding the New North Arrow to a Project ............................................................................................. 636 Creating a Titleblock Family ........................................................................................................................ 636 Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet ............................................................................................... 637 Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock .............................................................................................. 640 Adding the Titleblock to a New Project .................................................................................................. 649 Creating In-Place Families ............................................................................................................................ 650 Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family ............................................................................................... 651 Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family .......................................................................................... 658

Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques ................................................................. 661
Planning a Parametric Component Family .................................................................................................. 662 Determining Component Needs ............................................................................................................. 662 Selecting the Family Template ................................................................................................................ 663 Creating the Component Skeleton .............................................................................................................. 665 Adding Reference Planes ......................................................................................................................... 666 Adding Dimensions and Constraints ...................................................................................................... 671 Creating New Length Parameters ........................................................................................................... 674 Flexing the Component Model ............................................................................................................... 678 Adding Solid Geometry ................................................................................................................................ 680 Creating Solid Extrusions ........................................................................................................................ 680 Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry ............................................................................................ 682 Creating Additional Solid Geometry ...................................................................................................... 685 Testing the Family in a Project ..................................................................................................................... 693 Loading a Family into a Project .............................................................................................................. 693 Testing a Family Instance in a Project .................................................................................................... 694 Working with Nested Subcomponents ........................................................................................................ 697 Adding a Nested Component ................................................................................................................. 698 Creating Formula-controlled Parameters ................................................................................................ 702 Arraying Nested Subcomponents ............................................................................................................ 706 Reloading a Family into a Project ........................................................................................................... 711 Applying Subcategories, Materials, and Parameters ..................................................................................... 712 Creating and Applying Subcategories ..................................................................................................... 713 Creating Material Parameters .................................................................................................................. 717 Controlling Component Visibility ............................................................................................................... 719 Assigning Detail Level and View Controls .............................................................................................. 719 Creating Component Types ......................................................................................................................... 722 Creating Multiple Component Types ..................................................................................................... 722 Creating Conditional Formulas .............................................................................................................. 723

Chapter 21 Area Analysis ..................................................................................................................... 725
Using Area Analysis Tools ............................................................................................................................ 726 Creating Area Schemes and Plans ........................................................................................................... 726 Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans ................................................................................. 732

Contents | v

Chapter 22 Massing ............................................................................................................................... 735
Using Massing Tools ..................................................................................................................................... 736 Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model ...................................................................................... 736 Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model .......................................................... 741 Using Mass Family Files in a Project  ........................................................................................................... 743 Creating New Mass Family Types  .......................................................................................................... 743 Loading and Placing New Mass Families ................................................................................................ 744 Joining Mass Elements ............................................................................................................................ 747 Using Mass Elements with Design Options ................................................................................................. 750 Mass Elements in Design Options .......................................................................................................... 750 Creating Building Components from Mass Elements ................................................................................. 752 Creating Walls by Picking Faces ............................................................................................................. 753 Creating Floors by Picking Faces ............................................................................................................. 755 Creating Roofs by Picking Faces .............................................................................................................. 759 Creating Curtain Systems  ...................................................................................................................... 761 Editing Elements Created from Massings ............................................................................................... 763 Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility ............................................................................................................ 768

Chapter 23 Site ..................................................................................................................................... 771
Using Site Tools ............................................................................................................................................ 772 Creating a Toposurface ........................................................................................................................... 772 Adding Property Lines ............................................................................................................................. 777 Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings ...................................................................................... 781 Creating Topographic Subregions ........................................................................................................... 783 Grading the Toposurface ......................................................................................................................... 788 Adding a Building Pad ............................................................................................................................ 793 Adding Site Components ........................................................................................................................ 795 Tagging Site and Parking Components .................................................................................................. 798 Creating Parking Space Schedules ........................................................................................................... 799

Chapter 24 Grouping ............................................................................................................................ 801
Creating Groups ........................................................................................................................................... 802 Creating a Group ..................................................................................................................................... 802 Placing a Group ....................................................................................................................................... 803 Modifying a Group .................................................................................................................................. 804 Creating Nested Groups ............................................................................................................................... 805 Creating a Nested Group ......................................................................................................................... 806 Modifying a Nested Group ...................................................................................................................... 807 Working with Groups .................................................................................................................................. 809 Duplicating a Group ............................................................................................................................... 809 Creating a Detail Group .......................................................................................................................... 812 Using Attached Detail Groups ................................................................................................................ 813 Saving and Loading Groups .................................................................................................................... 815 Automatically Creating a Group ............................................................................................................. 816

Chapter 25 Structural .......................................................................................................................... 819
Adding Structural Walls ............................................................................................................................... 820 Importing a DWG for Use as an Underlay .............................................................................................. 820 Sketching Structural Walls ...................................................................................................................... 821 Dimensioning and Modifying Walls ...................................................................................................... 830 Adding Structural Columns and Beams ....................................................................................................... 833 Adding Structural Columns .................................................................................................................... 834 Adding Structural Beams and Girders ..................................................................................................... 838 Adding Joists and Purlins ........................................................................................................................ 848 Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels .................................................................................................. 854 Defining New Levels ............................................................................................................................... 855 Duplicating the Existing Design ............................................................................................................. 856 Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation ......................................................................................................... 858 Creating a Framing Elevation ................................................................................................................. 858 Adding Structural Braces ......................................................................................................................... 860

Chapter 26 Sharing Projects ................................................................................................................ 865
Overview ....................................................................................................................................................... 866

vi | Contents

Using Worksharing in a Project ................................................................................................................... 866 Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals .......................................................................................... 866 Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets ................................................................................... 869 Working Individually with Worksets ..................................................................................................... 873 Using Worksets with Multiple Users ....................................................................................................... 876 Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users ......................................................................... 881

Chapter 27 Creating Multiple Design Options .................................................................................. 885
Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project ............................................................................................ 886 Creating the Structural Design Options ................................................................................................. 886 Creating the Roof System Design Options ............................................................................................. 896 Managing Design Options ...................................................................................................................... 903

Chapter 28 Project Phasing ................................................................................................................. 909
Using Phasing ............................................................................................................................................... 910 Phasing Your Model ................................................................................................................................ 910 Using Phase-Specific Room Tags ............................................................................................................. 915

Chapter 29 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates ....................................................... 919
Linking Building Models .............................................................................................................................. 920 Linking Building Models from Different Project Files ............................................................................ 920 Repositioning Linked Building Models ................................................................................................... 928 Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility ........................................................................................ 931 Managing Linked Building Models ......................................................................................................... 933 Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models ........................................................................................... 935 Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates ................................................................................................... 935 Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates ........................................................................................ 937 Scheduling Components of Linked Files ................................................................................................ 941 Working with a Linked Building Model ................................................................................................. 943 Managing Shared Locations .................................................................................................................... 944

Contents | vii

viii | Contents

Understanding the Concepts

1

In this tutorial, you learn the fundamental concepts of Revit Building. You learn how Revit Building works, the terms used when working with the product, and how to navigate the user interface.

In the lesson that follows, you learn many of the important features in Revit Building that contribute to a user-friendly design environment, enhanced productivity, and faster construction documents. You begin with the fundamental concepts that Revit Building is built upon. You learn the terminology, the hierarchy of elements, and how to navigate the user interface.

1

Understanding the Basics
In this lesson, you learn what Revit Building is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work.

What is Autodesk Revit Building?
The Revit Building platform for building information modeling is a design and documentation system that supports the design, drawings, and schedules required for a building project. Building information modeling (BIM) delivers information about project design, scope, quantities, and phases when you need it. In the Revit Building model, every drawing sheet, 2D and 3D view, and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. As you work in drawing and schedule views, Revit Building collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. The Revit Building parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views, drawing sheets, schedules, sections, and plans.

What is meant by parametric?
The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination and change management that Revit Building provides. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. In mathematics and mechanical CAD, the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters; hence, the operation of the software is parametric. This concept is important because it is this capability that delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit Building: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project, and Revit Building coordinates that change through the entire project. The following are examples of these element relationships:

The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. If you move the partition, the door retains this relationship to the partition. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. If the length of the elevation is changed, the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. In this case, the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved, the floor or roof remains connected. In this case, the parameter is one of association or connection.

How does Autodesk Revit Building keep things updated?
A fundamental characteristic of a building information modeling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. When you change something, Revit Building immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. Revit Building uses two key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do, without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design.

Element behavior in a parametric modeler
Revit Building uses five software element classes: host, component, annotation, view, and datum. This implementation provides flexibility for designers. Revit Building elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly; programming is not required. If you can draw, you can define new parametric elements in Revit Building. Hosts include walls, floors, roofs, and ceilings. Components include windows, doors, and furniture. Annotations are 2D, view-specific elements that help you produce your documentation. Views are dynamic representations of the model and are always up-to-date. Datums are reference elements that help you put your building together. In Revit Building, the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the building. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. Often, you do nothing to establish these relationships; they are implied by what you do and how you draw. In other cases, you can explicitly control them, by locking a dimension or aligning two walls, for example.

Understanding Autodesk Revit Building terms
Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit Building are common, industry-standard terms familiar to most architects. However, there are some terms that are unique to Revit Building, and understanding them is crucial to understanding the software. This section defines the basic terms used in Revit Building. The first term you need to know is "project." In Revit Building, the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. The project file contains all the information for your building design,

2 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts

from geometry to construction data. This information includes components used to design the model, views of the project, and drawings of the design. By using a single project file, Revit Building makes it easy for you to alter your design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views, elevation views, section views, schedules, and so forth). Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. Another important term to understand is "level". Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements, such as roofs, floors, and ceilings. Most often, you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a building. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building; for example, first floor, top of wall, or bottom of foundation. To place levels, you must be in a section or elevation view.
Level 2 work plane cutting through the 3D view with the corresponding floor plan tiled next to it.

When creating your project, you add Revit Building parametric building elements to the design. All elements are considered categories. Revit Building classifies elements by model component elements and annotation elements. A model component element, such as a door, desk, or roof, represents the actual 3D geometry of the building. An annotation building element, such as a door tag, elevation symbol, or room tag, helps document the model. Families are classes of elements in a category that group elements with a common set of parameters (properties), identical use, and similar graphical representation. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties, but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. For example, six-panel colonial doors could be considered one family, although the doors that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. Most families are component family files, which means you can load them into your project and create them from family templates. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. Other families are called system families. These families, which include walls, dimensions, ceilings, roofs, floors, and levels, are not available for loading or creating as separate files. Revit Building predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. For example, the behavior of a wall is predefined in the system; however, you can create different types of walls with different compositions. System families can be transferred between projects. Each family can have different types. A type can be a specific size of a family, such as a A0 title block or a 910 x 2110 door. A type can also be a style, such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. A family can have several types. For example, a table could come in several different sizes. Each different size would be a new type within the same family. Instances are the actual items that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the building (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances).

Understanding the Basics | 3

Autodesk Revit Building terms

Navigating the Revit Building User Interface
One of the advantages of Revit Building is its ease of use, specifically its clear user interface. The Revit Building window is arranged to make navigation easy. Even the toolbar buttons are labeled, making it easy to understand what each button represents. Revit Building uses standard Microsoft® Windows® conventions. If you have used any other product that follows these conventions, learning Revit Building is much easier. In the following illustration, the user interface is labeled. In the steps that follow, you navigate and become familiar with the user interface.

Start a new project
1 On the Standard toolbar, click .

This creates a new project based on the default template.

4 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts

The Title Bar
2 Place your cursor at the top of the user interface and notice the Title Bar contains the name of the project and the view that is currently open.

By default, new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name. In addition, the Level 1 floor plan view is the default open view. TIP The view opened and the view names are dependent on the template that the project is based on.

The Menu Bar
3 On the View menu, click Zoom.

The Menu Bar across the top of the window includes standard menu names such as File, Edit, and View. You can choose commands by placing the cursor over the menu name and clicking. You then click the command name to run the command. Many of the commands also have shortcut keys to speed up the design process. These shortcut keys are listed next to the command on the menu. TIP For example, the shortcut key for Zoom To Fit is ZX. While working in the drawing area, you simply type the required keystrokes to run the command. Another timesaving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click. A context menu appears with a list of all available commands. The context menu changes depending on the function you are performing and what is currently selected.

The Toolbar
4 On the Window menu, click Toolbar.

There are six toolbars across the top of the window just beneath the Menu Bar. The buttons on the toolbar represent some of the more common commands. You can control the visibility of the six toolbars and turn the toolbar text labels on or off within the Window ➤ Toolbar menu. You can use the toolbar grips to resize and move each toolbar.

The Options Bar
5 On the Modelling menu, click Wall. Notice the bar beneath the toolbars contains wall design options.

Understanding the Basics | 5

The Options Bar is context-sensitive and varies depending on the tool or selected component. 6 On the Modelling menu, click Door. Notice the design options available on the Options Bar are now applicable to doors. On the left side of the Options Bar, notice a door type is specified.

The Type Selector
7 The drop-down list on the left side of the Options Bar is called the Type Selector. Select the drop-down list to view the list of doors.

The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list. If you select the Door tool, the Type Selector displays a list of doors available within the project. The list of components in the Type Selector is identical to the components listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category.

8 On the Modelling menu, click Wall.

6 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts

9 In the Type Selector, notice the list of walls that are available. You use the Type Selector in two ways. First, you can select a component type before you add it to the building model. For example, if you intend to add a door, the door type active in the Type Selector is the door type that is added when you insert it into the building model. You can also use the Type Selector to change a component type after it has been added to the building model. Within the drawing area, you can select any component and then change the type from the Type Selector.

The Design Bar
10 On the Window menu, click Design Bars. The Show Design Bars dialog box is displayed.

The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface, immediately below the Type Selector. There are 10 tabs in the Design Bar, containing buttons grouped by function. You can control which tabs display by selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog box. 11 Click OK. Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the menu.
■ ■ ■ ■

Basics tab—includes commands for creating most basic building model components. View tab—commands for creating different views in the project Modelling tab—all the commands to create model elements Drafting tab—commands for both adding annotation symbols and creating the sheet details for the project construction documents Rendering tab—commands for creating rendered 3D images Site tab—commands for adding site components and producing site plans Massing tab—commands for executing conceptual massing commands Area Analysis tab—commands for making area schemes and plans Structural tab—commands for adding structural components to your project Construction tab—includes commands for creating construction industry information

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

To access the commands within a tab, click the tab, and the respective commands are displayed on the Design Bar. TIP You can turn the visibility of each tab on and off by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab from the context menu.

Understanding the Basics | 7

The Project Browser
12 To the right of the Design Bar is the Project Browser. In the Project Browser, select Views (all).

You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views, schedules, sheets, reports, families, and groups of your current project. You can right-click in the browser to add, delete, and rename views, families, and groups. The browser is conveniently organized by view type (floor plans, elevations, 3D), family category (doors, walls, windows), and group name. You can expand or compress the browser list by clicking the + or sign next to the name. To open a view, double-click the name. You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area, making it easy to add a family or group to the project or add a view to a sheet. The browser is also dockable, so you can position it wherever you want by dragging the Project Browser title bar to a new location. 13 In the Type Selector, scroll through the sorting options available for the Project Browser.

8 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts

14 On the Settings menu, click Browser Organization. You can create and modify Project Browser organization schemes for both views and sheets. After you create a browser organization scheme, you can instantly change the sorting within the Project Browser by selecting the scheme in the Type Selector. 15 In the Browser Organization dialog box, click Cancel.

The Status Bar
16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. The cursor is displayed as a pencil. 17 Place your cursor near the center of the drawing area. Do not click.

Understanding the Basics | 9

In this case. Click the Help button. Tool Tips: To see Tool Tips. You can turn the Status Bar visibility on or off from the Window menu. use the Tab key to alternate between nearby components. it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point. 18 On the Design Bar. Autodesk Revit Building Help 21 On the Help menu. Elevations: Elevation: Elevation 5. Be sure to have the Standard toolbar displayed. click . Windows: From any window. it highlights and the status bar displays the component name. In the Status Bar. click Modify. Help is available online at all times during a Revit Building session. you can use the Status Bar and the Tab key to toggle between components and select the desired component. The elevation symbol consists of two parts. press F1 to get help on that dialog box. Make sure you place the cursor over the arrow portion of the symbol. press F1 to get the topic associated with the window. search for all instances of a word or phrase on the Search tab. It highlights when the cursor is over it. HTML help window to search for information and quickly display it to read or print. notice the Status Bar provides information regarding what you should do next.In the bottom left corner of the window. find a keyword on the Index tab. You can select a topic on the Contents tab. or save commonly used pages on the Favorites tab. The Status Bar also provides information. You can access Help in the following ways: ■ Dialog Boxes: Dialog boxes include Help buttons. rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the Tool Tip displays." TIP The tooltip that displays is identical to the note in the status bar. TIP When attempting to select a specific component in a crowded or detailed view. Context-sensitive help is also available to provide instant help on any menu command. If there is no Help button displayed. in conjunction with Tooltips. ■ ■ ■ 22 Close the Revit Building Help window. You can use this tri-pane. Toolbar: From the Toolbar. 19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol arrow on the left side of the drawing area. regarding selected components within a view. and the topic specific to the dialog box opens. 10 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts . TIP You can control the level of Tool Tip assistance from the Settings ➤ Options menu. You can also press SHIFT+F1. When attempting to select a specific component in a complex or crowded view. notice that the name of the preselected component is Views: Elevation: West. When you place the cursor over a component. and then click on a specific menu command or command button for Help. click Autodesk Revit Help. There are several tools that help you find information. the main symbol and the elevation directional arrows. 20 Press TAB. and notice that the preselected component switches to the main elevation symbol.

Creating Your First Building Model 2 This tutorial is designed to familiarize you with the basic concepts and methods of creating a building model using Autodesk Revit Building. you can normally use various means to accomplish identical tasks. Therefore. This tutorial is designed to teach concepts as well as methods. Because the design process in Revit Building is extremely flexible.mirror it to create the east wing.including all windows. For training purposes. you create the shell of the west wing . The building model you create consists of an east wing and a west wing joined by a curtain wall passageway. As you make design changes throughout this tutorial. and fundamental concepts before creating your first building model. While creating your first building information model. floors. and a roof . stairs. before proceeding further. this tutorial uses a diversity of methods whenever possible. Understanding the Concepts. For learning purposes. the design process might differ in a real-world scenario. 11 . you learn about the Revit Building parametric capabilities and ease of use. common terms. You should understand the user interface. and then add the passageway between them. doors. If you have not already done so. review the tutorial. all views and schedules instantly update.

In this exercise. and apply new wall types. at a later time. modify. you use the west wing to create the east wing. If you sketch the walls with the top constraint specifying a height. You can add and modify levels at any time during the design process. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. stairs. click the Training Files icon.Creating Your First Building Model In this lesson. you can assign the wall height to a level or a specific value. 12 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . Minor modifications have been made for training purposes. NOTE The dataset for this tutorial was created using the default template. After adding dimensions. and a roof. Finally. and double-click North. After sketching the walls. You then sketch the exterior and interior walls of the west wing. click Open. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Notice that Level 1 and Level 2 are already defined. you create. Using the mirror tool. you render the model and document the project by adding schedules and views to sheets. click Level. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. As you design the walls. you begin with a project file based on a simple template to which you add several new levels. You then add sketched components such as floors. you create a new wall type with multiple wall sweeps and reveals. reassign the top constraint to a specific level. Add new levels 1 In the Project Browser. Creating and Modifying the Exterior Walls of the West Wing In this exercise. You then apply the new wall type to the existing walls. expand Elevations. you can.rvt located in the Metric folder. you sketch the exterior walls of the west wing. expand Views (all). you define the levels first so that you can set the top constraint when you first create the walls. and then add the passageway between them. you add and modify doors and windows. Open m_First_Project. When you create walls. ceilings.

This allows you to create a new level by picking an existing line and applying an offset. the level name and height value displays with the color blue. This means that if you drag the control to resize the datum extent. ■ ■ Enter 4000 mm for Offset. click Modify. the extents of the other level lines adopt the same change. When you select Level 4. If you click the 3D control. this indicates that you can select and edit the values. notice that a floor plan and ceiling plan have been created for Level 3. the datum is in model extent mode. 8 Select Level 4. The left and right extents of the new level are aligned and locked to the levels below. ■ Select . Verify that Make Plan View is selected 4 Move the cursor over Level 2 and notice the prospective new level displays above it. You can also use the ESC key to accomplish this. provided those datums also have the 3D model extent control. it changes the extent of that datum in all other parallel views. With the 3D designation. This means that changes to the extents are applied only to the active view. Creating Your First Building Model | 13 . 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. When you click Modify. 5 Click Level 2 to create level 3 at the designated offset above it. it terminates the command in progress. In this view. In the Project Browser. 9 Click directly on the Level 4 text. it toggles to 2D. notice the following: ■ There is a control titled 3D that displays at the ends of the datum. This means that if you move the extents of one level line. ■ ■ 6 Click Level 3 to add Level 4.3 On the Options Bar.

14 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . double-click Level 1. In such a case. because the east wing is a mirror image of the west wing. 14 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. notice that the name of the Level 4 floor plan is changed to Roof. you create the exterior walls of only the west wing. and South elevation views. which define the East. use the wheel on your mouse. you can take advantage of the parametric capabilities of Revit Building by designing the majority of the west wing. mirroring it to create the east wing. you could begin the model by simply sketching the exterior walls and then continuing the design process from that point. or scroll the 10 Enter Roof and press ENTER. tool on the toolbar. West. In the steps that follow. Theoretically. This process reduces the amount of repetitive work and ensures consistency between each wing. In this view. TIP The Level 4 ceiling plan view has also been renamed to Roof. the floor plan would resemble the following illustration. Sketch the exterior walls 13 This building model consists of an east wing. and then designing the passageway to connect the two. North. You can use the zoom tools located on the View menu.TIP You may need to zoom in to accomplish this. there are four elevation symbols. right-click in the drawing area and use the zoom tools on the context menu. However. and a curtain glass passageway connecting the two wings. a west wing. 12 In the Project Browser. 11 Click Yes to rename corresponding views.

Creating Your First Building Model | 15 . select Basic Wall: Exterior . This means that each view is infinite. do not turn on the far clip planes at this time. click Wall. Do not click the symbol. and South elevation views are inactive. For training purposes. 16 In the drawing area. North. A solid line with two drag handles displays on the West elevation symbol.15 Move the cursor over the left elevation symbol and then over the elevation arrow. Make sure you click the arrow and not the round part of the symbol. Later in this tutorial. The drag handles control the left and right clip planes of the elevation view. West. 18 In the Type Selector. 17 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. You can activate the far clip plane in the element properties dialog box of each respective view.Brick on CMU. NOTE The far clip plane for the East. TIP You can turn off the visibility of the elevation symbols by using the Visibility/Graphics command found on the View menu. you use this command to modify the view. The name of the elevation view is displayed in a tooltip or in the status bar at the bottom of the drawing window. click the Elevation: West symbol.

000 mm long.000 mm wide and 24. You can click the temporary dimension value and modify it. specify the following options: ■ ■ Specify Roof for Height. By clicking the arrows. . The selected wall is red. TIP If necessary. This is a temporary dimension. make sure you sketch the rectangle just to the right of the west elevation symbol. vertical wall of the rectangle. Click the arrows a second time to return the exterior face to the outside of the rectangle. 21 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click to complete the rectangle. and use the directional arrows on your keyboard to move them into position as shown above. click Modify. 23 Click the arrows once to set the exterior face of the wall on the inside of the rectangle. and flip arrows display on the exterior face of the wall. you can flip the wall orientation. as shown. you can control the default witness line location for temporary dimensions and save the settings to the project. Select the drawing tool. Also notice the dimension that displays. Move the cursor down and to the right until the rectangle is 12. Verify that Wall Centerline is selected for Loc Line. click . TIP From the Settings ➤ Temporary Dimensions menu. 22 Select the left. select the four walls by dragging a selection box around them. 16 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . Because the west wing is later mirrored to the right. 24 On the View toolbar.19 In the Options Bar. Temporary dimensions are primarily sketching aids. ■ 20 Sketch the rectangle by clicking the upper left corner to specify the rectangle starting point.

Notice that temporary dimensions also display in 3D views. notice the shape handles (arrows) on top and bottom of the wall. TIP When entering a value. For example. you do not need to type the metric suffix. The blue dots at the base of the wall are drag handles that allow you to modify the length of the wall. 26 Drag the wall to the right as shown and release the mouse button when the width of the rectangle is approximately double the original size. you can use these handles to modify the height or depth of the wall.25 Select the 24000 mm wall on the right. You do not need to enter 12000 mm. you can enter 12000 and press ENTER. 27 Click the temporary dimension value and reset the rectangle width to 12000 mm. Creating Your First Building Model | 17 . In addition.

Notice the wall remains selected. 30 On the Design Bar. and click Shading with Edges. 33 On the View Control Bar. Notice the material settings. it is displayed as solid fill. click Zoom in Region. 31 On the View Control Bar located at the bottom-left corner of the frame. click the Model Graphics Style control. When a surface pattern becomes too dense. This is the shortcut key for Zoom to Fit. Notice that the brick surface pattern becomes solid fill after you zoom to fit. as shown. click the Model Graphics Style control. click Modify. 32 On the keyboard. and click Hidden Line. including the brick surface pattern displays. The brick surface pattern displays.28 Right-click in the empty space of the drawing area and. enter ZF. 29 Draw a region around the corner. 18 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model .

click . If your intent is to modify only the structure of the selected component. you would click Edit/New to access the type parameters. which control the selected component or components. In the steps that follow. For example. any changes made to the type parameters would be applied to all components of the same type. you can see the list of type parameters. Creating Your First Building Model | 19 . if you changed the Top Offset of the wall. and then apply it to the remaining walls. modify it. you cannot modify them within this dialog box. Although you can scroll through the list of type parameters. you should click Duplicate to create a new component type. you add horizontal sweeps of soldier course brick to the wall structure. To accomplish this. In the upper half of the dialog box. it has no effect on components that are not selected. However. If you change an instance parameter. you create a new wall type. The lower half of the dialog box contains the instance parameters. 35 On the Options Bar. The Element Properties dialog box displays the parameters of the selected component. For example. which control all components of the same type.Create and apply new wall type 34 Select the 24000 mm wall on the right as shown. You can then make changes to the type parameters without inadvertently modifying the components of the original type. if you wanted to modify the wall structure. You could then make changes to the wall structure as needed. only the wall that you selected would change.

36 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK. You can specify the sample height to any value you want. enter 13500 for Sample Height. click Edit. you must create a new wall type before altering the wall structure. 37 In the Type Properties dialog box. Therefore. 39 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Edit/New. 20 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . click Preview. under the Value column for Structure. The sample height is the height of the wall in the preview pane. Exterior . but you should specify a value high enough to allow you to create the desired wall structure. 41 In the lower left corner of the Edit Assembly dialog box. The sample height does not determine the height of any walls in the project.Brick on CMU with Soldier Course. click Duplicate. 38 In the Name dialog box. enter the new wall name. 40 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. For training purposes. the original wall type must remain unchanged.

select layer 9. the corresponding layer is highlighted in the preview area. Make sure the offset is a negative number. 49 Under Layers.0 mm for Offset. Enter 4000 mm for Distance. Notice the vertical structure tools are now active. 43 Under Modify Vertical Structure. When you select a layer. make the following modifications: ■ ■ Select M_Wall Sweep-Brick Soldier Course: 2 Bricks for Profile.Notice that the vertical structure tools are inactive. Enter -50. Verify that Base is selected for From. click Sweeps. This should be the interior finish layer. select Section: Modify type attributes. for View. 42 Under the preview pane. 44 In the Wall Sweeps dialog box. This is because the preview is displaying a plan view.Brick Soldier Course. 48 Draw a region around the soldier course. click Add. 47 Right-click in the preview area and click Zoom in Region from the context menu. under Name. and click OK. 45 In the Wall Sweeps dialog box. select Masonry . Click inside the Material field. In the Materials dialog box. Creating Your First Building Model | 21 . Verify that Exterior is selected for Side. ■ ■ ■ ■ 46 Click OK.

57 Click Apply.Brick Soldier Course for Material. Verify that Base is selected for From. under Modify Vertical Structure. 52 For the second wall sweep. 55 In the Reveals dialog box. Enter 8000 mm for Distance. Verify that the Offset is zero. Make sure it is a negative number. click Sweeps. Select Flip. Verify that Exterior is selected for Side. click Add. 58 Click Add. Select Masonry . click Add. 53 Click OK. Enter -50 mm for Offset. Verify that Base is selected for From. 56 Specify the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select M_Reveal-Brick Course: 2 Bricks for Profile. 51 In the Wall Sweeps dialog box. modify the settings as follows: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select M_Wall Sweep-Brick Soldier Course: 2 Bricks for Profile. Add reveals 54 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. 22 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . Verify that Exterior is selected for Side. click Reveals. Enter 4000 mm for Distance. and click OK.Add a second sweep 50 In the Edit Assembly dialog box.

You can also use the thin lines tool to temporarily apply thin lines globally to all views. 66 On the View toolbar. Notice some of the line weights in this view are rather heavy. Verify that the Offset is zero. Enter 8000 mm for Distance. 64 On the Design Bar.59 Specify the parameters for the second reveal: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select M_Reveal-Brick Course: 2 Bricks for Profile. click . 60 Click OK. click OK. Verify that Base is selected for From. 65 On the View menu. click OK. click Zoom  ➤ Zoom in Region and draw a zoom region around the corner that includes one of the sweeps and a reveal. Verify that Exterior is selected for Side. 61 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. 62 In the Type Properties dialog box. 63 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Modify. This can be affected by the view scale for this particular view. Creating Your First Building Model | 23 . click OK. Select Flip.

and click Save. click . 71 In the Type Selector. the interior walls resemble the following illustration. 68 Enter ZF. click the Model Graphics Style control. 74 Navigate to your preferred directory. Adding the Interior Walls of the West Wing.Brick on CMU with Soldier Course. This indicates that thin lines will continue to be applied globally to the project. the corners of the sweeps and reveals wrap automatically. This turns off thin lines globally. Exterior . This is the shortcut key for Zoom to Fit. They do not have sweeps or reveals. after the new wall type is applied. choose Basic Wall: Exterior .Notice thin lines are applied to all the linework in this view. 72 On the Design Bar. click Save As. and click Shading with Edges. you add the interior walls of the west wing. click Modify. TIP To select multiple components. 70 Select the three walls that are still the original wall type. Notice that. When finished. name the file m_First_Project-in_progress. Also notice the button remains activated.Brick on CMU.rvt. Adding the Interior Walls of the West Wing In this exercise. 67 On the View Control Bar. 75 Proceed to the next exercise. press and hold the CTRL key while you select each component. 69 On the View toolbar. 24 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 73 On the File menu.

Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise. specify the following: ■ ■ Verify that Level 2 is selected for Height. Creating Your First Building Model | 25 . ■ 5 Using the following illustration as a guide. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. . place the cursor over the north wall. 4 In the Options Bar. Select the Line sketching tool. Sketch the main corridor 1 In the Project Browser. m_First_Project-in_progress. under Views (all). select Basic Wall: Interior .rvt. 3 In the Type Selector. 5000 mm from the centerline of the west exterior wall. click Wall. 6 Move the cursor down. and click when it intersects the centerline of the south exterior wall. under Floor Plans.135mm Partition (2-hr). Verify that Wall Centerline is selected for Loc Line. double-click Level 1. and click.

TIP The temporary dimension snap values are dependent on your zoom settings. the snap values decrease. 26 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . click Modify. 8 Move the cursor down. Click to specify the wall start point. 10 Select both interior walls using one of the following three methods: ■ ■ Select one of the interior walls. ■ Draw a pick box from the upper-left to lower-right that includes both interior walls in their entirety. and click when it intersects the centerline of the south exterior wall. Draw a crossing pick from the upper-right to the lower-left that crosses both interior walls.7 Move the cursor over the north exterior wall and 2500 mm to the right of the wall you added in the previous step. press and hold CTRL. and select the second interior wall. 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. If you zoom into the model.

12 Using the following illustration as a guide. and under Colors. select Basic Wall: Interior . specify the selection color. Notice that temporary dimensions do not display automatically when multiple components are selected. This places both interior walls 4750 mm from the centerline of the closest exterior wall. This allows you to analyze their location in relationship to each other and modify the location of both walls at the same time. 15 In the Type Selector.79mm Partition (1-hr). 16 Add four horizontal interior walls stretching from the centerline of the left exterior wall to the centerline of the left wall of the corridor. click the Graphics tab. click a temporary dimension value. Add remaining interior walls 14 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Wall. they display as red.After the walls are selected. The temporary dimensions are displayed for both walls. and enter 4750 mm. as shown. select Options. On the Settings menu. click Activate Dimensions. TIP You can change the selection color by modifying the system settings. 11 On the Options Bar. Each wall should be 4800 mm from the previous wall. 13 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Creating Your First Building Model | 27 . click Modify.

18 Add the final four interior walls in each corner of the right side of the building model. Dimension lines have been added for training purposes.17 Add five horizontal interior walls stretching from the centerline of the right wall of the corridor to the centerline of the right exterior wall. as shown. 28 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . Use the dimensions shown in the following illustration when adding the walls. If necessary. The dimension lines have been provided for training purposes. modify temporary dimension values to obtain exact placement.

NOTE If the Tools toolbar is not available. 23 In the drawing area. click the tool a second time to turn thin lines mode off. you can activate it by opening the Windows menu and clicking Toolbar  ➤ Tools. As you move the cursor over the wall. click . TIP If the lines within the floor plan display too thick. Creating Your First Building Model | 29 . a thin line appears at the tip of the cursor.Use split tool to modify walls 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. you can click on the View toolbar. The cursor displays as a cutting tool. 20 Enter ZR. there is no immediate and obvious indication of the split location. This line represents where the underlying object is to be split. 24 Click to split the wall. place the cursor over the intersection of the right wall of the corridor and the short horizontal wall that intersects it as shown. After splitting the wall. When you are finished splitting the walls. 22 On the Tools toolbar. 21 Sketch a zoom region around the upper-right quadrant of the building model. This is the shortcut key for Zoom in Region. notice the exact placement of the cursor and the location of the proposed wall split. 25 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. In the above illustration and callout. This places the view in thin lines mode. and you can now split walls and lines. click Modify.

26 Select the short wall segment that you split from the right wall of the corridor. 30 Enter ZF. click . 27 On the Standard toolbar. 28 Using the same techniques learned in previous steps. zoom in to the bottom right corner of the building model. and delete the segment. This is the shortcut key for Zoom To Fit. 29 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. split the right corridor wall. 30 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . click Modify.

NOTE Arrows have been added at the location of the two splits. the inner segment is deleted automatically. 33 Using the following illustration as a guide. 37 Press and hold SHIFT and spin the building model by dragging one of the corners in any direction. . 34 Press ESC to end the Split command. click . Zoom in as necessary. 31 On the Tools toolbar. Notice the interior walls that you added and split. Creating Your First Building Model | 31 . 32 On the Options Bar. After the second split.There are two remaining splits to make. select Delete Inner Segment. click 36 On the View toolbar. This tool allow you to spin the model in any direction. split the right wall of the corridor at the intersection of the two center horizontal interior walls. click . 35 On the View toolbar.

ready for modification. Level 1 .5mm Arial. In that case.Dimensioned and Annotated.38 On the File menu. select Wall centerlines. Dimensioning the Building Model. ■ ■ For Prefer. the dimension value is displayed at its true size and is not selectable for modification. and components that require dimensioning. you add a multi-segmented dimension string to modify the witness lines. click Save. both permanent dimensions and temporary dimensions display. click Dimension. enter Level 1 . 6 In the Type Selector. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise. You create a dimension by selecting the dimension type. under Views (all). under Floor Plans. When geometry is selected for modification. select Individual References. and click Duplicate. m_First_Project-in_progress. right-click Level 1.Dimensioned and Annotated. 3 In the Rename View dialog box.rvt.2. select Linear Dimension Style: Diagonal . the dimension value displays in blue and can be modified directly by clicking the value. and click OK. you add dimension lines to the building model. under Floor Plans. click Rename. The floor plan. should be open. 39 Proceed to the next exercise. it opens automatically in the Project Browser. Next. you constrain the building model using equality and locking constraints. A permanent dimension is considered modifiable when one or more of the components that it references is selected for modification. When you duplicate a view. and in the context menu. If the geometry referenced by a permanent dimension is not selected for modification. Dimensioning the Building Model In this exercise. Add a dimension line between two walls 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. In the final section of this exercise. For Pick. specify the following dimension parameters: ■ Click . Create and rename copy of Level 1 1 In the Project Browser. This is the aligned dimension option. Permanent dimensions can appear in two different states: modifiable and non-modifiable. 2 In the Project Browser. 32 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . right-click Copy of Level 1. The dimension styles available in the Type Selector are dependent on the type of dimension selected on the Options Bar. You begin by adding a simple dimension between two walls. options. 5 On the Options Bar.

move the cursor over the left exterior wall as shown. When a dashed line is displayed on the wall centerline. click to select it. click to select it. 8 Move the cursor over the right exterior wall as shown. Click in the empty space of the drawing area to place the dimension line. When a dashed line displays on the wall centerline. 10 On the Design Bar. Creating Your First Building Model | 33 .7 In the drawing area. click Modify. 9 Move the cursor just above the north wall.

on each witness line. Notice that the dimension line and value displays as red. These controls allow you to modify and constrain the dimension. Notice the selected wall moved to the left. In its current state. or in the status bar of the drawing window. the value is not available for modification. Notice that a temporary dimension also displays. and press ENTER. change it to 4750. Notice that the dimension value is not blue. change it to 15000. indicating that the control moves the witness line. and a blue padlock displays. This behavior is similar to the witness line control on temporary dimensions. 14 Click the control once and the witness line moves to the interior face of the wall. the dimension value displays as modifiable. 17 Click the temporary dimension value. When you select a component referenced by a dimension witness line. and draw a zoom region around the north exterior wall and dimension line. Information is displayed in a tooltip. 16 Click the permanent dimension value. and press ENTER. 12 Select the dimension line. The control at the bottom of each witness line controls the gap between the end of the witness line and the component it references. 13 Place the cursor over the blue control in the center of the left witness line. This is one of the ways in which a permanent dimension differs from a temporary dimension. 34 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . Click the control a second time and the witness line moves to the exterior face. Notice the dimension value turns blue. This means you can modify the value by clicking it. Controls display on the value.11 Enter the keyboard shortcut ZR for Zoom In Region. 15 Select the vertical exterior wall on the left. Click it a third time to return the witness line to the wall centerline.

zoom out until you can see the entire building model. click Modify. select Intersecting Walls. and click to place the dimension as shown. In the Auto Dimension Options dialog box. select Entire Walls. select Wall centerlines. 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Click the symbol to make the temporary dimension permanent. vertical. move the cursor to the left.18 Place the cursor over the dimension symbol located beneath the temporary dimension value. and click OK. Add a multi-segmented dimension 20 Using one of the zoom methods learned previously. 23 Select the left. exterior wall. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Prefer. Click Options. For Pick. Creating Your First Building Model | 35 . 21 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Dimension.

right-click the blue control on the witness line second from the top. and click Delete Witness Line. NOTE Make sure you right-click the blue control and not the dimension line.24 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 26 Using the following illustration as a guide. Modify witness lines 25 Select the multi-segmented dimension you added in the previous steps. 36 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . click Modify.

it provides a different set of options on the context menu. click Edit Witness Lines. WARNING Do not right-click a witness line. 28 Select the centerline of the interior wall where you previously deleted the witness line. Creating Your First Building Model | 37 . and in the context menu.27 Right-click the dimension line.

29 After selecting the wall. NOTE There are two alternative ways of ending the dimension edit process: You can click Modify on the Design Bar. Create constraints 30 Select the second interior wall from the top to the left of the corridor. or press ESC on the keyboard. 38 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . click in the empty space of the drawing area to complete the editing process.

Creating Your First Building Model | 39 . 31 Drag the wall downward until the distance between it and the wall below it is approximately 2400 mm.Notice that the dimension values become modifiable on each side of the witness line that refers to the selected wall.

32 Select the multi-segmented dimension line. 40 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . the other moves with it and maintains the locked dimension value. 34 Select the same wall you moved previously and drag it upward approximately 1200 mm as shown. 36 Click the lock symbol on the 2400 mm segment to remove the constraint between the two walls. 35 Select the multi-segmented dimension. Lock symbols offer the opportunity to constrain the building model by locking a dimension value or an alignment. This dimension does not need to be precise. Notice a lock displays for each segment. You can turn the lock on and off by clicking the lock symbol. The relationship between these components is constrained. Notice that the dimension value for the locked segment remains unchanged as you move the wall. if you move one component. 33 Click the lock on the 2400 mm segment of the dimension.

In the final section of the exercise. Creating Your First Building Model | 41 . under Views (all). select Value for Equality Display. 41 On the File menu. under Other. Notice that each segment is now equally spaced and the dimension values display EQ. 40 In the Project Browser. you add doors and windows to the building model. You then add windows and use the mirror and array tools to save time and ensure consistency. This is an equality constraint that makes all dimension segments equal. double-click Level 1. you use the Paste Aligned tool to copy the Level 1 windows to Levels 2 and 3. 42 Proceed to the next exercise. select Save. Notice that each segment displays an equal value. 39 In the Element Properties dialog box. Next. click . 38 On the Options Bar. you load multiple new door types and add them to the building model. Adding Doors and Windows In this exercise. and click OK. Adding Doors and Windows. under Floor Plans. 37 Click the equality constraint to activate it.Notice an EQ symbol displays with a slash through it. You begin by adding single flush doors.

Doors are wall-hosted families and can only be added to a wall. the initial opening is based on the wall face from which the cursor approaches. 42 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 4 Approach the same corridor wall from inside the room. Do not click at this time.rvt. 2 In the Type Selector.Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise. When you add a door. Add single flush doors to the building model 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. doors snap automatically to the closest available level. click Door. Regardless of the initial placement. You can offset the door from the level. the door resides on a level line. In addition. 3 In the north side of the building model. place the cursor over the right corridor for the room shown in the following illustration. however. This is most evident when you add a door in an elevation or 3D view. A door symbol displays when the cursor is over the wall. you can flip the door opening immediately after placing it. m_First_Project-in_progress. This is the mechanical room. select M_Single-Flush: 0915 x 2134mm.

Creating Your First Building Model | 43 . You can use this to flip from left to right hand opening. Do not be concerned with exact placement. These control the door opening direction and the hand of the door (left or right). return the door to the position shown in the following illustration. 9 Add an additional door of the same type to the small room above door number 1 as shown. Notice the blue controls that display. and modify temporary dimensions as shown. 6 Click to add the door with the opening inside the room.5 Press the Spacebar once to flip the door hand. use the flip controls to adjust the opening. The precise dimensions are not important. 8 Click the temporary dimension value between the door centerline and the lower horizontal wall. 7 Click each control to familiarize yourself with how the door controls work. When you are finished. After you add door number 2. Press the Spacebar a second time. specify a value of 600 mm. and press ENTER.

15 In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 11 On the Design Bar. 44 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 14 On the Options Bar.rfa extension.10 Zoom in to the bottom right corner of the building model and add a door of the same type to the room as shown. and select M_Double-Glass 2. Notice that a preview image of the selected door displays in the upper right corner of the dialog box. Load and apply new door types 13 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Load. click Training Files. click Door.rfa. 17 Press and hold CTRL. 16 Navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Families\Doors folder. to zoom to fit. ZF. All Revit Building families have an . and select M_Double-Flush. and set the temporary dimensions. as shown.rfa. 12 Enter the keyboard shortcut. click Modify. Flip the door.

19 Click Open to load all three door families into the project. as shown. and select M_Single-Flush Vision. The distance between the door centerline and nearest wall centerline should be 600mm. These door families are now available in the Type Selector drop-down list. select M_Single-Flush Vision: 0915 x 2134mm. 22 In the Type Selector.rfa. 18 Press and hold CTRL. 21 Starting in the room in the upper left corner. TIP Zoom in and out as necessary. When more than one family is selected. Each door should open into the room. select M_Single-Flush Vision: 0864 x 2032mm. a preview image does not display. 20 In the Type Selector. add a door to each of the five rooms to the left of the corridor.You can load multiple families at the same time. Creating Your First Building Model | 45 .

This is door number 14 in the following illustration. 27 Add a door to the right exterior wall opposite of door number 1. 24 Zoom in around the lower-right corner of the building model and add doors 11 and 12 as shown. 25 Add the final M_Single-Flush Vision: 0915 x 2134mm door in the center of the building model and to the right of the corridor as shown.23 Zoom in around the upper-right corner of the building model and add doors 9 and 10 as shown. This is door number 13 in the following illustration. 26 In the Type Selector. select M_Double-Flush: 1730 x 2134mm. 46 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . The arrow has been added for training purposes.

Notice that the brick surface pattern displays as you zoom into this view. and clear Surface Pattern. zoom in until the brick pattern displays. 31 Click the Model Categories tab. double-click North. 32 Expand the Walls category. select Visibility/Graphics. 29 Zoom around the building model and level heads. Although there is no technical reason you cannot add a door in this view. under Elevations. If your view displays solid fill. 30 On the View menu. and scroll down to Walls.Add a door in elevation view 28 In the Project Browser. Creating Your First Building Model | 47 . under Views (all). NOTE The display of a surface pattern is zoom dependent. it would be easier if the visibility of the wall surface pattern was turned off.

NOTE The temporary dimensions refer to interior walls. double-click Level 1. as shown. the wall surface pattern will remain visible in all other views. then Level 2. under Floor Plans. 48 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . and down to Level 1. 34 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.33 Click OK. select M_Double-Glass 2: 1830 x 2134mm. Tag a door in plan view 38 In the Project Browser. 37 Add a double-glass door centered on Level 1. Notice that the double doors on the north wall display without a tag. Notice the door snaps to each level. 35 In the Type Selector. 36 Move the cursor over the wall at Level 3. Changes to Visibility/Graphics are applied only to the open view. When adding a door. it has two basic requirements: it must be hosted by a wall and it must be associated with a level. click Door. In this case. You can apply an offset if required.

41 On the upper exterior wall. as shown. verify that M_Double-Glass 2: 1830 x 2134mm is selected. TIP For each component type. 42 Zoom in to the lower exterior wall. a tag did not display when you added the door in the North elevation view. clear Leader. 39 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. NOTE Because the default door tag was not designed to display in an elevation view. 45 Add the final door centered on the lower exterior wall. the Type Selector and Options Bar remember the last settings used for that component.Components are tagged in the view in which they are placed. This should be door number 15. 40 On the Options Bar. 44 In the Type Selector. click Tag. click Door. Creating Your First Building Model | 49 . click the double doors to add a tag. 43 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

53 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 54 In the Type Selector. Windows are wall-hosted components. 49 Spin the model.46 On the Design Bar. As you move the cursor over a wall. the window displays at the cursor. Like doors. 50 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . select M_Andersen 400 C35: C35. 47 On the View toolbar. The window exterior is placed on the wall face closest to the cursor. . click Window. under Floor Plans. Add windows to the building model 51 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. just like doors. click Modify. and notice the doors you added. click 48 On the View toolbar. 52 Zoom in on the upper exterior wall. 50 On the File menu. click Save. you can flip the window after placement. click .

elevation. the designer creates the instance and type parameters that control geometry. go to Help. click Modify. 61 On the Options Bar. and reload it into the project. The list of parameters can vary depending on the window family design. 66 Add two C35 windows to the right of the exterior double door. click the temporary dimension value and specify the correct distance. Creating Your First Building Model | 51 . modify it. 62 In the Element Properties dialog box. click . 56 When the window displays at the tip of the cursor. click . IMPORTANT  If necessary. In this project. The designer can also create a window with few modifiable parameters. 65 Zoom out so you can see the right side of the upper exterior wall. When you add a window in a plan view.You can add windows in plan. 57 On the Design Bar. If you want to modify a window in a specific way but an instance or type parameter is not available to accomplish the task. click Window. In the family editor. the window is using a type tag that displays the window type number rather than the window mark. There should be a 1950 mm distance between the centerlines of the two windows. 55 Move the cursor over the exterior face of the left side of the upper exterior wall. 64 Add a window to the right of the existing window as shown. materials. the default head or sill height is used to set the initial height of the window. For more information on creating and loading annotation tags. as shown. 60 Make sure the distance between the window centerline and the left wall centerline is 1400 mm. and 3D views. 63 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. You can load and assign tags that display the specific information you need in the format you prefer. 58 On the View toolbar. you can edit the family in place or open the window in the family editor. Notice the list of instance parameters available for modification. and visibility. click to place it as shown. 59 Zoom around the window. and select it. click Cancel.

In this case. 52 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 74 Move the cursor to the left. the selected windows are to be mirrored across a horizontal axis residing on the midpoint of the east exterior wall. click Modify.67 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and make sure Copy is selected. The copy option is selected by default. you can pick or draw the mirror axis. click Mirror. click to select it. When you mirror a component or components. and click to set the mirror axis. 71 On the Options Bar. A tooltip is displayed. 69 Select one of the windows on the upper exterior wall. press and hold CTRL. 70 On the Edit menu. Mirror the windows 68 Zoom out until the building model fits within the view. 72 Place the cursor over the middle of the exterior face of the right exterior wall. indicating that the midpoint of that component is ready to be selected. and select the three remaining windows. 73 When the triangular midpoint symbol displays on the exterior face of the wall. click . You also have the option to mirror a copy rather than the selected component(s).

77 Add two windows to the left exterior wall. Notice that the mirrored windows are not tagged. Creating Your First Building Model | 53 . You tag the windows later in the exercise.The windows are mirrored immediately after you specify the mirror axis. at the dimensions shown. 76 On the Design Bar. click Window. Add and array windows 75 Zoom in to the room in the upper left corner of the building model.

it is an ideal situation to use an array. Select Constrain. click Array. Rather than manually add the rest of the windows on the left exterior wall. 82 On the Options Bar. Creating an array is a three-step process. For Move To. specify the following options: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that is selected for a linear array. select 2nd. Because all of the rooms on this side of the building model are equally spaced. You then move the array to the second or last location. Clear Group And Associate. Enter 5 for Number. 54 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 81 On the Edit menu. click Modify. you can use the array tool to finish the job. and click to set the array end point. 79 Zoom out in the upper left corner so you can see the two rooms with doors 4 and 5. 80 Select the two windows that you just added on the left exterior wall.78 On the Design Bar. 83 Move the cursor over the intersection of the left exterior wall and the intersecting interior wall shown below. and click to set the array start point. You first click a point to specify the array start point.

84 Move the cursor down until the arrayed window group is centered in the room below the starting point. and click the similar intersection shown below to set the array end point. Creating Your First Building Model | 55 . 86 On the bottom-right side of the building model. Add remaining level 1 window 85 On the Design Bar. click Window. undo the step and try again. NOTE It is extremely important to make sure the new array is centered between the walls of the next room. Notice the arrayed windows are not tagged. If you make a mistake placing the array. any misplacement has a multiplier effect as the array continues down the wall. Because the rooms on the left side of the building model are of equal size. add the final window to the right exterior wall and centered in the second room from the bottom. as shown.

90 Spin the model.87 If you are still using Thin Lines mode. click 89 On the View toolbar. . Rather than use the same methods to add similar windows to levels 2 and 3. click Modify. Paste align windows to Levels 2 and 3 91 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 92 In the 3D Drawing area. and notice the windows you added. on the View toolbar. click . you can use the paste-align tool to accomplish the same goal significantly faster. 56 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . turn it off by clicking 88 On the View toolbar. drag a selection box around the entire building model.

and click OK. After the windows are added to Level 2 and Level 3. clear walls and doors from the selection. The spacing will be modified in a later dataset. 93 On the Options Bar. double-click North. In this view. select Level 3. under Elevations. Creating Your First Building Model | 57 . click Modify. This leaves only the windows selected within the 3D view. click . 98 On the Design Bar. double-click South. Don’t be concerned with precise placement or spacing between the windows and doors.This selects every component in the building model. click Paste Aligned  ➤ Select Levels by Name. This is because the changes you made to the Visibility/Graphics of the North elevation view were applied only to that view. under Elevations. clear Tag on Placement. click Window. and click OK. 102 Add a C35 window in the center of Level 2 and Level 3 as shown below. such as equality constraints. 105 Add C35 windows to the center of Levels 2 and 3 as you did in the previous steps. 103 In the Project Browser. press and hold CTRL. 104 On the Design Bar. notice that windows need to be added above the double doors on the north and south walls. 94 In the Filter dialog box. 96 On the Edit menu. 95 On the Edit menu. click Copy to Clipboard. 97 In the Select Levels dialog box. click Window. The spacing can be manipulated using some of the dimensioning tools you learned earlier. 99 In the Project Browser. Notice that when you add a window in elevation view. select Level 2. notice the wall surface pattern displays. 100 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 101 On the Options Bar. the window snaps to the default sill height which displays as a green dashed line.

where three openings are required for the stairs and elevators. you can select walls to define the border of the component. 110 On the File menu. roof. Floors. 111 Proceed to the next exercise. under Floor Plans. Notice that all the windows in the view are tagged. double-click Level 1. . You also add elevators and plumbing components to the building model. click Tag All Not Tagged. 107 Zoom out until you can see the entire building model. Adding Floors and Floor Openings In this exercise. or ceiling. and all require their borders to be sketched. 108 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 3 Spin the model and observe that floors are needed throughout the building model.106 In the Project Browser. Add a floor slab to Level 1 1 On the View toolbar.rvt. each of these components can have a compound structure. click . click Save. You add a more complex floor type to levels 2 and 3. you begin by adding a floor slab Level 1. click 2 On the View toolbar. you add floors and floor openings to the building model. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise. Like walls. m_First_Project-in_progress. 109 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog box. When sketching these components. and ceilings are examples of sketched components. the respective layers interact according to the functional assignment within the Edit Assembly dialog box. and click OK. 58 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . select Window Tags. In this exercise. Adding Floors and Floor Openings. When walls intersect a floor. roofs. You can also select or draw lines.

11 On the Design Bar. clear Extend into wall (to core). In addition. click . 10 Select the three remaining exterior walls. click Floor. 9 If the magenta line is not on the exterior face of the north exterior wall. verify that Pick Walls is selected. the building model becomes unavailable for modification until you finish the floor sketch. 12 Select Concrete . click Finish Sketch. A magenta line displays with flip arrows. 5 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Floor Properties. you must either finish or quit in order to access other design modes. 8 Click the upper exterior wall. You can click the flip arrows to move the floor boundary to either the interior or exterior face of a wall. Creating Your First Building Model | 59 .4 In the Project Browser. Notice the floor on Level 1 that extends to the exterior face of the walls. and click OK. You are in sketch mode. click the flip arrows to flip the line. The Design Bar now has only one tab. 7 On the Options Bar. When in sketch mode. double-click Level 1. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Sketch. 14 On the View toolbar.300mm for Type. 6 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans.

When the chain of walls highlights. when it highlights under the cursor. press TAB. double-click Level 2. the interior walls on Level 1 display as an underlay. click Floor. verify that Extend into wall (to core) is selected. In this view. click to select it. 17 On the Options Bar.Add a floor to Level 2 15 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 19 Zoom in to the upper exterior wall. Notice the location of the magenta line. 60 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . You can use TAB to select a chain of walls or lines at any time. 18 Place the cursor over the upper exterior wall and. The windows are not tagged because you did not add them within this view.

and click OK. click . 23 Select Beam and Block 200mm for Type. 32 In the Type Selector. Creating Your First Building Model | 61 . Add elevators and bathroom components 30 In the Project Browser. 22 On the Design Bar. 26 Click Yes to join geometry and cut out the overlapping volume. click 28 On the View toolbar. 33 Add two elevators in the center room on the right side of the building model. indicating that they are not attached to the floor. select M_Elevator Center: 2032mm x 1295mm. After you add these components. 29 Spin the model and observe the new floor on Level 2. click Floor Properties. 24 Click Finish Sketch. Next. These elevators are wall-hosted components.20 Click the flip arrows. 21 Use the flip arrows to place the magenta line on the exterior face of the core. you paste-align the level 1 interior walls and components to level 2 before adding the level 3 floor. click Component. To do this. The line chain flips to each face of the core rather than the interior and exterior wall face. you add elevators and plumbing components on Level 1. double-click Level 1. . The interior walls of the building model are displayed in red. 31 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. move the elevator into position. A message displays asking if you want to join geometry and cut the overlapping volume out of the walls. Attaching the walls ensures that if you change the floor elevation. This occurs because the structural layers of the floor must cut through the interior finish layer of the wall in order to extend to the wall core. 25 Click Yes to attach the wall tops to the floor. position the cursor on the wall. the walls remain attached. 27 On the View toolbar. under Floor Plans. and click to place it. A message displays asking if you want the walls that go up to this floor to attach to it. as shown.

36 On the Design Bar. 38 Add the sink to the center of the room. as shown. 34 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and specify the dimension 1150 mm as shown above. select each one. click Component.TIP After adding the elevators. 37 In the Type Selector. toggle the temporary dimension witness line to the interior face of the adjacent wall. 62 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . select M_Pedestal Sink-3D: Pedestal Sink. 35 Zoom in to the upper right corner of the building model. click Modify.

enter 90 on the keyboard and press Enter. Creating Your First Building Model | 63 . an angular value displays that responds to keyboard entries. The first click specifies the rotation start point.39 On the Design Bar. Listening dimensions react to cursor movements and keyboard entries. the second click specifies the rotation end point. when you sketch a wall. establish the direction of the rotation. 43 Move the cursor 90 degrees to the left and click to set the rotation end point. 41 On the Edit menu. 42 Place the cursor directly above the sink and click to set the rotation start point as shown. you can type the wall length and press Enter rather than setting the wall end point. In this case. When rotating. Rotating an object requires two clicks. For example. you can use the listening dimension to accurately rotate the component. click Modify. The component will rotate to the value. click Rotate. 40 Select the sink. TIP Although you can manually rotate the component. when rotating the component.

47 Add the toilet on the right wall. 45 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select M_Toilet-Commercial-Wall-3D: 480mm Seat Height. click Component.44 Drag the sink until it snaps to the center of the left wall face. 48 Use the same procedure to add a toilet and sink in the similar room at the lower right corner of the building model. 64 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 46 In the Type Selector. as shown.

In addition. and click OK. the interior walls. click Modify.Before adding the final floor. and click OK. 53 In the Filter dialog box. right-click. doors. elevators. 56 Select Level 2. (Do not include the exterior walls in the selection. Paste align interior walls 49 In an empty space within the drawing area. a message might be displayed stating that the new walls conflict with an existing insert. click Paste Aligned  ➤ Select Levels by Name. Depending on the exact placement of the windows you added in the north and south elevation views. 50 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 54 On the Edit menu.) This captures all the internal walls. and plumbing fixtures can be paste aligned to Levels 2 and 3. 55 On the Edit menu. and click Zoom To Fit. and components. 52 On the Options Bar. you must add the openings for the stairwells and the elevators. clear Door Tags. click Copy to Clipboard. 51 Draw a crossing pick box beginning inside the upper-right corner of the building model and extending to the inside of the lower-left corner. Creating Your First Building Model | 65 . doors. click .

you can continue working and the warning dialog box closes automatically. In the steps that follow. If you know the source of the problem. 59 Correct the problem by moving the window away from the corridor wall. You can drag the window or use the arrow keys on your keyboard to nudge the window to a location that does not conflict with the interior wall. 66 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 58 If you received the conflict message. 63 Spin the model so you can see the interior walls and components on level 2. For more information regarding the warning. 61 On the View toolbar. you add floor openings to accommodate the elevators and stairs. 57 In the Project Browser. If you received this error. 60 Check the lower exterior wall for the same problem and correct it. double-click Level 2. or ceiling in which you want the opening. roof. click 62 On the View toolbar. under Floor Plans. Ignore the warning and proceed with the next step. you can click the controls on the side of the dialog box. When you add a model opening.These conflict warnings alert you to problems in your layout. . if necessary. The message disappears once you click in the drawing area. you are prompted to select the floor. zoom in to the upper exterior wall and notice that the center window conflicts with the left wall of the corridor. it is often a good idea to create a view that makes the selection process more precise. click . it is most likely because the center window intersects the corridor wall on Levels 2 and 3. Therefore.

69 Click the flip arrows to change the direction of the view towards the interior. Adding a section is a two-click process. drag the clip planes of the view so that you capture only the building model and set the depth just past the bathroom wall. click to set the start point. 65 Right-click in the empty space of the drawing area. double-click Level 1. 67 Place the cursor over the upper right corner of the building model.Create a section view 64 In the Project Browser. After you add the section. and the second click specifies the section tail. move the cursor down and click just below the south exterior wall. you can flip the view direction and modify the extents of the view. 68 Click the section line. and click Zoom To Fit. under Floor Plans. as shown. Creating Your First Building Model | 67 . 70 Using the shape handles. The first click specifies the section head. click Section. 66 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

floor. just as the level heads do in an elevation view.71 On the Design Bar. 75 Place the cursor over the level 2 floor and. click Modify. click Opening. select Pick a roof. select it. This view offers easy accessibility to all floors as well as the stairwells on the left and right. Similarly. and click OK. The section head is displayed in blue. Create a floor opening 73 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. when it highlights. the section heads are linked directly to the view so when you double-click the section head. 74 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box. or ceiling and cut vertically. the referenced view opens. 72 Double-click the section head. 68 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model .

Notice the locking constraints that display. 81 Click each of the four padlocks to lock them. select the rectangle drawing tool. 77 Zoom around the stairwell in the lower right corner. In the following illustration. Creating Your First Building Model | 69 . 76 In the Go to View dialog box. 79 On the Options Bar. the sketch lines have been enhanced for training purposes. the Go to View dialog box displays and offers you a selection of views to choose from. and click Open View. click Lines. select Floor Plan: Level 2. 78 On the Design Bar. these constraints ensure that the opening adapts to any changes in the associated walls. When locked. 80 Draw a rectangle that snaps to the interior wall faces of the stairwell as shown below.Because you must be in a view parallel to the screen in order to edit a sketch.

select Pick a roof. click Finish Sketch. 92 Click Finish Sketch. 89 On the Design Bar. 82 On the Design Bar. 85 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box.NOTE Although the opening could account for the stair landings at this point. 87 In the Go to View dialog box. 88 Zoom to the stairwell in the upper right corner. select it. click Lines. The modification of the opening is done for you in a dataset used later in this tutorial. it is often easier to add the stairs first and then modify the opening precisely to the location of the stairs. 90 On the Options Bar. click Opening. double-click Section 1. select Floor Plan: Level 2. 70 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . floor. 86 Place the cursor over the level 2 floor and when it highlights. under Sections (Building Section). and click OK. Add a second opening 84 On the Design Bar. select the rectangle drawing tool. 91 Draw a rectangle that snaps to the interior wall faces of the stairwell and lock the lines as shown. 83 In the Project Browser. or ceiling and cut vertically. and click Open View.

select Pick a roof. you paste align these openings rather than sketch them again. under Sections (Building Section). and click OK. . 99 On the Design Bar. click 104 On the View toolbar. select Floor Plan: Level 2. select it. double-click Section 1. 98 Zoom in to the elevators. Creating Your First Building Model | 71 . 94 On the Design Bar.Add an opening for the elevators 93 In the Project Browser. click Lines. 100 On the Options Bar. 96 Place the cursor over the level 2 floor and. or ceiling and cut vertically. click Opening. 102 Click Finish Sketch. You have completed the three openings required for this level. floor. 105 Spin the model so that you can see the vertical penetrations on level 2. select the rectangle drawing tool. 95 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box. click . when it highlights. 101 Draw a rectangle that snaps to the interior wall faces of the elevator shaft and lock the lines as shown. 97 In the Go to View dialog box. 103 On the View toolbar. and click Open View. After adding a floor to Level 3.

107 Right-click. and click OK. press TAB. 110 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls and. 113 Click Yes to join geometry and cut volume.Add a floor to Level 3 106 In the Project Browser. when the chain of walls highlights. double-click Level 3. click Copy to Clipboard. 118 On the Edit menu. and click Zoom To Fit. click . double-click Section 1. under Views (all). 109 On the Options Bar. 120 Select Level 3 and click OK. under Sections (Building Sections). clear everything except Floors (Floor opening cut). 115 Draw a pick box around Level 2 so that you capture the three openings you created previously. 72 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . and. click to select it. 111 On the Design Bar. 112 Click Yes to attach the walls to the bottom of the floor. The floor type you assigned to Level 2 is used for Level 3. Copy floor openings to Level 3 114 In the Project Browser. 119 On the Edit menu. verify that Extend into wall (to core) is selected. when the wall highlights under the cursor. Make sure you do not select Floors. under Floor Plans. 116 On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. click Paste Aligned  ➤ Select Levels by Name. 117 In the Filter dialog box. 108 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Floor.

123 Right-click. under Views (all). 125 Draw a crossing pick box beginning just inside the upper right corner and extending to the lower left corner. The only remaining task in this exercise is to paste-align the Level 2 interior walls. The vertical penetrations extend through Levels 2 and 3. click Modify. 124 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. doors. double-click Level 2. Paste-align components to Level 3 122 In the Project Browser. Creating Your First Building Model | 73 . Do not include the exterior walls. click .121 On the View toolbar. and components to Level 3. and click Zoom To Fit. under Floor Plans.

NOTE If you receive a warning that a conflict exists with an insert. 130 Select Level 3 and click OK. click Copy to Clipboard. Reposition one or both of the windows that may be intersecting the corridor wall. this removes it from the selection set. you add a gable roof and ceiling to the west wing of the building model. clear Floors and Floors (Floor opening cut). 127 In the Filter dialog box. click Paste Aligned  ➤ Select Levels by Name. 131 On the View toolbar. If you accidently select a component that does not belong in the selection set. and click OK. click Save. 129 On the Edit menu. 133 Proceed to the next exercise. hold the CTRL key down and select it. click . 132 On the File menu. Adding a Roof and Ceiling In this exercise. 74 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . Adding a Roof and Ceiling. 126 On the Options Bar.TIP If you miss a component. hold the SHIFT key down and select the component. click OK and go to the Level 3 floor plan. 128 On the Edit menu. click .

5 Select the left exterior wall so that the sketch line is left of the wall. Creating Your First Building Model | 75 . and verify that Overhang is 600 mm. under Views (all). Creating a footprint roof is very similar to creating a floor. 4 On the Options Bar. click Roof  ➤ Roof by Footprint. under Floor Plans. double-click Roof. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Pick Walls. 8 Select the upper exterior wall and the lower exterior wall. If the sketch lines are on the interior side of the exterior walls. Add a gable roof to the building model 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. m_First_Project-in_progress. 3 On the Design Bar. select Defines slope. 6 Select the right exterior wall so that the sketch line is right of the wall. Both are sketched components and require you to define the border of the component. click the flip arrows to move the lines outside of the exterior walls. Verify that Extend to wall core is clear. 7 On the Options Bar. clear Defines slope.Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise.

click Roof Properties. select Warm Roof . 15 Move the cursor over the gable end wall until it is preselected. . 14 Spin and zoom the building model until it resembles the following illustration. click 13 On the View toolbar. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box.9 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 76 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 16 Press TAB to preselect the chain of exterior walls. 11 On the Design Bar.Timber for Type. Notice the exterior walls are not connected to the roof. click Finish Roof. 12 On the View toolbar. click .

19 On the Options Bar. select Top. Notice the drag handle on the roof ridge. The exterior walls attach to the roof. for Attach Wall. Modify the roof 22 Select the roof. Creating Your First Building Model | 77 . for Top/Base. select Attach. click Modify. 23 Drag the roof ridge control upward to a point where the pitch is approximately doubled. 18 On the Options Bar.17 Click to select the entire chain of exterior walls. The exterior wall chain displays as solid red. 21 On the Design Bar. 20 Select the roof.

Notice the exterior walls adjust to the new roof pitch. TIP Although you can add a ceiling in a floor plan view. the ceiling is normally outside the view range and is not visible after you add it. you will use the auto ceiling method. 25 On the Design Bar. There are two methods to create a ceiling: ■ Using Auto Ceiling. 29 In the Type Selector. 30 In the upper-left corner of the building model. ■ In this case.24 Release the drag handle at the new position. 28 On the Modeling tab of the Design Bar. and then click inside highlighted rooms to add a ceiling. double-click Level 3. under Ceiling Plans. This returns the roof to its original position. select Compound Ceiling: 600 x 600mm grid. 78 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . you can sketch the perimeter of a ceiling using the same pick and draw techniques learned when you added the floors and roof. Add a ceiling to Level 3 27 In the Project Browser. click Modify. you select a ceiling type from the Type Selector. under Views (all). 26 On the Edit menu. Using the sketch method. click inside the room to add a ceiling as shown. click Ceiling. click Undo Move.

32 In the Type Selector. Creating Your First Building Model | 79 . 33 Click within the main corridor and each stairwell to add a ceiling in each.31 Add a ceiling of the same type in the remaining rooms on the left side of the corridor and in both bathrooms. select Compound Ceiling: 600 x 1200mm grid. as shown.

and click OK. and select Shading with Edges. click Modify. you modify the original stairwell to be a multistory stair and mirror a copy to the other stairwell. select Compound Ceiling: Plain. 37 In the drawing area. enter 3900 mm for Height Offset From Level. 36 On the Design Bar. 35 Add a ceiling to the three remaining rooms on the right side of the corridor. click Save. you begin by creating a set of stairs from Level 1 to Level 2.34 In the Type Selector. 42 Proceed to the next exercise. click Properties. under Constraints. 40 In the Element Properties dialog box. 39 Right-click the ceiling over the elevator shaft on Level 3. double-click the section head. Adding Multi-Level Stairs In this exercise. and from the context menu. Rather than repetitively creating the same stairs on each level and in each stairwell. Adding Multi-Level Stairs. 41 On the File menu. click the Model Graphics Style control. 80 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 38 On the View Control Bar.

2 Zoom in to the stairwell in the lower right corner of the building model. 4 In the Type Selector. you first add temporary model lines that provide an underlay to trace over. In the image below. Add stairs between Level 1 and 2 1 In the Project Browser. m_First_Project-in_progress. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 1. you create a set of U-shaped stairs similar to those in the following illustration.Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise. In order to sketch the stairs accurately. under Views (all). Creating Your First Building Model | 81 . click Lines. and use the temporary dimensions to specify the values shown in the following image. the permanent dimension lines have been added as a training aid and the section line has been hidden temporarily. select Wide Lines.rvt. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. In the steps that follow. 5 Add the three lines as shown.

and then clicking the bottom endpoint of the same line. you sketch the stair run and trace the run over the two vertical lines. 7 Sketch the first half of the run by clicking on the bottom endpoint of the right vertical line. In the steps that follow.NOTE It is important to dimension the lines to the interior face of the walls. not to the centerline. and then specify the value. for example: 550 mm. You are in sketch mode. 8 Sketch the second half of the run by clicking on the top endpoint of the left vertical line. By default. 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 82 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . the Run tool is active. click Stairs. The dimensions have been predetermined. Click on the temporary dimension witness line control until it moves to the interior face of the wall. and then clicking the top endpoint of the same line.

10 In the Railings Type dialog box. Creating Your First Building Model | 83 . 11 On the Design Bar.The stair run is complete. click Finish Sketch. Specify railing type 9 On the Design Bar. select 900mm Pipe. and click OK. click Railings Type.

and select Hide Object.Notice that the model lines still display. 84 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 13 On the View Control Bar. and select Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. This makes the model lines more apparent. 15 Delete the three model lines. click the Hide/Isolate control. 12 Select the stairs. click the Hide/Isolate control. 14 Select the three model lines. 16 On the View Control Bar.

17 In the Project Browser. 20 In the Element Properties dialog box. select Level 3 for Multistory Top Level. double-click Section 1. click Modify. 19 On the Options Bar. under Sections (Building Section). under Views (all). Modify stairs 18 Select the stairs. Use TAB or zoom in. 21 On the Design Bar. under Constraints. IMPORTANT Be careful not to select the railings. as needed. and click OK. click . Creating Your First Building Model | 85 .

86 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . Do not select the railings. 25 Enter the keyboard shortcut.NOTE At this time. SM. click to specify the start point of the mirror axis. click . and select Copy. The cursor now snaps only to midpoints. 24 On the Options Bar. as shown. 27 Move the cursor upward and perpendicular to the floor. Copy west stairs to east stairwell 22 Select the stairs created in the previous steps. This is done in the next exercise using a new dataset. click Mirror. When the midpoint symbol and tooltip displays. you could modify the floor openings to accommodate the stair landings. 23 On the Edit menu. 26 Place the cursor over the center of bottom edge of the Level 1 floor. and click to set the mirror axis endpoint.

. You add a curtain wall passageway between the wings with a suspended walkway between each of the upper floors. 29 On the View toolbar. you create the east wing of the building model by mirroring the west wing.28 On the Design Bar. 31 On the File menu. Creating Your First Building Model | 87 . click 30 On the File menu. Creating the East Wing and Passageway. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating the East Wing and Passageway In this exercise. It has been modified slightly for training purposes. a new dataset is supplied with the building model saved at this point. click Save. NOTE Beginning with the next exercise. click Modify. click Close.

This dataset is essentially the same dataset you saved at the end of the last exercise. and double-click 3D Southwest Isometric. 88 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . under Views (all). 4 Draw a pick box around the entire building model. zoom out before making the selection. click Ref Plane. Mirror the west wing 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. If necessary. expand 3D Views.rvt file located in the Metric folder. 2 Draw a vertical reference plane 12000 mm from the exterior face of the right exterior wall as shown. Stair railings on Level 3 were added. Open the m_First_Project-West_Wing. Additional 3D views were added. Floor openings were modified to create stair landings. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. The following modifications have been made: ■ ■ ■ ■ Wall inserts on the north and south walls were evenly spaced. 3 In the Project Browser. click Open. NOTE It is important to capture every component within this building model.Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. You use this plane later as the mirror axis. click the Training Files icon.

click Mirror. 5 In the Project Browser.The entire model displays as selected. IMPORTANT Components selected in one view remain selected when you switch views. 9 Select the vertical reference plane you added previously. click and verify that Copy is selected. double-click Level 1. 8 On the Options Bar. Creating Your First Building Model | 89 . and select the section line to add it to the selection set. under Floor Plans. 6 Press and hold CTRL. 7 On the Edit menu.

21 Sketch the two curtain walls between the wings. 11 If necessary. click . click Wall. The new components are numbered sequentially. zoom out to see both wings of the building model. as shown. 16 Spin and zoom the building model until it resembles the following illustration. If necessary. In addition. 13 On the Edit menu. Notice that the new wing is a mirror image of the original. 12 Select the reference plane. 90 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . .After you specify the mirror axis. 14 On the View toolbar. a progress bar displays on the status bar as the mirrored copy is generated. 20 On the Options Bar. click Delete. Add the passageway walls between wings 17 In the Project Browser. click the flip arrows to ensure the exterior face of the curtain wall is facing the outside. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 1. 10 After the mirrored copy displays. click 15 On the View toolbar. 18 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Curtain Wall: Exterior Glazing. select Roof for Height. notice that a new section view exists in the Project Browser. 19 In the Type Selector. click Modify on the Design Bar.

click . split the same exterior wall at the intersection of the exterior face of the wall hosting door 13 as shown. When splitting the wall. select Delete Inner Segment. click Split Walls and Lines. as shown below. zoom into the intersection and make sure you split the wall where it intersects the exterior face of the elevator shaft wall. Creating Your First Building Model | 91 . 23 On the Tools menu. 26 Using the same technique. 25 Split the face of the exterior brick wall at the intersection with the curtain wall.Split and delete exterior wall faces of each wing 22 On the View toolbar. 24 On the Options Bar.

30 On the Options Bar. 29 On the Tools menu. 28 Zoom in to the intersection of the passageway and the exterior wall of the right wing. Notice the segment between the splits has been deleted. you can use the Align tool to clean up the intersection. TIP If the split does not line up perfectly with the intersecting wall.27 Enter ZF to Zoom to Fit. verify that Delete Inner Segment is selected. 92 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . click Split Walls and Lines.

split the face of the exterior brick wall at the similar intersections shown below. 39 Select both curtain walls so that the floor offset is on the exterior side of each wall. and clear Extend into wall (to core). click . double-click Level 1. 38 On the Options Bar. click Modify. 35 In the Project Browser. 33 On the View toolbar. Add a floor to the Level 1 passageway 36 Adjust your zoom settings until you can see the perimeter of the entire passageway. click 34 On the View toolbar. Creating Your First Building Model | 93 . enter 150 for Offset. click Floor. under Floor Plans. 37 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 32 On the Design Bar. to turn off thin lines mode. Arrows refer to each split location.31 Using the technique learned previously.

52 On the Options Bar. Add walkway to Level 2 49 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 2. 50 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 41 On the Options Bar. notice the overlapping intersections that must be cleaned up before the sketch can be finished. and then select the center of the top horizontal line. When finished. 47 Select Concrete 300mm for Type. 53 Sketch a rectangle with the vertical lines attached to the level 2 floor of each wing and each horizontal line 1500 mm from the inner face of the curtain wall. 46 On the Design Bar. the sketch line weight has been increased for training purposes. dimensions have been added for training purposes. 42 Select the edge of the floor on both the west and east wings. The general rule is that you should click the section of the line that you wish to keep. 51 On the Design Bar.40 On the Design Bar. NOTE In the following image. In the following illustration. click Lines. click the rectangle drawing tool. 44 Select the center of the left vertical line. and click OK. click Floor Properties. In this case. the sketch should be a single closed loop as shown. 45 Continue cleaning up the intersections using this method. . click Trim/Extend. 43 On the Tools menu. 48 Click Finish Sketch. 94 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . under Floor Plans. click Lines. click Floor. there are two general rules that must be applied: You must have a closed loop and there cannot be intersecting lines. When sketching. click and Lock.

use the trim tool to make the sketch a single line. and click OK. Add railings to Level 2 walkway 57 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 56 Click Finish Sketch. select 1100mm for Type. click Railing. Creating Your First Building Model | 95 . click Railing Properties. and click OK. 65 On the Design Bar. If necessary. 58 On the Design Bar. you can use the SPACEBAR to toggle the offset. 64 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Lines.54 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. zoom in when selecting the walkway edge to make sure the offset is correct. 63 On the Design Bar. click and . and specify an offset of 50 mm. TIP When sketching. 60 Select the line at the top edge of the walkway so that the sketch line is offset inside the walkway. as shown. click Floor Properties. 61 On the Options Bar. If they do. click . 66 Select the railing. 55 Select Beam and Block 200mm for Type. 59 On the Options Bar. TIP Make sure the line intersections do not overlap. 62 Draw two short lines to close the gap between the walkway and where it intersects each wing.

continuous line. Add a new section view 71 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 74 Double-click the section head you created in the previous step. 70 Click at the midpoint of the walkway for the mirror axis start point. select both railings and the walkway on Level 2. and click to set the mirror axis. 69 Enter SM. click and Copy. and modify the direction and shape handles. click Modify. For the next mouse click. 75 In the section view. it is faster to mirror it. TIP Press and hold CTRL while making multiple selections. click Mirror. as shown. only midpoints will be snapped to. It should be noted that the reason both railings weren’t sketched at the same time is because a railing sketch has to be a single. 72 Add a section view to the center of the passageway. You could create another railing on the other side of the walkway. however. 73 On the Design Bar. 96 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . click Section. move the cursor to the right. 68 On the Options Bar.67 On the Edit menu.

under Floor Plans. double-click Roof. click Copy to Clipboard. 77 On the Edit menu. and verify that Overhang is 600 mm. 84 Select each curtain wall so that the offset is outside the curtain wall as shown. Add roof to passageway 80 In the Project Browser. click . click Paste Aligned  ➤ Select Levels by Name. If necessary. adjust the view so you can see the entire passageway. check Defines slope. 78 In the Select Levels dialog box. click Roof  ➤ Roof by Footprint. Creating Your First Building Model | 97 .76 On the Edit menu. and click OK. The only remaining task is to add a roof to the passageway. select Level 3. 83 On the Options Bar. 79 On the View toolbar. 82 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 81 Using the zoom commands. zoom in until you can see the railings and walkways.

88 On the Tools menu. 90 On the Design Bar. as shown. clear Defines slope. click . 87 Sketch two vertical lines that intersect the horizontal lines. Exact dimensions are not important. click the center of each roof line to clean up each corner. click Trim/Extend. 89 Using the techniques you learned earlier. click Finish Roof. 86 On the Options Bar. 91 On the View toolbar. 98 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . click Lines.85 On the Design Bar. as shown.

In this case. you select the edge of the roof or wall that you want it joined to. it is easier to demonstrate the roof joins in hidden line mode. Joining a roof is a two-click procedure. First.Notice that the passageway roof needs to be joined to each wing. Creating Your First Building Model | 99 . Second. you select the edge of the passageway roof. click the Model Graphics Style control. The two roofs are joined. Join the roofs 92 On the View Control Bar. For training purposes. click Join/Unjoin Roof. 93 On the Tools menu. and then the outer edge of the corresponding wing roof. 94 Click the left edge of the passageway roof. 95 Click the outer edge of the main roof. and click Hidden Line. you click the edge of the roof that you want to join.

Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise. click . The initial schedule contains all doors in the building model. First Project-Dual Wings-in progress. 99 Join the passageway roof and the roof of the other wing using the same technique learned in the previous steps.96 On the View toolbar. 100 On the View Control Bar.rvt 100 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 103 Proceed to the next exercise. rename each schedule. Finally. and change the filtering so each level has a unique door schedule. 97 Spin the model so that you have access to the unjoined end of the passageway roof and the east wing roof. name the file First Project-Dual Wings-in progress. Scheduling the Building Model In this exercise. and select Shading with Edges. you create and modify a door schedule. click Save As. click Join/Unjoin Roof. and click Save. Scheduling the Building Model. you modify it to filter by level. you duplicate the schedule twice. click the Model Graphics Style control. After creating the schedule. 101 On the File menu. 98 On the Tools menu.rvt. 102 Navigate to your preferred directory.

select Mark and click Move up until it displays at the top of the list. and click OK. 6 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. right-click on the Design Bar and click View. add the following as scheduled fields: ■ ■ ■ Level Mark Cost Notice that there is not an available field for Hardware. select Project parameter.Create a door schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 5 Click Add Parameter. You can add custom fields and make them either type or instance parameters. enter Hardware for Name. and click Add. 8 Under Scheduled fields (in order). Select Text for Type. Select Other for Group parameter under. on the Fields tab. Under Parameter Data. select Doors for category. 2 In the New Schedule dialog box. 9 Move Hardware so that it is directly below Family and Type. 10 Move Cost below Hardware. TIP You can also double-click an available field to add it to the scheduled fields. 4 From the Available Fields list. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. Select Instance. Select Common for Discipline. Creating Your First Building Model | 101 . select Family and Type under Available Fields. click Schedule/Quantities. 7 Click OK. TIP If the View tab is not visible.

Door Type will display as the column heading rather than Family and Type. select Header and select Footer. 18 Enter Door Type for Heading. select Hidden field. 16 Click the Formatting tab. 24 Select Bold for Header text. 17 Under Fields. 102 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 14 At the bottom of the tab. 21 Under Fields. select Grand totals and select Itemize every instance. select the column grip between Door Type and Hardware and move the grip to the right until the door types display in their entirety. The door schedule displays. select Level. 15 Select Mark for Then by. 19 Under Fields. select Cost. 26 In the door schedule. 13 Under Sort by. Therefore. Modifications to the schedule appearance display only when the schedule is added to a sheet. On the schedule. 23 Click the Appearance tab. 20 Select Right for Alignment. the column is redundant. and under Field Formatting. You can hide this field because you are sorting and grouping by level. 25 Click OK. 12 Select Level for Sort by. select Calculate totals.11 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. select Family and Type. 22 Under Field formatting.

right-click Door Schedule.TIP In this view. 33 In the Rename View dialog box. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. expand Schedules/Quantities. A message displays indicating that this change must be applied to all elements of the same type. and click Duplicate. and click Rename. each door is allowed a different value. and press ENTER. You now have a separate schedule for each level. Creating Your First Building Model | 103 . enter Door Schedule-Level 1. Modify the schedule 27 Click in the Cost field for door mark number 1. 29 Click in the Hardware field for door mark number 1. Duplicate and filter door schedules 30 In the Project Browser. under Other. 28 Click OK. enter 500. This is because for this door type. 36 In the Element Properties dialog box. right-click Door Schedule. enter Brass. under Schedules/Quantities. 35 In the Project Browser. 34 Repeat the process to rename the remaining copies to Door Schedule-Level 2 and Door Schedule-Level 3. and click OK. and click Properties. and click OK. each schedule still lists all the doors for each level. 31 Repeat the previous step to create a second copy of the door schedule. 32 In the Project Browser. and press ENTER. Because you created the hardware parameter as an instance parameter. under Schedules/Quantities. click Edit for the Filter value. any changes made to column size are not retained when the schedule is added to a sheet. specify Level equals Level 1 for Filter by. Cost is a type parameter. However. right-click Door Schedule-Level 1.

you create an exterior scene. Rendering the Building Model. Under Type. 104 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 39 Repeat the previous four steps for Door Schedule Level 2 and Door Schedule Level 3. Enter Exterior Scene for Name. click Save. 2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. click OK.38 In the Element Properties dialog box. 42 Proceed to the next exercise. double-click each door schedule. under Schedules/Quantities. Notice that the information is now filtered for each level. After rendering.rvt. select Exterior. 41 On the File menu. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise. specify the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ Select New. you capture the image and save it within the project. and then render a 3D view using that scene. 40 In the Project Browser. Filter each schedule by their respective level. First Project-Dual Wings-in progress. click Settings. 4 Click OK. Create the exterior scene 1 On the View toolbar. click . 3 In the Scene Selection dialog box. Rendering the Building Model In this exercise. modify the settings.

click Region Raytrace. 14 Click OK. under Background Color. 17 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. 12 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. Creating Your First Building Model | 105 . under Scene Settings. G. and B settings. 7 Click the color bar. 13 Under Raytrace Settings. the building model should resemble the following illustration. A color bar displays. 15 On the View toolbar. 8 In the Color Picker dialog box. select Solid Color.Specify scene settings 5 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. under Scene Settings. select Good for Quality. This is a white background color. 10 Click OK. clear Use Sun and Shadow Settings from view. 11 In the Environment dialog box. click Environment. 9 Specify a value of 250 for the R. 18 Drag a box around the building model as shown. and select Blurry Reflections and Blurry Transparency. When the rendering process is complete. 16 Spin the building model until it resembles the following illustration. 6 In the Environment dialog box. click the Bars tab. click OK. The raytrace process begins and a progress bar displays on the status bar. This is the background color for the scene. click .

rvt 106 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . Documenting the Building Model. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise. Documenting the Building Model In this exercise. On the second sheet. you add this to a sheet. click Save. click Display Model. You add a floor plan and schedule to the first sheet. expand Renderings. An expandable branch called Renderings is added to the Project Browser. 20 On the Design Bar. This is the captured rendering from the previous steps.19 On the Design Bar. you add two sheets with titleblocks to the project. 22 On the File menu. First Project-Dual Wings-in progress. 21 In the Project Browser. In the next exercise. and double-click {3D}. you add a rendered view and an elevation view. 23 Proceed to the final exercise. click Capture Rendering.

Notice that several titleblocks are installed with the software. You are prompted to select a titleblock. 8 Select the titleblock and zoom in to the lower right corner. click Sheet. The titleblocks that are listed are loaded into the project. click Metric Library. Creating Your First Building Model | 107 . The creator of this titleblock family did not want this text to be modifiable in the project environment. and press ENTER. Titleblocks are a family just like any other component. 7 Try to select the logo in the upper right corner. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. 4 Double-click the Titleblocks folder. click OK to use the loaded titleblock. click Load. 6 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. 9 Click Owner.Add a sheet and titleblock to the project 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 5 Click Cancel. You can create a titleblock family and load it into the project or navigate to it from this dialog box. The blue text is text that you can modify. The text is not selectable by design. enter your name.

15 Move the cursor to the center of the titleblock and click. Notice that your name is displayed for Client Name. Add a view to the titleblock 12 Zoom out until you can see the entire sheet. If you add views of different scales. click Project Information. Titleblock numbering is sequential and automatic. The Scale is blank and is filled in when a view is added to the titleblock. and click Add View to Sheet. select Floor Plan: Level 1. click Add View. referring the reader to the view titles. 108 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 13 On the View tab of the Design Bar. the label displays As Indicated. 14 In the Views dialog box. and click OK.10 On the Settings menu. 11 Enter First Building Model for Project Name. the next sheet and titleblock will be A102. In this case.

Relocate the view title 22 Drag the view title under the view. you activated the view specifically to turn off the elevation symbol visibility. However. click Activate View. You can work on the building model within this view. and on the context menu. click Deactivate View. 18 On the View menu. Notice the elevation symbols display. and click OK.16 On the Design Bar. clear Elevations. The titleblock becomes an underlay and the view becomes active. Notice drag handles display on the ends of the view title. 19 Click the Annotation Categories tab. 25 Drag the view to the lower left corner of the titleblock as shown. click Modify. 21 Right-click the view. 23 Select the view. 24 Adjust the view title length by dragging the shape handles under the extents of the view. 17 Right-click the view. and on the context menu. 20 Under Visibility. click Visibility/Graphics. Creating Your First Building Model | 109 .

28 In the Project Browser. 110 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model .26 Zoom in to the lower right corner. Notice that the scale value has updated. drag Door Schedule-Level 1 onto the upper right corner of the titleblock. 27 Zoom out until the titleblock fits within the drawing area. under Schedules/Quantities.

adjust each column width so no text wrapping occurs. 31 Zoom out and move the schedule into the upper right corner of the titleblock. 30 Using the column drag handles. Creating Your First Building Model | 111 .29 Zoom in to the top of the schedule.

37 On the File menu. If necessary. You can adjust the lengths of each section after the break. If you click this. modify the location and width of the view titles. Because these two views have different view scales. 112 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . notice the z symbol in the center edge. under Renderings. 36 On the File menu. Add various views to a second sheet 32 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 34 In the Project Browser. drag North to the lower left corner of sheet A102. the Scale label displays As Indicated. click Close. click Save. 35 In the Project Browser. click Sheet. You have completed your first building model. drag {3D} to the upper right corner of the new titleblock.TIP When the schedule is selected. 33 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. under Elevations (Building Elevations). click OK to use the default titleblock. the schedule breaks in half.

and set it as your default template. you learn how to modify your Autodesk Revit Building working environment. which is independent of the project settings. you modify project settings to control the appearance of the components and subcomponents within that project. 113 .Modifying Project and System Settings 3 In this tutorial. Finally. you create an office template. In the first lesson. you modify the system environment. In the second lesson.

click Modify. specify the following options: ■ ■ Select One hour for Save Reminder interval. 6 In the New Project dialog box. click the Graphics tab.rte in the Metric folder. 18 Sketch a simple straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. 19 On the Design Bar. and click OK. journal cleanup options. These settings control the graphics. click the value for Selection Color. 114 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . click Wall. they are not saved to project or template files. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. 16 Click OK. you learn how to control the system settings within Revit Building. click OK. 17 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Browse. and click OK. 13 In the Color dialog box. Set graphics settings 1 On the File menu. 15 Under Notifications. 5 On the File menu. 10 On the Settings menu.Modifying System Settings In this lesson. selection default options. you modify the settings that control your local Revit Building working environment. the elements causing the error display using this color. When an error occurs. notification preferences. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects. 11 In the Options dialog box. click the Graphics tab. and click Open. 4 Under Colors. click Close to close all open projects. 12 Under Colors. 8 Select m_Tutorial_Default. under Template file. Notice that the drawing area is black. 9 In the New Project dialog box. select yellow. Select None for Tooltip Assistance. select Invert background color. 3 In the Options dialog box. 7 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog box. 14 Click the General tab. click Training Files. click Options. and your username when using worksets. and select the wall. Modifying General System Options In this exercise. click New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Building project. 2 On the Settings menu. click Options.

the family template files. click the Graphics tab and make the following changes: ■ ■ Under Graphics. Specifying File Locations.Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. click Open. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. If prompted. They are saved at the termination of each Revit Building session. 26 In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Journal files are deleted automatically after their number exceeds the value you specify. 30 Click the General tab and make the following changes: ■ ■ ■ Under Notifications. Specifying File Locations In this exercise. do not save the changes. clear Invert background color. click Close. the family libraries. 21 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. Modifying System Settings | 115 . 25 On the File menu. and select Normal for Tooltip Assistance. This setting controls only the tooltips that display within the drawing area. Your login name displays by default. enter the name you want to use during worksharing. Notice that the drawing area background colors are no longer inverted and that tooltips display when you place the cursor over any building component. select your preferred Save Reminder interval. as well as the material and rendering libraries. 27 Open the m_Settings. select values for When number of journals exceeds and Delete journals older than (days). 22 Place the cursor over any of the icons on the toolbars. Notice that the system settings apply to this project. you specify your default file locations. Journal files are text documents that record each step during your Revit Building sessions. 24 When prompted to save. click Close. 28 On the Settings menu. 20 On the Design Bar. 29 In the Options dialog box. 31 Click OK.rvt file located in the Metric folder. click Modify. These settings control location of important Revit Building files such as your default project template. Under Username. Under Journal File Cleanup. click the Training Files icon. These files are used primarily in the software support process. Notice that a tooltip is displayed even though you set Tooltip Assistance to None. Select Red for Selection Color. 23 On the File menu. click Options. Journals can be run in order to detect a problem or recreate lost steps or files. 32 On the File menu. click No.

An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit Building Open. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog box. click Browse. and change the name to My Library. However. 8 Click Cancel. and you can create new libraries. architectural firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. centralized. 11 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. and click OK. When you are opening. 3 Under Default template file. 7 In the Options dialog box. Each library path points Revit Building to a folder of families or training files. 10 Under Libraries. saving. 5 Under Default path for user files. 4 Click Cancel. choose New  ➤ Project. click Browse. click the File Locations tab. On the File menu.Set file locations 1 On the Settings menu. such as in a large. and click the arrow that displays on the right side of the field. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog box. there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. under Libraries. 12 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. TIP To view a template. you can start a new project with that template. Load. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. and Import dialog boxes. Save. 116 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . You can modify the existing library names and path. under Default path for family template files. In the following illustration. 2 In the Options dialog box. and click Browse to select a template. click . notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog box. click Browse. This path is set automatically during the installation process. 6 In the Browse for Folder dialog box. or loading a Revit Building file. click Options. notice the list of library names. select the folder to save your files to by default. Notice that there are industry-specific templates that you can set as your default template.

If you work in a large office.13 Navigate to C:\My Documents or any other folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit Building projects. If you want to relocate this path. specify the new location here. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit Building. This path is determined during installation. Modifying System Settings | 117 . or families. Specifying Spelling Options. 21 Under Libraries. 26 Proceed to the next exercise. 18 Click Cancel. Notice that Revit Building navigates directly to the library path. and Import dialog boxes. 25 Click OK. Save. click Open. 17 In the left pane of the Open dialog box. and select it as the library path. 24 Under AccuRender resource location. you may want to set up an office library on a network path in order to increase productivity and maintain office standards. 22 Click to delete the library. 14 Under Library Name. click the My Library icon. This path specifies the location of the AccuRender® texture library. 19 On the Settings menu. The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit Building Open. Load. Specify rendering settings 23 Click the Rendering tab. click Options. and click OK. view the current path. select My Library. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. The library icons display in the order that they are listed in the Options dialog box. templates. 16 On the File menu. 20 Click the File Locations tab. 15 Click until My Library is at the top of the list. click My Library. and click OK.

8 Under Building industry dictionary. click Edit. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog box. 18 On the Settings menu. 4 Select m_Tutorial_Default. scroll down the list of building industry terms. 9 In the text editor. 3 Under Settings. 4 Under Personal dictionary. and then click File  ➤ Exit. click OK. enter sheetmtl-Cu. delete sheetmtl-CU. click Browse. click Modify. click Save. 5 In the New Project dialog box. 118 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . 20 Under Settings. This resets the spelling settings to their original configuration.Modify spelling settings 1 On the Settings menu. 13 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 17 Click OK. select Ignore words in UPPERCASE. 26 Proceed to the next exercise. click Spelling. click Exit. click the Spelling tab. click Edit. 14 Click in the drawing area. 16 On the Tools menu. 6 On the File menu. click Options. If prompted. work with snapping turned off. 25 On the File menu. You can turn snap settings on and off. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. Notice that there is also a building industry dictionary. click Restore Defaults. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. 24 In the Options dialog box. 2 In the New Project dialog box. click the Spelling tab. 2 In the Options dialog box. click OK. 15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 21 Under Personal dictionary. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. and click Open. click Exit. 22 In the text editor. click Save. click to open a new Revit Building project using the default template. click Close. click New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Building project. click Training Files. click OK. click Options. 7 On the File menu.rte in the Metric folder. 11 In the Options dialog box. 10 On the File menu. 19 In the Options dialog box. Modify snap increments 1 On the File menu. click Text. 5 In the text editor. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. you modify snap increments. 12 On the Standard toolbar. 23 On the File menu of the text editor. you modify snap settings. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. click Edit. under Template file. Modifying Snap Settings. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. In this exercise. do not save the changes.

zoom out until it does so. 10 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. This is the increment that you added previously. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. 9 In the Snaps dialog box. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 500 mm. click Wall. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys such as ZO to zoom out. click Snaps. While sketching. click OK. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. If you do not have a wheel button. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 1000. notice the two-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 1000 mm increments. As you zoom in and out within a view. Modifying System Settings | 119 . and enter 500 . you can right-click and select a zoom option from the context menu. This dimension reacts to the movement of your cursor and numerical keyboard entries. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall. If it does not. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. For example. snapping reverts to the system default settings. A listening dimension refers specifically to the dimension that appears while in the act of sketching. Revit Building uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. use the wheel button on your mouse.6 On the Settings menu. These are shortcut keys that you can use at any time when working on the design. 7 Under Dimension Snaps. 8 Under Object Snaps. enter SM and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. TIP To zoom while in the act of sketching. and move the cursor to the right.

14 Click to set the wall endpoint. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. and move the cursor to the right. and delete the value 500 . 18 Enter SM. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. and do not save the file. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. 120 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . save the project file with a unique name. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. click Modify. 23 Under Dimension Snaps. it will snap to the endpoints. and the wall edges. and click Wall. Finally. and specify the wall endpoint. 24 Click OK. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. you learn how to control the project environment by using the options available on the Settings menu. Creating and Applying Materials In this exercise. 21 Move the cursor downward. Well designed materials provide the foundation for photorealistic renderings. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. it defines the appearance of that component in shaded and rendered views.Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. 17 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. If you move the cursor along the wall. When you apply a material to a component. the midpoint. and use it to complete the exercises. and object styles. fill patterns. Do not set the wall end point. 25 On the File menu. you create a new material and apply it to a model component. You create and modify materials. If you cannot complete the exercises in their entirety. lines. 26 Proceed to the next lesson. 20 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. Modifying Project Settings In this lesson. 19 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. you modify the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. Notice that snapping is once again active. The exercises in this lesson should be done sequentially using the same project file. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. annotations.. Using these options. you modify the way the Project Browser organizes the project. Modifying Project Settings. click Close. 22 On the Settings menu. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 On the Design Bar. click Snaps.

Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Masonry-Fieldstone. This list includes all materials required by loaded model components. However. Notice that there is no Surface Pattern applied to this material. Open m_Settings. you render a region to observe the changes. this material provides a good foundation for the new material.Fieldstone. Notice that the material settings have not changed from the material that you duplicated.In the steps that follow. 2 Scroll down. click Open. Create a new material 1 On the Settings menu. When a model component is loaded into a project. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. You have created a new material that can be applied to any model component in this project. click Materials. click the Training Files icon. you modify the material so that it displays correctly in a shaded or rendered view. In the steps that follow. and click OK.rvt located in the Metric folder. all materials that are part of that component family are also loaded into the project. nor is there an AccuRender texture applied. After you create a new fieldstone material and apply it to the exterior wall face. 3 Click Duplicate. you begin with a simple building model consisting of brick on CMU exterior walls. Notice the materials listed on the left side of the dialog box. This building model has a generic roof and generic floor. enter Masonry . This creates a new material using the selected material settings as the starting point. and select Masonry . Modifying Project Settings | 121 . 4 In the New Material dialog box.Stone for Name.

click OK. 122 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . click to select a texture. enter 0. Fieldstone on CMU. click OK. select Masonry .Fieldstone for the name. 27 Press CTRL. 17 Select the upper exterior wall. 24 In the Materials dialog box. 12 In the Material Editor dialog box. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. The AccuRender texture Masonry . 25 Click OK three times. expand Floor Plans. and click OK. All of the exterior walls of this project are now Fieldstone on CMU. click Edit/New. click New  ➤ Use Current Material as Template. 8 In the Material Editor dialog box.Fieldstone material. The upper wall now uses the Fieldstone on CMU AccuRender texture when you render it. select user from the list of libraries. select Basic Wall: Fieldstone on CMU. notice that the Surface Pattern is still blank.Fieldstone for Name. 21 In the Value field for Structure. It is currently assigned the material Masonry . click This is the material you created previously.Fieldstone is now part of your AccuRender User library. 15 Click OK. Before closing the Materials dialog box. . and click OK. click the Maps tab. and click Edit. and double-click Level 1.Modify material settings 5 Under AccuRender. 6 Navigate to BMCD2AR3\Bitmap Textures\Stone\. 7 In the Material Library dialog box. Apply the new material 16 In the Project Browser. and select Stone82. 14 In the Material Library dialog box. 22 Click in the Material field for layer #1. enter Masonry . By offsetting the X and Y values of the image map. 20 Enter the new wall name. click the Orientation tab. 23 On the right side of the Material field. Layer #1 is the exterior finish of the wall. and click OK. 11 Under Offset. 28 In the Type Selector. 9 Select the entry under Image Mapping.75 for X and Y. you help prevent the appearance of repetitive patterns within the rendering. and select the remaining two unchanged walls. 19 Click Duplicate. expand Views (all). on the Material menu. you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to the Masonry . 26 Select the right exterior wall. 10 In the Image Mapping dialog box. and click . In the next exercise. and click OK. 13 In the Save Material As dialog box. click Edit.Brick.

33 On the File menu. click Display Model on the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. TIP If the Rendering tab is not available on the Design Bar. you create a new pattern called Fieldstone and apply it to the material you created in the previous exercise. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns. the rendering process begins. click Display Model. When finished. and there is no stone pattern applied in this view. drag a rectangle around the 3D image. Notice the roof did not render. and drag a rectangle around the area you want to render. click Region Raytrace.29 On the View Toolbar. In the following exercise. Controlling Object Styles. select Region Raytrace. the fieldstone material that you created is displayed. In the exercise. and save the file as m_Settings-in progress. you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to this material. 32 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. right-click the Design Bar. 35 Proceed to the next exercise. 30 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. and click Rendering. Notice that the exterior walls are no longer brick. After you draw the rectangle around the 3D model. This is because a surface pattern was not selected when the fieldstone material was defined. Zoom into the model. Modifying Project Settings | 123 . Creating and Applying Fill Patterns In this exercise. TIP If you want to see the material in greater detail. 31 In the drawing area. click . you apply a material to default roofs and resolve this.rvt. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns. click Save As. 34 Navigate to a folder of your preference. This is because a material has not been applied to the roof.

Apply the fieldstone pattern 13 Select the east exterior wall.There are two types of fill patterns: model and drafting. Both pattern types are created and applied in a similar way.pat from the Common folder. your training files can be found on C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\Revit Building\Training. m_Settings-in progress. select fldstn. 10 Under Custom. such as brick coursing or ceramic tile on a wall. click Custom. The new model pattern is available in the Name list in the Fill Patterns dialog box. The location of these files can vary depending on the path you set during installation. which consists of a double-diagonal hatching pattern. click Fill Patterns. 4 Scroll down the list of patterns. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. click Import. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. such as steel. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. expand Elevations. and click OK. 2 On the Settings menu. Drafting pattern density is fixed. 9 Select Fieldstone_Model. 3 Under Pattern Type. 7 Under Custom. 11 Enter Fieldstone for Name.56 for Import scale. TIP Typically. and double-click East. Notice that no model surface pattern displays on the fieldstone wall. 8 Navigate to the training folders installed with your Revit Building software. Create a new fill pattern 1 In the Project Browser. 12 Click OK. 124 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . Model patterns are fixed and scale with the model. and click Open. 6 In the Add Surface Pattern dialog box. Drafting patterns represent material in symbolic form. and enter . choose Model. 5 Click New. Notice that a fieldstone pattern is not available.rvt.

Fieldstone material. and click OK. click Edit/New. notice that there is no surface pattern applied to the Masonry . 24 On the Design Bar. Object Styles are applied in every view and can be overridden in a particular view by modifying the Visibility/Graphics settings. The east wall of the building displays as solid fill. Controlling Object Styles You can use Object Styles to control the appearance of components and subcomponents. click Edit. click Save. under Pattern Type. 26 On the View Toolbar. click in the Material field for layer #1. In the Materials dialog box. 15 In the Element Properties dialog box. 20 In the Fill Patterns dialog box. click OK. TIP If the pattern does not display. 23 Click OK three times. you can set the window frame material to “By Category. 17 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. 28 Proceed to the next exercise. click . Modifying Project Settings | 125 . click . adjust your zoom settings as needed. For example. 19 Under Surface Pattern. there are often multiple window types within a project. click Modify.” You can then change the material in the Object Styles dialog box and apply it to all window types. Object Styles allow you to control the appearance of multiple component types. 27 On the File menu. It is currently assigned the material Masonry . 18 On the right side of the Materials field.Fieldstone. 21 Select the Fieldstone model pattern. Layer #1 is the exterior finish of the wall. select Model. 25 Zoom into the model until the fill pattern appears. The client may not be certain of the exact window frame color to use and may want to see renderings of various options. click . 16 In the Value field for Structure.14 On the Options Bar. click to select a fill pattern. Rather than continually modify the type properties of each window type. Controlling Object Styles. 22 In the Materials dialog box.

NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. use the shortcut keys ZR (Zoom in Region) and drag a rectangle around the three left windows facing you. Apply object styles 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click 3D Model View. 2 On the keyboard.rvt. m_Settings-in progress. 126 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . expand 3D Views. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise.

click Edit/New. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. click OK. click OK. click Modify. and select 8 In the Materials dialog box. 17 In the Element Properties dialog box. 12 On the Options Bar. 6 In the Element Properties dialog box. .3 On the View Control Bar. click By Category. click By Category. Notice the exterior frames of all the windows are now gray. 7 In the Type Properties dialog box. click the Trim Exterior Material value. click the Trim Exterior value. click . 11 Zoom out. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Edit/New. 9 In the Type Properties dialog box. Modifying Project Settings | 127 . 18 On the Design Bar. click OK. and select the circular window on the second level. and select 15 In the Materials dialog box. 4 Select one of the windows. click OK. under Other. 16 In the Type Properties dialog box. This means that the material is assigned by the Object Styles setting. click Model Graphics Style. 14 In the Type Properties dialog box. 5 On the Options Bar. click . and click Shading with Edges. under Other. .

click Object Styles.19 On the Settings menu. expand Windows. click OK. Notice that the external window frames are now white. 24 In the Materials dialog box. 23 On the right side of the Material field. click . 30 Proceed to the next exercise. . 22 Under the Windows category. specify Trim . NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 25 In the Object Styles dialog box. Notice that the material is applied to all windows regardless of their type. 26 On the Settings menu. select Trim . 27 Under Category. you create a new line pattern and apply it to the fascia of the roof.White for Trim material. 21 Under Category. m_Settings-in progress. 28 On the View Toolbar. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. click 29 On the File menu. and click in the Material field. expand Windows. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles In this exercise. click Object Styles.Granite for name. select Trim. click Include categories from all disciplines in the list above. You then create a new line style to mark the zoning setback from the property line. and click OK twice. 128 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings .rvt. 20 In the Object Styles dialog box. click Save. and click OK.

2 On the Settings menu. 9 In the Object Styles dialog box. Modifying Project Settings | 129 . and select Roof Line for Line Pattern. m_Settings-in progress. click Line Patterns. click Model Graphics Style. enter Roof Line for Name. select Roofs.Create a new line pattern 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise. 3 In the Line Patterns dialog box. 4 In the Line Pattern Properties dialog box. You can use the Visibility/Graphics settings to modify the roof appearance in a specific view.rvt. 11 Click OK. You have created a new line pattern. click Object Styles. 7 On the View Control Bar. There are two ways to apply the line style to the roof. 10 Select Red for Line Color. The line style is applied to the roof in all views. and click Hidden Line. is open with the 3D view active. click New. 8 On the Settings menu. 5 Enter the Types and Values shown in the following illustration: 6 Click OK twice. or you can use Object Styles to apply the change to all views. under Category. now you must apply it.

click Model Graphics Style. under Modify Subcategories. under Floor Plans. 18 On the View menu. 21 In the Select Line Style dialog box. 17 Click OK. under Category.12 In the Project Browser. click New. click Object Styles. 22 Click OK twice. Select Roof Line for Line Pattern. 13 On the View Control Bar. 19 Click the Model Categories tab. 25 In the Line Styles dialog box. select Override and specify the following options: ■ ■ ■ Select 5 for Line Weight. Select Blue for Line Color. double-click Site. click Visibility/Graphics. select Roofs. click Line Styles. Notice the site topography and the property lines. 24 On the Settings menu. 15 In the Object Styles dialog box. 20 Click Override for Line Style Projection. Notice that the line style displays in this view also. 14 On the Settings menu. 16 Select Solid for Line Pattern. under 3D Views. and select Roofs for Visibility. Create a new line style 23 In the Project Browser. 26 Enter Zoning Setback for Name. and click Hidden Line. 130 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . and click OK. double-click 3D Model View. and select Black for Line Color. This overrides the appearance of the roof only in the current view.

and clear Zoning Setback. double-click Level 1 Annotated. Modifying Project Settings | 131 . expand Lines. click Visibility/Graphics. 33 On the View Toolbar. 38 On the View menu. Notice that the line style has not been applied to the roof in this view because you applied the override to the 3D Model View only.) Click . Modifying Annotations In this exercise. 43 Proceed to the next exercise. 34 On the View menu. move the cursor to the bottom-right corner of the property lines. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ Select 2 for Line Weight Projection. 40 Click OK. click . click Lines. specify the following: ■ ■ Click . select Zoning Setback. 36 Click OK. You also load a new window annotation symbol and apply it to show the window instance number rather than the window type number. 37 In the Project Browser.27 For the Zoning Setback category. This turns off the visibility of the Zoning Setback lines only in this view. and click to set the rectangle endpoint. Select Double Dash 5/8" for Line Pattern. 35 On the Model Categories tab. ■ 32 Click the upper-left corner of the property line to begin the rectangle. click Save. Select Red for Line Color. and clear Zoning Setback. you create a new dimension style using units of measurement that differ from the project settings. 41 On the View Toolbar. click Visibility/Graphics. 28 Click OK. 42 On the File menu. 31 In the Options Bar. The -3000mm offset displays inside the property lines. 30 In the Type Selector. Notice the Zoning Setback lines appear in this view. 29 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. (Make sure you specify a negative value. Modifying Annotations. expand Lines. 39 On the Model Categories tab. Enter -3000 mm for Offset. under Floor Plans. click .

You have created a new dimension style. click Dimension.Imperial dimension available. m_Settings-in progress. 2 On the Settings menu.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. double-click Level 1 Annotated. notice the Mark value differs from the window tag value. In the steps that follow. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box. click the default value for Units Format. Create a new dimension style 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise.rvt. In the Type Selector. under Category. you load a new window tag that displays the window instance mark. and select M_Window Tag . click . is open with the 3D View active. navigate to the Annotations/Architectural folder of the Metric Library.Number. The window tag used in this project is designed to display the type number. 14 Click Cancel. Notice that there is a window tag loaded and applied to windows. click Annotations  ➤ Dimensions  ➤ Linear.Imperial and click OK. click Annotations  ➤ Loaded Tags. 7 Click OK twice. click Duplicate. 4 Enter the name Linear . 12 On the Options Bar. 11 Select any window in the east or west wall. 6 In the Format dialog box: ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. Load a new window tag 10 In the Project Browser. notice that there is a Linear . 15 On the Settings menu.rvt. 18 In the Open dialog box. 3 In the Type Properties dialog box. 16 In the Tags dialog box. Notice that the windows on the east and west walls are tagged. 132 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . under Floor Plans. 17 Click Load. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. 5 Under Text. m_Settings-in progress. click Modify. scroll down to Windows. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and that the tag displays the window type number rather than the window instance number. 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Select Feet and fractional inches for Units.

24 On the Options Bar.Number as the assigned tag. scroll to Windows and notice that M_Window Tag . click the three left-most windows. and select the drop-down arrow that displays. Each Window Tag category has a different loaded tag: one displays the type value. In the final section. Temporary Dimensions. you modify the temporary dimension settings. In the second section. 22 Click OK. Under Category. you modify the detail level assignments. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. and Detail Level Options. M_Window Tag . 32 On the View Toolbar. 30 In the Type Selector.Number. A window instance tag displays on each selected window. you modify three settings that have a broad impact on the project. Modifying Project Settings | 133 .rvt. This indicates this tag is designed to display the window instance value rather than the type value. 27 Select the Window Tag category with the loaded tag. Unless overridden. select M_Window Tag . click Modify. notice that the label displays 1i. you specify the project units of measurements. This tag is used when tagging windows By Category.Number is now the assigned tag. select one of the window tags that displays the type value. 31 On the Design Bar. and Detail Level Options In this exercise. Temporary Dimensions. TIP Using the techniques learned in the previous steps. click Tag. . Specifying Units of Measurement. 28 Under Leader. 26 On the Design Bar. In the first section. you can have multiple views: one displaying window type tags and the other displaying window instance values. the other displays the instance value. verify that Create is clear. 23 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.Number. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. click Tag All Not Tagged. click M_Window Tag . 20 In the Tags dialog box. 29 On the east wall. Specifying Units of Measurement. Notice that both window tag types can coexist within the same view. click Save. clear Leader. The remaining untagged windows are tagged by instance value. 21 Under Loaded Tags. m_Settings-in progress. and click OK.Number. notice Window Tags appears twice.In the preview image. 19 Click Open. click 33 On the File menu. Leave M_Window Tag . 34 Proceed to the next exercise. 25 On the left side of the north wall. dimension values display using this setting. Notice that you can choose between the two window tag types loaded into this project.

click the default value for Format. 8 Under Walls. click Detail Level. you use the arrows between the columns to move view scales from one detail level to another. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. 11 Between the columns Coarse and Medium. Notice the 1 : 50 view scale moved to the Medium column. You do not select a view scale to move it. Organize the Project Browser by views 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all). you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. 13 On the File menu. 6 Click OK. select Faces. dimensions use these project settings. click . click the Training Files icon. In this project. click the default value for Format. These drawings and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. 3 In the Format dialog box. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. select 0 decimal places for Rounding. TIP You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties dialog box. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify how the Project Browser groups and sorts. click Project Units. you modify the Project Browser organization and create new methods of grouping and sorting the views and sheets. Unless overridden. Open c_Project_Browser. 5 In the Format dialog box. In this table. 2 In the Project Units dialog box. click Save. and expand 3D Views. expand Floor Plans. click Close. 9 Under Doors and Windows. under Area. the detail level is specified automatically according to the arrangement in the table. click Temporary Dimensions. and click OK. The view scale moves either from the bottom or the top of the column based on the direction. temporary dimensions now snap to the wall faces and to the door and window openings. 134 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . select To the nearest 100 for Rounding. When you create a new view and specify its view scale. In this exercise. Modifications to area rounding are displayed in schedules and area tags. Specify temporary dimension properties 7 On the Settings menu. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Specify detail levels 10 On the Settings menu. 14 On the File menu. Any new view created using this scale is automatically assigned the detail level Medium. Modifying Project Browser Organization In a typical project.rvt from the Common folder. In order to organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables.Set units of measurement 1 On the Settings menu. select Openings. Modifying Project Browser Organization. 4 In the Project Units dialog box. click Open. under Length. 12 Click OK. and click OK. and click OK. select meters squared for Unit suffix.

click Browser Organization. and notice that each is grouped by discipline. On the Project Browser. notice that Views are grouped based on Phase. 8 Select Phase. and click OK. 9 In the Browser Organization dialog box. 14 In the Project Browser. 12 Click the Sheets tab. select Type/Discipline. click Browser Organization. expand each sheet set. 2 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Settings menu.Phase 1-Structure East Wing . and click OK.Phase 3-Structure Completed Project-Structure Completed Structure w/ Roof&Floors Completed Project Each of the 3D views varies by phase and discipline. 3 Open each of the 3D views in the following order. Organize Project Browser by sheets 11 On the Settings menu. expand both the Architectural and Structural views. Modifying Project Settings | 135 . under Sheets. 6 In the Project Browser. select Discipline.Phase 2-Structure West Wing . In the Project Browser. and click OK. and notice the progression of each view: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Main Bldg . expand Sheets (all). Notice that the sheets are listed alphanumerically based on the sheet number. click Browser Organization. 10 In the Project Browser. 5 On the Views tab. and click Apply.Notice that the views are listed alphabetically. notice that Views are divided into Architectural and Structural disciplines. 13 Select Sheet Prefix. expand each view type. 7 On the Settings menu.

levels. 18 In the Browser Organization Properties dialog box. expand Complete. and click OK. you modified various project settings that affect project appearance and organization. and click New. By saving these settings as a template and using it throughout the office. click the Folders tab. You can save Project Browser organization schemes. you maintain consistent standards and reduce the amount of repetitive work. enter a unique file name. click Browser Organization. The lesson begins with choosing the right base template and progresses through many of the most common modifications that you would consider in order to make a template unique to your situation. You can also save these settings in a template file. 22 On the File menu. the project template is used to provide the initial project settings such as materials. and view names. All the settings that you changed in this lesson are saved with the project. and Discipline. In the lesson that follows. 20 In the Browser Organization dialog box. Proceed to the next lesson. View Type (Family and Type). It is mostly conceptual and designed as a road map with options for your consideration. Creating an Office Template In this lesson. and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Group by: Phase Then by: Family and Type Then by: Discipline 19 Click OK. navigate to your preferred directory. select Phase/Type/Discipline as the current browser organization. under Views. In this lesson. 136 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . you create an office template. 17 Enter Phase/Type/Discipline. dimensions styles. named print settings. and render scenes in a template. 16 Click the Views tab. and click OK. you may decide to modify one or more of these templates to the specific needs of your company. A well designed template will ensure office standards are maintained and will reduce repetitive work. 21 In the Project Browser. When you create new projects. Although Revit Building provides many templates to choose from. Creating an Office Template. expand 3D Views.Create a new browser organization name 15 On the Settings menu. and click OK. If you want to save this file. click Close. This lesson is intended to provide you with a blueprint of how to create your office template. Notice that the Project Browser has reorganized all the views within this project according to Phase. and expand both Architectural and Structural. you create a Revit Building template file and set it as your default template.

click Browse. Whenever you create a new project or template. 8 In the Project Browser. If you want to use a template other than the default. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. you select the starting point for your office template. 3 Under Template File. Modifying Project Settings In this exercise. structural or construction. navigate throughout the various views and schedules. drag a zoom region around the level heads. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. in the drawing area. you can create the materials commonly used in most projects. 13 Select the default template. 2 In the New Project dialog box. click Zoom  ➤ Zoom in Region and. Notice there are a number of different templates to choose from. 14 Click Open. expand Elevations. for instance. 11 Under Create New. Modifying Project Settings. 4 Select the Construction-DefaultMetric. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. each is modified in a way to make it useful to the applicable industry. For example.rte template. 9 On the File menu. 10 On the File menu. close them. such as the structural template. Notice that the construction template is more complex than the default template. click Close. 6 In the Project Browser. If you have additional projects open. Review existing templates 1 On the File menu. For example. you can select an existing template or begin the project with no template. Other templates. you modify the project settings for your new template. Even if you choose not to base that project on a template. and double-click North. the same rules apply. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to other templates. but the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of the structural tools. Notice that there are more predefined levels than you normally see in the default template. and click OK. 12 Under Template File. are simple in respect to the predefined views and schedules. You can use an existing template as the baseline or use no template at all. and click Open. 5 Click OK. when you create a new project. In that case. select Project for Create new. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. click New  ➤ Project. These settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project.Choosing the Base Template In this exercise. click New ➤ Project. certain baseline settings are still assigned to the new project. 7 On the View menu. a group of settings are used to specify the project environment. When you create a new template based on an existing template. You should choose the option that will help you develop the best template with the least amount of work. you can establish the settings that are common to most projects. When you create the material. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. Other than the default template. you can select it now. Creating an Office Template | 137 . click Browse. select Project Template. expand Views. In order to maintain office standards and reduce rework. The template selection may vary depending on your installation.

weights. 7 Create new fill patterns as needed. If there are materials that are commonly used within your office or industry. you may want to specify their appearance when rendered. see the previous lesson. Create and modify materials 1 On the Settings menu. rotate. When you save a new AccuRender material designed to be used in an office template. 6 Scroll through the list of model and drafting patterns. You may want to save the material to a library located on a network path. If you create or modify new materials. and create the AccuRender material. and patterns Annotations Project units Temporary dimensions Detail levels Project Browser organization In addition to the list above. you modify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Materials Fill patterns Object styles Line styles.In this exercise. The specifics regarding each of these are addressed at the end of this exercise. create and modify them as needed. 8 Click OK when finished. 3 Under AccuRender. You may want to rename or modify some of the existing materials. there are additional commands under the Settings menu that allow modifications that can be saved in a template. click Materials. and materials for different categories and subcategories of components or imported objects. For more details on modifying these settings. RELATED See Modifying System Settings for more information on creating new AccuRender materials. You are merely pointed to each area where you can adapt the template to your needs. 4 Click OK twice to close the Material Library and Materials dialog boxes. Specify object styles 9 On the Settings menu. you can set line weights. If there are custom AccuRender materials that you want to add to the template. Choose the appropriate option. be aware that access to the original material library may be necessary at some point. click Fill Patterns. Modifying System Settings or refer to the Help documentation. click Object Styles. line patterns. 2 Scroll down the Name list. 138 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . You can also dimension to model pattern lines. Observe the materials that are already defined. line colors. You can do this by setting the AccuRender Texture. click to access the AccuRender Material Library. specific modifications are not dictated. or modify existing patterns. During this exercise. you can do so by going to the Material menu and selecting New. You can align. RELATED See Modifying Project Settings for more information on creating new fill patterns. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. Create and modify fill patterns 5 On the Settings menu. TIP Drafting patterns represent materials in symbolic form. In the Object Styles dialog box. and move model patterns.

10 Click the Model Objects tab. 15 Click OK to close the Object Styles dialog box. 25 Modify existing line weights as needed.TIP When the material of a component is set to by category. 13 Click the Annotation Objects tab. 33 Click OK. or line pattern as needed. and create new subcategories as needed. Modify line weights 20 On the Settings menu. select it. click Line Patterns. 18 If necessary. You can define the widths of 16 different pens for six different drawing scales. In the dialog box. 26 Click the Annotation Line Weights tab. click Line Styles. The Perspective Line Weights tab controls the line width of objects such as walls and windows in perspective views. and scroll through the list of categories. 14 Modify categories. one for perspective model line styles. 11 Modify the properties of any existing categories as needed. 12 If necessary. 31 To modify a line pattern. create new line subcategories. 30 Scroll through the list of line patterns. Modify line patterns 29 On the Settings menu. and one for annotation symbol line styles. it adopts the material assigned to its object styles category. 28 Click OK. The Line Weights command controls the display of line widths for each scale of a view. 17 For existing line categories. 23 Add and delete view scales as needed. click Line Weights. Annotation line widths are independent of the view scale. 21 Click the Model Line Weights tab. The Model Line Weights tab controls the line width of modeling components. Creating an Office Template | 139 . 19 Click OK. The widths are dependent on the scale of the design. 22 Modify existing line weights as needed. Modify line styles 16 On the Settings menu. line color. such as walls and windows in orthographic views. there are three tabs: one for model component line styles. 32 Add and delete line patterns as needed. 24 Click the Perspective Line Weights tab. such as section lines and dimension lines. modify the line weight. create new subcategories. and click Edit. The Annotation Line Weights tab controls the line width of annotation symbols. 27 Modify existing line weights as needed. You can add and delete view scales.

39 Click OK. click Load. click Format. name the style. 50 After you have loaded the necessary tags. click Annotations ➤ Arrowheads. 55 Repeat the previous two steps for the Area. To see the details of a particular style. click Duplicate. and Angle settings. Linear. and notice the list of existing arrowhead styles. and click OK. 35 Select the Type drop-down list. 45 Click OK. when you add a door with the tag option selected. On the Settings menu. click Annotations  ➤ Dimensions  ➤ Radial. 37 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing arrowhead. click Annotations  ➤ Loaded Tags. and dimensions. Notice many categories do not have loaded tags. 36 Modify the properties of existing arrowhead styles if necessary. click Duplicate. you can override the assignment by selecting a different tag from the drop-down list. 38 If you need to create a new arrowhead style. ■ ■ On the Settings menu. 57 Click OK. In the Tags dialog box.Modify arrowheads 34 On the Settings menu. 53 Modify the unit settings if necessary. and specify the properties. and notice the list of existing linear dimension styles. For example. Specify project units 51 On the Settings menu. 52 Under Length. Volume. 46 Repeat the previous five steps for angular and radial dimensions. To see the details of a particular style. name the style. 44 If you need to create a new linear dimension style. angular. 41 Select the Type drop-down list. click Project Units. 42 Modify the properties of existing linear dimension styles if necessary. Modify Dimension Styles 40 On the Settings menu. The tag assignments in this dialog box dictate the default tag for each category. 49 To load new annotation tags. The arrowheads configured within this dialog box can be applied to text notes. 56 Specify the Slope option. and specify the properties. 140 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . and choose a decimal symbol. 43 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing style. 48 Scroll through the list of loaded tags. click Annotations  ➤ Dimensions  ➤ Angular. make sure each category is assigned the desired tag. tags. and radial dimensions are modified separately. the last loaded tag becomes the default tag. You can have multiple tags loaded for any category. select it from this list. You can override tag assignment using the Type Selector. the door is tagged using the tag assigned to the Doors category in this dialog box. Modify loaded tags 47 On the Settings menu. select it from this list. 54 Click OK. click Annotations  ➤ Dimensions  ➤ Linear. When more than one tag has been loaded for a category.

click the arrows between columns. NOTE You cannot select specific scales in this dialog box. you may only want to add generically named settings that would be applicable to most projects. Specify detail levels 62 On the Settings menu. create new browser organization types. specify the default location for temporary dimensions. When you create a new view. For example. 69 Click the Sheets tab. In order to organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. 71 If necessary. You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties command. 72 Click OK. you can save rendered scene settings to a template. 67 Delete. click Browser Organization. 68 If necessary. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify the grouping and sorting within the Project Browser. In a typical project. To move the view scales. specify where you want the temporary dimensions to measure from by default. you can modify the location of temporary dimension witness lines. Modify project browser organization 65 On the Settings menu. or Edit existing organization types. Rename. 60 Under Doors and Windows. create new browser organization types. or Edit existing organization types. However. you may want to modify the browser organization settings within the template. The detail level is based on view scale. View scales are organized under the detail level headings Coarse. click Detail Level. If you routinely create the same documentation sets. RELATED For more information on modifying browser organization. 61 Click OK. and move view scales as needed. 59 Under Walls. 63 Review the table. you can move view scales from one detail level to another. there are several additional commands that control the project environment. Additional project settings 73 On the Settings menu. 70 Delete. the detail level of that view is automatically assigned using this table. or Fine. 64 Click OK. These views and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. 66 In the Browser Organization dialog box. Creating an Office Template | 141 . The view scales move from the lower-left to the upper-right and vice-versa. Using the arrows between the columns. click Temporary Dimensions.Specify temporary dimensions 58 On the Settings menu. you must decide if the time investment is offset later by the reduction in repetitive work. Although these settings can be saved within a template. In such a case. you should consider each carefully before applying changes to a template. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. Rename. TIP In the drawing area. click the Views tab. see Modifying Project Browser Organization. Medium.

titleblocks. Modify door type 142 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . Phases Project Phasing Area Settings Area Analysis View Templates This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. notice the list of doors already loaded. and graphic overrides applicable to most projects. select Edit/New. the section cut material. you may want to delete. and make modifications in each area as necessary. Goal: Load new door type Steps: In the Element Properties dialog box. In the steps that follow. It is important to understand that you should not load every conceivable family into a template file. 3 To modify. each component loaded will add to the length of the relative Type Selector list. do so before starting this exercise. and click OK. However. If necessary. See Modifying Views and View Templates. For example. Although the options are endless. modify. you would have to scroll through a lengthy list of windows every time you changed a window within a project. This could be useful for things such as hardware. it is not recommended because it would increase the file size significantly before the first component was added to the project. You can find additional information in Help. you can create and modify area schemes if there are default settings applicable to most projects. and the poche depth. select from the Options Bar. Use the table below as a checklist. you do both. 74 Proceed to the next exercise. Settings Menu Command Project Parameters Associated Tutorial Considerations This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. If you have not completed the previous exercise. you can set the default contour line interval. you can set up the phases. If necessary. 2 In the Type Selector. You may want to modify wall types to add a more diverse selection within the template. you can add project (and shared) parameters to a template. or use the Project Browser. you load and modify families or groups into the template started in the previous exercise. or modify a door. you may want to load families into the template to save time later or ensure consistency throughout the office. Use the instructions in the table below to load. and electrical fixtures. Obviously. create. You can do this in several ways: select a component type and click Properties. if you loaded every window type you could find. Navigate to the directory containing the door type. You can load any family or group into a template.Each of these areas are covered later in this lesson or in other tutorials. This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. you could load detail components. and in the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Load. furniture. If necessary. See Modifying Render Scene Settings Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings Render Scene If necessary. Each command is available on the Settings menu. In addition. or add to this selection. Site Settings If necessary. or electrical fixtures. You should think very carefully about what families or groups to load and modify within a template. See Setting up Shared and Project Parameters. Select it. you should only load components that tend to be used in every project and are not likely to change. Depending on the intended use of this template. Make modifications. phase filters. For example. or load a new door type. there are some important thoughts to consider. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups. you can move onto the next component type. click Door. This would be cumbersome and counterproductive. Links to associated tutorials are provided. Although this is possible. In the Element Properties dialog box. and click Open. create. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups In this exercise. Create and modify the view templates to control the appearance of default views. you can create scene settings and save them to the template. Load and modify families 1 Use the project started in the previous exercise. If this selection is satisfactory.

select Edit/New. Use Project Browser to modify families 7 In the Project Browser. click Load from Library. (The titleblock name may vary depending on the template you started with. Notice that each family category is listed. 4 Click OK. Creating an Office Template | 143 . expand Families.Goal: Create new door type Steps: In the Element Properties dialog box. Press ESC twice to return to the template. You can use the Project Browser to modify family types. and click OK. Loading from the library is the quickest when you know exactly what families you want to load. You may want to open other Design Bar tabs and make modifications to components not available on this tab. Notice that you have the option to Load Family or Load Group. and click OK. Click Duplicate. 6 On the File menu. and select the titleblock type. Modify type properties. Notice that there is a titleblock symbol loaded. 8 Expand Annotation Symbols.) 9 Expand the titleblock. Enter Name. You can also load families and groups from the File menu. 5 Repeat the process for any component type that you want to modify.

create. RELATED For more information. you create the views required for your template. Discipline. View Range. you will first modify view templates. View templates help standardize the look of all views by providing the initial settings for a view. To load a titleblock. In this exercise. load. 2 Select Architectural Plan for Name. and the visibility settings of categories and subcategories. You can use the Project Browser to delete a component from the project/template. In this exercise. In addition. These values represent the starting point for each plan view. This titleblock is currently part of the template. Notice it has Revit Building in the upper-right corner. or modify any component families or groups as necessary. and you noticed that each template had a unique set of predefined views. 144 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . In addition. and click Delete. . You may want to load a titleblock applicable to your office and then delete this titleblock.10 On the Options Bar. you can apply a view template to any view. see Creating a Titleblock Family. At any time. you create and apply the underlying view templates that control their initial appearance. click 11 Click <<Preview. 12 Click OK. Modifying Views and View Templates. right-click the component. Modifying Views and View Templates At the beginning of this lesson. To do so. you can apply a template to an existing view at any time using the Apply View Template command. you created new projects using different templates. The view inherits view properties such as View Scale. Detail Level. Create and modify view templates 1 On the Settings menu. click Load. 13 Using any of the techniques learned in previous steps. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. click View Templates. These settings are applied when you create a new plan view by adding a new level. and then create new views that will automatically use those templates.

or delete this view. review the floor plans. the view properties of the target view are instantly reset to match those of the template. The associated floor plan will use the Architectural Plan view template to set its initial view properties. 13 On the View menu. After applying the template. expand Floor Plans. 11 Click Apply. Make sure you are still in the South Elevation view. This options means that every time a new plan view is created. click Apply View Template. rename or duplicate the view template and make modifications. 17 If you made modifications to the Site Plan template. 22 In the Project Browser. open the view from the Project Browser. in the context menu. Blue level heads have associated plan views. under Floor Plans. right-click Level 1. duplicate. There is no limit to the number of times you can apply a view template to a view. NOTE Do not select Apply automatically to new views of same type. In addition. under Floor Plans. 26 Rename and reposition the level as needed. 5 Repeat the steps above for each of the view templates in the Name drop-down list. 9 Select the Architectural Plan template. click Apply. you reduce rework and increase consistency across projects. under Floor Plans. Notice the level names. the view is not linked to the template in any way. and click OK. Upon the application of the view template. and then click OK. and. Keep in mind that these settings are the default settings for this view type. double-click South. notice that you have the option to rename. 24 In the Options Bar. double-click Level 2. under Floor Plans. you can rename this view according to your preference. ceiling plans. 21 In the Project Browser. click Level from the Basics tab of the Design Bar. You can also duplicate or delete the view. or delete them as needed. 3 Specify each value according to your needs. select Make Plan View. and apply the appropriate template. it will use this view template to set the initial view properties. If necessary. 4 If necessary. 10 Select Apply automatically to new views of same type. Rename. there is no limit to the number of view templates that you can apply.By modifying the view templates according to your specific needs. 6 Click OK. Create and modify views 19 In the Project Browser. Creating an Office Template | 145 . Black level heads have no associated views. 23 To add additional levels to the template. Apply view templates 7 In the Project Browser. duplicate. This would result in the Site Plan view template becoming the default template for all new plan views. select Site Plan. click Apply View Template. 16 On the View menu. double-click Site. 25 Add the new level within the elevation view. 12 In the Project Browser. expand Views. under Elevations. 14 Select the Architectural Plan template. 18 If you modified any other view templates. Subsequent modifications to the view template do not affect any current views unless you reapply the view template. click Apply View Template. Applying a view template to a view is a one-time action. and elevations. and click OK. 15 In the Project Browser. 20 In the Project Browser. 27 Recreate additional levels as needed. 8 On the View menu. review the existing floor plans. and double-click Level 1. click Apply.

31 Rename the 3D View. On the Filter tab. You can use this tool. select the category type. click . Add sheets to the template 42 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 39 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. 38 If you want to add schedules to your template. You can add schedules to a template. select and order required fields. The view is listed in the Project Browser under Views  ➤ 3D Views. On the Formatting tab. assign filters. modify settings as needed.Create 3D views 28 To add 3D views to the template. modify settings as needed. Create and modify schedules 37 On the View tab of the Design Bar. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. click Sheet. 34 Click the arrow on the right side of the Dynamic View dialog box. On the Appearance tab. and click OK. click 29 In the Project Browser. You are prompted to select a titleblock. 32 To create additional 3D views. expand 3D Views. To do so. 36 To save the view. on the View toolbar. supply a view name. Dynamically Modify View. This can save significant time and ensure office standards are maintained. click . right-click {3D}. If you have already loaded your office titleblocks into the template. you may want to modify the view properties of any new views. If necessary. and click View Properties. to orient and save the view. 146 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . and select Rename. make the following modifications as needed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. and click OK. 35 You can use Orient to a Direction or Orient to a View to set the camera location and target. and click OK. 40 Click OK. select one. on the View toolbar. under 3D Views. 30 In the Project Browser. 41 Repeat the steps above for each schedule type you add to the template. click Schedule/Quantities. click 33 On the View toolbar. You may want to consider adding the schedules that you use most often. and modify their properties accordingly. go to the View menu. modify settings as needed.

which is included on the Revit Building CD. Alpha Channel: Lets you use the image's alpha channel (embedded pixel-by-pixel masking information). Creating an Office Template | 147 . jpeg. choose the appropriate season for plant rendering. exterior-default. 2 Color Gradient: Lets you vary the color between two selected colors. or targa. 10 Under Plant Season.TIP You can add sheets to the template and delete the titleblock. click Environment. and click Rename. for example. ■ ■ ■ 6 Specify the Advanced features: TIP As you select options. Ground Plane: Adds an infinite plane to your rendering. 5 Specify the background color. and provide a name for the scene. You can still add views to the sheet. 45 Create new sheets as needed. if one exists. and then click OK. Modifying Render Scene Settings You can create interior and exterior scene settings and save them within the template. Choose from bitmap. and click New  ➤ Place Titleblock. Different seasons directly affect any AccuRender plants in the view. Subsequent sheets are numbered consecutively based on the previous sheet. select the titleblock and delete it. To do so. 4 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. 7 Click OK. if not. 8 Under Scene Settings. 9 Specify the date and time. TIP You can drag and drop views directly from the Project Browser onto the sheet. for example. and changes the color automatically depending on the sun and sky conditions. 43 Add views to the sheet by selecting Add View from the View tab of the Design Bar. Solid Color: Specifies a single color that appears behind your rendering. and click OK. ■ Automatic Sky: Treats the background as a sky. a deciduous tree in summer appears in full bloom with leaves. it is completely bare. 46 Proceed to the next exercise. right-click the sheet in the Project Browser. Be sure that you have installed this software. click Render Scene. tiff. select Exterior. while in winter. select the default titleblock. After the sheet is created. Create and modify an exterior scene 1 On the Settings menu. By adding a default interior and exterior rendered scene setting to the template. you can install AccuRender by running the install program on the Revit Building CD. and a Clouds tab appears. 3 Color Gradient: Lets you vary the color between three selected colors. ■ ■ ■ ■ You can also save and load environmental settings. 44 To rename or renumber the sheet. select the Clouds option. settings. and colors. under Scene Settings. place. 3 Click OK. 2 Under Type. you could render basic scenes much faster and with greater consistency without the need to spend time modifying these settings. go to the View menu. Background images are available from the AccuRender software. Modifying Render Scene Settings. ■ Background Image: Lets you map images to your background. Clouds: Adds procedurally generated clouds to the background. for example. Haze: Simulates effects from slight “depth cues” to dense fog. the relevant tab appears. To later add a titleblock to a sheet. click Sun.

Modifying Import/Export Settings In this exercise. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. Antialiasing is a process in which more than one ray is shot for each pixel in an attempt to better resolve the value of the pixel. however. Medium. These scenes are now part of the template and will provide users with two basic rendering scenes. ■ ■ ■ Create and modify an interior scene 14 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. Higher values cause longer rendering times. Select Recalc Radiosity Lights to recalculate the shadows cast during the radiosity preprocess. 15 Provide a name for the new interior scene. click New. Increasing the antialiasing level adds considerable rendering time. This works on opaque faces only.11 Specify Culling options: ■ Select Back Face Culling to eliminate rendering on model faces that do not face the camera eye. The number of bounces determines how many levels of reflections or transparencies are permitted. Good. ■ Select Soft Shadows to produce more realistic shadow edges. Better. Radiosity quality affects the relative coarseness of the mesh and the amount of time to process the solution. such as jaggy shadows or light leaks. 148 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . Modify export layers for DWG and DXF 1 On the File menu. This is a very time consuming operation but. Best is the slowest. for example Interior . Specify the Color Bleeding value: This controls the color saturation of reflected light. 18 Proceed to the next exercise. Back face culling decreases rendering time and space. Modifying Import/Export Settings. but provides the highest quality. you modify the export layer settings for DWG/DXF and DGN. ■ Set values for Reflection and Transparency bounces.Default. ■ Specify the Solution Goal: This limits the radiosity calculation to a certain number of steps. When you import a DWG or DXF file. 16 Repeat the steps you performed when creating an exterior scene. ■ 13 Specify Raytrace Settings: ■ Select Quality: Click the Quality drop-down list to choose an antialiasing option: Draft. Good. Meaningful values are between 0 and 1. Select Blurry Transparency to affect the look of material seen behind glass. Shadows based on the size of the light source are calculated. Medium. Best. and click OK. AccuRender always processes transparent faces. Draft provides the lowest quality and fastest speed. This setting is effective for region raytraces. ■ 12 Specify the Radiosity Settings: ■ Select Quality: Click the Quality drop-down list to choose an option: Draft. You then set the import line weights for DWG/DXF. when used in conjunction with high antialiasing and soft shadows it can produce very high quality renderings with fewer radiosity artifacts. Setting the quality to Better or Best reduces meshing artifacts. Higher values cause the color of reflected light to more closely approximate the color of the reflecting surface. 17 Click OK when finished. Select View Culling to eliminate rendering model faces that lie outside the area being raytraced. Better. the quality also is lower. Best. This value is used both for the initial number of steps when you first use the Radiate command and for any subsequent calculation by clicking Continue from the Options Bar. Select Blurry Reflections to affect the look of reflections in glass. click Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DWG/DXF. but also increases the solution time.

you can skip this exercise and move onto the last exercise of this lesson. The layer mapping files reside in the Data folder of the Revit Building program installation directory. name the file. and so on. When scheduling. select Save As. match the pen (DWG/DXF Color Number) to the appropriate line weight. 8 In the dialog box. and click Save. These settings are retained within the project template. The layer names are stored in a text file (either exportlayers. you can define additional parameters that are not included in either the pre-defined instance and type parameters within family components or within the project template. therefore.txt for AutoCAD or exportlayersdgn. 5 For each category. and the creation of multi-category tags and schedules. you do not need to worry about where the text file is saved. If you do not need to make changes to shared or project parameters. name the file. Their definitions are stored in an external file ensuring consistency across families and projects. You can import pen numbers from a DWG or DXF file and map them to a Revit Building line weight. Project Parameters are those parameters (either instance or type) that are used within a single project for the purposes of scheduling information specific to that project. select Save As. and so on. and then are exported along with your project into the appropriate CAD program. name the file. for example. 2 For each category. Set as many pen-line weight mappings as desired. Modify export layers for DGN 4 On the File menu. Using Shared Parameters.The Export Layers command maps Revit Building categories and subcategories to specific layer names that are available after exporting to other CAD programs. and they become the set mappings for the project. you could use Shared Parameters to add specific parameters to an existing family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not initially present by default. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Layer Name and Color ID Cut Layer Name and Color ID 3 If you modified the settings in this dialog. doors. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters. When you create a multi-category schedule. You can save these mappings to a text file. and click Save. TIP Color ID in the Export Layers dialog box corresponds to an AutoCAD or MicroStation color ID. see Scheduling Shared Parameters or Scheduling Project Parameters. click Import/Export Settings ➤ Import Line Weights DWG/DXF. In this exercise. Modify import line weights 7 On the File menu. project parameters. you continue the refinement of the template by setting up shared parameters. For example. 9 Select Save As. If you are unfamiliar with shared parameters. project parameters. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Level Number and Color ID Cut Level Number and Color ID 6 If you modified the settings in this dialog. Creating an Office Template | 149 . and related multi-category tags and schedules. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created.txt for MicroStation). Multi-Category Tags employ Shared Parameters to permit tagging of any family component regardless of category. detailed instructions are not supplied since each office has a unique set of needs. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters In this exercise. Creating Named Print Settings. Their values may also be aggregated and reported using multi-category schedules. and they cannot be used to tag objects (as with Shared Parameters). and click Save. click Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DGN. Revit Building presets the layer names to American Institute of Architects (AIA) industry standards. windows. Layer name corresponds to level name for MicroStation. it lists components regardless of category by using an external parameter as a filter. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. You can add these shared parameters to any family regardless of category. you normally schedule a single category: rooms. Pen Number 1 to Line Weight Number 1. They cannot be shared with other projects. Pen Number 2 to Line Weight Number 2. When you import a DWG or DXF file.

10 Click OK. select Project parameter. If this template will be used by multiple people within an office. If a file already exists. 2 Click Create. or use the Help documentation for assistance. 12 Click OK when you have finished creating shared parameters. click Shared Parameters. and click OK when finished. 21 Click OK. and assign which categories this parameter applies to. and click Open. 3 Name and save the file. select the tag. 23 To add a shared project parameter. The tag is now part of the template. select a group that you want to add parameters to. click Add. 25 Click OK. 11 For each parameter group. 18 Under Type. click Load from Library  ➤ Load Family. click New. 14 Click Add. After the file is named. click Project Parameters. 17 Under Discipline. 31 Navigate to the directory. 5 Enter the group name. add required parameters. and specify the Type. 8 Under Parameters. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. you can create a list of parameters. 28 Add shared project parameters as needed. select a parameter discipline type. click New. 30 On the File menu.Set up shared parameters 1 On the File menu. This allows you to name the external parameter file. and select Shared Parameter. 150 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . NOTE This procedure is for creating a new shared parameter file. Create and load multi-category tags 29 Create required multi-category tags in the Family Editor. 4 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog box. under Groups. 6 Create as many groups as needed. select a parameter value type. and choose a shared parameter. and click OK. you can browse to that file and modify it as needed. you can load them into the template. Set up project parameters 13 On the Settings menu. 7 Under Parameter group. 27 Click OK. see the tutorial referenced in the introduction of this exercise. For information on creating multi-category tags. you can begin creating parameter groups. 24 Click Select. For each parameter group. 19 Choose whether the parameter is stored by instance or type. you may want to save the file to a network location. 16 Under Name. 26 Choose whether you want the shared parameter to be an instance or a type parameter. After you have created the multi-category tags within the Family Editor. 22 Add project parameters as needed. 20 Select the element categories this parameter applies to. 9 Name the Parameter. enter a parameter name.

and print. click Setup. click Print. 34 Under Name. The only remaining task is to save it. If you need to share this file with others. 2 Under Name. select Template Files (*. click Schedule/Quantities. you may find it beneficial to add named print settings to the template. 14 Under Save as type. For each printer. you should save it to a network path. click Save.Create multi-category schedules 32 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. click OK. Creating Named Print Settings. 36 When you have completed the schedule. 10 Repeat these steps as needed. you can set options such as sheet sizes. you create named print settings. You can also create named settings for printing to DWF and to a PDF writer. and create new settings for this printer. Save the template 12 On the File menu. 35 Create the schedule as you did in the previous exercise. enter a name for the print setting and click OK. 3 Under Settings. and click Save. TIP You can also create named settings for your DWF and PDF writer. Create named print settings 1 On the File menu. make minor modifications if necessary. Creating Named Print Settings In this exercise. 8 Click OK when you have finished creating named settings for this printer. 37 Create additional multi-category schedules as needed. 4 Click Save As. 7 If you want to have multiple settings for this printer. 33 Select <Multi-Category> for Category. This is especially true if you have numerous printers in a large networked office. 11 Click OK when finished. Depending on your office environment. click Setup. 15 Name the template. 9 In the Print dialog box. and the percent of actual size. select the first printer for which you want to create named settings. 13 Navigate to the directory where you want to save the template. paper placement. save the file as a template. 5 In the New dialog box. enter a name for the schedule. and make it your default template file. Creating an Office Template | 151 . 6 Modify the printer settings. click New. Your template is complete.rte). By creating named settings within the template. and create additional settings as needed. select a different printer. you need only select a setting. Notice that the shared parameters created in previous steps are available within the list of available fields. 38 Proceed to the final exercise. you can select the printer for each set of named settings within the Print Setup dialog box. By going first to the Print command.

you could delete the model geometry and save the empty project as a template file. 23 Navigate to the template location. 18 Select the template. 24 Click OK. In addition. you modified settings. click Options. In addition. You can also set this template as your default template. loaded components. click Browse. go to the File menu. select it. In this lesson. 21 Click the File Locations tab. The changes you made to the template are now the starting point for this project. TIP There are other ways you can create a template. and click Open. If you have a project. and click New  ➤ Project. and click Open. Set the template as your default template file 20 On the Settings menu. 17 Select Browse. 22 Next to Default template file. 152 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . you can use the Transfer Project Standards tool to move standards from one project to another. you significantly reduce the amount of repetitive work that would be done by each employee for each project.Use the template 16 To use the template. By investing the time to individualize your template. you ensure that office standards are maintained. and saved them to a template. and navigate to the location where you saved the template. This can provide a good starting point for a template. 19 Click OK.

You can also create ceilings by sketching them.Ceilings 4 In this tutorial. you learn how to create automatic ceilings in Revit Building. see the online Help. You learn how to add ceilings by selecting room boundaries to automatically place the type of ceiling that you select. You also learn how to change the surface pattern of a ceiling grid. and how to create a compound ceiling. 153 . For more information.

expand Views (all). You can create automatic ceilings in an RCP (reflected ceiling plan) view of the building model. you can change the surface pattern of the ceiling grids. Create automatic ceilings 1 In the Project Browser. The ceiling is displayed. click Ceiling. You also learn how to create and add a compound ceiling to the building model. when the room boundary highlights. you learn how to create ceilings with the AutoCeiling command. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. 3 In the Type Selector. You add four different types of ceilings. Open c_Ceiling. After you add ceilings to the model. click Open. and double-click Level 1. click the Training Files icon. 4 Move your cursor into the upper center room and. select it. In the left pane of the Open dialog box.rvt located in the Common folder. select Basic Ceiling : 600 x 1200mm grid. you learn how to add ceilings to an RCP view of a simple building model. expand Ceiling Plans.Creating Ceilings In this lesson. and then change the surface pattern of one of the ceiling grids. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 154 | Chapter 4 Ceilings . Creating Automatic Ceilings In this exercise.

click in the Material type parameter Value field. under Name. 16 In the Type Properties dialog box. click . select Finishes . and click OK.Wood Diagonal Strips 150mm. 10 On the Options Bar. 17 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK. when the room boundary highlights. it displays in the Type Selector. 12 In the Type Properties dialog box. select it. Change the ceiling grid surface pattern of room on the left 8 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Creating Ceilings | 155 . NOTE You select one of the grids or the entire ceiling using the TAB key. click Duplicate. 7 Select the room on the left and the room on the right. under Materials and Finishes. When selected. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box.Interior . select Basic Ceiling : 600 x 600mm grid. enter Wood Diagonal Strips 150mm. The new ceiling material is applied to the ceiling. click OK. 14 In the Type Properties dialog box. 15 In the Materials dialog box. click OK.5 Select the lower center room and. and then click . 9 Select the 600 x 600mm ceiling grid located in the room on the left. click Edit/New. 13 In the Name dialog box. 6 In the Type Selector.

you change the project to Metric. click the Training Files icon. and double-click First Floor. Open c_Condominium. expand Views (all). Create a new ceiling type 1 In the Project Browser. add layers of material to the ceiling type. and save the exercise file with a unique name.18 If you want to save your changes. expand Ceiling Plans. 156 | Chapter 4 Ceilings . click Save As. and then add the ceiling to the building model. Close the exercise file without saving your changes. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. The original project units are imperial. In the steps that follow. you learn how to create a compound ceiling. Creating Compound Ceilings In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click Open. NOTE This common dataset is used in several imperial and metric datasets.rvt located in the Common folder. You create a new ceiling type. on the File menu.

10 In the Type Properties dialog box. enter 20 mm Layer 4: Core Boundary Layer 5: Structure [1]. under Layers. 5 In the Project Units dialog box. and click OK. enter 12 mm 16 Click OK. 14 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. 9 In the Element Properties dialog box. select Finishes . click OK. select Compound Ceiling: Ceiling 1. 17 In the Type Properties dialog box. under Construction. under Material. enter 45 mm Layer 3: Structure [1]. click Edit/New. select Metal . 3 In the Project Units dialog box. 15 Define the five layers as follows and in the following order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Layer 1: Core Boundary Layer 2: Structure [1]. click Duplicate. 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Ceiling. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. 7 In the Type Selector. and click OK. click Project Units. 8 On the Options Bar. click OK. under Thickness.Interior . specify Millimeters for units.Specify metric project units 2 On the Settings menu. 4 In the Format dialog box.Furring. Creating Ceilings | 157 . click the format button for length.Cold Rolled Channel. click Insert twice to add two new layers. click Preview to display the current layers. enter Gypsum board on metal furring. 12 In the Type Properties dialog box. click OK. 11 In the Name dialog box. under Thickness. under Thickness.Gypsum Wall Board. select Metal . 13 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. under Material. click . Add the compound ceiling 19 Move your cursor into the common area of the model and click to insert the Gypsum board on metal furring channels ceiling. under Material. click Edit for the Structure type parameter value.

21 On the View Control Bar. 22 The compound ceiling is visible in the section view of the first floor. on the File menu. expand Sections (Type 1).View the compound ceiling in a section view 20 In the Project Browser under Views (all). TIP You can use the zoom commands to zoom into the ceiling. 23 If you want to save your changes. Close the exercise file without saving your changes. You can also apply thin lines from the View menu. click Save As. and double-click Section 1. and click Fine. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click the Detail Level control. 158 | Chapter 4 Ceilings .

In the exercises that follow. roof. 159 . In addition. you cut floor and ceiling openings that expose the stairs beneath them. You can cut vertically through a selected floor. or ceiling. you create an opening for an existing dormer and cut two openings in the roof in order to visualize the difference between a perpendicular and a vertical cut. floor. When creating a hosted opening.Openings 5 You can cut openings through roofs. and you can create an opening in a roof specifically for a dormer. or ceilings using the Opening command. or ceiling. you have the option to cut perpendicularly through the face of a roof. floors.

To use the Opening tool to cut a dormer opening. click the Training Files icon.Cutting Roof Openings In this lesson.rvt located in the Metric folder. the project must have an existing dormer. the view range of a wireframe view was modified to display the entire dormer roof. and you should create a view where you can see the dormer geometry. click Open. you create an opening for an existing dormer and cut two openings in the roof in order to visualize the difference between a perpendicular and vertical cut. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Open the file m_Cutting_Openings. 160 | Chapter 5 Openings . notice the existing dormer. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. In this case. View current dormer construction 1 In the current 3D View. Cutting a Dormer Opening in a Roof In this exercise. you cut an opening in a roof with an existing dormer. This allows you to precisely define the borders of the opening.

The camera is located in the attic and is pointing to the dormer interior. This view has been set up specifically for the dormer. click to select it. right-click the Design Bar. Select the main roof to be cut. NOTE If the Modelling tab of the Design Bar is not active. expand 3D Views. and double-click Roof . expand Views (all). select Pick a roof to be cut by a dormer opening. Notice no opening exists in the roof for the dormer. The view range was modified so the cut plane captured the entire dormer. The dormer windows are above the roof so they do not display. Cutting Roof Openings | 161 . This is an interior 3D view. and click OK. and double-click Attic View.2 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). Create the dormer opening 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. WARNING Do not select the dormer roof. expand Floor Plans. and. You need to cut an opening in the roof to accommodate the dormer. 3 In the Project Browser. when the edges of the roof highlight. 5 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box.Dormer. 6 Move the cursor over the main roof. The display is wireframe so each dormer component can be seen and selected when defining the borders of the opening. and click Modelling. click Opening.

a side face of a wall. 162 | Chapter 5 Openings . a bottom face of a floor. and select the exterior face of the three walls that define the dormer. 8 Zoom in around the dormer. Valid boundaries are a joined roof or its bottom face. you define the boundary of the dormer opening. select it. 7 Place the cursor over the dormer.Next. and. or a model line on the face of the roof to be cut. an edge of the roof to be cut. when it highlights. Sketch lines display along the border between the dormer roof and the selected roof.

the gaps in the bottom sketch line need to be closed. 14 In the Project Browser. 9 On the Design Bar. and the horizontal line on the bottom dormer wall does not extend to the corners. Although the overlapping lines are not a problem. 10 Select the lower sketch line. double-click Attic View. 12 On the Design Bar.Notice the sketch lines overlap in places. Cutting Roof Openings | 163 . and notice the drag controls on each end. click Finish Boundary. under 3D Views. 11 Drag each control to the corner until it intersects with the vertical sketch line on that side. click Modify. The dormer opening in the roof is apparent. 13 Zoom out to see the entire plan view.

2 Using the spin function. click Close.15 On the File menu. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click . click Open. spin the model around so that you can see the side of the roof without the dormer. select Save As from the File menu. Open the file m_Cutting_Openings. you create a roof opening that is perpendicular to the roof face. Creating a Perpendicular Roof Opening In this exercise. 164 | Chapter 5 Openings . NOTE If you want to save this file. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. click the Training Files icon.rvt located in the Metric folder. Create a perpendicular opening 1 On the View toolbar.

4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Cutting Roof Openings | 165 . TIP If the Modelling tab of the Design Bar is not active. when it highlights. click Modify. right-click the Design Bar. select Pick a face of a roof. 6 Move the cursor over the exterior face of the main roof. and click Modelling. the opening on the left is cut perpendicular to the face. select it. floor. The opening on the right is cut vertically. 7 On the Options Bar. and. which is the side of the roof without a dormer. In the following illustration. or ceiling and cut perpendicular to face. 5 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box. click . click Opening. and click OK.3 On the Design Bar. 8 Sketch a rectangle in the center of the roof.

166 | Chapter 5 Openings . click Finish Sketch. and.9 On the Design Bar. 10 Place the cursor over the edge of the opening. select it. when it highlights.

You can move it. click . click the Training Files icon. and click Finish Sketch. spin the model around so that you can see the side of the roof without the dormer. 11 On the Options Bar. click Open. .rvt located in the Metric folder. change the shape. and constrain it like any other element. click 12 On the File menu. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. If you want to modify the shape of the sketch. NOTE If you want to save this file. you create a roof opening that is cut vertically through the roof. notice the tool displays. Cutting Roof Openings | 167 . Open the file m_Cutting_Openings.The opening is an element independent of the roof. Create a vertically cut opening 1 On the View toolbar. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. click Close. select Save As from the File menu. dimension it. Creating a Vertical Roof Opening In this exercise. 2 Using the spin function.

168 | Chapter 5 Openings . right-click the Design Bar. The opening on the left is cut perpendicular. and click Modelling. when it highlights. In the following illustration. select Pick a roof. 6 Click OK. or ceiling and cut vertically. and. select it.3 On the Design Bar. TIP If the Modelling tab of the Design Bar is not active. click Opening. 5 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 7 Move the cursor over the main roof. the opening on the right is cut vertically through the face. floor. click Modify.

Dormer. expand Floor Plans. click Finish Sketch. 10 On the Options Bar.Because the cut is vertical. it is easier to sketch the boundary on a plan view. click . select it. 13 On the View Toolbar. and. expand Views (all). 9 On the Design Bar. Cutting Roof Openings | 169 . click Lines. 14 Place the cursor over the edge of the opening. 11 Sketch a rectangle in the center of the roof on the side without the dormer. 12 On the Design Bar. 8 In the Project Browser. click . when it highlights. and double-click Roof .

notice the tool. change the shape. click Close. Open the file m_Cutting_Openings. you cut an opening on the second level of a building model to accommodate a set of existing stairs. 170 | Chapter 5 Openings . and click Finish Sketch.rvt located in the Metric folder.The opening is an element independent of the roof. Creating Openings in Floors and Ceilings In this lesson. Cut a floor opening 1 In the Project Browser. and constrain it like any other element. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. If you want to modify the shape of the sketch. dimension it. and double-click Section 1. expand Views (all). 15 On the Options Bar. You can move it. click Open. click 16 On the File menu. NOTE If you want to save this file. expand Sections (Filled Arrow). you cut openings in a floor to accommodate a set of stairs that are already in place. Cutting an Opening in a Floor In this exercise. . you created a roof opening that was cut vertically through the roof. The exercises in this lesson must be done sequentially. In this exercise. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. select Save As from the File menu. click the Training Files icon.

or ceiling and cut vertically. and click Modelling. TIP If the Modelling tab of the Design Bar is not active. In the following illustration. select Pick a roof.Notice that there is not an opening for the stairway in the ceiling or the floor. you add a reference plane to mark the stair head height. floor. The opening on the left is cut perpendicular to the face. the opening on the right is cut vertically through the face. Creating Openings in Floors and Ceilings | 171 . However. and the second click specifies the end of the plane. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 5 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box. This is useful when sketching the opening in a plan view. make sure that the plane intersects the fifth stair tread from the bottom. a section view provides an excellent vantage point to select faces or planes to cut. right-click the Design Bar. click Ref Plane. Before cutting the floor opening. The first click specifies the start point. 3 Add a vertical reference plane similar to the following illustration. and click OK. Adding a reference plane is a two-click process. and the level 1 and 2 lines. When cutting a floor or ceiling for a stairway. The length of the plane does not have to be precise. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Opening.

If you intend to complete the next exercise. click Finish Sketch. double-click Section 1. do so now. You are prompted to select a view. 14 In the Project Browser. 7 In the Go To View dialog box. and click Open View. Otherwise. 13 On the Design Bar. the stairs. Notice the new floor opening. and click Wireframe. NOTE The next exercise requires this project in its current state. select Floor Plan: Level 2. and the reference plane you added previously. 12 Sketch a rectangle that borders the interior face of the wall. 11 Zoom in around the upper right corner where the stairs are located. click . you may close the project with or without saving it.6 Select the floor on Level 2. 9 On the Design Bar. 172 | Chapter 5 Openings . 10 On the Options Bar. click Lines. under Views (all). click Model Graphics Style. under Sections (Filled Arrow). 8 On the View Control bar.

double-click Level 1 Interior View. 8 In the Project Browser. 7 On the Design Bar. under 3D Views. and click Open View. Notice the new ceiling opening. and the right and lower border of the stairs and floor you added in the previous exercise. 6 Sketch a rectangle that borders the reference plane. TIP If the Modelling tab of the Design Bar is not active. the interior face of the wall. under Views (all). and click Modelling. click . 2 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box. Creating Openings in Floors and Ceilings | 173 . select Reflected Ceiling Plan: Level 1. 4 In the Go To View dialog box. double-click Section 1. or ceiling and cut vertically. 5 On the Options Bar. Cut a ceiling opening. Dataset Continue using the dataset you were using in the previous exercise. Use the following illustration as a guide. click Finish Sketch. you cut a ceiling opening for the stairwell. and click OK. click Opening. floor. select Pick a roof. 9 In the Project Browser. under Views (all).Cutting an Opening in a Ceiling In this exercise. right-click the Design Bar. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 3 Select the ceiling below level 2. under Sections (Filled Arrow).

click Open. 174 | Chapter 5 Openings . NOTE If you want to save this file. make sure that the plane intersects the fifth stair tread from the bottom. Before cutting the opening. and the second click specifies the end of the plane. However. 3 Add a vertical reference plane similar to the following illustration. click the Training Files icon. Adding a reference plane is a two-click process. The first click specifies the start point.10 On the File menu. select Save As from the File menu. you add a reference plane to mark the stair head height. Cutting an Opening Using the Shaft Tool In this exercise. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Section 1. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. When using the shaft tool to cut an opening. and the level 1 and 2 lines. however. Notice that there is not an opening for the stairway in the ceiling or the floor. you must sketch in a plan view. click Close. Add a reference plane 1 In the Project Browser. click Ref Plane. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. expand Sections (Filled Arrow). The length of the plane does not have to be precise. you cut an opening through several levels of a building model to accommodate a set of existing stairs and to account for the possibility of extending the stairs up another level. Open the file m_Cutting_Openings.rvt located in the Metric folder. expand Views (all).

This accounts for the possibility of extending the existing stairs up another level. 5 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box. 9 On the Options Bar. right-click the Design Bar. select Floor Plan: Level 2. ■ ■ Select Up to level: Roof for Top Constraint. Creating Openings in Floors and Ceilings | 175 . TIP If the Modelling tab of the Design Bar is not active. and the reference plane you added previously. the ceiling of level 1 would remain intact. click Opening. but does cut the ceiling of level 1. click Properties. the stairs. 8 On the Design Bar. under Sections (Filled Arrow). under Constraints. 12 On the Design Bar.4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Enter 3400 for Base Offset. specify the following parameters: ■ Select Level 1 for Base Constraint. 7 On the View Control bar. and click Wireframe. under Views (all). and click Open View. double-click Section 1. 16 In the Project Browser. select Create shaft opening. 11 Sketch a rectangle that borders the interior face of the wall. click . 6 In the Go To View dialog box. click Model Graphics Style. 10 Zoom in around the upper right corner where the stairs are located. Entering a value for base offset ensures that the shaft opening does not cut through the floor at level 1. click Finish Sketch. and click OK. If you selected level 2 for the base constraint. click Lines. 14 Click OK. and click Modelling. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box. 15 On the Design Bar.

176 | Chapter 5 Openings . you can cut a single opening through every floor. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. Using the shaft tool. and roof that interferes with the defined volume of the opening.Notice the shaft opening that cuts through several levels. ceiling.

balusters. and panels. posts. 177 .Railings 6 In this tutorial. you learn how to create a railing and customize it using design information for rails.

rfa. 3 On the File menu.rfa . 4 In the Open dialog box. you create a railing and add components to it.rte is selected as the Template file from the Metric Templates folder.Square w Ball. verify that DefaultMetric. navigate to Metric Library/Balusters. 8 Draw a 4300 mm vertical line from bottom to top as shown. 178 | Chapter 6 Railings . and M_Post . such as panels. Make certain that you draw the line from bottom to top because these starting and ending points are used to justify the railing later. you need to load railing components from the library provided in the drawing template. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. and click OK. Project is selected under Create new. select M_Baluster . Before you lay out the railing. M_Post . 2 In the New Project dialog box.Custom4.rfa. The railing layout in this exercise is based on these custom components. click Railing.rfa. press the CTRL key. 6 On the Design Bar. M_Baluster Panel 1. between the balusters. Open five component families 1 On the File menu. select Chain. 7 On the Options Bar. M_Baluster . and click Open.Newel. click Lines. Creating the Railing Layout In this exercise. You also learn how to use a pattern editor to place balusters and posts and how to customize the railing with additional components. Sketch a plan view of two railing lines 5 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.rfa. click New ➤ Project. you learn how to create and place a railing using design information such as the shape and finish material of the rails.Custom3.Creating Railings In this lesson.

TIP You may need to zoom in until the angular dimension increments by a single degree. click Edit/New. click Railing Properties. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box.Paint Finish . In row 2. 12 In the Type Properties dialog box. and click OK. Creating Railings | 179 . 18 In the Edit Rails dialog box. and then do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In row 1. click Duplicate. . In row 2. 16 In row 1. 15 In the Edit Rails dialog box. enter 300 mm for Height. enter Top for Name. click in the Material field. click Edit for Rail Structure.9 Draw a second 4300 mm line at an angle of 37 degrees as shown. click Insert.Paint Finish . Matte for Name. In row 2. and then click . select M_Rectangular Handrail : 50 x 50 mm for Profile. and click OK. select Metal . select Metal .Dark Gray. and click OK. In row 2. 19 In the Materials dialog box. 14 In the Type Properties dialog box. in row 2. enter Bottom for Name.Dark Gray. Specify the railing parameters 10 On the Design Bar. 13 In the Name dialog box. and then click 17 In the Materials dialog box. click in the Material field. Matte for Name. enter -25 mm for Offset. enter Railing with Glass Panel for Name.

Glass for Baluster Family. 28 In row 2. click Save As and save the exercise file as Training_Railing.Square w Ball : 60mm for Baluster Family and enter 50 mm for Top offset.20 In the Edit Rails dialog box. 33 On the View menu. from previous. from previous. Enter 380 mm for Dist. 23 In row 2. Lay out the post pattern 27 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. 29 In row 3.Custom 3 : 25mm for Baluster Family. Adjusting Railing Parameters In this exercise. enter 230 mm for Dist. IMPORTANT Completing this tutorial is required to successfully complete some exercises in the tutorial on Stairs. Adjusting Railing Parameters. under Main pattern. 21 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Shading with Edges. click Edit for Baluster Placement. click OK.Newel : 150mm for Baluster Family and enter 0 mm for Space.Newel : 150mm for Baluster Family and enter 0 mm for Space. under Posts. Select M_Baluster Panel 1: 600mm . do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter Glass Panel for Name. select M_Post. 180 | Chapter 6 Railings . click on row 2. select M_Post . select M_Post. you change the pattern of balusters and posts with the pattern editor to show different design options for the railing. 31 On the Design Bar. 25 In row 4. in row 1. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select M_Baluster . click . and then click Duplicate. Select Bottom for Base. 26 Select Beginning for Justify. 32 On the Toolbar. from previous. A new row is displayed. 30 Click OK three times. Lay out the main baluster pattern 22 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. under Construction. 24 In row 3. 35 Proceed to the next exercise. 34 On the File menu. click Finish Sketch. Enter 380 mm for Dist.rvt. Select Bottom for Base.

5 In the Element Properties dialog box. The railing layout reflects the beginning justification option that you assigned in the previous exercise. 6 In the Type Properties dialog box. click . 12 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. 2 Zoom in on the left side of the railing. 4 On the Options Bar. click Modify and select the railing. expand Elevations. 11 In the Type Properties dialog box. under Main pattern. click Edit for Baluster Placement. click . click Edit/New. The railing layout reflects the assigned end justification option. 15 In the Element Properties dialog box. 16 In the Type Properties dialog box. 17 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box.rvt. 13 Click OK three times. Training_Railing. under Main pattern. The railing layout reflects the assigned center justification option.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click . View the end justification option 3 On the Design Bar. select Center for Justify. click Edit for Baluster Placement. View the center justification option 9 On the Options Bar. select End for Justify. under Construction. under Main pattern. Creating Railings | 181 . 18 Click OK three times. expand Views (all). View the spread pattern to fit option 14 On the Options Bar. View the beginning justification option 1 In the Project Browser. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. under Construction. select Spread Pattern To Fit for Justify. click Edit for Baluster Placement. click Edit/New. 7 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. and double-click East. 8 Click OK three times. click Edit/New. under Construction.

View the truncate pattern excess length fill option 19 On the Options Bar. click . custom baluster excess length fill. and enter 150 mm for Spacing. under Construction. click . 35 On the Toolbar. 32 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. 182 | Chapter 6 Railings . 34 Click OK three times. 20 In the Element Properties dialog box. and select Truncate Pattern for Excess Length Fill. 23 Click OK three times. click Edit for Baluster Placement. click Edit/New. click Edit/New. click Edit for Baluster Placement. View post options 29 On the Options Bar. and spacing options.The railing layout reflects the assigned spread pattern to fit justification option. View the custom baluster with specified spacing excess length fill option 24 On the Options Bar. 31 In the Type Properties dialog box. 26 In the Type Properties dialog box. under Construction.Custom3 : 25mm for Excess Length Fill. 30 In the Element Properties dialog box. enter 54 degrees for Angle. under Main pattern. click . You cannot assign base top and bottom offset parameters to excess length fill balusters. click Edit for Baluster Placement. 27 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. Observe that the balusters that occur in the excess length fill area extend below the bottom rail. 25 In the Element Properties dialog box. 22 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. click Edit/New. 33 Under Posts. select M_Baluster . under Construction. click . The railing layout reflects the assigned beginning justification and truncated excess length fill options. select Beginning for Justify. select Truncate Pattern for Excess Length Fill. under Main pattern. under Main pattern. select Angles Greater Than for Corner Posts At. 21 In the Type Properties dialog box. The railing layout reflects the assigned beginning justification. 28 Click OK three times.

42 Click OK three times. under Construction. click Save As and save the exercise file as Training_Railing. 40 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. 38 In the Element Properties dialog box. under Main pattern. click . Select Spread Pattern To Fit for Justify. 39 In the Type Properties dialog box. enter 380 mm for Dist. from previous. from previous. select Each Segment End for Corner Posts At. In row 4. Specify the final railing layout 36 On the Design Bar. Creating Railings | 183 .rvt. a corner post does not occur. Since the angle is less than 54 degrees. The railing layout reflects the assigned distance and justification options. double-click East. click Edit/New. 37 On the Options Bar.The railing layout reflects the assigned minimum angle limit for the corner post option. click Modify and select the railing. under Elevations. 41 Under Posts. enter 0 mm for Dist. 44 On the File menu. click Edit for Baluster Placement. do the following: ■ ■ ■ In row 2. 43 In the Project Browser.

184 | Chapter 6 Railings .

Roofs 7 In this tutorial. 185 . you learn how to create different types of roofs in Autodesk Revit Building. and soffits to the roofs that you create. gutters. In addition. you learn how to add fascia.

expand Views (all). you need to select a work plane to use as a sketching guide. Open m_Roofs. including hip. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. shed. and then select Reference Plane : Breezeway. 6 In the Roof Reference Level and Offset dialog box. 3 In the Work Plane dialog box. You do not need to create the work plane. you create an extruded roof over a breezeway between a house and a garage.Creating Roofs In this lesson. expand Floor Plans. gable. Creating an Extruded Roof In this exercise. The section view is automatically cropped around the area where you want to sketch the roof. 4 Click OK. and click OK. 186 | Chapter 7 Roofs . 5 In the Go To View dialog box. and then click Open View to select a section view parallel to the work plane in which to sketch the roof. 1 In the Project Browser. You create roofs from footprints and by extrusion: the two roof creation methods in Revit Building. and mansard roofs. verify that Section: Section1 is selected. click Open. and double-click Level 1. you learn to create several different types of roofs. verify Level 3 is selected for Level. Before you can sketch the roof profile. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. a work plane named Breezeway exists for the purpose of this exercise. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. select Name. You create the roof by sketching the top roof profile and extruding it over the length of the breezeway. click the Training Files icon.rvt located in the Metric folder. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

10 Sketch a vertical reference plane centered between the two vertical walls. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 9 Sketch a similar reference plane 450 mm to the right of the right exterior breezeway wall face.Before you can sketch the profile of the roof. you need to define four reference planes to help determine key points on the profile sketch. you can place it in the general location and then zoom in and use temporary dimensions. This helps ensure that the plane is measured from the face of the wall rather than from the wall centerline. click Ref Plane. Creating Roofs | 187 . TIP Instead of trying to place the reference plane in its exact location initially. 8 Sketch the first reference plane 450 mm to the left of the left exterior breezeway wall face.

Use automatic snaps to link the chain to the reference plane intersections.11 Sketch a horizontal reference plane 450 mm below Level 2. click Lines. The roof is automatically extruded from the Breezeway work plane in one direction. Begin the sketch at the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the horizontal plane. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. sketch the roof profile. 14 Sketch two sloped lines to create the roof profile. 13 On the Options Bar. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. select Chain. 188 | Chapter 7 Roofs . click Finish Sketch to complete the roof. Next.

20 Select the breezeway roof edge. so you next attach the breezeway walls to the breezeway roof.16 On the View toolbar. and double-click Section 1. press TAB. Creating Roofs | 189 . expand Views (all). 18 Select the edge of the roof. Next. 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and then select the exterior face of the wall. click to display the model. 23 Select one of the breezeway walls. click Modify. expand Sections (Type 1). press CTRL. The roof should resemble the following illustration. click . 19 On the Tools toolbar. use the Join Roofs command to adjust the length of the roof and join the roof edges to the exterior walls. Notice that the breezeway roof penetrates the house walls inappropriately. click . 17 On the Tools toolbar. Use the Join Roof command again to join the opposite end of the breezeway roof to the exterior wall of the house that joins the breezeway. and then select the exterior wall face of the garage to join the roof to the garage wall. 21 In the Project Browser. The breezeway walls still penetrate the roof. and select the second wall.

190 | Chapter 7 Roofs . 27 Proceed to the next exercise. you create a gable roof over a garage from a footprint. You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. click Attach for Top/Base. 25 Select the roof to join the wall tops to the roof. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. you set the roof slope as a property of the footprint slope lines. You use roof slope lines to define the roof gable ends. click to view the completed breezeway roof in the model. To complete the gable roof with the correct pitch.24 On the Options Bar. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint. 26 On the View toolbar.

select both slope definition lines. 2 In the Go To View dialog box. Verify that a dashed green line displays to the right of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. 4 On the Options Bar. and click Open View. On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Creating Roofs | 191 . enter 500 mm for Rise/1000 to change the roof slope. 12 On the Design Bar. 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. verify that Defines slope is selected. The Element Properties dialog box is displayed. click Yes to attach the highlighted exterior garage walls to the roof. click Finish Roof. 8 Select the two horizontal walls to create a closed loop and complete the roof footprint. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. and on the Options Bar. and enter 600 for Overhang. verify that Floor Plan: Garage Roof is selected. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box. Verify that a dashed green line displays to the left of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. 7 On the Options Bar. click Pick Walls. m_Roofs. 3 Next. 6 Select the parallel wall on the right to define the second roof slope line.rvt.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. clear Defines slope. 13 When you see the informational dialog box. edit the properties of the two vertical slope definition lines to change the roof pitch. Next. under Dimensions. 10 Press CTRL. and click OK. By default. 5 Select the left vertical wall of the garage to define the first roof slope line. click . the roof slope has a 750 mm rise over a 1000 mm run. sketch the roof footprint.

Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint. click to view the gable roof and attached walls in the model. 192 | Chapter 7 Roofs . Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. After you define the roof slope lines and complete the footprint. 1 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. m_Roofs. and then verify that a dashed green line displays to the exterior side of the walls. and enter 600 for Overhang.rvt. NOTE You add the slope defining lines in a later step. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint In this exercise. 3 On the Options Bar. You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls. and double-click Level 3. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. expand Views (all). 15 Proceed to the next exercise. clear Defines slope. When you complete the roof. you sketch a closed rectangular opening around the chimney. The roof requires an opening to accommodate a chimney. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you add a main gable roof to a house from a footprint. click Pick Walls. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.14 On the View toolbar. press TAB. the opening that you sketched becomes a void in the roof.

10 On the View menu. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 9 Using automatic snaps. click Finish Roof. 15 On the Options bar. Creating Roofs | 193 . add new slope lines to the roof. 8 On the Options Bar. Next. 17 When you see the informational dialog box. select Defines Slope. 11 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. sketch the chimney opening. 14 Select one of the shorter line segments shown in the following illustration.6 Click to select all the walls. 12 Select the uppermost horizontal line. click Modify. click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. click Lines. 13 On the Options Bar. Next. select Defines Slope. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the entire floor plan. sketch a rectangle from the upper left corner of the exterior chimney face to the lower right corner of the exterior chimney face. click . 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.

4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Verify that a dashed green line displays on the exterior side of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the walls. you create a hip roof over the rear of a house from a footprint. m_Roofs. 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. expand Floor Plans.18 On the View toolbar. 194 | Chapter 7 Roofs . 3 On the Options Bar. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Defines slope. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. click to view the new roof in the model. click Pick Walls. and enter 600 for Overhang. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 5 Select the exterior edges of the three walls that create the rear addition to the house. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint. expand Views (all). and double-click Level 2.

You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. 8 Select the exterior edge of the uppermost horizontal wall of the main building. Creating Roofs | 195 . click Lines. 12 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. click . select the left vertical slope definition line. Roof sketches must create a closed loop before you can create the roof. clear Defines Slope. and then specify a point near the midpoint of the line that you sketched along the wall of the main building. 7 On the Options Bar.Next. 10 On the Options Bar. close the roof sketch. Next. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. 11 To trim the first line segment. using the following illustration for guidance. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and click . 9 On the Tools toolbar. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. The sketched lines cannot overlap or intersect each other.

Next. 14 Under Constraints. 16 On the View toolbar. Press and hold CTRL to select and join the two remaining walls at the same time. Notice that the walls do not join to the roof. enter 600 for Base Offset From Level. 22 Using the same method that you used previously. 21 Click to use the Dynamic View tool to view the remaining walls that support the hip roof. 20 Select the roof to join the wall top to the roof. Use the Attach Top/Base command to join the walls to the roof. raise the roof 600 mm above the current level. 196 | Chapter 7 Roofs . use the Join Roof command to fix the roof. join the two remaining walls to the roof. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. and click OK. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.Next. click Roof Properties. The Element Properties dialog box is displayed. Notice that the new hip roof does not properly join to the back of the house. click Attach for Top/Base on the Options Bar. click Modify. 18 On the Design Bar. click 17 Click to display the model. click Finish Roof. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 19 Select one of the walls under the hip roof. to use the Dynamic View tool to view the back of the house.

23 On the Tools toolbar. click Pick Walls. Creating Roofs | 197 . 1 In the Project Browser. click . Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 4 On the Options Bar. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. The properly joined roof should resemble the following illustration. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. 24 Select the edge of the hip roof. m_Roofs. expand Floor Plans. and enter 300 for Overhang.rvt. and then select the edge of the main roof to join the roofs. clear Defines Slope. expand Views (all). and double-click Level 2. you create a shed roof over the entrance to a house from a footprint. 3 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.

18 Click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. click Modify. you add a slope-defining line.5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls that defines the entry way. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 9 On the Options Bar. enter -600 for Base Offset From Level. and select the lower horizontal line at the front of the roof. select Defines slope. and then click to select all three of the entry way walls. select the left vertical roof line. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. click . 11 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. 7 Select the exterior face of the main wall to close the sketch. Next. Notice the rise value is displayed next to the slope marker. 13 On the Options Bar. Verify that a green dashed line displays around the exterior side of the walls. click Roof Properties. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 14 Enter 500 mm for the rise value to change the roof slope. 10 To trim the first line segment. 19 Click on the View toolbar to display the model. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Next. and click OK. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. and then select a point near the midpoint of the upper horizontal line you sketched earlier. 16 Under Constraints. 198 | Chapter 7 Roofs . 6 On the Options Bar. press TAB. and press ENTER. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. enter 0 for Overhang. 8 On the Tools toolbar.

expand Floor Plans. and enter 600 for Offset. 9 On the Tools menu. you need to add two reference planes. 5 On the View menu. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. Before you can add slope arrows. click to activate the roof footprint sketch. 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click Level 2. click Split Walls and Lines. expand 3D Views. you add slope arrows to the shed roof.20 Click to use the Dynamic View tool to rotate the model. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof. Verify that the reference planes are located inside the shed roof sketch. Creating Roofs | 199 . click . you need to split the slope defining line into three segments. 10 Split the slope defining line where the reference planes intersect as shown in the following illustration. 7 On the Options Bar. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 2 Select the shed roof over the entrance of the house. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof In this exercise. and zoom in around the shed roof footprint.rvt. click Ref Plane. 8 Select the two vertical sketch lines. m_Roofs. and double-click 3D. 3 On the Options Bar. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. expand Views (all). 4 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all). To help locate the position of each split.

Aligning Roof Eaves. select Slope for Specify. Move the cursor along the roof line until the midpoint displays. verify is selected. and then select it to specify the location of the slope arrow head. 12 On the Options Bar. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. select both slope arrows. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. Begin the tail at the right reference plane. 22 Click on the View toolbar to display the model. ■ 16 Repeat steps 13 . change the longest slope line segment (the middle segment) so that it no longer defines slope. click Modify. and then click OK. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. The head should snap to the midpoint of the line as in the previous steps. click Slope Arrow. . 18 Press CTRL.Next. and select the middle segment of the slope defining line. NOTE If the front wall is separated from the roof. enter 500 for Rise/1000.15 to add the second slope arrow. click Modify. 14 On the Options Bar. Next. 200 | Chapter 7 Roofs . use the Attach Top/Base command to join the wall to the roof. 15 Sketch a slope arrow from the reference plane to the midpoint of the lower horizontal roof line: ■ Select the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the roof line to specify the location of the slope arrow tail. 20 Under Dimensions. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 21 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 11 On the Design Bar. and click 19 Under Constraints. add two new slope arrows. clear Defines Slope. and move the cursor to rotate the arrow.

Notice how the overhang adjusts to match the eave height of the first eave. click . select a method to align the eaves. When you sketch a hip roof. 9 Select the left vertical eave to use to align the eaves. on the Options Bar. click Align Eaves. 10 On the Options Bar. 5 On the Options Bar. expand Views (all). and click OK. select Defines Slope. expand Floor Plans. 11 Select both the horizontal eave lines. and double-click Garage Roof. enter 800 mm for Rise/1000. 13 On the View toolbar. 1 In the Project Browser. the adjacent eave heights must align.rvt. Next. Creating Roofs | 201 . 12 On the Design Bar. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click to display the model. 2 Select the gable roof over the garage. 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. you can use the Align Eaves tool to align them. When eave heights differ. When aligning eaves. This dimension is the height of the eave measured from the sketch plane. under Dimensions. 3 On the Options Bar. click . 7 In the Element Properties dialog box. The eave lines display with a dimension. you must select one eave to use to align both eaves. select Adjust Overhang to align the eaves by adjusting the overhang to match the eave height of the first eave. click Finish Roof. 6 With the two gable end lines selected. 4 Select the two gable end lines (the lines without slope definition).Aligning Roof Eaves In this exercise. you convert the gable roof over the garage to a hip roof and use the Align Eaves tool to adjust the eave heights. m_Roofs.

and save the exercise file with a unique name. on the File menu. you create a mansard roof by cutting off a hip roof at a specific level and adding another roof on top of it. 5 Click OK to cut the top of the roof off at level 3. 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click Save As. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. click Modify. select Level 3 for Cutoff Level. expand Elevations. click Open.14 If you want to save your changes. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. on the Options Bar. click . Notice the model has four defined levels: In the next steps. click the Training Files icon. Creating a Mansard Roof. 4 In the Element Properties dialog box. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. Creating a Mansard Roof In this exercise.rvt located in the Metric folder. and double-click North. 3 Select the roof and. under Constraints. you constrain the current roof so it does not rise above Level 3. Open m_Mansard_Roof. 202 | Chapter 7 Roofs . expand Views (all).

expand Floor Plans. and double-click Level 3. click Finish Roof. 15 In the Element Properties dialog box. and then select Defines slope. 17 On the View toolbar. click to display the model with the complete mansard roof. enter 750 mm for Rise/1000. press TAB. 14 On the Options Bar. 10 On the Options Bar. 11 Select the four edges of the roof cutoff.6 On the View toolbar. click Modify. 13 Select one of the roof cutoff lines. 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Next. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. expand Views (all). 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Creating Roofs | 203 . create a new roof that starts at level 3 and completes the mansard roof. click Lines. under Dimensions. click . click to display the model. 7 In the Project Browser. click . and click OK. and select the remaining three lines.

19 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. click . 2 In the Open dialog box. click the Training Files icon. 9 In the Type Properties dialog box. Creating Roof Fascia In this exercise. select M_Fascia-Built-Up. and soffits. you learn to use the Host Sweep command to create fascia on the roof of a condominium. 204 | Chapter 7 Roofs .18 If you want to save your changes. 8 In the Name dialog box. gutters. and click OK twice. click Duplicate. 1 On the File menu. and soffits in Revit Building. open the Profiles folder. on the File menu. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. you can easily create its fascia.rfa. open the Metric Library folder. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia. you learn how to create roof fascia. and save the exercise file with a unique name. and open the Roofs folder. click Save As. gutters. enter Built-up Fascia. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 3 Press CTRL.rvt located in the Common folder. 6 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Load From Library ➤ Load Family. click Edit/New to access the type properties of the fascia. Open c_Condominium. After you create a roof. Creating Fascia. select M_Fascia-Built-Up: 38 x 184mm x 38 x 286 for Profile. and click Open. and click OK. and Soffits In this lesson. 10 Move the cursor to the top edge of the roof. 7 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Open. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.rfa and M_Gutter-Cove. under Construction. Gutters. 5 On the Options Bar.

Creating Gutters In this exercise. Creating Fascia. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating Gutters. Gutters. you use the Host Sweep command to place a gutter at the bottom edge of the roof on a condominium building model. and Soffits | 205 . 12 Select all of the roof top edges to place the fascia around the building.11 Select the top edge of the roof to place the fascia.

you learn how to place a roof soffit. 5 Enter Cove Shape Gutter for Name. c_Condominium. Creating Soffits.rvt. 206 | Chapter 7 Roofs . 10 Click to place the gutter. 7 Under Materials and Finishes.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and click OK three times. 6 In the Type Properties dialog box. click in the Value field for Material. 2 On the Options Bar. select Metal-Aluminum for Name. and then click . select M_Gutter-Cove: 125 x 125mm for Profile. click . and click OK. 9 Move the cursor to the bottom edge of the roof. 3 In the Properties dialog box. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating Soffits In this exercise. 11 Continue to add gutters to the other roof edges of the building model. click Edit/New. 4 In the Type Properties dialog box. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Duplicate. under Construction. You add the soffit underneath the roof of the condominium building model that you used in the previous exercise. 8 In the Materials dialog box. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Gutter.

5 On the Design Bar. 3 On the Design Bar. Creating Fascia. expand Floor Plans. 6 In the Project Browser. Notice that the geometry of the roof and the soffit overlap. expand Views (all). expand Views. Gutters. click Roof ➤ Roof Soffit.rvt. and Soffits | 207 . and double-click 3D. click Pick Roofs.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. c_Condominium. expand 3D Views. click Finish Sketch. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Roof. 4 Select the roof.

208 | Chapter 7 Roofs . 10 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name.7 On the Tools menu. and then select the soffit to join them. click Join Geometry. 8 Select the roof. on the File menu. 9 If you want to save your changes. click Save As.

and work with a stair calculator. and semi-circular runs of stairs.Stairs 8 In this tutorial. You learn to create special feature stairs. you learn how to create and modify straight. 209 . add railings to your landings. u-shaped.

4 Click OK.Creating Stairs In this lesson. click Stairs. 3 In the Element Properties dialog box. you learn how to create runs of typical and special feature stairs with the stairs aligned correctly between the levels in your project. you create and align a straight run of stairs to provide access from the first level to the second level of the building model. click View Properties. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Draw a straight stair run 5 Zoom in on the entry way. 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. railings from another project. specify the start point for the stair run. The level where the stairs originate displays as your current working level. and double-click Level 1. View the first level lobby and second level underlay 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog box.rvt file located in the Metric folder. use the Stair Calculator to add a straight run of stairs to your drawing. You learn to work with different stair components. The outline of the level 2 floors and wall display as an underlay. 7 Using the following illustration as a guide. expand Views (all). and then modify. Creating the Main Lobby Stair Run In this exercise. The level where the stairs end displays as a screened background after you select it as an underlay. 210 | Chapter 8 Stairs . 2 On the View menu. expand Floor Plans. add. under Graphics. such as treads. select Level 2 for Underlay. Open the m_Stair_Exercise. risers and stringers. click the Training Files icon. click Open. If you add stairs to a drawing in plan view. you can display both of the levels that you are working with.

8 Specify the stair run endpoint as shown. click Finish Sketch. 9 On the Design Bar. Creating Stairs | 211 .

212 | Chapter 8 Stairs . The top edge of the stair run is now aligned with the front edge of the second level. 11 On the Toolbar. 12 Select the front edge of the second level as the alignment line as shown. 13 Select the top edge of the stair run as the entity to align as shown. click .Align the top edge of the stair run with the front edge of the second level 10 Zoom in on the top of the stair run.

Align the stair run centerline with the wall centerline
14 Select the wall centerline as the alignment line as shown. TIP On the Options Bar, click Wall centerlines on the Prefer menu.

15 Select the stair run centerline as the entity to align as shown.

The stair run centerline is now aligned with the wall centerline.

16 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand 3D Views, and double-click lobby stair view.

Creating Stairs | 213

Specify new main lobby stair parameters
17 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Sections, and double-click Stair Section. 18 On the View menu, click Thin Lines.

TIP Hold the cursor over the stairs to see the risers and treads. 19 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the stair run. 20 On the Options Bar, click .

21 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 22 In the Type Properties dialog box, click Duplicate. 23 In the Name dialog box, enter Lobby Main Stairs for Name, and click OK.

214 | Chapter 8 Stairs

24 In the Type Properties dialog box, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Treads, enter 255 mm for Minimum Tread Depth. Under Treads, select Stair Nosing - Radius : 20 mm for Nosing Profile. Under Treads, enter 50 mm for Tread Thickness. Under Risers, clear End with Riser. Under Risers, select Straight for Riser Type. Under Risers, enter 20 mm for Riser Thickness. Under Risers, select Extend Tread Under Riser for Riser to Tread Connection. Under Stringers, select Match Level for Trim Stringers at Top. Under Stringers, enter 305 mm for Stringer Height. Under Stringers, enter 65 mm for Stringer Carriage Height. Under Stringers, enter 180 mm for Landing Carriage Height. .

25 Under Materials and Finishes, click in the Value box for Tread Material, and click

26 In the Materials dialog box, select Finishes - Interior - Carpet 1 for Name, and click OK. 27 Click in the Value box for Riser Material, and click .

28 In the Materials dialog box, select Finishes - Interior - Carpet 1 for Name, and click OK. 29 Click in the Value box for Stringer Material, and click .

30 In the Materials dialog box, select Wood - Cherry for Name, and click OK. 31 In the Type Properties dialog box, click OK. Because you specified ending the stair run with a tread instead of a riser, a warning dialog box displays, telling you that the actual number of risers is different from the desired number of risers. 32 Click OK to ignore this warning message. 33 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Dimensions, enter 1220 mm for Width. 34 Click OK.

The stair section reflects the new assigned parameters. 35 On the File menu, click Save As, and save this exercise file as Training_Stairs.rvt. 36 Proceed to the next exercise, Modifying the Main Lobby Stair Run.

Modifying the Main Lobby Stair Run
In this exercise, you use design information about a railing from another project and create special feature stairs with concave stringers from the straight run of stairs you completed in the previous exercise.

Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise, Training_Stairs.rvt.

Changing the railing type
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand 3D Views, and double-click lobby stair view. 2 On the Design Bar, click Modify, press CTRL, and select both railings. 3 In the Type Selector, select Railing : Railing with Glass Panel.

Creating Stairs | 215

NOTE If the panels do not display in the railings, go to the Type Properties of the railing. Click Edit next to the Baluster Placement parameter. If selected, clear the check box for the User Baluster Per Tread on Stairs option. Notice that the railing start post is offset above the level of the floor.

Adjust the railing start post offset
4 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select one of the railings. 5 On the Options Bar, click .

6 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 7 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, click Edit for Baluster Placement. 8 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box, under Posts, in row 1, enter -200 mm for Base offset. 9 Click OK three times. 10 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

The railing start post is now at floor level.

Change the stair shape in plan view
11 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1. 12 Zoom in on the stair run. 13 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the stair run. 14 On the Options Bar, click Edit. 15 Press and hold CTRL, select the left and right stair run boundary lines, and delete them.

216 | Chapter 8 Stairs

Draw the left boundary arc
16 On the Design Bar, click Boundary. 17 On the Options Bar, click .

18 Specify the intersection of the bottom riser and inside wall face as the arc start point as shown.

19 Specify the left end of the top riser as the arc endpoint.

Creating Stairs | 217

20 Specify a point to the left of the stair run for the arc midpoint approximately as shown.

Mirror the left boundary arc
21 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the left boundary arc. 22 On the Toolbar, click .

23 Select the stair run centerline as the mirror axis.

Draw the new first riser
24 On the Design Bar, click Modify, select the first riser and delete it.

218 | Chapter 8 Stairs

25 On the Design Bar, click Riser. 26 On the Options Bar, click .

27 Specify the lower end of the left boundary arc as the arc start point as shown.

28 Specify the lower end of the right boundary arc as the arc endpoint as shown.

29 Specify the intersection of the front wall edge and the stair run centerline as the arc midpoint as shown.

Creating Stairs | 219

30 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

31 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click lobby stair view.

The stair run from the first floor main lobby is now complete. 32 On the File menu, click Save As and save the exercise file as Training_Stairs.rvt. 33 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating the Second Floor Lobby Side Stairs.

220 | Chapter 8 Stairs

Creating the Second Floor Lobby Side Stairs
In this exercise, you create and align runs of side stairs with railings.

Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise, Training_Stairs.rvt.

Specify the lobby side stair run parameters
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2.

2 On the View menu, click View Properties. 3 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Graphics, select Level 3 for Underlay, and click OK.

4 Zoom in on the upper left of the lobby area. 5 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Stairs, and then click Stairs Properties. 6 In the Element Properties dialog box, select Lobby Main Stairs for Type, and click Edit/New. 7 In the Type Properties dialog box, click Duplicate. 8 In the Name dialog box, enter Lobby Side Stairs for Name, and click OK. 9 In the Type Properties dialog box, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Risers, select End with Riser. Under Risers, select None for Riser Type. Under Construction, enter -300 mm for Extend Below Base. Under Stringers, select Do not trim for Trim Stringers at Top. Under Stringers, select None for Right Stringer. Under Stringers, select None for Left Stringer. Under Stringers, select 1 for Middle Stringers. Under Stringers, enter 100 mm for Stringer Carriage Height. Under Treads, select Front, Left and Right for Apply Nosing Profile.

10 Click OK. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Dimensions, enter 1220 mm for Width, and click OK.

Creating Stairs | 221

Place the lobby side stair run
12 Specify a point near the left edge of the landing for the stair run start point, and then specify a point to the left for the stair endpoint. NOTE The exact location of the stair run is not critical. You specify its final location in subsequent steps. 13 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

Move the stair run into the corner of the level 2 opening
14 Zoom in on the upper left side of the stair run. 15 On the Design Bar, click Modify, hold down CTRL, and select the stair run and both railings. 16 On the Toolbar, click .

17 Specify the upper left endpoint of the railing as the move start point as shown.

18 Specify the upper left corner of the level 2 opening as the move endpoint as shown.

The top of the stair run is now positioned in the corner of the level 2 opening.

222 | Chapter 8 Stairs

19 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand 3D Views, and double-click {3D}.

Specify a new side stair run railing type
20 On the Design Bar, click Modify, press and hold CTRL, and select both railings. 21 In the Type Selector, select Railing : 900mm Pipe. Notice that both railings are on the outside of the treads. This is because the original stairs that you duplicated, the main lobby stairs, have left and right stringers that hosted the railings. Because the lobby side stairs have only a center stringer, you need to flip the railings so they rest on the stair treads. 22 Select each railing, right-click, and click Flip Orientation.

Mirror the lobby side stair run
23 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 24 On the Design Bar, click Modify, press and hold CTRL, and select the side stair run and both railings. 25 On the Toolbar, click .

26 Specify the main lobby stair run centerline as the mirror axis as shown.

Creating Stairs | 223

The lobby side stair run is mirrored to the right side of the lobby.

27 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click {3D}.

The lobby side stairs and railings are now complete. 28 On the File menu, click Save. 29 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating the Level 2 Landing Railings.

Creating the Level 2 Landing Railings
In this exercise, you create and modify railings for a landing and then extend the railings from the side stairs in the previous exercise to the railing on the landing.

224 | Chapter 8 Stairs

Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, Training_Stairs.rvt.

Sketch the left side level 2 landing railing path
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2. 2 Zoom in on the level 2 landing. 3 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the left main stair railing. 4 On the Options Bar, click Edit. 5 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 6 On the Options Bar, select Chain. 7 Click to specify the sketch line start point approximately as shown.

8 Move the cursor down and specify the next sketch point as shown.

9 Move the cursor to the right and specify the sketch endpoint as shown.

Creating Stairs | 225

10 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the left railing sketch line of the main stairs. 11 Select the endpoint of the sketch line for the railing as shown.

12 Drag the arc sketch line endpoint up to the right end of the new horizontal sketch line as shown.

13 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

14 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand 3D Views, and double-click Level 2 Landing.

226 | Chapter 8 Stairs

15 Zoom in and on the View toolbar, click

to reorient the view to look as shown.

Create the right side level 2 landing railing
16 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 17 Select the right lobby main stair railing and delete it. 18 Select the left lobby main stair railing. 19 On the Toolbar, click .

20 Specify the lobby main stair centerline as the mirror axis as shown.

The new lobby main stair and level 2 landing railing layout is mirrored to the right side of the stair run.

21 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click Level 2 Landing.

Creating Stairs | 227

Extend the lobby side stair railing onto the landing
22 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 23 Zoom in on the left side of the level 2 landing. 24 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the upper lobby side stair railing.

25 On Options Bar, click Edit. 26 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 27 Click to specify the right endpoint of the railing sketch line for the line start point as shown.

28 Move the cursor 440 mm to the right and specify the sketch line endpoint as shown.

228 | Chapter 8 Stairs

29 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 30 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click {3D} and zoom in on the railing extension.

The railing now extends onto the landing.

Modify the railing extension parameters
31 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the extended railing. 32 On the Options Bar, click .

33 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 34 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, select No Connector for Tangent Joins. 35 Click OK twice.

Creating Stairs | 229

36 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the extended railing. 37 On the Options Bar, click .

38 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 39 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, select Add Vertical/Horizontal Segments for Tangent Joins, and click Edit for Baluster Placement. 40 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box, under Posts, in row 2, select None for Baluster Family. 41 Click OK three times.

42 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the extended railing. 43 On the Options Bar, click Edit. 44 Select the 440 mm railing extension sketch line segment. 45 On the Options Bar, select Custom for Height Correction and enter 170 mm. 46 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

230 | Chapter 8 Stairs

47 On the File menu, click Save. 48 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating the Emergency Exit Stair Run.

Creating the Emergency Exit Stair Run
In this exercise, you create a u-shaped run of stairs in plan view, and then add a railing and extend the stairs to another level in a three-dimensional (3D) view. When you are adding stairs that turn corners in plan view, it is easier to align the stairs if you mark the edge of the landing with a reference plane first.

Dataset
Continue to use the dataset from the previous exercise, Training_Stairs.rvt.

Draw a reference plane
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1. 2 Zoom in on the stairwell on the left side of the building.

3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Ref Plane. 4 On the Options Bar, click and enter 528 mm for Offset.

5 Move your cursor over the left edge of the exterior wall and place a vertical reference plane to the left of the exterior wall face as shown.

Creating Stairs | 231

The new reference plane. 18 Click OK three times. 10 In the Name dialog box. select Metal . select for Stringer Material Value. 11 In the Type Properties dialog box. select Metal . and then click Stairs Properties. select Finishes . and click OK. click Stairs. 9 In the Type Properties dialog box. select for Tread Material Value.5 mm as indicated by the temporary dimension. enter 915 mm for Width. is at 864. 20 Move the cursor up 2040 mm and specify the stair run next point as shown. Dark Gray Matte for Name. 13 In the Materials dialog box. 8 Under Dimensions.Paint Finish. select for Riser Material Value. under Treads. 17 In the Materials dialog box. enter Exit Stairs for Name. Specify the exit stairs parameters 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 16 Under Materials and Finishes. click Duplicate. and then click Edit/New. enter 255 mm for Minimum Tread Depth.Paint Finish. 15 In the Materials dialog box. and click OK. and click OK. 232 | Chapter 8 Stairs . Draw the exit stairs 19 Click to specify the midpoint of the landing edge as the stair run start point as shown. measured from the exterior wall centerline. 14 Under Materials and Finishes.Exterior: Precast Concrete Panels for Name. 7 In the Element Properties dialog box. 12 Under Materials and Finishes. Dark Gray Matte for Name. select 180mm max riser 275mm tread for Type.

22 Drag the cursor down and specify the intersection of the landing edge and the reference plane as the stair run endpoint as shown. Creating Stairs | 233 .21 Move the cursor to the right and specify the intersection of the next-to-last riser line and the reference plane as the stair run next point as shown. The exit stair run layout is complete.

234 | Chapter 8 Stairs . 25 Zoom in on the exit stairwell. expand 3D Views.23 On the Design Bar. View the exit stairs 24 In the Project Browser. and the exit door. click Finish Sketch. and double-click Exit Stairs. 26 Hold CTRL and select two of the exterior walls of the exit stairwell. expand Views (all).

click Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Object. and select both railings. click Edit/New. hold down CTRL. click . 31 On the Options Bar.27 On the View Control Bar. click Modify. select Railing : 900mm Pipe.Round1 : 25mm for Baluster Family. Specify a new railing type 28 Zoom in on the stair run. 33 In the Type Properties dialog box. Creating Stairs | 235 . The selected objects are hidden. click Edit for Baluster Placement. 30 In the Type Selector. 29 On the Design Bar. 35 Click OK three times. in row 2. select M_Baluster . and the exit stairs are visible. under Posts. under Construction. 32 In the Element Properties dialog box. 34 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box.

and click OK. Turn on the display of the exit stairwell exterior walls and exit door 39 On the View Control Bar. 37 On the Options Bar. under Constraints. and select the exit stairs. you create a semi-circular run of stairs and then modify the winders and the railing. 40 On the File menu.Add another exit stairs flight 36 On the Design Bar. Creating a Semi-circular Exterior Stair Run. 236 | Chapter 8 Stairs . click Modify. Creating a Semi-circular Exterior Stair Run In this exercise. click . click Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. click Save. 38 In the Element Properties dialog box. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. select Level 3 for Multistory Top Level.

15 On the Options Bar. 2 Zoom in on the exterior concrete pad above the north exterior wall of the building. 6 In the name dialog box. enter 5 mm for Riser Thickness. click . enter 1300 mm for Width. TIP You can use the shortcut key SM to snap only to midpoints. and click OK. 4 In the Element Properties dialog box. Under Treads. enter 0 mm for Landing Overlap. enter 300 mm for Stringer Carriage Height. and click Edit/New. enter 200 mm for Maximum Riser Height. Under Stringers. and click OK. Under Stringers. click Duplicate. Under Risers. for Tread Material Value. enter 1 mm for Tread Thickness. Draw the semi-circular stair run 14 On the Design Bar. 10 In the Type Properties dialog box. enter 0 mm for Nosing Length. select 9 In the Materials dialog box. expand Views (all). and click OK. 8 Under Materials and Finishes.Cast-in-Place Concrete for Name. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Construction. 7 In the Type Properties dialog box. Under Risers. 12 In the Type Properties dialog box.rvt. Creating Stairs | 237 . select Extend Tread Under Riser for Riser to Tread Connection. select for Monolithic Material Value.Cast-in-Place Concrete for Name. Under Risers. and double-click Level 1. 5 In the Type Properties dialog box. Under Construction. Under Treads. select Concrete . enter Semicircular Stairs for Name. and then click Stairs Properties. 11 In the Materials dialog box. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box under Dimensions. click OK. expand Floor Plans. select 180mm max riser 275mm tread for Type. click Stairs. Training_Stairs. select Monolithic Stairs. and click OK. 16 Click to specify the midpoint of the concrete slab edge as the stair run center point as shown. click Run. select Concrete . select 16 for Desired Number of Risers. enter 200 mm for Landing Carriage Height. Specify the semi-circular stair run parameters 1 In the Project Browser.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.

238 | Chapter 8 Stairs . and click to specify the arc end point.17 Drag the cursor to the right along the slab edge. 19 Move the cursor counterclockwise until the display indicates that there are 0 risers remaining. The semi-circular stair run is complete. and press ENTER. 18 On the keyboard. enter 1310 for Radius as shown. as shown.

expand Views (all). and double-click Exterior Stairs. Modify the semi-circular stair run parameters 21 In the Project Browser. TIP You may need to select the outer railing and flip its orientation to align it to the pad.20 On the Design Bar. expand 3D Views. click Finish Sketch. Creating Stairs | 239 .

The underside of winder parameter is smooth. 22 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the stair run. 23 On the Options Bar, click .

24 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 25 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, select Stepped for Underside of Winder. 26 Click OK twice.

The underside of winder parameter is stepped with no overlap. 27 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the stair run. 28 On the Options Bar, click .

29 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 30 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, enter 300 mm for Landing Overlap. 31 Click OK twice.

240 | Chapter 8 Stairs

The underside of winder parameter is stepped with a 300 mm overlap.

Specify new semi-circular stair run railing parameters
32 On the Design Bar, click Modify, press and hold CTRL, and select both railings. 33 In the Type Selector, select Railing : 900mm Pipe.

34 If you want to save your changes, on the File menu, click Save. 35 On the File menu, click Close.

Working with the Stair Calculator
In this exercise, you create two sets of stairs side by side within a new project. The first set of stairs uses the default settings to calculate the slope. The second set of stairs uses the stair calculator to calculate the slope of the stairs. After creating both stairs, you add dimensions to them to see how the tread depth and stair slope adjust based on the changes made in the stair calculator.

Dataset
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click New ➤  Project. In the New Project dialog box, under Template File, click Browse. Open the DefaultMetric.rte file located in the Metric Templates folder.

Creating Stairs | 241

Create a set of stairs using the default settings
1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Stairs. 2 On the Design Bar, click Stairs Properties. 3 In the Element Properties dialog box, select Industrial and Assembly for Type, and click OK. 4 In the center of the Level 1 Floor Plan, click to specify the stair run start point, move the cursor vertically upward until the stair risers are complete, and click to specify the end of the stair run.

5 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 6 On the View Toolbar, click .

When you created these stairs, the slope was calculated automatically. In the steps that follow, you create a set of stairs using the stair calculator to define the stair slope.

242 | Chapter 8 Stairs

Create a set of stairs using the stair calculator
7 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. 8 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Stairs. 9 On the Design Bar, click Stairs Properties. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box, select Industrial and Assembly for Type, and click Edit/New. 11 In the Type Properties dialog box, click Duplicate. 12 In the Name dialog box, enter Industrial and Assembly - Calculated Slope, and click OK. 13 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, click Edit for Calculation Rules. 14 In the Stair Calculator dialog box, select Use Stair Calculator for slope calculation. The Stair Calculator computes actual tread depth using the following Calculation Rule equation: X * Rise + Y * Depth = Z X is the value to multiply the actual riser height indicated by the stair properties; Y is the value to multiply the actual tread depth, and Z is the result that lies within threshold minimum and maximum values range based on either design standards or building codes. 15 Enter 680.0 mm for Z, enter 695.0 mm for Maximum Result for Stair Calculator, and enter 670.0 mm for Minimum Result for Stair Calculator. 16 Click OK. 17 In the Type Properties dialog box, click OK. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK. 19 To the right of the stairs you created previously, click to specify the stair run start point, and move the cursor vertically upward until the stair risers are complete. NOTE When specifying the stair run starting point, try to align it with the bottom of the stairs you created previously. This allows you to make a better comparison of the slope when you view the stairs together in a 3D view at the end of the exercise.

20 After all the risers have been created, click to specify the stair run end point. 21 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. Notice the stairs created using the stair calculator have a longer run than the first set of stairs you created. 22 On the View menu, click Zoom  ➤  Zoom in Region, and draw a zoom region around both sets of stairs. 23 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 24 On both sets of stairs, add dimensions to the bottom tread and the stair run as shown.

Creating Stairs | 243

25 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 26 Select the right stair run, Industrial and Assembly - Calculated Slope. 27 On the Options Bar, click .

28 In the Element Properties dialog box, notice the Actual Tread Depth is 332.2 mm. Within this project, the project units are set to display length dimension values on screen rounded to the nearest 1 mm. Even more exact dimension values are displayed to the nearest .1 mm where appropriate in the Element Properties dialog box. In this case, the actual tread depth dimension is 332.2 mm; it becomes 332 mm when rounded to the nearest 1 mm in the drawing area. The actual tread depth is determined by using the following Calculation Rule equation derivation: Tread = (Z - X * Riser) / Y Substituting with the current values (X = 2, Y = 1, Z = 680 mm and Riser = 173.9 mm) yields: Tread = (680 - (2 * 173.9))/1 Tread = (680 - 347.8) Tread = 332.2 mm 29 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK. 30 On the View Toolbar, click 31 On the View Toolbar, click . and spin the model as shown.

244 | Chapter 8 Stairs

Notice the difference between the slope of the two stairs. 32 On the File menu, click Close. You can close the project file without saving your changes. This completes the Working with the Stair Calculator exercise. This also completes the Stairs lesson.

Creating Stairs | 245

246 | Chapter 8 Stairs

Walls

9

247

Creating Walls
In this lesson, you learn about walls. Sketch wall segments, work with compound walls, and create new wall types. Create curtain and foundation walls, join walls to floors, and assign wall top and bottom attachments.

Sketching Walls
In this exercise, you use sketching tools to draw and modify straight and arc wall segments, and then add a floor with an opening.

Draw the first exterior wall segment
1 On the File menu, click New ➤ Project.
■ ■ ■ ■

In the New Project dialog box, under Template file, click Browse. In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog box, click the training files icon. Select the m_Tutorial_Default.rte file located in the Metric folder, and click Open. In the New Project dialog box, click OK.

2 Zoom in on the center of the viewing window. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. 4 Specify the wall segment start point, and drag the cursor to the right 2900 mm.

5 Click to specify the wall segment endpoint and select the dimension. 6 Enter 3000 mm for the new horizontal dimension.

7 Press ENTER.

The wall segment length is updated with the new dimension.

Draw the second exterior wall segment
8 Specify the right endpoint of the first wall segment as the second wall segment start point.

9 Drag the cursor down 2100 mm, and click to specify the wall segment endpoint.

Both vertical and horizontal dimensions display.

248 | Chapter 9 Walls

Draw the third and fourth exterior wall segments
10 Specify the lower end of the second wall segment as the third wall segment start point. 11 Press and hold SHIFT, drag the cursor to the right 2400 mm, and click to specify the third wall segment endpoint.

NOTE Hold down SHIFT as you drag the cursor to constrain your drawing direction orthogonally. 12 Specify the right end of the third wall segment as the fourth wall segment start point. 13 Hold down SHIFT, drag the cursor up 2100 mm, and click to specify the fourth wall segment endpoint.

Stretch the fourth exterior wall segment
14 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 15 Select the fourth wall segment and select the upper drag control.

Observe that the first wall segment has an assigned lock icon that references the alignment of the first wall segment centerline and the fourth wall segment endpoint. 16 Drag the cursor up to 3600 mm.

Only the fourth wall segment is stretched. 17 Select the drag control again, and drag the cursor down to 2100 mm. 18 Click the first wall segment lock icon to lock the alignment of the first wall segment centerline and the fourth wall segment endpoint.

Creating Walls | 249

19 Select the drag control again, and drag the cursor up to 2900 mm.

Observe that the first wall segment centerline and the fourth wall segment endpoint maintain their alignment. The second wall segment stretched as well to accommodate the new position of the first wall segment. Locking the alignment ensures that this relationship between wall segments is maintained.

Draw the fifth and sixth exterior wall segments
20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. 21 On the Options Bar, select Chain. 22 Specify the upper end of the fourth wall segment as the fifth wall segment start point. 23 Drag the cursor to the right 5500 mm, and click to specify the fifth wall segment endpoint.

24 Drag the cursor down 5500 mm, and click to specify the sixth wall segment endpoint.

250 | Chapter 9 Walls

Draw the seventh, eighth, and ninth exterior wall segments
25 Drag the cursor to the left 7000 mm, and click to specify the seventh wall segment endpoint.

26 Drag the cursor down 2100 mm, and click to specify the eighth wall segment endpoint.

27 Drag the cursor to the left 3900 mm, and click to specify the ninth wall segment endpoint.

Move the eighth wall segment
28 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the eighth wall segment. 29 Drag the cursor to the right until the centerline of the eighth wall segment aligns with the fourth wall segment centerline.

Creating Walls | 251

30 Click the eighth wall segment lock icon to lock the alignment of the eighth wall segment centerline and the fourth wall segment centerline. 31 Select the eighth wall segment, and drag the cursor to the right 2100 mm to specify the new wall segment location

Observe that the eighth wall segment centerline and the fourth wall segment centerline maintain their alignment. The third, fifth, seventh, and ninth wall segments are stretched as well to accommodate the new position of the eighth wall segment. Locking the alignment ensures that this relationship between wall segments is maintained.

Draw an arc wall segment
32 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. 33 On the Options Bar, click .

34 Specify the left end of the ninth wall segment as the arc start point.

252 | Chapter 9 Walls

35 Specify the left end of the first wall segment as the arc endpoint. NOTE Do not snap the cursor to 180 degrees.

36 Move the cursor along the preview arc wall, and click to place the arc wall. 37 Select the radius value, and enter 4900 mm.

38 Press ENTER.

Creating Walls | 253

Move wall segments by modifying dimensions
39 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the fourth wall segment. 40 Select the 3200 mm dimension value, and enter 4000.

41 Press ENTER.

254 | Chapter 9 Walls

Both the fourth and eighth wall segments are shifted 800 mm to the right.

Draw a diagonal exterior wall segment
42 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. 43 Specify the midpoint of the fifth wall segment as the diagonal wall segment start point.

44 Specify the midpoint of the sixth wall segment as the diagonal wall segment endpoint.

45 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 46 On the Toolbar, click .

47 Select the left side of the fifth wall segment as the first wall segment to trim.

48 Select the diagonal wall segment as the wall segment to trim to. 49 Select the lower side of the sixth wall segment as the next wall segment to trim.

Creating Walls | 255

50 Select the diagonal wall segment as the wall segment to trim to.

Draw a floor by picking walls
51 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Floor, and then click Pick Walls. 52 Place the cursor over one of the walls, press TAB, and click to select the entire chain of walls.

All of the wall segments are highlighted. 53 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

Sketch a rectangular floor cutout
54 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Opening. 55 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box, select the first option, and click OK. 56 Place the cursor over the edge of the floor until it highlights, and click.

256 | Chapter 9 Walls

57 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 58 On the Options Bar, click .

59 Using the following illustration as a guide, specify an approximate location for the first corner of the rectangular floor opening.

60 Specify the second corner of the rectangular floor opening, creating a 1800 mm X 3000 mm floor opening.

TIP The cursor snaps to dimension values based on the zoom of the view. To get the rectangle to the exact dimensions, you may need to zoom in. 61 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 62 On the Toolbar, click .

63 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 64 On the Toolbar, click .

65 In the Dynamic View dialog box, select Spin, and then, while holding the left mouse button down, move the cursor in the viewing window to orient the view as shown.

Creating Walls | 257

This completes the Sketching Walls exercise.

Working with Compound Walls
In this exercise, you work with compound walls. Convert generic wall styles to new custom wall styles, add dimensions, edit fill patterns that display in section views, and apply surface patterns.

Dataset
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon. Open the m_Gallery.rvt file located in the Metric folder.

Access wall properties
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

2 Zoom in on the upper part of the floor plan. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Modify. 4 Select the 200 mm exterior wall.

258 | Chapter 9 Walls

Exterior . click . Click in the Material field. and in the Materials dialog box. Enter 135 mm for Thickness. Click OK. click Insert twice. and click Up. click . click Click OK. Click in the Material field.GRG (Glass Reinforced Gypsum). under Layers. and select Finish 1 [4]. Click in the Material field. click . ■ 14 In row 3. click Edit/New. 6 In the Element Properties dialog box. select Wood .5 On the Options Bar. under Name. click Duplicate. 10 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. ■ Creating Walls | 259 . select Finishes . ■ 15 In row 5. and select Structure [1].Interior . enter 200 mm Stud Wall for Name. Click OK. Enter 15 mm for Thickness.Exterior Insulation and Finish System. and click OK. and in the Materials dialog box. 11 Select row 2. select Finishes . 13 In row 1.EIFS . do the following: ■ ■ Click in the Function field. . under Name. and select Finish 2 [5]. do the following: ■ ■ Click in the Function field. 7 In the Type Properties dialog box. do the following: ■ ■ Click in the Function field. and in the Materials dialog box.Stud Layer. click Edit for Structure. Add two layers to the new wall type 9 In the Type Properties dialog box. 8 In the Name dialog box. and click Down twice. Enter 50 mm for Thickness. 12 Select row 3. under Name.

21 Select Generic . Assign the new wall style to the remaining exterior walls 20 In the Project Browser. click Dimension. 22 In the Type Selector. 25 On the Options Bar. 24 On the Design Bar. expand Walls. 19 Zoom in on the left end of the new 200 mm Stud wall segment. 26 Select the upper horizontal wall segment centerline as the first dimension point. click Detail Level ➤ Medium. Add a wall centerline dimension 23 Zoom in on the lower part of the floor plan. and expand Basic Wall.16 Click Preview. The style of the selected walls is updated in the building model.200mm. 17 Click OK three times. select Basic Wall : 200 mm Stud Wall. 260 | Chapter 9 Walls . Specify the view detail level 18 On the View Control Bar. and click Select All Instances. right-click. expand Families. select Wall centerlines for Prefer.

select Wall faces for Prefer. Creating Walls | 261 . The vertical wall centerline to centerline dimension displays.27 Select the lower horizontal wall segment centerline as the second dimension point. Add a wall face dimension 29 On the Options Bar. 30 Select the upper horizontal wall segment exterior face as the first dimension point. 28 Specify a point to the left as the dimension location point.

262 | Chapter 9 Walls .31 Select the lower horizontal wall segment exterior face as the second dimension point. 34 Select the left vertical wall segment exterior core face as the first dimension point. select Faces of core for Prefer. The vertical wall exterior face to exterior face dimension displays. Add a wall core face dimension 33 On the Options Bar. 32 Specify a point to the right as the dimension location point.

36 Specify a point below as the dimension location point. The horizontal wall core face to core face dimension displays. Creating Walls | 263 .35 Select the right vertical wall segment exterior core face as the second dimension point.

25 for Import scale. The new Gypsum pattern is assigned to the gypsum wall board representation in section view. click OK. expand Sections (Callout 1). and click OK. click for Pattern.Create a custom gypsum fill pattern 37 In the Project Browser. 47 In the Materials dialog box. and click Open. Assign a masonry surface pattern in a 3D view 49 In the Project Browser. 42 In the New Pattern dialog box. 39 In the Fill Patterns dialog box. Enter 0. select Custom. 38 On the Settings menu. click Fill Patterns. 50 On the View Control Bar. select revit. navigate to \Program Files\Autodesk Revit Building\Data.pat. 46 In the Fill Patterns dialog box.Dense for Import. click Materials. 43 Click OK twice. and under Cut Pattern. 264 | Chapter 9 Walls . 45 In the Materials dialog box. select Gypsum. Assign the new gypsum fill pattern to a wall layer in section view 44 On the Settings menu. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line.Interior . click New. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Sand . expand 3D Views and double-click {3D}.Glass Reinforced Gypsum.GRG . select Finishes . 41 In the Import dialog box. 40 In the New Pattern dialog box. Enter Gypsum for Name. and double-click Callout of Section 3. and click Import. 48 Zoom in on the gypsum board representation in the wall section.

51 On the Settings menu, click Materials. 52 In the Materials dialog box, select Masonry - Concrete Blocks, and under Surface Pattern, click 53 In the Fill Patterns dialog box, select Model for Pattern Type, select Block 8x16, and click OK. 54 In the Materials dialog box, click OK. 55 Select the low circular wall segment. 56 On the Options Bar, click . for Pattern.

57 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 58 In the Type Properties dialog box, click Edit for Structure. 59 In the Edit Assembly dialog box, under Layers, in row 2, click 60 In the Materials dialog box, select Masonry - Concrete Blocks. 61 Click OK four times. 62 Zoom in on the low wall segment. for Material.

Align a masonry surface pattern in an elevation view
63 In the Project Browser, expand Elevations, and double-click East.

64 Zoom in on the right retaining wall.

Creating Walls | 265

65 Zoom in on the upper left corner of the wall. 66 On the Toolbar, click .

67 Select the building wall edge as the alignment reference.

68 Select the CMU edge as the line to align.

The upper left corner of the CMU pattern is now aligned with the upper left corner of the retaining wall. This completes the Working with Compound Walls exercise.

Working with Vertically Compound Walls
In this exercise, you modify vertically compound walls and create and modify wall layers in sections view.

266 | Chapter 9 Walls

Dataset
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon. Open the c_Townhouse.rvt file located in the Common folder.

Access the exterior wall properties
1 On the Settings menu, click Project Units. 2 In the Project Units dialog box, click the button under Format next to Length. 3 In the Format dialog box, select Millimeters for Units, and click OK. 4 Click OK in the Project Units dialog box. 5 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the right front exterior wall.

6 On the Options Bar, click

.

7 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 8 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, click Edit for Structure. 9 If the Preview pane is not displayed on the left side of the Edit Assembly dialog box, click Preview. 10 On the Preview pane, ensure that Section: Modify type attributes is selected for View.

The wall section displays at its default sample height of 6096 mm.

Creating Walls | 267

Assign split regions to the wall section
11 Right-click in the preview window and click Zoom In Region. 12 Zoom in on the bottom of the wall section. 13 Under Modify Vertical Structure (Section Preview only), click Split Region. 14 Specify a point up 300 mm from the bottom of the wall on Layer 1: Masonry - Brick as the first split point.

15 Specify a point up 300 mm from the first split point on Layer 1: Masonry - Brick as the second split point.

Merge split regions in the wall section
16 Under Modify Vertical Structure (Section Preview only), click Merge Regions. 17 Select the upper split line as the region to merge.

268 | Chapter 9 Walls

The previously split regions are now merged.

Adjust the split line location
18 Under Modify Vertical Structure (Section Preview only), click Modify. 19 Select the split line, and click the 300 mm dimension value. 20 Enter 3680 mm.

Creating Walls | 269

21 Press ENTER. 22 Zoom out on the wall section.

The split line now occurs 3680 mm above the bottom of the wall.

Adjust the sample wall height
23 Scroll up to view the top of the wall. 24 Move your cursor over the top of the wall and press TAB until the outer boundary of the wall is highlighted (watch the Status Bar in the lower-left corner of the interface to be sure you are highlighting the outer boundary), and then click to display the lock icon and the 6096 mm dimension value. 25 Click the 6096 mm dimension value, and enter 5500 mm.

270 | Chapter 9 Walls

26 Press ENTER. The sample wall height is now 5500 mm.

Add another split line
27 Zoom in on the existing split line. 28 Under Modify Vertical Structure (Section Preview only), click Split Region. 29 Specify a point up 240 mm from the existing split line on Layer 1: Masonry - Brick as the new split point.

The new split line now occurs 240 mm above the previous split line.

Creating Walls | 271

Add a new layer to the wall style
30 Under Layers, select row 1, and click Insert. 31 In row 1, select Finish 1 [4] for Function. 32 Select for Material.

33 In the Materials dialog box, under Name, select Masonry Brick - Soldier Course, and click OK. 34 In the Edit Assembly dialog box, under Layers, select row 1. 35 Under Modify Vertical Structure (Section Preview only), click Assign Layers. 36 On the Preview pane, select the 240 mm high region between the split lines as shown. Place the cursor at the bottom of the region to select it.

37 Click OK three times. 38 Zoom in on the front brick wall.

The soldier course displays in the exterior wall.

272 | Chapter 9 Walls

Specify allowance for layer extension
39 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the front brick wall. 40 On the Options Bar, click .

41 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 42 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, click Edit for Structure. 43 In the Edit Assembly dialog box, on the Preview pane, zoom in on the bottom of the wall. 44 Under Modify Vertical Structure (Section Preview only), click Modify. 45 Select the outer boundary of the wall at the masonry brick layer.

46 Click the lock icon to unlock the masonry brick layer for layer extension. 47 Click OK three times.

Modify extended layers
48 In the Project Browser, expand Sections (Callout 1), and double-click Wall Detail. 49 Select the brick wall.

50 Using the drag control at the bottom of the brick wall, drag it down into the concrete wall approximately as shown.

Creating Walls | 273

51 On the Tools menu, click Join Geometry. 52 Select the brick layer of the wall as the first layer to join.

53 Select the concrete foundation wall as the second layer to join.

The concrete foundation wall is cut away to accommodate the brick course.

54 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the brick wall. 55 On the Options Bar, click .

56 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Constraints, enter -150 mm for Base Extension Distance, and click OK.

274 | Chapter 9 Walls

Add a wall sweep
57 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the brick wall. 58 On the Options Bar, click .

59 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 60 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, click Edit for Structure. 61 In the Edit Assembly dialog box, under Modify Vertical Structure (Section Preview only), click Sweeps. 62 In the Wall Sweeps dialog box, click Add and do the following:
■ ■

Select Sill : Sill for Profile. In the Material field, click Concrete. Click OK. , and in the Materials dialog box, under Name, select Concrete - Cast-in-Place

■ ■ ■ ■

Enter 3860 mm for Distance. Select Base for From. Select Exterior for Side. Enter -90 mm for Offset.

63 Click OK. 64 On the Preview pane, zoom in on the applied wall sweep in the wall section.

65 Click OK three times. 66 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), under 3D Views, double-click 3D perspective. 67 Zoom in on the front wall, and view the sill.

Creating Walls | 275

This completes the Working with Vertically Compound Walls exercise.

Joining Walls to Floors
In this exercise, you work with joining walls and floors in section view.

Dataset
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon. Open the c_Floor_wall_joins.rvt file located in the Common folder.

Draw the level 2 50 mmx255 mm wood joist floor
1 On the Settings menu, click Project Units. 2 In the Project Units dialog box, click the button under Format next to Length. 3 In the Format dialog box, select Millimeters for Units, and click OK. 4 Click OK in the Project Units dialog box. 5 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2.

6 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Floor. 7 On the Options Bar, select Extend into wall (to core). 8 For all four walls, select the outer edge of the wall core. Use the flip arrows to toggle the selection. TIP You can select each wall or use the TAB key to select the chain of walls.

276 | Chapter 9 Walls

9 On the Design Bar, click Floor Properties. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box, select Wood Joist 255 mm for Type, and click OK. 11 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 12 When prompted to cut the geometry from the walls, click Yes. 13 In the Project Browser, expand Sections, and double-click Section 1. 14 Zoom in on the wall at Level 2.

The level 2 floor extends into the wall structural layer.

Draw the level 1 50 mmx255 mm wood joist floor
15 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Floor. 17 On the Options Bar, select Extend into wall (to core). 18 Select all four walls on the centerline (click each wall while pressing Ctrl).

19 On the Design Bar, click Floor Properties. 20 In the Element Properties dialog box, verify that the Type is Wood Joist 255mm, and click OK. 21 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 22 When prompted to attach the walls to the bottom of the floor, click Yes. 23 In the Project Browser, expand Sections, and double-click Section 1. 24 Zoom in on the wall at Level 1.

Creating Walls | 277

The foundation wall is trimmed by the level 1 floor. This completes the Joining Walls to Floors exercise.

Working with Foundation Walls
In this exercise, you create and modify concrete foundation walls and footings.

Dataset
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon. Open the c_Wall_Functions.rvt file located in the Common folder.

1 On the Settings menu, click Project Units. 2 In the Project Units dialog box, click the button under Format next to Length. 3 In the Format dialog box, select Millimeters for Units, and click OK. 4 Click OK in the Project Units dialog box. 5 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

6 On the View menu, click View Properties. 7 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Graphics, select T.O. Footing for Underlay, and click OK. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. 9 In the Type Selector, select Basic Wall : Foundation - 305 mm Concrete. 10 On the Options Bar, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Select T.O. Footing for Depth. Select Finish Face: Exterior for Loc Line. Select Chain. Enter 305mm for Offset.

11 Specify the outside upper left corner of the building as the first foundation wall segment start point, and then specify the outside lower left corner of the building as the first foundation wall segment endpoint.

278 | Chapter 9 Walls

12 Proceed in a counterclockwise direction and draw the remaining five foundation wall segments. Snap to the outside corners at each foundation wall segment endpoint. 13 In the Project Browser, expand 3D Views, and double-click {3D}.

Create a new 610 mm concrete footing wall type
14 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click T.O. Footing.

Creating Walls | 279

15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. 16 In the Type Selector, select Basic Wall : Foundation - 305 mm Concrete. 17 On the Options Bar, click .

18 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 19 In the Type Properties dialog box, click Duplicate. 20 In the Name dialog box, enter Foundation - 610mm Concrete for Name, and click OK. 21 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, click Edit for Structure. 22 In the Edit Assembly dialog box, under Layers, in row 2, enter 610 mm for Thickness.

23 Click OK three times.

Draw the 610 mm concrete footing
24 On the Options Bar, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Select Unconnected for Depth and enter 305 mm. Select Finish Face: Exterior for Loc Line. Select Chain. Enter 460 mm for Offset.

25 Specify the outside upper left corner of the foundation as the first footing wall segment start point and then specify the outside lower left corner of the foundation as the first footing wall segment endpoint. If a warning about the objects not being visible in the current view is displayed, close the warning dialog.

280 | Chapter 9 Walls

26 Proceed in a counterclockwise direction and draw the remaining five footing wall segments. Snap to the outside corners at each footing wall segment endpoint.

27 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click {3D}.

The concrete foundation walls and footings are now complete. This completes the Working with Foundation Walls exercise.

Working with Wall Wraps
In this exercise, you assign different wall wrap conditions to a window opening.

Dataset
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon. Open the c_Wall Functions.rvt file located in the Common folder.

Creating Walls | 281

Assign window wall closure parameters
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. 2 Zoom in on one of the level 1 windows.

Neither the interior nor the exterior wall components wrap around the window opening. 3 Select the window. 4 On the Options Bar, click .

5 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 6 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, select By host for Wall Closure. 7 Click OK twice.

Assign an interior wall wrap parameter
8 Select the wall. 9 On the Options Bar, click .

10 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 11 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, click Edit for Structure. 12 In the Edit Assembly dialog box, under Default Wrapping, select Interior for At Inserts. 13 Click OK three times.

The interior metal stud wall with gypsum board now wraps around the window opening.

Assign an exterior wall wrap parameter
14 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the wall. 15 On the Options Bar, click .

16 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 17 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, click Edit for Structure. 18 In the Edit Assembly dialog box, under Default Wrapping, select Exterior for At Inserts. Both would wrap gypsum and brick. Exterior wraps only the brick. 19 Click OK three times.

282 | Chapter 9 Walls

The exterior brick wall now wraps around the window opening. This completes the Working with Wall Wraps exercise.

Assigning Wall Bottom and Top Attachments
In this exercise, you assign wall bottom attachments to a curved floor in 3D view and wall top attachments to reference planes in elevation view.

Dataset
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon. Open the c_Attach_Top_Bottom.rvt file located in the Common folder.

Attach wall bottoms to floor surface
1 Select all four wall segments.

2 On the Options Bar, click Attach for Top/Base, and select Base for Attach Wall. 3 Select the floor as the object to attach to.

The walls are projected down to attach to the floor.

Creating Walls | 283

6 On the Options Bar. The south wall is projected up to attach to the first reference plane.Attach wall tops to reference planes 4 In the Project Browser. 5 Select the south wall. and select Top for Attach Wall. click Attach for Top/Base. and double-click South. 7 Select the first reference plane as the object to attach to. expand Views (all). 284 | Chapter 9 Walls . expand Elevations.

11 Select the second reference plane as the object to attach to. click Attach for Top/Base.8 In the Project Browser. double-click North. The north wall is projected up to attach to the second reference plane. Creating Walls | 285 . 10 On the Options Bar. 9 Select the north wall. under Elevations. and select Top for Attach Wall.

This completes the Assigning Wall Bottom and Top Attachments exercise. expand 3D Views and double-click {3D}. This also completes the Walls lesson. 286 | Chapter 9 Walls .12 In the Project Browser.

A typical curtain system comprises a wall. they can usually include mullions and have glazed panels. you select the grid. This affects the entire curtain system. 287 . you need to select a panel. To switch panel types. You can add curtain systems with the wall command. they can define space and separate the exterior from the interior. curtain systems are usually assembled on site as a single unit. Unlike windows. and mullions. and they are not windows. Like windows. to resize the system. or you can use a specific curtain system command. They are typically not load-bearing and are not cut for doors or windows. and you can change these elements individually. For example. To change grids. Like walls. panel. you need to change the length of the wall.Curtain Systems 10 Curtain systems are not walls. grid lines.

expand Floor Plans. and double-click Ground Floor. Open the m_Curtain_Walls. 1 In the Project Browser.rvt file located in the Metric folder. click Wall. This floor edge will be the entrance to the building. Creating a curtain system using the wall command 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Creating an Entrance In this exercise. expand Views (all). click Open. This type of curtain system is also referred to as a curtain wall. click the Training Files icon. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. click Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. 288 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . 4 On the Type Selector. 5 Start the curtain system where shown. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 2 Zoom in on Grid F where it meets the arc in the floor. you create a curtain system using the wall command.Flat Curtain System In this lesson. you further develop the building information model by creating a flat curtain system at the entrance of the model.

6 Move the cursor down along the edge of the floor and finish at the outside face of the exterior wall as shown. Flat Curtain System | 289 . 7 Zoom in on the join between the curtain system and the exterior wall.

Note that a curtain system created from the wall command has similar properties to other walls: base constraint. 290 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . You want the curtain system to attach to the roof. 12 Under Constraints. specify Up to level: TOP OF ROOF for Top Constraint. top and base attachments. 11 Select the curtain system and click .8 In the Project Browser. The curtain system is now at the same height as the other existing curtain systems. 10 Zoom in on the curtain system you just added. click Orient ➤ Northeast. and click OK. expand 3D Views. top constraint. and room bounding. 13 Specify 1200 for Top Offset. expand Views (all). 9 On the View menu. and double-click Southeast Isometric.

You are going to subdivide the panel into several smaller panels. Adding curtain grids 14 In the Project Browser. 21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 16 Place the elevation symbol in front of the curtain wall and click Modify on the Design Bar. 15 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Flat Curtain System | 291 . using curtain grids. and click Rename. 20 In the drawing area. 19 Enter Entrance Elevation. double-click GROUND FLOOR.Right now. and click OK. 22 Place a horizontal curtain grid 1200 mm above the ground floor level line. under Floor Plans. 18 In the Project Browser. click Elevation. the curtain system is a single glazed panel.a. and resize the crop boundary as shown. double-click the elevation symbol arrow to open the new elevation view. right-click on the elevation name Elevation 1 . click Curtain Grid. 17 Click the elevation arrow to display the crop boundary.

and click OK. click Modify. click Copy to Clipboard. 27 On the Edit menu. 28 On the Edit menu. The selected grid lines are now at each of these levels. 26 Hold CTRL and select the 3 grid lines you just placed. TIP To be sure that the curtain grid is at the midpoint of the panel. SIXTH FLOOR. Click to create a vertical grid.23 Place another grid 1500 mm above the first grid. FOURTH FLOOR. 29 In the Select Levels dialog box. 31 Place the cursor on grid 2 so that it highlights. click Curtain Grid. hold CTRL and select SECOND FLOOR. click Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 292 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . one larger than the other. 24 Place another grid so that it snaps to the SECOND FLOOR level line. 33 On the Design Bar. 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. THIRD FLOOR. 25 On the Design Bar. watch the tooltips and the Status Bar. FIFTH FLOOR. and SEVENTH FLOOR. 32 Move the cursor along the GROUND FLOOR level (left of the vertical grid line) until it snaps to the midpoint of the larger vertical panel. This divides the curtain wall vertically into 2 panels. Click to place another grid line. or press CTRL + C on the keyboard.

and on the Options Bar. 37 Click in any white space to exit the editor. and then you replace that panel with a curtain system door panel. remove the horizontal segment that intersects the vertical segment removed in the previous step. you add a doorway to the curtain system. you set up a doorway on a curtain panel. The segment line style changes to dashed. click Add or Remove Segments. and then select the segment above it. 36 Select the lowest segment of the left grid line.Next. 38 Using the same method. 35 Select the left vertical grid line. Flat Curtain System | 293 . You enter an editor that lets you select segments of the grid line to remove them. Adding the doorway 34 Zoom in to the ground floor level in the Entrance Elevation view. The two segments are removed. You do not use the Door command. Instead.

43 Delete the dimensions. 41 Place 4 vertical grid lines as shown. 47 Click the horizontal grid line between the smaller panels. The line style changes from dashed to solid to indicate a grid segment has been added. Use the following picture as a guide. 294 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . 44 When the warning about locked dimensions being deleted displays. 40 On the Options Bar. select One Segment. You now have two 1800 mm wide panels between smaller rectangular panels. 46 Click Add or Remove Segments on the Options Bar. 42 Place dimensions as shown. and lock them.39 On the Design Bar. 45 Select the horizontal grid line that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings to view the dimensions. click Curtain Grid. click OK to leave the curtain grids constrained. You are going to add more segments to an existing curtain grid. Do not click between the 1800 mm panels.

This changes the graphics style of the view. click M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl: Store Front Double Door. 48 When the grids are placed (line style have changed to solid). Now. 54 On the Design Bar.rfa.TIP The middle grid lines are centered between the long vertical grid above them. click Modify. You will have to press TAB to highlight it. The panel changes to a double door. click Load From Library ➤ Load Family. 49 On the File menu. and click Wireframe. Changing panels 58 Zoom in to the FIFTH FLOOR level. and click Open. you change panels in front of ceilings from glazed to solid. you replace some of the transparent panels with solid ones. 57 On the View Control Bar. on the new curtain system you added. not as curtain panels. These panels schedule as doors. 56 In the Project Browser. you replace the 2 larger 1800 mm panels with curtain system doors. 53 Use the same method to replace the other panel with a double door. click in any white space to exit the editor. Flat Curtain System | 295 . under Elevations. double-click Entrance Elevation. Next. Next. They are part of the curtain panel category. select M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl. Watch the Status Bar to be sure you are highlighting the panel. 55 In the Project Browser. To get the horizontal grid to display between the vertical grids. 51 Select the left 1800 mm panel. click once to the right of the long grid and then click once to the left of it. click . double-click GROUND FLOOR to see the plan view door swings of the curtain wall doors. 52 On the Type Selector. 50 In the Doors folder. under Floor Plans.

and Material specifies the shading and patterning. and the solid panels display in white. 62 Click Edit/New to open the Type Properties of the panel. click Wireframe for Graphics Style.59 Select one of the panels below the FIFTH FLOOR level line. This completes the exercise for creating an entrance. 65 On the View Control Bar. 63 Click OK twice to close the Type Properties and Element Properties dialog boxes. 64 Replace the two adjacent glazed panels with solid panels. Thickness specifies the depth of the panel. The glazed panels display in blue. The glazed panel is changed to a solid panel. 296 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . click . 61 With the panel still selected. click Shading with Edges for Graphics Style. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System In this exercise. The Offset property specifies the distance from the centerline of the curtain wall. you place mullions on curtain panel grids. Name the file m_rvt8_Curtain_Walls-in_progress. click Save As. 67 Change the remaining glazed panels in front of ceilings to solid panels. click System Panel : Solid.rvt. 66 On the View Control Bar. 68 On the File menu. 60 On the Type Selector.

so you remove them next. Mullions can change their joins to other mullions. You are going to change some mullion joins. select Grid Line Segment. Now all empty grid segments have mullions on them. however. 9 Delete the mullions below them.Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. select All Empty Segments. 6 On the Options Bar. click Mullion. 3 Place a mullion on the grid segment at the ground floor immediately to the right of the right set of doors. because they reduce the doors’ size by their widths. 2 On the Options Bar. 7 Place the cursor on any empty grid segment on the curtain system and click. there are a few that you do not want. select Entire Grid Line. 4 On the Options Bar. Removing mullions 8 Zoom in on the set of doors. 5 Place a mullion on the horizontal grid that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. The two mullions below the doors are not necessary. Flat Curtain System | 297 .

298 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . The bottom of the mullion meets the top of the horizontal mullion. Two mullion join controls display. 11 Select the vertical mullion above and between the set of double doors. click Hidden Line for Graphics Style.Changing mullion joins 10 On the View Control Bar. 12 Click the lower mullion join control. The top of the vertical mullion now meets the bottom of the horizontal mullion above. 13 Click the top mullion control.

9 Start the wall by clicking at the left edge of the circle at the centerline of the intersecting wall. click Modify. 6 Under Constraints. Curved Curtain System In this lesson. you add a curtain system using the wall command. double-click Southeast Isometric. 8 On the Options Bar. You also create a custom curtain panel for the system. 4 On the Type Selector.TIP After selecting the vertical mullion. 1 In the Project Browser. 15 In the Project Browser. Adding a Curved Curtain System In this exercise. you can also right-click and select Break at Join from the Join Conditions menu to break the mullion at both joins. you add both predefined and custom mullions to the system. 7 Enter 1200 for Top Offset. 2 Zoom in on the circular space above the entrance that was just completed. The curtain wall is sketched as an arc. click Wall. double-click Ground Floor. This completes the exercise for adding mullions. and click OK. 16 Save the file. You learned how to create a basic curtain wall system and how to subdivide it with grids. you create a curved curtain system near the entrance of the model that was just completed. Finally. click . Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. click Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. you learned how to add mullions and change their joins. specify Up to level: FIFTH FLOOR for Top Constraint. Finally. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 5 Click . You also learned how to modify grids and change panels. This also completes the lesson on creating a flat curtain system. Curved Curtain System | 299 . 14 On the Design Bar. 10 Place the second point at the lower right side. under Floor Plans.

14 Continue to place more grids by using the snap points on the arc. 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Next. You are going to use one of these snaps points. Divide the halves into quarters. Do not add a grid on the GROUND FLOOR level. and snap the cursor to each level line and click to add horizontal curtain grids. 300 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . The curtain grid command snaps only to the curved arc. The curtain wall displays as one flat panel between the first and second points placed. click Curtain Grid. you place grids on the system. double-click East. 16 Zoom in on the cylinder. and then sixteenths. 15 In the Project Browser. Watch the Status Bar to ensure you are at the midpoint. under Elevations. 13 Snap the cursor to the midpoint of the curved arc and click. eighths.11 Finish the arc by clicking at the top of the arc.

Remember to click from the selection except Curtain Walls. 19 On the Type Selector. to filter out all other elements 20 Save the file. Next you create a custom panel and add it to the system. you change some panels in the system.17 On the Design Bar. click Modify. you create a custom curtain panel and place it into the curved curtain system. Using walls as panels 18 Using a selection box. This completes the first exercise for creating a curved system. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel In this exercise. click Basic Wall: Generic . Next. Curved Curtain System | 301 . select the bottom layer of panels.300mm.

2 In the Metric templates folder. 6 On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. click New ➤ Family. 5 On the Design Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. . and on the Options Bar. and click . 10 Under Identity Data. under Elevations. click . click 12 Sketch 2 lines that crisscross the extrusion. click Model Lines. enter 100 for Depth. 9 Select the extrusion. and click OK.Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 3 In the Project Browser. click Lines. 7 Start the sketch at the upper lefthand reference line intersection and finish at the lower righthand reference line intersection. double-click Metric Curtain Wall Panel. specify Glass for Subcategory.rft. 8 On the Design Bar. double-click Exterior. 4 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. 302 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . 1 On the File menu. 11 On the Design Bar.

Solid. All fifth floor panels are selected. 21 Select the curved arc curtain wall. right-click and select Select Panels along Horizontal Grid from the Select Panels menu. All fourth floor panels are selected. 26 On the Type Selector.13 On the Design Bar. 15 Close the family file by clicking Close on the File menu. Curved Curtain System | 303 . under Floor Plans.Pattern. click Modify. click System Panel . 14 On the File menu. select Curtain Panel . click curved curtain system. click Save As. 19 Highlight a panel in the arc. .Pattern. All the panels change to the custom panel you created. and then click . 20 On the Type Selector. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. and click Flip Orientation. 22 Right-click. 25 Highlight a panel in the arc.rfa. double-click FIFTH FLOOR. and save the family as Curtain Panel . double-click FOURTH FLOOR. 18 In the Project Browser. 23 On the View toolbar. 17 Load the Curtain Panel .rfa family. 24 In the Project Browser.Pattern. All the panels change to the solid panel. right-click and select Select Panels along Horizontal Grid from the Select Panels menu. under Floor Plans. and return to your project file. Hold Shift and spin the model so that you can see the The curved curtain system’s structure now matches that of the main part of the building. 16 On the File menu.

This completes the exercise for adding a custom curtain panel. 7 Specify Mullion for Profile Usage. enter 8 for Sides. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. click . Creating a custom mullion in the Family Editor 4 On the File menu. 27 Save the file. and click OK. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel In this exercise. under Elevations.The finished arc wall should look like the following picture. 8 On the Design Bar. For vertical mullions. and select Radius and specify 50 mm for the radius. double-click East. you use the Family Editor to create a custom mullion. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Family Category and Parameters. 304 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . 3 Select each horizontal grid line on the curved curtain panel. 9 On the Options Bar. 6 On the Settings menu. click Lines.rft. except at the GROUND FLOOR level. you add both custom and predefined mullions to the curved curtain panel. double-click Metric Profile. click Mullion. 5 In the Metric Templates folder. click New ➤ Family.

click Visibility. Curved Curtain System | 305 . 14 In the Family element visibility settings dialog box. click Modify. click Detail Component. Notice that both the starting and ending points are in the same location. 17 Open the m_Cylinder Mullion . This controls the detail level at which the mullion profile displays. and click OK. 11 On the Design Bar.rfa file from the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Families\Detail Components folder.detail. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 19 Place the detail component so that it snaps to the mullion profile as shown. clear Fine. 15 On the File menu. 18 On the Design Bar. click the Training Files icon. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Click again to specify the ending point. 12 Select the lines in the octagon.10 Place the cursor at the intersection of the reference planes and click to enter the octagon starting point. 13 On the Options Bar.

and click OK. right-click and use Select Mullions on gridline from the Select Mullions menu. 37 Click OK twice. select Circular Mullion for Family. click Save As. 42 Highlight a mullion in the arc. so next you remove the unwanted ones. 29 Click . You have placed more mullions than you want. select All Empty Segments. 35 Enter Cylinder Mullion for Name. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 306 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . 32 In the Element Properties dialog box. double-click Southeast Isometric. 34 In the Type Properties dialog box. The detail component becomes the true representation in plan view. 40 On the Design Bar. and click DELETE. and click Visibility. 30 On the Modelling tab. 39 Click on any grid line in the entry cylinder. specify Cylinder Mullion : Cylinder Mullion for Profile. 21 Select the detail component. 25 Close the family file by clicking Close on the File menu.20 On the Design Bar. click Modify.rfa family. 27 Load the Cylinder Mullion. and return to the project file. 36 Under Construction. After the new profile is loaded. and click OK. 31 Click . clear Coarse and Medium. it can be added as a mullion type. 23 On the File menu. double-click GROUND FLOOR. 24 Save the family as Cylinder Mullion. click Modify to exit placing mullions. 22 In the Family element visibility settings dialog box. click Duplicate. click Mullion. 28 In the Project Browser. and spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. 33 Click Edit/New. under 3D Views.rfa. 41 In the Project Browser. 26 On the File menu. 38 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans.

Sloped Glazings Sloped glazings are useful when you are creating skylights and other glazed roofing systems. and press TAB. and you can click to select them all. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. 1 In the Project Browser. and a ruled curtain system. under Floor Plans. select Defines slope. make custom curtain panels and mullions. 5 On the Options Bar. In this lesson. This completes the exercise for adding mullions. and then apply those custom elements to the system. 2 Zoom in on the skylight at the center of the building between Grids 2 and 3 and D and E. you create additional types of curtain systems: a sloped glazing system. place the cursor on the inside face of one of the walls. All the inside faces highlight. you learned to create a curved curtain system. 6 Select the inside faces of the base walls. Additional Curtain Systems | 307 . 4 On the Design Bar. as well as the lesson on creating a curved curtain system. TIP To chain select all the walls. double-click TOP OF ROOF. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. a storefront system.43 Save the file. Additional Curtain Systems In this lesson. click Pick Walls.

under 3D Views. 15 On the Options Bar. click Shaded with Edges for Graphics Style.7 On the Design Bar. 10 On the Design Bar. click System Family: Sloped Glazing for Family. 308 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . select Entire Grid Line. 17 On the Design Bar. Storefront System In this exercise. 13 Zoom in on the skylight. 8 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Finish Roof. click Mullion. 11 In the Project Browser. 14 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. This completes the exercise for creating a sloped glazing system. 12 On the View Control Bar. click Roof Properties. 18 On the View Control Bar. enter 600 for Base Offset From Level. 9 Under Constraints. 19 Save the file. you embed curtain walls into other walls to create a storefront system. double-click Southeast Isometric. click Hidden Line for Graphics Style. click Modify. and click OK. 16 Select the grid lines that define the edges of each panel in the sloped glazing.

select Curtain Wall : Storefront. You are going to place a storefront system in this wall. 2 Zoom in on the wall at the eastern-most area of the model. 5 On the Options Bar. 7 Sketch a curtain wall along the wall centerline to the approximate length shown. 6 Start the wall 1200 mm from one end of the wall on the wall centerline. click Wall. and enter 2400. This curtain wall cuts the original wall.Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. You can place the curtain wall right inside this wall. 4 On the Type Selector. double-click GROUND FLOOR. select Unconnected for Height. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Additional Curtain Systems | 309 . under Floor Plans.

and click . and the Spacing (Grid 1) is set to 1524 mm. 9 On the Design Bar. The Instance Parameters list includes additional parameters that define the curtain grid layout.8 Click the temporary dimension. The Grid 2 counterparts are the same but for the perpendicular direction. The Justification (Grid 1) specifies the vertical spacing at the beginning. under 3D Views. you find Number (Grid 1). Click OK. The storefront wall already has a curtain grid layout. which is specified in the type. Angle (Grid 1). even if the wall height changes. 310 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . center. For this wall. This means that the panel heights will be exactly at a 2400 mm height. 11 Zoom in on the new storefront wall. and Offset (Grid 1). 13 Click Edit/New to open the Type Properties dialog box. For more information about these curtain wall parameters. Under the Pattern heading. 12 Select the storefront wall. You see these same parameters for Grid 2. This specifies an exact length for the wall. 15 To see how these parameters can affect the wall. the Layout (Grid 1) is set to Maximum Spacing. see the Revit Building help. Justification (Grid 1). 10 In the Project Browser. This indicates that the curtain grids are placed at even intervals along the length of the curtain wall at a distance up to 1524 mm. you can look at the properties of the storefront wall. double-click Southeast Isometric. 14 After you have looked at the Pattern parameters. To see how the grid layout is defined. The Number (Grid 1) is the number of vertical curtain grids you want on the curtain instance. click Modify. The Offset (Grid 1) is the distance the spacing starts from the justification point. enter 45 for Angle (Grid 1) and 15 for Angle (Grid 2). enter 10200 mm. or end. and press ENTER. By setting the Angle (Grid 1) value. and the Spacing (Grid 2) is set to 2400 mm. you are rotating the grid lines to an angle on the face of the panel. The type parameters under the Pattern heading create the predefined layout. The Layout (Grid 2) is set to Fixed Distance. click OK to close the Type Properties dialog box and return to the Element Properties dialog box that displays the instance parameters.

click Mullion. 1 In the Project Browser. you learned how to embed a curtain wall and set up a grid layout. click Hidden Line for Graphics Style. This type of curtain system is known as a ruled curtain system. Additional Curtain Systems | 311 . 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and select All Empty Segments on the Options Bar. you create a curtain wall based on 2 lines that have been sketched at different elevations on the model. 18 Save the file. 3 On the View Control Bar. Curtain System by Lines In this exercise. 17 Select a curtain grid. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 2 Orient the view to the storefront wall you added in the last exercise.16 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. In this exercise. This completes the exercise on creating a storefront. double-click Southeast Isometric. click Curtain System ➤ Curtain System by Lines. under 3D Views.

312 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . 6 Click the highlighted line. A panel between the 2 lines is created. 7 Place the cursor at the top edge of the TOP OF ROOF level. 8 Select the highlighted line. Watch the Status Bar and Tooltips to be sure you are highlighting the thin line. and highlight the thin line. Press TAB to select the line if it does not immediately highlight.5 Place the cursor at the bottom edge of the SECOND FLOOR. making sure Thin Lines : Model Lines : Line is highlighted.

NOTE The next few steps are intended as a guide to finish the system. This completes the exercise for creating a ruled curtain system. 12 Using the midpoint curtain grid snaps. 9 Select the panel. Finally. 16 Change the THIRD FLOOR level panels to solid. quarters. place horizontal grids that divide the panel into halves. In this lesson you learned to create a sloped glazing system. but now that you have created a ruled curtain system. Additional Curtain Systems | 313 . 10 Click OK to close the Element Properties dialog box. click System Panel : Solid. 14 Highlight a top level glazed panel. Next. 13 Place vertical grids that snap to the midpoints on the panel and divide the panel into halves. and then eighths. you subdivide the ruled curtain system using curtain grids. and then eighths. quarters. This is similar to placing the grids on the curved curtain system. and click . Notice there are very few properties for the ruled curtain system. you can vary the steps to style the system the way you want. embed a curtain system inside another wall. 17 Save the file. 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. you replace some of the glazed panels in front of the ceilings with solid panels. click Curtain Grid. and the lesson on creating additional curtain systems. 15 On the Type Selector.A ruled curtain system does not have all the properties of a curtain wall. right-click and use Select Panels along Grid 2 from the Select Panels menu. and define a ruled curtain system.

314 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems .

elevation. section. 315 . you can add different views of the building model directly to the sheet. three-dimensional views. which are a type of view in a project. The model views that you can add to sheets include plan. usually contain a title block. you learn how to create drawings from a building information model in an Autodesk Revit Building project. begin by first creating sheets.Creating Drawings 11 In this tutorial. and are accessible from the Project Browser. To create a printed or plotted set of drawings from the views in your building model. Depending on the type of drawing that you want to create. and schedules. Sheets are defined by borders.

click Open. you enter the project information and create a drawing sheet with a title block that displays the project information. You begin by duplicating an existing floor plan view that includes furniture. You also reorient the swing of one of the doors in the floor plan view on the sheet. click the Training Files icon. Next. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Open m_Drawing_Exercise located in the Metric folder. you create a drawing sheet that includes a floor plan of the first level of the building model. how to create new views from a building model. how to add views to the sheets. Creating a Drawing Sheet In this exercise.Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project In this lesson. and dimension the exterior walls of the building to complete the floor plan drawing sheet. and how to make changes to the building model from a view on a sheet. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. The project used in the following exercises is a small office building model. adjust the view scale. You then add the floor plan view to the sheet. and observe that the changes are made in the floor and furniture plan views of the building model. you learn how to create sheets within an Revit Building project. 316 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . You turn off the visibility of the furniture in the duplicated view to create a floor plan view and rename the original view as the furniture plan.

The changes in visibility are applied to this view only. furniture. furniture. furniture. enter Level 1 Furniture. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 317 . A copy of the Level 1 Floor plan view is displayed in the Project Browser. and expand Floor Plans. click Project Information. double-click Level 1 to redisplay the floor plan. click Visibility/Graphics. lighting fixtures. 5 In the Project Browser. Casework. Enter the project information to display in the title block of the drawing sheet 11 On the Settings menu. and specialty equipment in the Level 1 Floor Plan view 6 On the View menu. click the Model Categories tab. and click Duplicate. Turn off visibility for casework. expand Views (all). 12 In the Element Properties dialog box. and specialty equipment are no longer displayed in the Level 1 floor plan view. 8 Select Include categories from all disciplines in the list above. 4 In the Rename View dialog box. 2 Under Floor Plans. 3 Right-click Copy of Level 1.Copy the Level 1 floor plan view to create a Level 1 Furniture plan view 1 In the Project Browser. click Edit for Project Address. and click OK. clear: ■ ■ ■ ■ Casework Furniture Lighting Fixtures Specialty Equipment 10 Click OK. and click Rename. and specialty equipment continue to display in the Level 1 Furniture plan. Casework. 9 Under Visibility. right-click Level 1. 7 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog box.

318 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . enter the following address: ■ ■ 123 Main Street Anytown. select A0 metric. The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project. A title block and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet. 15 Continue to change the remaining type parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 31 March. click Sheet. 17 On View tab of the Design Bar. 18 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. Enter 2005-01 for Project Number. right-click. Smith for Client Name. 16 Click OK. The text fields in the titleblock family (shown below) contain labels that associate the project information parameters with the appropriate text fields. 2005 for Project Issue Date. The text fields of the title block on the sheet automatically display the corresponding project information that you entered in step 14. Enter J. and click View. TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar. Enter Residence for Project Name. and click OK.13 In the Edit Text dialog box. MA 12345 14 Click OK. Enter Client Approved for Project Status.

expand Sheets (all). The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser with the name A101 . Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 319 . 23 Ground Floor Plan is displayed in the title block as the sheet name and is appended to the sheet name in the Project Browser. and select the title block. click Modify. 24 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 20 On the Design Bar. but the scale of the view is too small for the drawing sheet. 22 In the Element Properties dialog box.Unnamed. select Floor Plan: Level 1. and click to place the view in the center of the drawing sheet. The Level 1 floor plan view is displayed on the drawing sheet. 21 When the title block highlights.NOTE The Project Path parameter in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every time the project file is saved. 19 In the Project Browser. and click OK. click . click Add View. 25 In the Views dialog box. and you can modify it within the sheet by activating the Level 1 floor plan view and changing its scale. View scale is a property of the view. enter Ground Floor Plan for Sheet Name. 26 Move the cursor to the center of the drawing sheet. under Identity Data. and click Add View to Sheet. on the Options Bar.

select 1:20 for View Scale. If you were to open the Level 1 floor plan view. click Viewport : Title w Line.27 With the view selected. 31 Select the viewport and from the Type Selector. you would see that the scale of the Level 1 floor plan view is now 1:20. click Deactivate View. indicating the view is deactivated. click Activate View. 320 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . right-click. 33 Drag the viewport to the center of the drawing sheet. and click OK. and click View Properties. under Graphics. and drag the grips that display on the scale to lengthen it. The border and the title block are no longer grayed out. 32 Select the viewport. The scale of the view on the sheet changes. 29 In the Element Properties dialog box. on the View menu. The border and title block are grayed out. and click View Properties. indicating that the Level 1 floor plan View is active and you can modify it. Any changes that you make to it on the sheet while it is active display when you open the Level 1 floor plan view. 28 Right-click the view. Center the view on the sheet and reposition the drawing scale 30 On the View menu.

as shown in the following illustration. and click to place the dimension. and then select the outer face of the east exterior vertical wall. 35 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Dimension. Reorient the door in the upper exterior wall 39 On the Design Bar.Dimension the exterior walls of the building 34 Right-click on the viewport on the drawing sheet. 36 On the Options Bar. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 321 . click Modify. click . and select Wall faces for Prefer. as shown in the following illustration. and click Activate View. This creates aligned dimensions that originate at the wall faces. 37 Dimension the north wall of the building: ■ Select the outer face of the west exterior vertical wall. ■ 38 Dimension the west exterior wall of the building by selecting the outer faces of the north and south exterior walls and placing the dimension to the left of the west wall. and select the door on the north exterior wall (in the upper right corner). Move the cursor above the north exterior wall. 40 Click the control arrows until the door swings open to the interior.

are specific to the view in which they are created. 44 Proceed to the next exercise. The two dimensions that you added to the view in the previous steps have been added to this view. double-click Level 1 Furniture. however. and click Deactivate View. 43 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. and the door is updated. double-click Level 1. The dimensions that you added to the Level 1 floor plan view are not displayed. the change is also made in the Level 1 Furniture plan. Dimensions. This means that when you reoriented the door swing in the Level 1 floor plan. Adding a Sheet to the Project. but the door reflects the change you made to its orientation in the Level 1 floor plan. right-click. 322 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . 42 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans.41 Select the view. When you change the geometry of the building model while the view is activated. the changes are made within the building model and not restricted to the current view.

Adding a Sheet to the Project In this exercise. and click OK. Add a new sheet to the project 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Identity Data. you add a new sheet to the project. select A0 metric. and adjust the scale of the view to create a furniture plan drawing. Furniture Plan Level 1 is displayed in the title block as the sheet name. click Sheet. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. is displayed. enter Furniture Plan Level 1 for Sheet Name. 4 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK. the new sheet. under Sheets (all).rvt.Furniture Plan Level 1. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 323 . m_Drawing_Exercise. The sheet is incrementally named A102. and on the Options Bar. 3 Select the title block. add the furniture plan view. A102 . Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click . In the Project Browser.

under Floor Plans. and select 1:20. 8 In the Project Browser. 3 On the Design Bar. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet. double-click Level 1 Furniture. you learn how to modify a building model directly from the drawing sheets that you created from its views. and select the lamp next to the lounge chair. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. click and drag Level 1 Furniture onto the sheet. click Modify. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet In this exercise. 5 Select M_Floor Lamp 1 : 100watt Halogen in the Type Selector to change the lamp type.Change the scale of the view before you add it to the sheet 5 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Type Selector. verify that M_Floor Lamp 2 : 150 watt Incandescent is displayed. and click Activate View. 324 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . 9 Center the cursor in the drawing area of the sheet.Furniture Plan Level 1. under Floor Plans. 7 In the Project Browser. and click to place the view.rvt. m_Drawing_Exercise. right-click on the view on sheet A102. You change a lamp type and the length of an interior wall in the furniture plan view on Sheet A102. Change the lamp type in the furniture plan 1 In the drawing area. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. under Sheets (all). and then observe that the changes are also made in the Level 1 Furniture plan. 6 On the View Control Bar. double-click A102 . 2 Zoom in on the lower left corner of the building. click the scale value.

furniture. click Modify. 8 Select the wall as shown in the following illustration. 7 On the Design Bar. 11 Select the same wall you selected in step 8 to view the change in dimension. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. The desk. enter 5200 mm. Creating New Views to Add to Sheets. 9 Click the temporary dimension value of the distance between the wall and the centerline of the exterior horizontal wall. chair. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 325 . select Floor Plan: Level 1 Furniture. and the wall position in Sheet A102 are reflected in the Level 1 Furniture plan view. and press ENTER. The changes made to the lamp.6 Select one of the furniture components. and file cabinet adjacent to the wall move when the wall is resized. and notice that Moves with Nearby Elements is selected in the Options Bar. 10 On the Window menu.

and select the dashed callout view border. double-click Level 1 Furniture. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. A callout tag is placed inside the walls of the building model. 5 Select the blue border grip adjacent to the view tag. 326 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . m_Drawing_Exercise. you learn how to create new elevation. under Floor Plans. click Callout. 3 Draw a rectangle around the room in the lower left corner of the drawing to define the boundaries of the room. Create a callout view 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. click Modify. and move it to the position shown in the following illustration. 4 On the Design Bar.Creating New Views to Add to Sheets In this exercise. callout. and section views of the building model and add them to a single drawing sheet. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

The new sheet. is displayed under Sheets (all) in the Project Browser. A103 .6 On the Design Bar. click the scale value. click Modify. select A0 Metric.Unnamed. 9 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. and click to place the view. 8 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 327 . 12 Move the cursor to the upper left corner of the sheet. and select 1:20. 10 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Change the callout view scale. and add the callout view to a new sheet 7 On the View Control Bar. and double-click the callout tag to display the callout view. 11 In the Views dialog box. click Sheet. and click Add View to Sheet. click Add View. TIP You can also drag the Floor Plan: Callout of Level 1 Furniture view from the Project Browser to place it on the sheet. and click OK. position the view. select Floor Plan: Callout of Level 1 Furniture.

select the elevation symbol arrow. The tag now displays the drawing sheet and detail number. Create a new elevation view. 18 On the Design Bar. and zoom out to view the elevation extents. 17 Move the cursor to the lower left room. 14 Zoom in around the view tag of the callout. the elevation symbol points to the closest wall. center it in the room so that it points north. double-click Level 1 Furniture. 16 On the View tab of the Design Bar. As you move the cursor. 328 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . The elevation extents do not display when you select the body of the elevation symbol.13 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. An elevation symbol displays at the end of the cursor in the drawing area. click Modify. click Elevation. and click to place the elevation symbol. and place it on the sheet 15 Adjust your zoom to display the lower left corner of the view.

Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 329 . and notice that two new elevation views display: Elevation 1 .19 Select the body of the elevation symbol.c. select Elevation: Elevation 1 . 25 Click to place the elevation next to the callout view on the drawing sheet. 24 In the Views dialog box. Add the new elevation views to sheet A103 22 In the Project Browser under Sheets (all). double-click A103 . 23 On the View tab of the Design Bar.Unnamed. 21 In the Project Browser under Views (all). and click Add View to Sheet. expand Elevations. The symbol is displayed as in the following illustration. 20 Select the box under the elevation symbol to create a new elevation view 180 degrees from the first elevation view you created when you placed the elevation symbol. click Add View.a and Elevation 1 .a.

double-click Level 1 Furniture. under Sheets (all). Create a section view.Furniture Plan Level 1. double-click A102 . 28 Zoom in on the elevation tag in the lower left room.c to the sheet either with the Add View command or by dragging it from the Project Browser onto the sheet. 27 In the Project Browser. The sheet (drawing) number and detail IDs of the views are displayed in the symbol. 330 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . and add it to the sheet 29 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 30 Zoom in on the right side of the building.26 Add Elevation 1 .

Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 331 .31 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 32 In the Options Bar. click Section. select 1:50 for Scale. 33 Add a section line that cuts through the right side of the building: ■ Click outside the north exterior wall of the building to place the start point of the section line and the section head (section tag). ■ 34 Click the arrows at the head of the section line to flip the section so it points to the west. Move the cursor down and click outside of the south exterior wall of the building to place the section tail and complete the section line.

under Graphics. and click Add View to Sheet. and click Deactivate View.Unnamed. such as callouts. modify the building model from your sheets. 332 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . 41 Enter 25 for Scale Value. click Custom for View Scale. and save the exercise file with a unique name. add views to your sheets. and to create new views of your building model. 44 If you want to save your changes. 37 In the Views dialog box. 40 In the Element Properties dialog box. 43 Place the section view on the drawing sheet as shown in the following illustration. double-click A103 . select Section: Section 1. and click Activate View. 42 Right-click on the view. on the File menu. 38 Right-click on the viewport. and click OK. elevations. By completing the exercises in this lesson. click Save As. you learned how to create new drawing sheets.35 In the Project Browser under Sheets (all). and click View Properties. 45 Close the exercise file. 39 Right-click on the view. and sections. The drawing sheet is now complete. click Add View. 36 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

you create a legend view and add symbols and text to it using a text type you create by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. click Open. door frame schedule. and door frames. windows. NOTE A component that is placed in a legend does not count as an additional instance of the component in the Revit Building building model. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. and click Rename. and thus is not added to the number of instances of that component listed on a schedule or noteblock. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. enter Symbol Legend for Name. 2 In the Project Browser. Finally. doors. Creating a Symbol Legend In this exercise.rvt located in the Metric folder. The two most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component legends. building component legends are often called schedules (wall type schedule. 6 Add the following symbols to the legend view. Open m_Legends.Filled Level Head . click the Training Files icon. you add the completed symbol legend to a cover sheet for the construction documents. 4 In the Rename View dialog box. Building component legends list and identify components such as walls. Create a legend view 1 On the View menu. selecting each from the Type Selector and placing it in the legend as shown. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ M_Section Head .Upgrade : 6 mm M_Wall Tag : 12mm Door Tag metric Window Tag metric Using Legends | 333 . click New ➤ Legend. annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends. click Symbol. Add symbols to the legend 5 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and so on). Annotation legends are made up of components such as section markers and door tags that are paired with text that identifies them. and click OK. On construction documents. expand Legends. 3 Right-click Legend 1.Using Legends Legends provide a way to display a list of the various building components and annotations used in a project. On construction documents.

Create a text type 7 Because the text size for the symbol legend is not available in the Type Selector. 17 In the Project Browser. click . you create a text type with the necessary size. 18 On the Design Bar. 9 On the Options bar. 8 In the Type Selector. On the Design Bar. 13 In the Type Selector. and click to place it. click Text.Cover Sheet to open it in the drawing area. click Modify to end the command. 15 Working from the top down. and click OK. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. 12 Under Text. and click to the right of the first symbol to specify the text start point. expand Sheets (all). click Symbol Legend. 14 Enter Detail Callout (detail #/sheet #) for the text note. click Edit/New. enter 3mm for Text Size. 334 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . enter the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend: ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Marker (Level name/Elevation in mm) Wall Tag (Wall Type #) Door Tag (Door #) Window Tag (Window Type #) Place the symbol legend on a sheet 16 In the Project Browser. You do this by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. and double-click A100 . verify that Text : 3mm is selected. 11 In the Type Properties dialog box. enter 3mm for Name. click Duplicate. select Text : 6mm. and click OK twice. drag it to the lower-right corner of the cover sheet.

2 In the Project Browser. click Save As.rvt. Creating a Wall Type Legend. you create a building component legend for the wall types in the building model. 4 In the Rename View dialog box. and click Save.Brick on CMU for Family. 19 On the File menu. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. expand Legends. You then add the completed legend to a project cover sheet. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. and click Rename.The symbol legend is added to the project cover sheet. You use the text type that you created in a previous exercise to create annotations that identify the material used in each wall component. 6 On the Options Bar. enter Wall Type Legend for Name. name the file m_Legends_in progress. Add components to the legend 5 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 3 Right-click Legend 1. click New ➤ Legend. select Walls: Basic Wall: Exterior . 8 Click near the top left of the drawing area to specify the insertion point for the wall.rvt. Using Legends | 335 . m_Legends_in progress. 7 Select Section for View. 20 Navigate to your preferred directory.138mm Partition (1-hr) directly below the first wall. Create a legend view 1 On the View menu. and click OK. click Legend Component. Creating a Wall Type Legend In this exercise. 9 Repeat the procedure to place a wall of type Interior .

click to add a single-segment leader. 17 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the text annotations on the lower wall component.Add text to the legend 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Text. verify that Text : 3mm is selected. 11 In the Type Selector. The text note with leader is added to the legend. 13 Click in the far left portion of the Brick on CMU wall to specify the leader start point. 15 Enter (1) Layer 16mm GWB. and click Modify on the Design Bar. 12 On the Options bar. 336 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . 14 Click to the right of the wall to end the leader and specify the text start point. 16 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the remaining text annotations on the upper wall component.

Cover Sheet to open it in the drawing area. 24 Below the title text of the upper component. 23 In the Type Selector. draw a detail line that extends as far as the longest component callout. select Text : 6mm. you use the Match Type tool to convert a wall in the floor plan to the component type used in the Wall Type Legend. 28 On the Design Bar. and then select the wall to which you want to apply the same properties. click Detail Lines. You capture the wall type properties in the tool. 30 Proceed to the next exercise. click Modify to end the command. Place the legend on a sheet 25 Using extension reference lines. and click to place it above the symbol legend.Add titles to the legend components 18 In the Type Selector. The wall type legend is added to the project cover sheet. 21 Click below the lower wall and enter Wall Type 2. add an identical detail line below the lower component. Using Legends | 337 . and enter Wall Type 1. click Save. click to add text without a leader. double-click A100 . 26 In the Project Browser. 27 In the Project Browser. Using a Legend View to Match Types. Using a Legend View to Match Types In this exercise. 20 Click below the upper wall component to specify the start point for the text. select Medium Lines. 29 On the File menu. 22 On the Design Bar. click Wall Type Legend. 19 On the Options Bar. drag it onto the sheet.

rvt. allowing you to select a component type in one drawing and then apply the type in the second drawing. 4 In the Wall Type Legend view.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Tile. 338 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . indicating that it captured the wall type properties. 2 On the Window menu. The open drawings are both visible. Notice that the eyedropper changes to filled. Tile views in the drawing window 1 Close all project view drawings except Floor Plan: Level 1 and Wall Type Legend. select the wall type 1 component. select Medium for Detail Level. click . so that you are zoomed in to the walls. 5 In the floor plan view. 6 Draw a rectangle around the upper-left corner of the floor plan. enter ZR to zoom to a specific region. Match a component type 3 On the Tools toolbar. m_Legends_in_progress. 8 On the View Control Bar. Changing the detail level displays the hatching for each material of the wall component. 7 Click on the wall at the top of the view.

unanticipated changes in construction conditions. These changes can be due to owner requests. Add a revision to the project 3 Click on the value for Release Date. you can specify the numbering method for revisions in a project. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence in which they are added to a sheet. This is the date the revisions are sent out for review. 4 Click on the value for Description. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. In general. contractor inquiries. verify that By Project is selected for Numbering Method. and you can add data such as release date and description to each revision. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence of revisions in the Revisions dialog box. Using the table. When Issued is selected. Setting Up a Revision Table There are likely to be changes to your construction documents after you have issued the original set of documents for bid or after you have received a signed contract. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. if the active revision is number 1. the revision is locked and issued to the field. and enter Moved window and added second window to Living Room. For example. Using Revision Tracking. all tags and schedules display the numeral 1. click the Training Files icon. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. and enter a date. 6 Verify that Visible is selected. 10 Proceed to the next lesson. 2 In the Revisions dialog box. yet as concise as possible. In this exercise. you use the Revisions command to open a revision table in which you can add rows that represent a sequence of revisions. and you can draw revision clouds around elements in your project that have changed.The wall type in the floor plan matches wall type 1 from the Wall Type Legend. When you use this option. Open m_Revisions. 5 Verify that Issued is cleared. or changes in building material availability. You can use revision tags to notate the revision clouds. click Revisions. You can create a sequence of revisions.rvt located in the Metric folder. Specify a revision numbering method 1 On the Settings menu. Click Yes when prompted to save the drawing. and can then display the revisions in schedules that appear in the titleblock of each project sheet. click Open. 9 On the File menu. Using Revision Tracking Revit Building provides tools that enable you to track revisions to your project. click Close. If you select By Sheet. Using Revision Tracking | 339 .

but each cloud is visible only in the view in which it is sketched. click Save As. enter 1200 mm. and expand Floor Plans. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. Revision clouds have read-only properties. Modify a window 1 In the Project Browser. and press ENTER. select the window. which are inherited from the revision table you created for the project. The selected window is moved to the left 900 mm. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and then indicate the changes graphically with a revision cloud.If Visible is not selected. Sketching Revision Clouds In this exercise. you make changes to the project floor plan. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. In most instances. 7 Click OK. You can draw multiple revision clouds for each revision. 340 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . 9 Navigate to your preferred directory. 8 On the File menu. including revision number and revision date. expand Views. name the file m_Revisions-in progress. Sketching Revision Clouds. m_Revisions-in progress. and click Save. 3 In the small empty room.rvt.rvt. You can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D views. 2 Double-click Level 1 to open it in the drawing area. 4 Select the dimension value to the left of the window. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it.

14 On the Design Bar. 15 On the File menu. 11 In the drawing area. Using Revision Tracking | 341 .Add a window 5 Verify that the modified window is still selected in the drawing area. and click 6 Select the midpoint of the casement window as the start point. You can change the appearance of the cloud from the Settings menu. click near the windows you have changed. 12 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. click Modify to end the command. and then apply the tag to the revision cloud in the current drawing. click Save. 7 Move the cursor to the right until the distance from the midpoint is 1800 mm. Tagging Revision Clouds In this exercise. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified windows. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. m_Revisions-in progress. Tagging Revision Clouds. on the Edit toolbar.rvt. 9 On the Design Bar. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. The tag number that is displayed in the drawing is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table in a previous exercise. click Revision Cloud. click Finish Sketch. you load a revision tag into the project. Revit Building is now in sketch mode. Add a revision cloud 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 8 Click to place the second window. 13 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed.

2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. browse to Annotations\M_Revision Tag.rvt. select Level 1. 5 In the Open dialog box. click New ➤ Sheet. The number is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table. Add a revised view to a sheet 3 In the Project Browser. and drag it onto the sheet view. 6 In the Tags. In the Tags dialog box. 3 In the Tags dialog box. 6 Draw a rectangle around the revision schedule in the sheet titleblock. The tag displays the revision number of the cloud. click Tags. and because the revision is the first in the project. you need to add one. m_Revisions-in progress. Working with Revisions. 9 Click to place the tag. 5 Enter ZR to zoom to a specific region. 342 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . Because there are no tags loaded for revision clouds. on which you place a revised view. and click OK. Because a real-world project can undergo several revisions before it is completed. 2 On the Options Bar. verify that A0 Metric is selected. Because you chose to number by project. Tag a revision cloud 7 On the Options Bar. which creates a record of the revision and locks it from further changes. You then issue a revision. If the cursor is just inside the cloud. and click Open. you create additional revisions in the revision table. Create a sheet view 1 On the View menu. the tag is displayed inside the cloud. you create a sheet view in your project. position the cursor just outside the revision cloud. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.rfa. clear Leader. 8 In the drawing area. click Tag. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. 4 In the drawing area. 10 On the File menu. notice that M_Revision Tag is the loaded tag for Revision Clouds. the cloud is tagged as number 1. click Save. 4 Click Load. A new sheet view is created in the project. scroll down to Revision Clouds. dialog box. click OK. Working with Revisions In this exercise.Load a revision tag 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. click to place the floor plan.

clear Visible for each issued revision. NOTE After you issue a revision. 14 Click OK. Click Yes when prompted to save the drawing. On the Settings menu. Using Revision Tracking | 343 . 8 In the Revisions dialog box. Create additional revisions 10 Your project may have several revisions before it is completed. click New. You can continue to add revisions.The information you added to the revision table in a previous exercise is displayed in the revision schedule. 11 In the Revisions dialog box. 12 Enter the appropriate information for this revision. On the Settings menu. click Revisions. You do this by issuing the revision. you can no longer modify it. and click OK. enter a name for Issued to. You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in the drawing area. you prevent further changes to the revision. Issue a revision 7 After you make the necessary changes to the project and add the revised views to a sheet. click Revisions. 9 Select Issued. A new row is added below the existing rows in the revision table. 15 On the File menu. 13 If you want to hide issued revisions in the drawing. nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds. under Add. click Close.

344 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings .

you use a separate drafting view in which to create the detail. like a standard detail that you want to add to a library. These components scale with the building model. using detail components to represent materials like lumber. you also learn how to change the detail component display order and visibility settings in a detail to create depth and show varying levels of detail. you learn how to create details in Autodesk Revit Building.Detailing 12 In this tutorial. and metal studs. The "drafted" detail that you create is not parametrically linked to the building model. You can detail directly in a view of the building information model. In this tutorial. plywood. 345 . For a detail that you do not want to associate with the model.

you create a callout view that references the foundation sill of the house. you trace over the building model geometry. Creating a Callout View In this exercise. 346 | Chapter 12 Detailing . expand Floor Plans. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu.Creating a Detail from a Building Model In this lesson. you must define the view in which you want to create a detail. In the callout view. The callout view is a larger view of the area that you define in the section view with the callout. you detail the foundation sill of a small house. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. The section line that you see in the floor plan indicates that a section view has been added to the project. add detail components. In order to detail from the building model. click Open.rvt located in the Metric folder. The callout defines the extents of the callout view. You define that view by creating a callout view within a section view. expand Views (all). and double-click First Floor. Modify the section view 1 In the Project Browser. and then complete the detail by adding break lines and text notes. You create the callout view by adding a callout to the section view. Open m_Cape_House. click the Training Files icon.

click Modify and select the section line. 4 Select and move the blue grips of the interior end points of the section line so the section line is displayed as in the following illustration. 3 Click the break symbol to create a gap in the section line.2 On the Design Bar. Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 347 . Blue grips and a break symbol display on the section line.

8 On the Options Bar. 7 On the View tab of the Design Bar. ■ Reposition the callout head 10 On the Design Bar. 11 Select the grip near the callout head and move it to the bottom left side of the view as shown in the following illustration. 348 | Chapter 12 Detailing . 9 Add the callout by drawing a rectangle around the left side of the foundation: ■ Click in the section view where the upper left corner of the callout rectangle displays in the following illustration. and click the tab in the context menu. click Modify. and select the callout border. The callout border and tag highlight and display blue grips. select 1:5 for Scale. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. click Callout. right-click in the Design Bar. 6 Double-click the head of the section line to display the section view. click Modify.Add a callout to the section view to specify the callout view 5 On the Design Bar. Click in the section view where the lower right corner displays.

Notice that the alignment of the level is locked to the site level. select the First Floor level line. click View Properties.Display and modify the callout view 12 On the Design Bar. The callout view is displayed. 16 In the view. click Modify and double-click the callout head. Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 349 . 15 Click OK. change the following instance parameters: ■ ■ Enter Section Detail @ Foundation Sill for View Name. 14 In the Element Properties dialog box. 13 On the View menu. Select Hidden Line for Model Graphics Style.

TIP If you do not see the Filled Region command. sub-flooring. and insulation objects. click Filled Region. that you add to the view are visible only in this view. Detailing the View. m_Cape_House. which means that any detail components. as well as detail lines. Exact dimensions are not important. select Chain and click . You start by adding a filled region that represents the sloped grade outside of the foundation wall. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 4 On the Options Bar. Notice that the Design Bar is now in Sketch mode and the model geometry is grayed out. siding. and then add detail components to the detail that represent lumber. 3 In the Type Selector.17 Proceed to the next exercise. The detail components that you add to the view are two-dimensional family objects. 5 Trace the region representing the sloped grade using the following illustration for reference. turn off the display of some of the Design Bar tabs. Create a filled region that represents the sloped grade outside the foundation wall 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. region objects. click Lines.rvt. 350 | Chapter 12 Detailing . Detailing the View In this exercise. 2 On the Design Bar. They are also view specific. TIP Enter SO on your keyboard to turn off snapping as you sketch. select Wide Lines. and an anchor bolt. you detail the view of the foundation sill.

9 In the Name dialog box. Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 351 . click Duplicate. under Name and Pattern. select EARTH. 14 In the Type Selector. click Edit/New. 11 In the Fill Patterns dialog box. 8 In the Type Properties dialog box. enter Earth for Name. and click OK. 7 In the Element Properties dialog box. click in the Fill Pattern type parameter Value field. click Finish Sketch to complete the filled region. click Modify and select the two lines shown in the following illustration. If you are zoomed in too far. 12 Click OK three times. 10 In the Type Properties dialog box. the pattern does not display. NOTE You may have to zoom out to view the earth fill pattern in the filled region. The earth fill pattern is displayed in the filled region. 13 On the Design Bar. click Region Properties.6 On the Design Bar. 15 On the Design Bar. select <Invisible lines>.

22 Press the Spacebar to rotate the Lumber Section counter-clockwise. select M_Dimension Lumber-Section 38X235. select the following lumber components: ■ ■ ■ 38X140 38X235 38X286 20 Click Open. 17 On the Options Bar. select M_Dimension Lumber-Section. TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the lumber. 352 | Chapter 12 Detailing . click Detail Component. 21 In the Type Selector. 18 In the Open dialog box. 23 Place the 38X235 Lumber component in the detail view as shown in the following illustration.rfa. navigate to Detail Components\Structural\Wood in the Metric Library. click .Add lumber detail components 16 On the Design Bar. 19 At the bottom of the dialog box.

24 Place a 38X235 lumber component as shown in the following illustration. select M_Dimension Lumber.Section: 38x140. Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 353 . and place it in the detail view. 25 In the Type Selector.

select M_Plywood : 25mm. click Detail Component.Add a plywood detail component to represent the sub-flooring 26 On the Design Bar. TIP You may need to use the Align tool to place the plywood component. 354 | Chapter 12 Detailing . 27 In the Type Selector. Add a plywood detail component to the exterior wall face 29 Place another plywood component on the exterior face of the wall as shown in the following illustration. 28 Place the plywood component above the last 38X235 that you added as shown in the following illustration.

select the plywood on the exterior face of the wall. and click OK. 35 On the Options Bar. enter 19 mm for Thickness. 37 In the Type Properties dialog box. and click OK. Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 355 . . ■ ■ 40 Click OK twice. 41 Add the lap siding to the plywood on the exterior face: ■ ■ Select the lower left corner of the plywood detail component. When you place the repeating detail component. Move the cursor up along the plywood component. 36 In the Element Properties dialog box. until enough lap siding displays to cover it. click Modify. click Edit/New. 38 In the Name dialog box. change the following type parameters: ■ ■ Select m_lap siding for Detail. Verify Fill Available Space is selected for Layout. Select Inside. 39 In the Type Properties dialog box. Add an anchor bolt detail component 32 On the Design Bar. 33 In the Type Selector. select m_anchorbolt and place it in the detail view as shown in the following illustration. click Duplicate.30 On the Design Bar. click Repeating Detail. enter Lap Siding for Name. this parameter determines the appropriate spacing between the repeated components so that they fill the space that you select evenly. Add a lap siding to the exterior wall as a repeating detail component 34 On the Design Bar. and click to place the lap siding. click Detail Component. and click 31 In the Element Properties dialog box. Verify Detail Rotation is set to None. click .

The lap siding is displayed along the plywood. 42 Proceed to the next exercise. Like detail components. Add detail lines 1 On the Design Bar. m_Cape_House. 3 Sketch detail lines to enclose the bottom end of the lap siding as shown in the following illustration. you add lines to your detail. they are view specific. meaning they display only in this view.rvt. on the Design Bar. Adding Detail Lines In this exercise. click Modify and select the repeating lap siding detail component. If you need to make modifications to the lap siding after you place it. 2 In the Type Selector. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Detail Lines. Select and move the blue grips on the repeating detail line to shorten or lengthen the lap siding. click Wide Lines. Adding Detail Lines.NOTE You may need to move your cursor above the crop region of the detail view to place the lap siding along the entire length of the plywood. 356 | Chapter 12 Detailing .

Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 357 . click Detail Lines. select Chain. click Filled Region. 7 In the Type Selector. select As underlay for the Display Model instance parameter. 6 On the Design Bar. 11 In the Type Selector. select Medium lines. 12 On the Options Bar. Create a filled region that represents the15 mm gypsum board 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 5 In the Element Properties dialog box. select Medium Lines. and click . click View Properties. The model geometry that displays underneath the detail components and lines is grayed out. 13 Trace over the interior wall face as shown in the following illustration.4 On the View menu. sketch a 20 x 100 mm baseboard. select . and click OK. 9 Add two more detail lines as shown in the following illustration. 8 Using the underlay inside wall face and floor as references.

and click OK. click Edit/New. under Name and Pattern. 17 In the Name dialog box. click in the Fill pattern type parameter value field. 21 On the Design Bar. 358 | Chapter 12 Detailing . 16 In the Type Properties dialog box. 15 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Finish Sketch to view the gypsum board. 19 In the Fill Patterns dialog box. 18 In the Type Properties dialog box. enter Plasterboard for Name.14 On the Design Bar. 20 Click OK three times. click Region Properties. click Duplicate. select Gypsum-Plaster.

you add a vapor barrier and insulation to the detail. 26 On the Design Bar. 31 In the Fill Patterns dialog box. 28 In the Type Properties dialog box. 23 In the Type Selector. Add a vapor barrier 1 On the Settings menu. select . under Modify Subcategories. select Concrete. 30 In the Type Properties dialog box. 29 In the Name dialog box. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. you turn off the display of the model geometry. Adding a Vapor Barrier and Insulation In this exercise. click Duplicate. and click OK. click Line Styles. If there were no filled region to represent the foundation walls. select Medium Lines. click Edit/New.rvt. click Region Properties. 27 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Filled Region. Adding a Vapor Barrier and Insulation. click New. enter Concrete for Name. 25 Trace a rectangle over the foundation wall. enter Vapor Barrier for Name. 32 Click OK three times. 33 On the Design Bar. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Near the end of this lesson. click Finish Sketch to view the concrete filled region. Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 359 . and click OK. the region would be blank. under Name and Pattern. 3 In the New Subcategory dialog box. m_Cape_House. click in the Fill pattern type parameter value field. 2 In the Line Styles dialog box.Create a filled region that represents the foundation wall 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 24 On the Options Bar.

Adding Break Lines. 5 Click OK to complete the new line style. select Vapor Barrier. Select Black for Line Color. you add break lines to the detail. click and enter 28mm for Offset. make the following changes to Vapor Barrier: ■ ■ ■ Select 3 for Line Weight/Projection.4 Under Lines Styles. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. click Detail Lines. enter 120 mm for Width and 65 mm for Offset to center. Add insulation 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 8 On the Options Bar. Move your cursor down to the top of the 38x140 and click to specify the endpoint. 360 | Chapter 12 Detailing . click Insulation. Adding Break Lines In this exercise. 6 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Select Dash for Line Pattern. 12 Sketch the insulation: ■ ■ Click at the top and to the right of the exterior wall face underlay of the wall to specify the start point. 9 Click the right face of the interior wall to create a line as shown in the following illustration. 7 In the Type Selector. 11 On the Options Bar.

Add a break line to the top of the wall section 1 On the Design Bar. 7 In the Type Selector.rvt. 4 On the Design Bar. click Detail Component. 5 Select and move the crop boundary grips until the view displays as in the following illustration. m_Cape_House. Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 361 . 8 Place the break line approximately in the center of the floor as shown in the following illustration.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 2 In the Type Selector. 3 Place the break line at the top of the wall section as shown in the following image. click Modify. Add a break line to the floor 6 On the Design Bar. verify that M_Break Line is selected. select M_Break Line. click Detail Component. and select the crop boundary of the detail view.

Turn off the visibility of model components to view detail components only 11 On the View menu. When you turn the display model off.9 On the Design Bar. 10 On the Tools toolbar. click Modify. and click OK. the model elements such as walls and floors no longer display in this view. click and rotate the break line until it displays as shown in the following illustration. click View Properties. NOTE You may need to drag the shape handles of the break line to resize it to the illustration. 362 | Chapter 12 Detailing . What remains are the detail components and lines that you added previously. and select the break line. as shown in the following illustration. select Do not display for Display model. 12 In the Element Properties dialog box.

rvt.13 Proceed to the next exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Add text notes to the detail 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select 4 mm text for Text size. m_Cape_House. on the File menu. 2 On the Type Selector. Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 363 . 4 Add the leaders and notes shown in the following illustration: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the detail to set the location of the arrow. you add text notes to complete the detail. Adding Text Notes. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click Text. click to create a leader with two segments. click Save As. Click again to set the location of the text box. Adding Text Notes In this exercise. 3 On the Options Bar. 5 If you want to save your changes. Enter the text. Click again to set the elbow position of the leader. 6 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.

Within a detail view. and double-click Basement. you learn to modify the display of detail components in your detail views. expand Floor Plans. A detail component can display in front or in back of all other components. while other model elements. The section line that you see in the top right corner of the floor plan indicates that a section view that cuts through the kitchen sink and cabinet has been added to the project. click the Training Files icon. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. For example. such as walls and windows. The filled regions in the detail section view do not overlap properly. Changing Detail Component Order in a Detail View In this exercise. click Open. 2 Double-click the section line head to display the section view. expand Views (all). you can arrange the order in which detail components display. or can display in front of or in back of specific components. Open the detail view 1 In the Project Browser.Changing Component Order and Visibility Settings in Detail Views In this lesson. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. you can set only doors in a detail view to display in fine detail. You also learn how to override line styles and detail level settings for each model element. 364 | Chapter 12 Detailing . you change the order in which detail components in a detail view of a kitchen sink and cabinet display.rvt located in the Common folder. Open c_Office_Building. display in coarse detail.

4 With the sink selected. on the Options Bar. Display the sink behind the cabinet 5 Select the sink and. The sink now displays as if it was in front of the cabinet detail component.Display the sink in front of the cabinet 3 Move your cursor over the kitchen sink detail component. click . click . behind the cabinet. Changing Component Order and Visibility Settings in Detail Views | 365 . and when it highlights. The sink is now sent to the back of the drawing. on the Options Bar. select it.

There are three stacked detail components in this detail: a sink. Display the furniture in the basement view in halftone 4 On the View menu. a cabinet. c_Office_Building. Changing Visibility Settings in a Detail View In this exercise. and overriding detail level settings. 2 On the Window menu. Select the base cabinet and try the various depth options on the Options Bar. 3 On the View menu. Changing Visibility Settings in a Detail View. using halftone. 366 | Chapter 12 Detailing . select Tile. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 5 Click in the window containing the Floor Plan: Basement view and draw a zoom box around the furniture as shown in the following illustration. you change the visibility settings of several views by overriding line styles. and a simple fill pattern. double-click Level 1. select Zoom ➤ Zoom In Region. Open four different views 1 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 6 Proceed to the next exercise. select Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit.rvt.

click the Annotation Categories tab. 7 On the View menu. The furniture within this view is displayed in halftone. select Visibility/Graphics. and click Apply. 15 Clear the Visibility for Door tags. Turn off door tags in the Level 1 Floor Plan 11 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. select Visibility/Graphics. Changing Component Order and Visibility Settings in Detail Views | 367 . and select Halftone. scroll down to Furniture. The door tags are not displayed. 14 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog box. select Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. 16 Move the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog box so you can view the floor plan. 9 Under Visibility. expand Views (all). click the Model Categories tab. and double-click Level 1.6 Maximize the window containing the Floor Plan: Basement view. 10 Click OK. 12 On the View menu. 13 On the View menu. 8 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box.

21 Click OK twice. Change the cut line style for walls in the view 19 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog box. select Coarse for Detail Level. 368 | Chapter 12 Detailing . Select Black for Line Color. All the walls in this view are displayed as coarse regardless of the settings in the View Properties dialog box. The walls in this view display in a coarse level of detail while the rest of the floor plan is displayed in a fine level of detail. Select 8 for Line Weight. click the Model Categories tab. and click Apply. click Override under Line Style Cut for Walls. Select Solid for Line Pattern.Display walls in coarse detail in the Level 1 Floor Plan 17 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog box. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Override. 18 For Walls. The cut line style of the walls is now significantly heavier. 20 In the Select Line Style dialog box.

Select 1:5 for Scale. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Create the new drafting view 1 On View menu. you can reference it within the model and place it on a sheet. expand Views (all). you create a drafting view that is not associated with a building model. You can create details in drafting views when you do not need to create callout views from the building model. on the File menu. and expand Drafting Views. is displayed in the Project Browser. Creating a Drafting View In this exercise. Creating a Drafted Detail | 369 .rvt located in the Metric folder. click Open. Drafted details are created in drafting views and are not directly based on building model geometry. Creating a Detail in the Drafting View. You can create drafted details using the drafting tools in Revit Building or by importing details from an existing detail library. Creating a Drafted Detail In this lesson. In the next exercise. The building model is no longer displayed in the drawing window because you have created a drafting view that is not associated with the building model. Creating a Detail in the Drafting View In this exercise. you create a door detail in this new drafting view. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog box. 3 Click OK to create the new drafting view. named Door Detail. After you create a drafting view. The new drafting view. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 4 In the Project Browser. you create a door detail in the new drafting view. you learn how to create a drafted detail. 5 Proceed to the next exercise.22 If you want to save your changes. as there is no parametric linkage to any building model components. click New ➤ Drafting View. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. 23 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. click the Training Files icon. click Save As. enter the following: ■ ■ Enter Door Detail for Name. These details do not update with changes to the building model. Open m_Drafting_views.

You can also use the Rectangles sketching tool to create the basic shapes. you can change it. you can change its value by clicking Modify on the Design Bar and selecting one of the lines the dimension references. select Wide Lines.rvt. After you create a dimension. 2 In the Type Selector. 5 Permanently dimension the door jamb sketch so that the dimension values match those in the following illustration. 370 | Chapter 12 Detailing . When the dimension value displays in blue. and then use the Split and Trim tools to complete the sketch.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and click the tab in the context menu. Create a drafted door detail 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. TIP You may want to use the Chain option when you sketch the door jamb. 3 Sketch the door jamb shown in the following illustration. right-click in the Design Bar. click Dimension. 4 On the Design Bar. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. m_Drafting_views. click Detail Lines.

9 Turn off automatic snapping to facilitate sketching in close detail: ■ ■ On the Settings menu. 19 On the Design Bar. select Wide Lines. The detail with filled regions (the gypsum wall board with the sand drafting pattern) is displayed. click Region Properties. 20 In the Type Selector. click Finish Sketch. Under Dimension Snaps. enter Sand. 18 On the Design Bar. click Filled Region. click Edit/New.Create filled regions 6 You sketch filled regions to represent gypsum wall board. click Detail Lines. Creating a Drafted Detail | 371 . and click OK 3 times. click Duplicate. 16 In the Fill Patterns dialog box. 14 In the Name dialog box. and click OK. click Snaps. clear Length dimension snap increments. 11 On the Design Bar. 13 In the Type Properties dialog box. 21 Sketch the 50 mm x 15 mm door trim as shown. 17 Under Pattern Type. 8 On the Options Bar. 10 Sketch two 15 mm thick rectangles as shown. click Lines. and click OK. 15 In the Type Properties dialog box. verify Drafting is selected. under Name. On the Design Bar. select Sand. click for the Fill pattern type parameter. 12 In the Element Properties dialog box. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click .

22 On the Design Bar. 24 Drag the door jamb dimension controls to pull the dimensions away from the detail. 25 Add an overall dimension of the door jamb. Adjust witness lines 23 Select each door jamb dimension. and add 2 dimensions to the door trim. 372 | Chapter 12 Detailing . click Dimension.

click Duplicate. enter 38 x 125. 27 In the Type Selector. enter 125 for the Width type parameter. and click OK twice. click Edit/New. click Detail Lines. and click Hide Object from the context menu. 37 Place the lumber component in the detail. 31 On the Options Bar. click . select Medium Lines. TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the lumber. 32 In the Element Properties dialog box. Add the dimensional lumber for the header 29 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. 34 In the Name dialog box. Select the desired dimensions. click the Hide/Isolate command. 35 In the Type Properties dialog box. 36 Press the Spacebar to rotate the Lumber counter-clockwise. and on the View Control Bar. 28 Draw lines that represent the door as shown.Sketch a door 26 On the Design Bar. Creating a Drafted Detail | 373 . select M_Dimension Lumber 38X140. 33 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Detail Component. TIP You may find it helpful to temporarily hide the dimensions in the view when sketching the door. 30 In the Type Selector.

select Break Line. 374 | Chapter 12 Detailing . click Detail Component. TIP Rotate and move the bottom break line to adjust its masking element. 40 In the Type Selector.38 Stack another 38 x 125 directly above the one that you placed in the previous step to complete the header. 41 Add two break lines as shown. Add two break lines 39 On the Design Bar.

and drag it onto the sheet. expand Views. 49 Click to specify an insertion point.Add text notes to complete the detail 42 On the Design Bar. click to create a leader with two segments. 44 Add leaders and text notes to the detail as shown. and click OK. 50 On the Design Bar. 47 In the Project Browser. verify that A0 metric is selected. 43 In the Options Bar. click Modify to end the command. Place the drafting view on a new sheet 45 On the View menu. and expand Drafting Views. click Text. Creating a Drafted Detail | 375 . click New ➤ Sheet. 46 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. 48 Select Door Detail.

Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Importing a Detail into a Drafting View In this exercise. 6 At the bottom of the Import/Link dialog box.dwg from the Metric folder in the Training Files. select m_Rail_detail. under Layer/Level Colors. After you explode it. m_Drafting_views. 7 On the View menu. Importing a Detail into a Drafting View. the DWG entities are converted into Revit Building elements. enter the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Rail Detail for Name. you place an existing detail in a new drafting view to create a drafted detail. The detail is imported as an import symbol. In order to modify it. Create a new drafting view 1 On the View menu. Select Custom for Scale. and then click Open. Import a complete detail in DWG format 4 On the File menu. 376 | Chapter 12 Detailing . DXF. 5 In the Import/Link dialog box. DGN. you must explode it. select Preserve colors. The detail that you import is in DWG format. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the detail.rvt. select New ➤ Drafting View. Enter 5 for the Scale value.51 Proceed to the next exercise. click Import/Link ➤ DWG. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog box. 3 Click OK.

click . and the text within the detail is converted to Revit Building text. 10 If an error dialog box displays. Change the text color to black and add text leaders 11 On the Design Bar. 9 Right-click. The text is displayed as black after you click in the drawing area. 12 On the Options Bar. click Modify. 15 In the Color dialog box. press and hold CTRL. and click OK 3 times. The lines of the detail are converted to detail lines. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Modify.Explode the imported detail 8 On the Design Bar. click Edit/New. The text retains the DWG layer color. click the button in the Color type parameter Value field. and select all of the text blocks in the detail. click Delete Element(s). select black. and then select the detail. and click Full Explode. Creating a Drafted Detail | 377 . 14 In the Type Properties dialog box.

MET STUD FRAMING.Add leaders to the text notes 16 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Creating a Reference Callout. click . A leader is added to the text note. 18 Select and move the leader grips to position the leader as shown. 378 | Chapter 12 Detailing . 17 On the Options Bar. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. and select the bottom text note. 19 Add leaders to the remaining text notes to complete the detail as shown.

expand Views (all). Display the reference view 7 On the Design Bar. m_Drafting_views. The door detail that you drafted previously is displayed. The section view is displayed. 6 Select the callout. click Callout. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 3 On the Options Bar. 5 Add the callout bubble by dragging a rectangular bubble over the upper left door corner.Creating a Reference Callout In this exercise. it appears in the Reference other view list with the detail number and sheet number displayed after the view name. Create the callout view 1 In the Project Browser. expand Sections. and select Drafting View: Door Detail (1/A101). and double-click the callout. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.rvt. select Reference other view. The callout head displays the detail and sheet information (1/A101) because the referenced drafting view is already placed on this sheet. NOTE When a view has been placed on a sheet view. and double-click Section 1. and use the callout grips to move the callout head. 4 Zoom in on the Level 1 doors. Creating a Drafted Detail | 379 . you create a callout in the section view of the building model to reference the door detail that you previously created. click Modify.

and save the exercise file with a unique name. Otherwise.8 If you want to save your changes. on the File menu. close the exercise file without saving your changes. click Save As. 380 | Chapter 12 Detailing .

you learn how to create different types of schedules in your Autodesk Revit Building projects. 381 .Scheduling 13 In this tutorial.

You then select a window in the instance schedule and use the Show command to locate it in a view of the building model. 382 | Chapter 13 Scheduling .Creating Type and Instance Schedules In this lesson. creating an instance schedule. you can list each component as a separate line item. Creating a Window Schedule In this exercise. You begin by creating an instance schedule. When you schedule building components in Revit Building. you learn how to create type and instance schedules. creating a type schedule. you create a window schedule for the building model shown below. or you can group components of the same type into a single line item. or a schedule that lists every window in the building.

and click OK. click the Fields tab. The Comments field is moved under Scheduled fields. select Comments and click Add. and click View. Open m_Schedules. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. click Open. click the Training Files icon. Create a new window schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. A schedule is created that contains every window in the building model. click Schedule/Quantities. Creating Type and Instance Schedules | 383 . add the following fields to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Height Level Type Mark Width 6 Under Scheduled fields. select Windows. order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down. 2 In the New Schedule dialog box. 7 Click OK. Finally.rvt located in the Metric folder. you group and sort the windows in the instance schedule. you change the window instance schedule to a window type schedule. right-click in the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 4 Under Available fields. or a schedule that lists the windows by window type. 5 Using the same process. under Category. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu.Next. Define the fields to display as columns in the window schedule 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog box.

9 In the warning dialog box that is displayed. 14 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. expand Schedules/Quantities. in large building models with many views. this can be a time-consuming process. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click View Properties. 11 In the Project Browser. 10 In the Show Element(s) in View dialog box. click Close. click Show. NOTE By clicking Show. 15 Select Type Mark for Sort by. under Other. However. click the Sorting/Grouping tab.Select a window in the schedule and locate it in the building model 8 Select any cell in the first row of the window schedule and. 384 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . Group and sort the window schedule by type mark 12 Right-click on the schedule. on the Options Bar. you can display other views of the building model that include the selected window. click Edit for Sorting/Grouping. The window that corresponds to the information in the schedule row is displayed in a relevant view of the building model. sorted by type mark. 16 Click OK twice. The window schedule is displayed. and double-click Window Schedule to redisplay the window instance schedule. click OK to search through relevant views of the building model.

20 Click OK twice. The window type schedule is displayed. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. Creating a Room Schedule In this exercise. and save the exercise file with a unique name. clear Itemize every instance. 22 Close the exercise file. Schedule keys allow you to define common items that can be used by multiple objects within a schedule. you create a room schedule from the floor plan of a large building model. 21 If you want to save your changes. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams | 385 . 19 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. on the File menu. click Save As. you learn to add schedules and schedule keys to a project by creating a room schedule and room color diagram. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams In this lesson. and click View Properties.Change the schedule from an instance schedule to a type schedule 17 Right-click on the schedule. click Edit for the Sorting/Grouping instance parameter.

click Schedule/Quantities.rvt located in the Metric folder. 386 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. Open m_Schedules. and click OK. 5 Under Available fields. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. and double-click flr 3 to make it the active view. expand Views (all). The Number field is moved under Scheduled fields. select Rooms. click the Fields tab. and click View. Select the fields to display as columns in the room schedule 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. right-click in the Design Bar. 3 In the New Schedule dialog box.Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Several rooms and room tags exist in the floor plan. under Category. click Open. select Number and click Add. Create a room schedule 1 In the Project Browser. click the Training Files icon. expand Floor Plans.

you define the font for the schedule headers. NOTE The Appearance settings only take effect when the schedule is placed on a drawing sheet. 10 Click OK. A new row is displayed at the bottom of the schedule. 9 To the right of Header text. click New. Add new rooms to the schedule 11 On the Options Bar. 8 Click the Appearance tab. The bold header is not noticeable until you place the schedule on a drawing sheet. The room Number is 1. select Bold to display the schedule headers in bold font. order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down. and the Level and Area values are displayed as Not Tagged. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams | 387 . because the room is not tagged with a room tag.6 Using the same process. next to Rows:. Next. add the following fields to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ Name Level Area 7 Under Scheduled fields.

Add two room tags to the floor plan 16 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 15 Select 1 in the Number column for Room 1. 14 Select Room in the Name column for Room 1. 388 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . add a second room. 17 Zoom in on the right side of the building. and enter Conference to change the room name.12 Using the same process. 13 Select Room in the Name column for Room 29. and select Conference from the list. double-click flr 3. None of the rooms have tags placed on them. The second room is displayed at the bottom of the list and is numbered sequentially. and enter 30.

and double-click Room Schedule to view the updated room rows. The boundaries of the room highlight before you place the room tag. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams | 389 .18 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and verify that Horizontal is selected. right-click in the Design Bar. expand Schedules/Quantities. and click to place the room tag. select 30 Conference for Room. 19 On the Options Bar. click Room Tag. select 29 Conference for Room. 20 Move your cursor into the large room in the upper right corner of the floor plan. 23 In the Project Browser. 21 On the Options Bar. and click Drafting. 22 Place the room tag in the small room across from the large conference room. TIP If the Drafting tab of the Design Bar is not active.

390 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . 26 On the Options Bar. 25 On the Design Bar. double-click Room Schedule to view the 11 rooms that you added to the schedule. select Auto for Room. under Schedules/Quantities. 27 Place the room tags as shown in the following illustration. click Room Tag. 28 In the Project Browser.Add eleven additional room tags 24 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. double-click flr 3.

33 In the Element Properties dialog box. and select Circulation for Name. and zoom in on the room. select Services for Name. 35 With the room tags selected. click . 34 On the Design Bar. and select the seven room tags shown in the following illustration. and select the tags in the three remaining rooms named Room. click Modify. locate the room with an area of 92. double-click flr 3. select Office for Name. click . and click OK. 31 On the Design Bar. press and hold CTRL.Modify room tags 29 In the schedule. and click OK. 32 With the room tags selected. 36 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Modify. The name in the room tag is now Circulation.11 square meters. 30 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams | 391 . under Identity Data. press and hold CTRL.

click New twice to add two rows to the schedule. 46 Add information to the rows so that the schedule displays as shown in the following illustration. 392 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . 39 Select Schedule keys. select Base Finish. click the Key Name field. 38 In the New Schedule dialog box. 41 Click OK to create the new room style schedule. click Schedule/Quantities. and click OK. 40 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. 44 Using the same process. and Wall Finish. and enter Std Office. press and hold CTRL. Enter Carpet 1 for Floor Finish. 45 On the Options Bar. Enter Paint for Wall Finish. and click Add. Floor Finish. 43 In the new row. under Category. Define three new room styles 42 On the Options Bar. click New to add a row to the schedule.Add a schedule key 37 On the View tab of the Design Bar. enter the following information in the row: ■ ■ ■ Enter Vinyl for Base Finish. select Rooms. under Available fields.

50 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Edit for Fields. 48 On the Design Bar. click Modify. select Exec Offices for Room Style. click Modify. and click OK. 39) in the lower right corner of the floor plan. and select the room tags in the three offices (37. click View Properties. select Room Style. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams | 393 . 51 On the Design Bar. and select the room tag in the large conference room (29) in the upper right corner of the floor plan. select Exec Offices for Room Style. click . and click Add. 56 Under Other. 59 Click OK twice to update the schedule. 49 On the Options Bar. View the room schedule 54 In the Project Browser. double-click flr 3. click . 53 In the Element Properties dialog box. 52 On the Options Bar. double-click Room Schedule. 55 On the View menu. press and hold CTRL. under Schedules/Quantities. under Other. and click OK. 38. 57 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. under Available fields. 58 Change the order of the schedule as shown in the dialog box below.Apply the new room styles to the room schedule 47 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. under Other.

select Services from the list in the Room Style column. 394 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . Creating a Room Color Diagram In this exercise.60 For the rooms in the schedule that are named Services. Creating a Room Color Diagram. you create a room color diagram based on the names of the rooms in the floor plan. 61 Proceed to the next exercise.

2 Zoom out so you can view the entire building model. Change the fill colors that are applied to the conference rooms 6 On the Design Bar. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog box. scroll all the way to the left. 11 Click OK three times. and double-click flr 3. The rooms in the floor plan automatically change color. m_schedules. click Color Fill. 5 In the alert dialog box. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams | 395 . 9 In the Color dialog box. click Modify. A legend displays at the tip of your cursor. click the color button for Conference.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. The fill color in the rooms named Conference are displayed as green. under Views (all). Create a room color diagram 1 In the Project Browser. and select the color legend. click Edit Color Scheme. expand Floor Plans. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 4 Click in the lower right of the drawing area to place the legend. 10 In the PANTONE® Color Picker. click PANTONE.rvt. 7 On the Options Bar. and click the color green. click OK.

under Schedules/Quantities. you learn how to schedule Uniformat Assembly Codes as they are applied to Revit Building components. click Open. and level. click the Training Files icon. graphics are displayed with imperial values. 396 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . 2 In the New Schedules dialog box. The color diagram and legend reflect the changes that you made. You also learn how to create a furniture schedule that includes room name. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. NOTE Because the next two lessons use common files. Open c_Schedules_2. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. number. right-click in the Design Bar. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes In this lesson. under Categories. and click OK. Room no longer displays in the key/legend. 16 Close the exercise file. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click the Fields tab. you create a wall schedule that includes columns for the Uniformat Assembly Codes and assembly descriptions of the scheduled walls. select Project Units from the Settings menu and change the appropriate formats to metric. 14 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. click Save As. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions In this exercise. 13 In the Room Schedule. on the File menu. To display graphics with metric values. Create a new wall schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 15 If you want to save your changes. select Walls.Change the name of the single room named Room 12 In the Project Browser. double-click Room Schedule. select the following fields and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ Area Volume Width Length 5 Click OK to complete the schedule. double-click flr 3.rvt located in the Common folder. and click View. click Schedule/Quantities. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. 4 Under Available fields. select Services for Room (10) in the Name column. and save the exercise file with a unique name.

under Other. and click Properties to view the element properties of the wall schedule that you created. expand Schedules/Quantities. 9 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. 8 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Edit for Fields.Schedule Uniformat Assembly Codes 6 In the Project Browser. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes | 397 . 10 Click OK twice. The Assembly Code and Assembly Description fields display in the schedule. 7 Right-click Wall Schedule. add Assembly Code and Assembly Description to the schedule.

Partitions .Partitions.Interiors. expand C . expand Floor Plans. expand C10 . and then click in the schedule. under Views (all). expand C1010 .Assign an assembly code to a wall type in the project within the schedule 11 In the wall schedule. Assign an assembly code to a wall type in the project from the building model 15 In the Project Browser.Fixed Partitions. click in the Assembly code column in the first row of the schedule. and double-click Level 1. 398 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . All of the walls of this wall type are updated. and click . 12 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog box. and select C1010115 . expand C1010100 . 14 Click OK in the dialog box that explains that the change will be applied to all elements of the chosen type.Brick Veneer w/ Stud. 13 Click OK.Interior Construction.

under Schedules/Quantities. click . under Identity Data.Drywall w/ Metal Stud.16 Select one of the Interior . expand C1010.Partitions . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes | 399 . and then click . double-click Furniture Schedule. click in the Assembly Code field. click Edit/New. 21 Click OK three times. expand C1010100.5 1/2" Partition (1hr) walls. Schedule building model components by level and room 23 In the Project Browser. expand C. and select C1010145 . double-click Wall Schedule. 22 In the Project Browser. under Schedules/Quantities. 17 On the Options Bar. 20 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog box. 19 In the Type Properties dialog box. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. expand C10.

Change the appearance of the schedule 33 Zoom in on the schedule on the sheet. 25 In the Element Properties dialog box. 27 Add Room: Name and Room: Number to the schedule. click Sheet. and click OK. and then add Level and Manufacturer to the schedule. under Other. and click Properties. 32 Drag the furniture schedule from the Project Browser onto the sheet. 31 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. 400 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . 29 Click OK twice. and click to place it. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : 30 x 42 Horizontal. 28 Select Furniture for Select available fields from. Place the Furniture Schedule on a new drawing sheet 30 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Room for Select available fields from. right-click Furniture Schedule.24 In the Project Browser. 26 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. click Edit for Fields. 34 Adjust the row length in the schedule by selecting and moving the blue grips that are displayed on the top of the schedule.

37 If you want to save your changes. An example of the use of shared parameters is the need to add specific parameters to a family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not present by default. you learn how to use shared parameters to define additional parameters that are not included in pre-defined instance and type parameters either within family components or within the project template. Scheduling Shared Parameters In this lesson.35 Split the schedule into multiple segments by clicking the blue break line that is displayed on the right border of the schedule. These shared parameters can be added to any family. on the File menu. adding the shared parameters to a family. click Save As. and creating a multi-category schedule. you create a multi-category schedule. 36 Select the blue crosses that are displayed in the center of each schedule segment to reposition the schedule segments as shown. Their values may also be aggregated and reported within Revit Building multi-category schedules. and are defined and stored in an external file. regardless of category. and save the exercise file with a unique name. ensuring consistency across families and projects. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 401 . 38 Close the exercise file. The new schedule segments are automatically placed to the right of the original schedule and are top aligned. The following exercise demonstrates the solution for this situation and covers the process of setting up shared parameters. Creating a Multi-Category Schedule In this exercise.

click New. click Shared Parameters. and assign Text for Type. 402 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . and then generate the multi-category schedule. enter Hardware. Create a shared parameter file 1 On the File menu. Click OK if the alert box indicates that the shared parameter file does not exist. 7 Under Parameters. click New. Create parameters in the Hardware group 6 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog box. Create a new parameter group to store individual parameters 4 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog box. 2 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog box. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. enter a file name. make sure you save your shared parameter files in a location where other users can access it. and click OK. The shared parameter file (TXT) is created. and click Save. and click OK. create a multi-category tag that you use to tag a simple floor plan. ID. 9 Add three additional parameters. 5 In the New Parameter Group dialog box. enter Closure for Name. 10 After you add the parameters. If you are working on a network. click OK. Shared parameters are saved to an external file. You store all of your hardware-related parameters within this group for use in the project. verify that Hardware is selected for Parameter group. select Text for Type.You create shared parameters. Hinge. under Groups. 3 In the Save As dialog box. click Create. and Lock Set. add them to a door family.

The Family Types dialog box displays the parameters that are currently available for this family category. Enter Chrome for Hinge. click Close to close the file. under Parameters. click Open.Add the shared parameters to a family 11 On the File menu. click Family Types. Enter N/A for Closure. under Parameters. and click OK. 14 On the Design Bar. 21 Click OK. and click OK. 20 Assign the new parameters the following values by entering them in the corresponding Value field. You are now working in the Family Editor.rfa located in the Common folder. 22 Save the file as NewDoor in an appropriate location. select ID. 17 In the Shared Parameters dialog box. 13 Open c_ Door. 23 On the File menu. 18 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. Enter 1 for ID. The parameters are displayed in the Family Types dialog box. select Instance. 19 Repeat the steps for the other parameters. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 403 . and click Select. click Add. select Shared parameter. click the Training Files icon. 15 In the Family Types dialog box. setting them as Type parameters. ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter Yale for Lock Set. so that you can use it later in this exercise. 16 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. 12 In the left pane of the Open dialog box.

38 Save the file as HardwareTag in an appropriate location. 29 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. and click Open. click New ➤ Annotation Symbol. select ID. 25 In the New dialog box. select Multi-Category Tag. 32 In the Select Parameter dialog box. ID). click . Use the multi-category tag in a project 40 On the File menu. 30 In the Shared Parameters dialog box. click Close to close the file. 28 In the Select Parameter dialog box.rvt located in the Common folder. and click Open. 39 On the File menu. 27 Click at the intersection of the reference planes in the drawing window to display the Select Parameter dialog box.Create a multi-category tag 24 On the File menu. 404 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . click Label. click Select.rft in the Annotations folder. 31 Under Parameters. as shown. click Lines.. and click OK twice. 26 On Design Bar. the tag cannot attach to any component. A multi-category tag must have at least one label with an external parameter set as a filter parameter. 41 In the Open dialog box. click Add. This option ensures that this tag attaches only to a component with that same filter parameter (i.e. 37 Draw a rectangle around the tag. 36 On the Options Bar. under Parameter Group. 34 Zoom in to the tag at the intersection of the reference planes. NOTE If you do not specify a filter parameter for the tag. select Filter parameter. select Hardware. 35 On the Design Bar. select c_Hardware_Plan. 33 Click OK. Open.

52 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. select Multi-Category from the list. 45 In the Type Selector. 53 Click OK. and click OK. and load into the project the multi-category tag files HardwareTag. click Tag All Not Tagged to quickly tag all the components with the filter parameter. select Multi-Category Tags for Category. click Tag. 47 Click to place the tag. 44 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family.42 On the File menu.rfa that you just created. click Schedule/Quantities.rfa and NewDoor. 51 In the New Schedule dialog box. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 405 . Notice that the HardwareTag is reading the shared parameter that you created earlier and attached to the Door family. and click OK. 48 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Create a multi-category schedule 50 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 46 Move your cursor into the drawing window. add the following fields to the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ID Mark Type Family Closure Lock Set NOTE Do not be concerned with duplicate ID and Lock Set fields. 49 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog box. select the multi-category HardwareTag that you just loaded. 43 Replace any existing doors by selecting them and changing their type to the NewDoor type that you just loaded. Notice that you can highlight only those components that have the filter parameter that you set earlier to ID.

expand Floor Plans.M_Single-Flush Vision: 864 x 2032 mm 3 . you create two schedules.rvt located in the Metric folder. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. all of the doors in the project would be scheduled. click the Training Files icon.M_Single-Flush Vision: 915 x 2134 mm 3 . expand Views (all).The multi-category schedule is displayed. The first schedule that you create is a level-based door schedule that uses a filter to exclude all of the doors that are not on floor three of the building model. Open m_First_Project-West_Wing. you create a level based door schedule. However. There are 11 doors of the following types on this level of the building model: ■ ■ ■ 5 . In the left pane of the Open dialog box.UK_Single-Flush: SO 1010 x 2410 mm If you created a standard door schedule. View the third floor of the building 1 In the Project Browser. The second schedule that you create is a wall schedule that calculates the cost of the walls in the project. The floor plan is displayed. click Schedule/Quantities. Creating a Level-Based Door Schedule with a Filter In this exercise. Using Formulas and Filters in Schedules In this lesson. click Save As. and save the exercise file with a unique name. and double-click Level 3. click Open. 54 If you want to save your changes. based on wall area. 406 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . 55 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. on the File menu. you want to filter out all doors that are not on level 3 to include only the 11 doors listed above. Create a new door schedule for level flr 3 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. You use both filters and a formula to create the second schedule.

Verify New Construction is selected for Phase. and specify the following options: ■ ■ Select Family and Type for Sort by. 12 Right-click the schedule. and it causes the schedule to include only the doors on Level 3. under Other. select the following fields. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box. and select (none) for Filter. select Hidden Field. Select Level 3 in the third menu. click the Fields tab. 6 Under Available fields. This filter checks each door in the project to see which level it is associated with. 8 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. 11 Under Field formatting. Select equals in the second menu. 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. and click View Properties. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Family and Type Sill Height Head Height Width Level 7 Click the Filter tab. enter Doors . 14 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. click the Filter tab. 15 Click OK twice. select Doors. click Edit for Filter. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. Verify Schedule building components is selected. 4 Click OK. Using Formulas and Filters in Schedules | 407 . Hide the Level field in the schedule so it is used only to filter the doors that are not on level 3 and not included as a column in the schedule 9 Click the Formatting tab.Level 3. Under Name. and specify the following values for Filter by: ■ ■ ■ Select Level in the first menu.3 In the New Schedule dialog box. 10 Under Fields. The schedule includes the count and type for only doors on floor 3. Clear Itemize every instance to group the like door types into one row. and click OK. select Level. The counts for the door types represent the door schedule for the entire model.

2 In the New Schedule dialog box. 3 Click OK. The wall type information for each wall is updated when you enter this data. you create a wall schedule that provides a total cost of all of the walls in the project based on the total square footage of each wall type. Creating a Wall Schedule with Filters and a Formula In this exercise. select Area. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Family and Type Cost Area 6 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. click Schedule/Quantities. select the following fields. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Category. select Walls. 9 Click the Formatting tab. 12 Under Fields. select Cost. 10 Under Fields. 14 Since no cost has been assigned to these wall types. m to more accurately represent the data. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 408 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . enter Cost/Sq. enter a cost value for each type in the schedule. 8 Clear Itemize every instance to group the like wall types into one row. Use the cost values in the following illustration.16 On the Standard toolbar.rvt. m_First_Project-West_Wing. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. select Calculate totals so that the total area of the each type is calculated. 11 Under Heading. 13 Click OK. 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. 7 Select Family and Type for Sort by. click once so the schedule represents only the doors on Flr 3. 5 Under Available fields. Create a new schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Verify New Construction is selected under Phase. The schedule is displayed. Creating a Wall Schedule with Filters and a Formula. Verify Schedule building components is selected. and then under Field Formatting. click the Fields tab.

you learn how to schedule project parameters. This is because you did not select to calculate the totals for that field. select Calculate totals to ensure that a total of all the walls is returned. 29 Close the exercise file. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Total Cost for Name. click Save As. 22 Under Field formatting. 28 If you want to save your changes. 17 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. 18 In the Calculated Value dialog box. The schedule is displayed. and click View Properties. Scheduling Project Parameters In this lesson. Notice that there is no grand total displayed for the Cost/Sq. 26 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. 27 Select Grand totals to have the schedule display the sum of any row for which you selected Calculate totals on the Formatting tab. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click the Sorting/Grouping tab. 19 Click OK. 23 Click Field Format.Determine the total cost for each wall type by multiplying the total area of the wall by the cost per square foot 15 Right-click the schedule. Verify that Number is selected for Type. 21 Under Fields. Select Fixed for Units. Project parameters are instance or type parameters that you can use to schedule information specific to the project that you are working with. 25 Click OK. NOTE The /(1 m^2) in the formula is required to make the resulting value unitless. 16 In the Element Properties dialog box. 20 Click the Formatting tab. under Other. and click OK twice. m column. unlike shared parameters. click Calculated Value. Scheduling Project Parameters | 409 . you cannot use them to tag objects. click Edit for Fields. They cannot be shared with other projects and. Enter Area * Cost/(1 m^2) for Formula. without the value it would have a unit of area. 24 In the Format dialog box. Select 2 decimal places for Rounding. on the File menu. select Total Cost.

7 Tag the rooms as shown in the following illustration. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. or by entering it in the properties of the room tag. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. Under Categories.Creating a Room Schedule with Project Parameters In this exercise. After you create the schedule. click Project Parameters. The new project parameter Occupant is displayed in the Project Parameters dialog box. 5 Click OK. right-click in the Design Bar. click Add to create the new parameter. Assign the new Occupant parameter to the project and create the room schedule 6 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click the Training Files icon. you create a room schedule for the following office floor plan that includes the project parameter. You begin by adding the Occupant parameter to the project and creating the room schedule to include the Occupant parameter as a column in the schedule. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click Room Tag. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog box. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Project Parameter. either by entering it directly. click Open. Create a project parameter 1 On the Settings menu. and click Drafting. Occupant. Open m_Office_2. 4 Click OK. select Rooms to associate the Occupant parameter with the Room category. you can add information to the Occupant column in the schedule.rvt located in the Metric folder. TIP If the Drafting tab of the Design Bar is not active. 410 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . Enter Occupant for Name.

under Categories. and save the exercise file with a unique name.8 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access In this exercise. on the File menu. and click OK. Exporting Project Information with ODBC | 411 . click Schedule/Quantities. The Occupant field is displayed in the schedule. select the following fields. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Area Department Occupant 12 Click OK to generate the schedule. select Rooms to create a room schedule. 11 Under Available fields. 15 Close the exercise file. 10 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. click Save As. Exporting Project Information with ODBC In this lesson. click the Fields tab. The process that you use to export the database is similar for any other ODBC-compliant database. you learn how to export project information to an ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) compatible database. you learn how to export project information into a Microsoft® Access 2000 database. 14 If you want to save your changes. 9 In the New Schedule dialog box. 13 Add names to the occupant field by entering them directly in the schedule or by entering them in the room tag properties.

mdb for Database Name. 13 Close the exercise file. These parameters are exported as well and contain the ID of the key element. tables that list instances only are created for levels and rooms because these categories do not have types. 10 When the confirmation displays. click Open. used for choosing one of the keys from the key schedule. click OK in the dialog box. Open c_Schedules_2. click Export ➤ ODBC Database. click the Training Files icon.Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. click Create. Additionally. The exported columns are the same as the columns in the key schedule. 2 In the Select Data Source dialog box. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 7 In the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog box. select a location for the database file. under Database. and some instance tables include a “RoomId” column containing the ID of the room that the instance is in. under Database Name. 6 Click Finish. click the File Data Source tab. and open the database in Microsoft Access. instance tables include a “TypeId” column containing the ID of the instance’s type. so that each table of elements includes an “Id” column. 11 In the OBDC Microsoft Access Setup dialog box. and click OK to create the database. a table is also created for each key schedule in a project. in addition to the Id column. Each key schedule gives elements in its category a new parameter. In addition to the tables for instances and types in a category. 9 Under Directories. 8 In the New Database dialog box.rvt located in the Common folder. 12 Click OK in the remaining dialog boxes. and click Next. One final table is also exported: Assembly Codes. A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements. 5 Enter RevitDSN for the name of the DSN. The table of types includes an Assembly Code column that references the Assembly Codes table. 4 In the Create New Data Source dialog box. The columns of the table are Assembly Code and Assembly Description. Revit Building creates two tables for the following categories of elements: one that lists all of the element instances in a project and one that lists all of the element types in a project (see below). Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different tables. enter Revit_Project. This table contains one row for each Uniformat Assembly Code. 3 Click New. click OK. and click Next. 412 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . as long as the category is one of the categories that Revit Building exports. For example. 1 On the File menu. select the Microsoft Access driver (*mdb).

413 . you learn how to change the base elevation of a project.Annotating and Dimensioning 14 In this tutorial. and how to annotate and dimension your Autodesk Revit Building projects.

Level 1 displays an elevation value of 0 mm. expand Elevations. you learn how to relocate the base elevation of a project. Setting the Base Elevation of a House In this exercise. Open m_simple_house. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. expand Views (all). you can relocate the project at a base elevation of 1500 m and define the levels as shared so that Level 1 reads 1500 m. 414 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning .rvt located in the Metric folder. and not 1504 m. if a project is built on a plateau at 1500 m and Level 2 is 4 m above the base elevation. Define Level 1 as a shared level 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click South. you relocate the base elevation of a small house from 0 m to 10000 m. click the Training Files icon. while Level 2 reads 4 m. as the base elevation of most projects is rarely at sea level. After you define the levels as shared and relocate the project. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. You accomplish this in Revit Building by defining levels as either project or shared levels. click Open. and Level 2 reads 1504 m. For example. For example.Setting the Base Elevation of a Project In this lesson. Shared levels report an elevation value relative to an origin that you establish when you relocate the project. Level 1 reads 1500 m. the elevation value of the second level of the house (4000 mm above Level 1) reports an elevation of 14000 mm. or you can change the base elevation and add its value to the levels above it. if a project is built on a plateau at 1500 meters and Level 2 is 4 meters above the base elevation. Project levels report elevation as it relates to other levels in the project. You can change the base elevation without changing the elevation value of every other level in the project. and not 4 m.

Shared. click Duplicate. Relocate the project 9 On the Tools menu. The elevation of the other levels remains the same. under Constraints. The reported value of Level 2 changes to take the value of the global elevation into consideration. and press ENTER. click Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. 14 In the Type Selector. The base elevation now reads 10000 mm. click Edit/New. 5 In the Type Properties dialog box. By entering 10000 mm in this step. to better demonstrate how shared levels work. enter 10000 mm. However. 7 In the Type Properties dialog box. 12 On the View menu. 13 Select the Level 2 line. select Level : Level . 11 Move the cursor above the elevation line. and you must create a new level type. 10 Select the Level 1 line. By selecting the Level 1 line. In order for Level 1 to report the global elevation after the project is relocated. 3 On the Options Bar. 6 In the Name dialog box. enter Level . Setting the Base Elevation of a Project | 415 . you would change the parameter for all the levels in the Project. If you did that now.Shared. The south elevation is displayed. 8 Click OK twice. select Shared for Elevation Base.2 Select the Level 1 line. 4 In the Element Properties dialog box. you specify the point from which you want to relocate the project. you must set the Elevation Base parameter to Shared. click . click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. you specify the new location of the project. only the Elevation Base parameter of Level 1 is shared at this time. and click OK.

and save the exercise file with a unique name. permanent dimensions are created automatically. Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created. Dimensioning In this lesson. define the roof level as shared. click Save As. The changes in elevation have propagated to this view.15 In the Project Browser. double-click North. In this case. so it reports an elevation of 18000 mm. on the File menu. as well as other views of the building model. under Elevations. 17 If you want to save your changes. Temporary dimensions display automatically when you create and insert components. although you must turn on their visibility to view them. except when you sketch profiles to create families. there are two types of dimensions: temporary and permanent. you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your designs. In Revit Building. 16 Using the same method. 416 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . 18 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.

click the Training Files icon. and angular dimensions.Creating Dimensions In this exercise. that you can add to your drawings. 3 When the centerline of the wall highlights. move the cursor over the top straight wall on the floor plan. click Open. you learn how to create and modify different types of permanent dimensions. 4 Move the cursor over the wall at the very bottom of the view. Create permanent dimensions 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The different types of dimensions that you can add include aligned. dimensions are aligned and snap to wall centerlines. The default dimensioning options display on the Options Bar. By default. click Dimension. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Open m_Dimensions. Dimensioning | 417 . select it. select it. multi-segmented. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu.rvt located in the Metric folder. linear. 2 Without making any changes on the Options Bar. and when the centerline of the wall highlights. radial.

Create multi-segmented dimensions 7 On the Design Bar. The dimension displays in the drawing. indicating that the dimension can be modified. 6 Click the lock.5 Move the cursor to the left. and click to place the dimension. an equal symbol with a slash through it is displayed. The lock displays as locked. An unlocked lock symbol displays next to each dimension segment. 8 Dimension the four vertical walls: ■ ■ Select the four vertical wall segments sequentially. indicating that the dimension segments are not equal in length. Only aligned and angular permanent dimensions can be constrained in this way. and click to set the location of the dimension. click Dimension. 418 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . indicating that you cannot change the distance between the referenced walls without first unlocking the dimension. A lock symbol that is unlocked displays next to it. In addition. Move the cursor below the lowest horizontal wall. outside of the wall.

The slash no longer displays through the equal symbol. Create a radial dimension 10 On the Design Bar. click 12 Dimension the curved wall: ■ ■ . click Dimension. 11 On the Options Bar. indicating that the segments are now equal. Select the curved corner wall to display the radial dimension. Move the cursor to the inside of the curved wall. and click to place the dimension. and the are dimensions permanent and constrained to each other.9 Click the equal symbol to make all dimension segment lengths equal. Dimensioning | 419 .

click Dimension. and zoom in around the curved wall. select the dimension line of the radial dimension. click and select Wall faces for Prefer. 420 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . the default dimension option. 16 On the Options Bar.13 On the View menu. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. and place the dimension as shown in the following illustration. Select the inside face of the wall. 18 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing window. The dimension is snapped to the wall center. and press DELETE. 14 On the Design Bar. 17 Dimension the curved wall again: ■ ■ Move your cursor over the inside face of the wall until it highlights. click Modify. 15 On the Design Bar.

Notice that the Prefer and Pick options are no longer available on the Options Bar. and depends on the cursor tracking behavior. click . click and verify that Wall faces is selected for Prefer. and then select the bottom point of the exterior face. 20 Dimension the slanted wall at the top right in the floor plan: ■ ■ Select the inside face of the slanted wall. Move your cursor to the left to size the dimension arc. Create a linear dimension 21 On the Options Bar. Dimensioning | 421 . and click to place the dimension. You can override the cursor tracking by toggling with the spacebar. and click to place the dimension.You can now view the radial dimension within the floor plan. Create an angular dimension 19 On the Options Bar. The linear dimension tool has a more restricted selection filter so that you can select only points. 22 Dimension the vertical wall at the top right in the floor plan: ■ ■ Select the top point on the exterior face of the wall. and then select the inside face of the vertical wall above it. The dimension is always constrained to either the horizontal or vertical axis. as shown in the following illustration. Move your cursor to the right.

you specify their origin on the Options Bar. but do not select anything. 5 Hover the cursor near the center of the bottom wall. and press TAB repeatedly. delete. When you place dimensions. you learn to add. 6 When the outside face of the wall highlights. you may need to override their settings on an instance basis. select it. m_Dimensions. click Dimension. Each time you press TAB. including the wall centerline. However. 24 Proceed to the next exercise. where the witness lines referring to interior walls would be located on the centerline of each wall. 4 Alternate the cursor position over the inner and outer bottom wall face. 2 On the Options Bar. in some cases.23 On the Design Bar. 3 Move the cursor over the bottom wall. because the Prefer wall face option is selected instead of the Prefer wall centerline option. For example. click Modify. a different wall selection choice highlights. verify that Wall faces is selected for Prefer. 422 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . Override dimension defaults 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.rvt. Controlling Witness Line Location. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Controlling Witness Line Location In this exercise. for a multi-segmented dimension. and change the origin of dimension witness lines. you may want to locate the two outermost witness lines on the exterior face of each wall. Notice that only the wall faces highlight when you move the cursor over them.

9 Place the dimension as shown in the following illustration. 8 Move the cursor to the top horizontal wall and select the exterior face. press TAB until the wall centerline highlights. click Modify. The dimension highlights and control boxes display on each witness line.7 Move the cursor over the middle horizontal wall. Dimensioning | 423 . 11 Select the dimension line shown in the following illustration. and select it. Edit dimension witness lines 10 On the Design Bar.

424 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . The witness line moves to the wall centerline. 13 Click the control box again. but do not select it.12 Click once on the control box on the lowest witness line. 14 Move the cursor to the control box on the witness line at the top wall. The witness line moves to the inside wall face.

a shortcut menu with different options is displayed. you learn to modify the type parameters of dimensions.rvt.15 Right-click the control box. The full dimension string is displayed again. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and click Delete Witness Line. Modifying Dimension Properties. Change the type parameters of the floor plan dimensions 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Modifying Dimension Properties In this exercise. click Modify and select the dimension that you modified in the previous exercise. 17 Select the outside face of the top wall. If you right-click the control box. m_Dimensions. click in the drawing area away from the floor plan. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. Dimensioning | 425 . IMPORTANT Be careful to right-click the witness line and not the control box on the witness line. 18 To end the editing command. 16 Right-click the remaining dimension line and click Edit Witness Lines. The witness line is deleted.

alignments can be made and locked with minimal effort. a lock symbol immediately displays. allowing you to lock the alignment of the walls. when sketching walls. then Up for Read Convention. and save the exercise file with a unique name. on the File menu. click Modify. For example. Aligning components is similar to dimensioning components with a value of zero. you learn to align components and lock their alignment to better work with them in your drawings. click Save As. The dimensions update as shown in the following illustration. click Edit/New. 4 In the Type Properties dialog box. Working with Alignments and Constraints In this exercise.2 On the Options Bar. Under Text. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. 426 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . 3 In the Element Properties dialog box. 5 Click OK twice. select Right. enter 5 mm for the Text Size. or close the exercise file without saving your changes. As you create components. 7 If you want to save your changes. 6 On the Design Bar. Working with Alignments and Constraints. change the following type parameter values: ■ ■ Under Text. if two or more walls are colinear. click . A locked alignment is a constraint that is maintained if any of the components is moved or modified.

and select Wall centerlines for Prefer.Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. When you align two components. The short horizontal wall on the left moves to align with the upper horizontal wall. indicating that the Align command is active. The cursor displays two arrows at its tip. Align the two uppermost horizontal walls in the floor plan 1 On the Tools toolbar. 5 On the Options Bar. indicating that the alignment of the two walls is now locked. click . 3 Click the lock. Open m_Alignment. while the second component moves to complete the alignment. Select the exterior face of the uppermost horizontal wall. Align the three short horizontal walls below the two walls that you aligned 4 On the Tools toolbar. the first component that you select remains fixed in position. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click 2 Align the walls: ■ ■ . The symbol changes to a closed lock.rvt located in the Metric folder. Select the exterior face of the short horizontal wall on the left. The lock symbol displays as unlocked. 6 Select the lower center wall to define it as the fixed wall to which the other walls will align. Dimensioning | 427 . click Open. select Multiple Alignment. indicating the two walls are not constrained to each other. click the Training Files icon.

8 Click the lock to lock the alignment of the walls. 10 On the Design Bar. but the wall on the right does not because the alignment between the two walls is not constrained (locked). 9 Select the short horizontal wall on the right. The wall on the left moves with the middle wall when you drag it. 11 Select the middle wall and drag it downward. Do not lock this segment of the alignment.7 Select the short wall to the left. 428 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . click Modify.

select Multiple Alignment. NOTE Because you are not aligning walls. 13 Click the right wall.12 On the toolbar. and then click the lock to align the wall with the middle wall. the Prefer wall faces or centerline option on the Options Bar does not apply to the doors. Dimensioning | 429 . click once to undo the move. Move the walls to verify the alignment. Align doors in the floor plan 14 On the Tools toolbar. 16 Select the centerline of Door 4 on the upper right side of the model. 15 On the Options bar. click .

19 Select Door 2 and lock it to constrain it Doors 3 and 4. 430 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning .17 Select the centerline of Door 3 to the left. 18 Click the lock to constrain the movement of the doors. 22 Slide the door up or down the wall and notice how the other doors move with it. 21 On the Design Bar. click Modify and select one of the aligned doors. 20 Select Door 1 and lock it to constrain it to the other doors. Door 3 aligns with Door 4.

29 To view the constraint. Dimensioning | 431 .Align the windows in the floor plan 23 On the Tools toolbar. 24 On the Options Bar. 28 Select the far right window in the top wall. and select the dimension between the second window and the right wall. clear Multiple Alignment. 30 Click the lock to unlock it. 25 Select the window in the upper horizontal wall on the left side of the floor plan. click Modify. on the Design Bar. The second window does not align because it is already constrained by a locked dimension. click . 26 Select the window on the far left in the lower wall. click and repeat steps 27 . indicating the constraint.28 to align the windows. The two windows align. A lock is displayed. 27 Select the far right window in the bottom wall. 31 On the Tools toolbar.

as shown in the following illustration. m_Alignment. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.rvt. You want to dimension the wall so that the width of each window displays in the dimension string. Creating Automatic Linear Wall Dimensions In this exercise. 432 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . Creating Automatic Linear Wall Dimensions. 1 View the lower horizontal wall and notice that it includes five windows. 33 Proceed to the next exercise.32 Align the remaining windows. you learn how to automatically dimension a linear wall with openings (windows) by selecting the wall. instead of selecting the wall and all the openings as dimension references.

click Dimension. on the File menu. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click Save As. Select Entire Walls for Pick. The two vertical walls highlight. Verify Wall centerlines is selected for Prefer. Dimensioning | 433 . select Openings. the windows). 3 On the Options Bar. and that the window widths are referenced in the overall dimension string. 8 If you want to save your changes. indicating the start and end of the dimension string. These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings (in this case. 5 Click OK. 9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.2 On the Design Bar. 7 Move your cursor below the lower horizontal wall and click to add the dimension. Click Options. 6 Select the lower horizontal wall. and then Widths. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click . 4 In the Auto Dimension Options dialog box.

You learn how to create angular dimensions and how to use an equality constraint to space the windows equally. and double-click Level 1. 3 On the Options Bar. click the Training Files icon. 4 Dimension the three windows near the east entrance by selecting the centerline of each window and placing the dimensions as shown in the following illustration. sequentially tag rooms on a floor plan. click . you how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit Building. click Open. Create angular dimensions 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all).rvt located in the Common folder. tag doors and windows.Annotating In this lesson. 434 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . Open c_Area. you dimension the three windows on a floor plan. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. click Dimension. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. rotate tags with building components. You learn how to: ■ ■ ■ ■ create angular dimensions. Creating Angular Dimensions In this exercise. expand Floor Plans.

c_Area. Tag rooms sequentially 1 On the View menu. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the entire floor plan. Sequentially Tagging Rooms In this exercise.rvt. Sequentially Tagging Rooms. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. you sequentially tag the rooms on the floor plan. and click to place the room tag. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 3 Move the cursor to the room at the upper right of the plan view. Annotating | 435 . click Room Tag. The enclosed area that represents the room highlights to indicate that it will be tagged. 6 Proceed to the next exercise.5 Click the equal sign associated with the angular dimension string to equally space the windows.

enter 101. click Room tag. ■ The second tag that you place displays the sequential number 102. 436 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . 5 Zoom in on the tag number. 6 Place another room tag: ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. Align the tags by moving the cursor until a dashed green line displays between the placed tag and the one that displays at the tip of the cursor. 7 Continue to place room tags.4 On the Design Bar. Move the cursor into the room below the one previously tagged. click Modify. and select the room tag. click it. Click to place the new tag. indicating that it can be edited. Sequential letters are also supported. The room tag number displays in blue.

Add a door and tag 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. c_Area. click Door. 7 Place the door as shown in the following illustration. 2 In the Type Selector. click Door. 4 Place the door with the tag in the room at the bottom left. and clear Leader.8 Proceed to the next exercise. 6 On the Options Bar. as shown in the following illustration. Tagging Doors and Windows. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. verify that Tag on placement is selected. you learn how to place door and window tags. Tagging Doors and Windows In this exercise. Annotating | 437 . You learn how to add a door to the floor plan that includes a tag. and select Leader. to add a tag with a leader. and to tag doors and windows that are not tagged.rvt. select Tag on Placement to add a tag when you place the door in the floor plan. 3 On the Options Bar. select a door type that you want to add to the floor plan. Place a door with a door tag and leader 5 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

Notice that the door is placed without a tag. under Category. select Create. clear Tag on placement. The door is tagged with a tag and leader. 438 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . click Tag All Not Tagged. clear Create. All of the windows that were not tagged are now tagged. Tag a door after placing it 11 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 10 Place the door below Door 6. verify that Door Tags is selected for Category. 15 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog box. and then click OK. 9 On the Options Bar. 16 Under Leader. click Tag All Not Tagged.Place a door without a tag 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Door. Tag the windows in the floor plan 14 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 12 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog box. select Window Tags. and click OK. 13 Under Leader.

or close the exercise file without saving your changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name.17 If you want to save your changes. click Save As. on the File menu. Annotating | 439 .

440 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning .

how to control fill pattern colors. and how to use plan regions within floor plans and reflected ceiling plans. you learn how to change the visibility of detail components.Viewing 15 In this tutorial. you learn to create and customize views of building information models. More specifically. You learn how to access and create building model views and how to change the visibility of building components and annotation within views. 441 .

and three-dimensional (3D) views. you learn how to access different views of the building model. you learn to create and customize user-defined views of a building information model. TIP If the Project Browser does not display. sections. Both hidden lines and window tags display in the east elevation view. Exploring the Building Model In this exercise.rvt located in the Metric folder. The current file name is displayed in the Project Browser title bar. locate the Project Browser.Viewing a Building Model In this lesson. 2 In the Project Browser. The Project Browser is displayed by default between the Design Bar and the drawing area. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. and double-click East. You also learn how to control the visibility of different building components and annotation within building model views. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. A new view displays a wireframe view of the east elevation view of the building model. scroll down and click the Training Files icon. including elevation and three-dimensional views. click Open. Open an elevation view of the building model 1 On the left side of the drawing area. click . and learn how to control the visibility of building components and annotation within them. Open m_Viewing_Exercise. You create elevations. on the Standard toolbar. expand Views (all). 442 | Chapter 15 Viewing . expand Elevations.

Create a 3D view of the building model 9 On the View toolbar. Notice that window tags continue to display in the view. and click Hidden Line. click the Annotation Categories tab. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides for Elevation: East dialog box. Turn off the display of window tags in the elevation view 4 On the View menu. The default name of the view is {3D}.Display the elevation view with hidden lines 3 On the View Control Bar. the east elevation. The 3D view is displayed in a new viewing window. This change is applied only in this elevation view. click Model Graphics Style. This hides the lines that show through to the exterior of the elevation view. The window tags are no longer displayed in this view. 7 Under Visibility. 8 Click OK. 6 Select Include categories from all disciplines in the list above. scroll down and clear Window Tags. This change is applied only to the active view. click . Viewing a Building Model | 443 . click Visibility/Graphics. The east elevation view displays with hidden lines.

and click Rename. . 17 In the Rename View dialog box. and click OK. 12 Pan the view by clicking and dragging the cursor in the drawing area. Notice that the view name is updated in the title bar of the viewing window and in the Project Browser. The view follows the movement of the cursor. expand Views (all). you can enable zoom mode by rolling the middle wheel. and notice that the cursor displays as a magnifying glass This indicates that you are in zoom mode. zoom. and spin the building model by clicking the appropriate button in this dialog box. 19 In the Project Browser. enter My 3D View. Notice that the view continues to display with hidden lines and no window tags. 14 View the Dynamic View dialog box in the lower left corner of the screen. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. and expand 3D Views. right-click {3D}. you can enable pan mode by pressing and holding the middle wheel button while moving the mouse. 13 Press and hold CTRL. 444 | Chapter 15 Viewing . NOTE If you have a pointing device with a middle wheel. under 3D Views. 16 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. double-click My 3D View. Creating a Perspective View with a Camera. click X to close the view. 18 In the upper right corner of the viewing window. NOTE If you have a pointing device with a middle wheel. Save the current 3D view 15 In the Project Browser. click to reorient the view.10 On the View toolbar. . 11 Move the cursor to the drawing window and notice that it now displays as a hand This means you are in pan mode. You can pan.

you create a perspective view of the building model with a camera. right-click in the Design Bar. 3 Add the camera to the view by specifying two points: one for the camera position and the other for the camera target point: ■ ■ Specify the first point in the top right corner of the drawing. Cameras define the eye point. as shown in the following illustration.Creating a Perspective View with a Camera In this exercise. m_Viewing_Exercise. expand Views (all). the new view named 3D View 1 is displayed by default in a perspective view. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. After you specify the second point (the view target). Create the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Viewing a Building Model | 445 .rvt. eye height. outside of the dimension lines. expand Floor Plans. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. and click View. click Camera. and distance from the target. Specify the second point in one of the rooms in the building. and double-click Level 1.

click the Walkthrough tab located at the bottom of the dialog box. Move the cursor up and down in the view to move the cursor forward and backward. Press and hold the left mouse button. Press and hold the left mouse button. click Dynamically Modify View. 9 To move the camera forward and backward in the view: ■ ■ ■ Click Forward/Back and move the cursor into the perspective view. down. and sideways to see how the view changes. Change the camera projection settings 6 On the View menu. You can use the walkthrough controls in this dialog box to move the camera position and change the view. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit.4 Select the blue grips that display on the crop region of the view and move them to resize the view so the view includes the entire building model. Move the cursor up. 5 On the View menu. 7 In the Dynamic View dialog box. 446 | Chapter 15 Viewing . 8 To move the camera eye position higher or lower: ■ ■ ■ Click Dolly and move the cursor into the perspective view.

11 Adjust the view as shown in the following illustration. Press and hold the left mouse button.10 To rotate the camera around the target: ■ ■ ■ Click Turn and move the cursor into the perspective view. 13 On the View menu. Change the camera position. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. Viewing a Building Model | 447 . You may need to reposition the view with the other controls. Four views of the model display in the drawing area. height. click Tile. Move the cursor side to side in the view to rotate the view. and target 12 On the Window menu.

double-click Level 1. under Floor Plans. 17 In My 3D View. 16 Right-click. 15 In the Project Browser. The border of the window that contains the Level 1 view highlights. click 3D View 1. The camera and the view direction of the camera are displayed in the appropriate views. under 3D Views. 448 | Chapter 15 Viewing . select the camera target point (the magenta grip). and click Show Camera. and move it to another location.14 In the Project Browser.

click to create a new 3D view. Click OK. 18 Change the target and eye elevation of the camera by modifying its properties: ■ ■ Select the camera in My 3D View. and click Shading. In the Element Properties dialog box. click Model Graphics Style. Use a section box to clip the model 19 On the View toolbar. right-click. ■ 3D View 1 immediately updates to show the change. and click Properties. TIP The updated view depends on the location of the camera before you change the elevation values. 21 Rotate the view as shown in the following illustration. 20 On the View Control Bar. under Camera.3D View 1 should update immediately after you move the target point of the camera. enter 15000 for Eye Elevation and 1700 for Target Elevation. Viewing a Building Model | 449 .

25 Select and move the lower right grip on the section box closer to the model. and click OK. click View Properties. A section box is displayed around the model.22 On the View menu. 24 Click the section box. select Section Box. under Extents. 450 | Chapter 15 Viewing . as shown in the following illustration. A rotation tool is also displayed. The section box highlights and grips are displayed on its faces. 23 In the Element Properties dialog box.

rvt. m_Viewing_Exercise. double-click Level 1. Sketch a section line in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser. Creating a Section View In this exercise. Creating a Section View. and maximize this view. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Viewing a Building Model | 451 .26 Click and hold the rotation tool and rotate the section box around the model. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. you create a section view by sketching a section line in a plan view. expand Floor Plans.

6 Select the section view. The box represents the extents of the section view as well as the viewing direction of the section. expand Sections (Callout 1). and drag the section depth grip below the middle horizontal wall as shown in the following illustration. and click Find Referring Views. right-click. 7 In the Go To View dialog box. 3 Click to the left of the left wall of the building model. and double-click Section 1. NOTE Fill pattern is dependent on the zoom ratio.2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 8 Select the section line. double-click the section head. click Section. View the section 5 To view the section. Notice a dashed green box with blue grips is displayed on the section line. 4 On the Design Bar. and then click to the right of the lower right wall to sketch the horizontal section line shown in the following illustration. You may need to zoom closer to the walls in order to see the fill pattern. or in the Project Browser. click Modify. and click Open View. 452 | Chapter 15 Viewing . select Floor Plan: Level 1.

under Floor Plans. 15 Double-click the section head to display the section view. An elevation symbol displays at the end of the cursor. click Modify.rvt. Control arrows are displayed near the section tag. 14 On the Design Bar. you learn to create an elevation view in a project by adding an elevation symbol to a plan view. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating Elevation Views.9 On the Design Bar. Viewing a Building Model | 453 . and select and move the section depth grip under the lower wall. m_Viewing_Exercise. double-click Level 1. Add an elevation symbol 1 In the Project Browser. click Modify. Change the view direction of the section 11 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 10 Double-click the section head to display the section view. 13 Click the control arrows to flip the section view. 12 Select the section line. click Elevation. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. double-click Level 1. Notice the change in the view direction. Creating Elevation Views In this exercise. Notice the change in section depth.

The elevation symbol is displayed with four check boxes. 8 Select the center of the elevation symbol. 10 In the Project Browser. click Modify. View the elevation 6 To view the new elevation.b. and click. place the cursor inside the building facing the lobby entrance.b. double-click Level 1. Do not select the arrow. under Floor Plans.a. You may need to adjust your zoom settings to see the elevation symbol. The elevation is named Elevation 1 . double-click Elevation 1 . indicating the possible elevation views that you can create. Elevation 1 . 5 On the Design Bar. 7 In the Project Browser. The check mark in the right box indicates the current elevation view.3 Without clicking in the drawing area.a by default. under Elevations. move the cursor around the building model. 4 To create an elevation view of the building lobby. Elevation 1 . double-click the elevation symbol arrow. Notice that the elevation symbol arrow points to the nearest wall as you move through the building model. 454 | Chapter 15 Viewing . 9 Select the box shown in the following illustration to add a new elevation view. Make sure the elevation symbol is pointing towards the lobby doors.

in this case. such as Brick on CMU. In addition.11 If you want to save your changes. roofs. 12 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. and other families. Controlling Fill Pattern Colors In this lesson. Controlling the Fill Pattern Color of a Material In this exercise. where each layer is assigned a different material. Controlling Fill Pattern Colors | 455 . a shade of gray. click Save As. you can set the fill pattern color for the brick to red. you learn to control the fill pattern colors of a material. floors. and applies to phasing override materials as well. This means that in views with a coarse level of detail. you can choose the wall fill color for a wall type. For example. in a compound wall. This includes walls. you can set the color of the coarse scale fill pattern for wall types. on the File menu. such as the one below. You change the color of the cut and surface patterns in the brick material assigned to the exterior wall in the building model. You can control the fill pattern color of the cut and surface patterns for objects that obtain their fill pattern definition from materials. and save the exercise file with a unique name. you learn to control the fill pattern color of a material and set the coarse scale fill pattern color of a wall type. and the insulation color to pink.

expand 3D Views. expand Sections (Section Head . Change the color of the brick cut pattern for the exterior walls 1 In the Project Browser. Open c_Showroom. 5 In the Color dialog box. expand Views (all). 7 Zoom in on the brick pattern of the exterior walls. 3 In the Materials dialog box. scroll down and click the Training Files icon. click Color. and double-click Wall/Floor Join .Filled). select Masonry . The surface pattern of the brick is black. click Open. A color is assigned to both the Surface Pattern and Cut Pattern options in the dialog box.rvt located in the Common folder. In the left pane of the Open dialog box.Level 3. select red. The brick cut pattern is displayed as red. 456 | Chapter 15 Viewing . and double-click 3D.Brick for Name. View the surface pattern of the exterior brick walls 6 In the Project Browser under Views.Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. click Materials. Notice the different fill patterns assigned to each layer within the floor and wall structure. 4 Under Cut Pattern. 2 On the Settings menu. Each layer is designated by the material settings of the layer. and click OK twice.

Controlling Fill Pattern Colors | 457 . and click OK twice. 11 In the Color dialog box. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. View the detail level setting of the view 1 In the Project Browser. select white. select Masonry . Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type In this exercise.Change the brick surface pattern from black to white 8 On the Settings menu. 10 Under Surface Pattern. 9 In the Materials dialog box. Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type. expand Views (all). and double-click Level 1. The walls in the floor plan that you work with are displayed with a gray fill pattern when displayed in a view with a coarse level of detail. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. you learn to set the coarse scale fill pattern color for a wall type.rvt. click Color. c_Showroom. The surface pattern of the brick is now white. click Materials. expand Floor Plans.Brick for Name. You change the coarse scale fill pattern from the default color of black to a shade of gray for a wall type. The floor plan in the view is displayed in the Coarse level of detail as indicated by the Detail Level icon on the View Control Bar.

click Detail Level. click the button in the Coarse Scale Fill Color value field. 8 On the Design Bar. 10 On the View Control Bar. 12 If you want to save your changes. select Solid fill. 6 In the Type Properties dialog box. select a shade of gray. The wall type is displayed as solid gray within any view where the Detail Level is set to Coarse. 458 | Chapter 15 Viewing . View the arced wall in fine detail 9 In the Project Browser. under Graphics. on the File menu. double-click Level 2. click Edit/New. right-click. and click Properties. 4 In the Type Properties dialog box. and click OK. including the current view. click in the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern parameter value field. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click Modify. and click . the Coarse Scale Fill Color parameter (under Graphics) is set to black and the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern is set to none.Change coarse scale fill pattern color of the arced wall 2 Select the south arced wall. click Save As. 13 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. By default. Notice that the surface pattern and color of the brick wall are not applied because the detail level is set to Fine. under Graphics. 5 In the Color dialog box. 11 Zoom in on the arced wall. and click Fine. under Floor Plans. 7 In the Fill Patterns dialog box under Name. 3 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK three times.

line type. or pattern. you create a plan region in the Level 1 floor plan of the following building model. you work with a split-level building model that requires a different view range than the rest of the view.Creating a View Plan Region In this lesson. line color. and you cannot control their visibility. refer to the online Help for more information. Because the stepped portion of the walls in the building model is above the cut plane height in the Level 1 floor plan view. the plan regions cannot overlap each other. Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan In this exercise. it does not display in the Level 1 floor plan. Plan regions are closed sketches that you can create in floor plan and reflected ceiling plan (RCP) views only. If you are not familiar with view ranges in Revit Building. By creating a plan region in the view with a different cut plane height. Creating a View Plan Region | 459 . you can display the stepped portion of the walls in the Level 1 floor plan. Plan regions do not work with linked Revit Building files. although they may have coincident edges. If you create more than one plan region in a file.

expand Floor Plans. Add a plan region to view the stepped portion of the model 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. so you can view the height of the walls and windows. right-click in the Design Bar. In the following illustration.Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. and click View. the south elevation is also displayed. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. Open m_Plan_Region. View the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. 460 | Chapter 15 Viewing .rvt located in the Metric folder. and double-click Level 1. scroll down and click the Training Files icon. expand Views (all). The cut plane height of the view range for this view is 1200 mm. click Open. The stepped portion of the project walls and windows are not displayed because the cut plane does not intersect any of the model geometry above this height. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click Plan Region.

Specify a point at the intersection of the two dashed blue lines on the bottom right. and the view depth plane. view range. you specify that the level used to define each plane (cut plane. sketch the plan region using the blue tick marks for guidance: ■ On the Design Bar. click Edit for View Range. On the Options Bar. 7 In the View Range dialog box. Creating a View Plan Region | 461 . The plan region is no longer visible. As the cursor moves across it. ■ ■ ■ Specify a point at the intersection of the two dashed blue lines on the top left. click Lines. This means that the plan region view is going to cut all geometry at 2800 mm above Level 1. click Finish Sketch.Plan regions have a single property. click . top and bottom clip planes. Press ESC to end the command. ■ ■ On the Design Bar. 9 Click Apply. 5 Select the red dashed line. and click Properties. select Parent View’s Level (Level 1) for Cut plane. 3 In the Level 1 view. the top and bottom clip planes. click Modify. right-click. and enter 2800 for the Cut plane Offset. 8 Because the top clip plane value cannot be set lower than the cut plane. enter 4000 for the Top Offset. that is similar to the view range for plan views. the plan region is displayed as a red dashed rectangle. The Level 1 floor plan should display as shown in the following illustration. as it is displayed with hidden lines in this view. 6 In the Element Properties dialog box. and view depth) in the view range is the same as the level used to define the corresponding plane in the parent view. under Extents. 4 Move the cursor across the area where you sketched the plan region. By selecting Parent View’s Level. You use the view range property to control cut plane. 10 On the Design Bar. and then click OK twice.

click Save As. on the File menu. 11 If you want to save your changes. 462 | Chapter 15 Viewing .The following illustration demonstrates how the level 1 floor plan view is being viewed with the plan region. 12 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name.

AccuRender is the rendering engine incorporated into Revit Building that is used to produce rendered views. and posters. billboards.Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs 16 In this tutorial. you learn to use the AccuRender® Radiosity and Raytrace features in Autodesk Revit Building to create rendered interior and exterior views of your building information model. to place and render decals to create signs. and to create walkthroughs of your building information model. 463 .

define a new polished aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions on the front curtain wall. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model In this exercise. and create the perspective view that you want to render. After you create the perspective view. When you complete these changes. you: ■ ■ ■ change the texture of the brick material applied to the exterior walls of the building. You also learn to create a new material and apply it to a building component. 464 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . In this exercise.Rendering an Exterior View In this lesson. You work with a building model that already has material applied to it. and the curtain wall to view and verify the material and texture changes. add realistic three-dimensional trees to the building site. you learn how to create an exterior perspective view of a building model and render it with the AccuRender Raytrace feature. you learn how to view and modify the material that is applied to a building component in a building model. you raytrace a region of the building that includes the exterior wall. the floor. you select a scene that defines the model environment. and then raytrace the view to produce the final rendered exterior view. You learn to create and apply materials to a building model. change the material of the front terrace of the building from the default material to asphalt.

under Construction.Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. click Wall. Rendering an Exterior View | 465 .Brick. 5 In the Type Properties dialog box.rvt located in the Metric folder. and click the tab in the context menu. 4 In the Element Properties dialog box. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Edit for Structure. and click Edit/New.Heavyweight block is displayed for Type. click Open.Cavity Wall . Open m_Cohouse. verify that Co-house . right-click in the Design Bar. 6 Click Cancel three times to return to the 3D view of the building model without making any changes to the exterior finish at this time. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. View the finish material of the exterior walls 1 Verify that the 3D view of the townhouse building model is displayed. click . TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. Verify that the material defined for the exterior finish layer (Layer 1) of the building model is Masonry . click the Training Files icon. 3 On the Options Bar.

27 On the Design Bar. 21 In the Materials dialog box. select Masonry . and click 15 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Modify. click Edit/New. .Running. select the curtain wall mullion again. 28 Select one of the curtain wall mullions on the exterior face of the building. Polished and click OK. expand Masonry and click Brick. 22 In the New Material dialog box. 19 Click OK four times.200mm. press TAB to cycle your selection through different building model components. click Materials. click in the Material field that contains Default Floor.Change the brick texture of the exterior wall finish material 7 On the Settings menu. select Carib. and click . click Modify and select the terrace in front of the building. under Name. 18 In the Materials dialog box. under _accurender. 23 Under AccuRender. 10 In the left pane of the Material Library dialog box. enter Aluminum. under Construction. 11 Under Name. under Name. A preview of the brick texture that is currently assigned to the walls is displayed in the right pane of the Material Library. 12 Click OK twice.Plain.Asphalt. click next to Texture to display the Material Library. click Materials. 26 Click OK twice. TIP If you do not select the curtain wall mullion on the first selection. When Curtain Wall Mullions: Rectangular Mullion displays in the Status Bar at the bottom of the screen. under _accurender. 24 In the Material Library. click next to Texture to display the Material Library. Change the material of the terrace from the default material to asphalt 13 On the Design Bar. 9 Under AccuRender. click Edit for Structure. Define a new polished aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions 20 On the Settings menu. click Duplicate. under Name.Brick. verify that Floor : Floor 1 displays in the Type Selector. 466 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 8 In the Materials dialog box. 17 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. 25 Under Name. select Site . select Polished. expand Metals. You can view the new brick texture when you raytrace a region of the building in a later step. for Layer 2. 14 On the Options Bar. and click Aluminum. 16 In the Type Properties dialog box.

and then click 32 In the Materials dialog box. Rendering an Exterior View | 467 . The portion of the building that you selected is raytraced and the materials that you changed and applied to the exterior walls. and curtain wall mullions are rendered (this takes a few moments). and curtain wall mullions to which you made material changes. 31 In the Type Properties dialog box. under Name. select Exterior under Type. producing a photorealistic effect. select Aluminum. click Edit/New. 30 In the Element Properties dialog box. floor. floor. under Materials and Finishes. click Region Raytrace.29 On the Options Bar. This completes the changes in materials and textures that you make for the building model. 35 Move the cursor over the building model. 36 In the Scene Selection dialog box. and draw the rectangular region shown in the following illustration. click in the Material field. Raytrace a region of the building to view the material changes that you made 34 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. 33 Click OK three times. Make sure the region includes the exterior walls. click No. . Polished. and click OK. verify that New is selected. click . 37 If you are prompted to turn off the lights in the scene.

Add red maple trees to the site 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click 1st Flr. Adding Trees to the Site. the leaves of the trees display as indicated by the season and location specified in the render scene settings. you place two different types of trees on the building site. 39 Proceed to the next exercise. expand Floor Plans.38 On the Design Bar. click Display Model to end the Region Raytrace command and redisplay the building model in hidden line wireframe. 468 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . In a later exercise. expand Views (all). Adding Trees to the Site In this exercise. m_Cohouse. Cnst. when you render an exterior view of the model. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.rvt.

Deciduous : Acer Rubrum . and click to place a tree.2 Zoom out so you can easily view the area surrounding the building model.9 Meters. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed. 5 Move the cursor to a location on the building site. Rendering an Exterior View | 469 . right-click in the Design Bar. The tree that you selected in this step is a red maple. and click Site. Available tree types are listed in the Type Selector by their Latin names. 4 In the Type Selector. select M_Tree . click Site Component. 3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. Continue to place trees until you have added several red maples to the building site as shown in the following illustration.

7 In the Type Selector. The black oak is shorter than the red maple trees that you added to the site. Creating a Perspective View In this exercise. and then click display the Plant Library.rvt. 11 In the Type Properties dialog box. under Identity Data. click in the Value field for Plant Name. as shown in the following illustration. Creating a Perspective View. Black. 13 Under Name. m_Cohouse. under Other. and click OK twice. 10 In the Name dialog box. 12 In the Plant Library.Create a new type of tree. enter Black Oak. to . select Black Oak for Type Comments. select Oak. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and click OK. enter 7000mm for Plant Height. and click 8 In the Element Properties dialog box. 16 Move the cursor to the building site. 18 Proceed to the next exercise. expand Trees and Shrubs. click Modify. 14 In the Type Properties dialog box. 15 Under Other. under accurender. and click OK. you define the exterior perspective view of the building model that you want to render. 470 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and add it to the site 6 On the Design Bar. 17 Press ESC to end tree placement. click Edit/New. 9 In the Type Properties dialog box. and click Site Component. select any of the deciduous trees. and place two black oak trees. and click Deciduous. click Duplicate.

3 Select and move the crop boundary grips until the perspective view displays as in the following illustration.Place a camera in the first floor view 1 With the 1st Flr. The new perspective view is displayed. view open. Rendering an Exterior View | 471 . on the View tab of the Design Bar. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and the camera target point: ■ ■ Specify the first point on the site facing the building to position the camera. Specify the second point in front of the building facade to define the target point of the camera. Cnst. click Camera.

The camera position is displayed in the 1st Flr. expand 3D Views. 6 Select and move the FOV boundary grip to adjust the field of vision and back clipping plane as shown in the following illustration. and click Show Camera. Cnst. 5 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. Cnst. The red triangle represents the FOV (field of vision) angle and the back clipping plane of the view. view.Modify the camera position and back clipping plane in the perspective view 4 In the Project Browser under Views (all). double-click 1st Flr. right-click 3D View 1 (the default perspective view name). 472 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .

8 In the Rename View dialog box. Rendering an Exterior View | 473 . You must define a scene because this is the first time settings are being applied to this view. lighting. m_Cohouse. Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View In this exercise. and click Rename. and environment settings that you use to render the view. enter Exterior. and click OK. place. Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View.7 In the Project Browser. date.rvt. double-click Exterior. right-click 3D View 1. Display the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. 9 Proceed to the next exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. you select a scene and specify time. under 3D Views.

474 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . click OK to accept the existing scene (Scene 1). Time. TIP Use the left and right arrow keys to adjust the minutes precisely. 7 Under Date. and click Sun. and drag the slider to set the time to 2:30 PM. Notice that the name of the tab changes to Date and Time. and Place from the Specify Solar Angles list. 8 Under Time. 6 Select By Date. enter 10 (October) for Month and 5 for Day.Select the render scene settings 2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. 5 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog box. 4 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. verify that Daylight Savings Time is selected. clear Use Sun and Shadow Settings from view. click the Solar Angles tab. under Scene Settings. 3 In the Scene Selection dialog box. click Settings.

26 On the Design Bar. 23 Under Raytrace Settings. select Good for Quality. 17 Under Advanced. under Scene Settings. Dark. Render the perspective view 24 On the Design Bar. 27 On the Options Bar. The rendered exterior perspective view is displayed. 16 In the Environment dialog box.9 Click the Place tab. click . select Ground Plane. click Raytrace. 28 If you are prompted to turn off the lights in the scene. click Environment. 10 Click in the Cities list. verify that Automatic Sky is selected. 22 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. 19 In the Material Library. and select Boston. and enter bo. click No. USA. and click OK. Rendering an Exterior View | 475 . 25 Enter 150 for Resolution. 13 Enter . This setting produces a level of cloudiness in the sky that ranges from 0 (no clouds) to 1. 20 In the Name list. and click OK. under _accurender.20 for Cloudiness. under Background Color. Rye. 21 Click OK twice. 18 Click Material. select Autumn for Plant Season. 11 Scroll down. MA. select Grass. under Scene Settings.) 14 Click OK. 12 Click the Settings Tab. click Image Size. click Site. The Ground Plane tab displays. 15 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box.00 (many clouds.

and save the exercise file with a unique name. you render an interior view of the building model that you worked with in the previous lesson. Rendering an Interior View In this lesson. Redisplay the rendered view 31 In the Project Browser under Views (all). and finally. you add ArchVision realpeople (RPC people) to the floor plan of the second floor. click Capture Rendering.Save the rendered view 29 On the Design Bar. and double-click Exterior to display the rendered view of the townhouse that you saved. on the File menu. The rendered view is saved in the project and can be accessed from the Project Browser. you add two RPC people to the interior view that you render in a later exercise. 30 On the Design Bar. expand Renderings. define the view and render scene settings. 476 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . To create the rendered scene. click Display Model to end rendering and redisplay the wireframe perspective view of the building model. RPC people are represented by a circle in plan view and resemble real people only when rendered in a 3D view. Adding RPC People In this exercise. Rendering an Interior View. use both Radiosity and Raytracing to render the view. 32 If you want to save this exercise. click Save As. 33 Proceed to the next lesson.

Open second floor plan to display the interior scene that you will render 1 In the Project Browser under Views (all). expand Floor Plans. click Component. 7 Repeat steps 4 . 3 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. 6 Click to place Cathy to the right of the sofa and below the table. 4 In the Type Selector. select Rotate after placement. 5 On the Options Bar.rvt.6 to select and place M_RPC Male: Alex to the right of Cathy and facing up and to the left (northwest). 2 Zoom in on the left side of the living room as shown. m_Cohouse. Rendering an Interior View | 477 .Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and then move the cursor to rotate her so she is facing up and to the right (northeast). select M_RPC Female: Cathy. Cnst. and double-click 2nd Flr.

Add a camera 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Creating the Interior Perspective View. click Camera. you create the interior perspective view that you will render in the final exercise in this lesson.8 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating the Interior Perspective View In this exercise. Specify the target point of the camera in front of the corner of the table.rvt. m_Cohouse. 478 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and target point: ■ ■ Specify the first point on the floor plan facing the table and RPC people to place the camera.

double-click 3D View 1 to redisplay the interior perspective view. 4 Select and move the FOV boundary grip to adjust field of vision and back clipping plane as shown in the following illustration.The interior perspective is displayed. double-click 2nd Flr. Cnst. Rendering an Interior View | 479 . but you must adjust the field of vision and far clipping plane to display more of the view. 3 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 5 In the Project Browser under 3D Views.

under Size. enter Interior. and click OK. click View Properties. select Section Box. and select the section box. and click OK. 480 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . enter 178 mm for Height. A section box is displayed around the building model. click Shading to view the effects of the section box when you add it.Resize the perspective view 6 On the Options Bar. under Extents. 11 On the View menu. Grips are displayed on the section box. 8 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. 12 On the View menu. click the dimensions for Size. right-click 3D View 1. and click OK. click to display the 3D view of the building model. 9 In the Rename View dialog box. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Modify. and click Rename. 7 In the Crop Region Size dialog box. 14 On the Design Bar. enter 229 mm for Width. Add a section box to limit the extents of the rendered view 10 On the View toolbar.

15 Select and move the section box grips until only the room that you added RPC people to and that you want to render is visible. you create a render scene to specify the time. you reduce the rendering time. date. place. By limiting the geometry. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. and environment settings used to render the view. Rendering an Interior View | 481 . m_Cohouse.rvt. under 3D Views. Creating a New Render Scene In this exercise. Display the interior perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. This process allows you to limit the geometry that will be rendered when you create a rendering of your interior view. Creating a New Render Scene. double-click Interior to display the interior perspective view. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.

and click Save.rvt. 9 Under Time. 18 Under Advanced. 4 Under Type. 19 Click Material. select {3D}. clear Use Sun and Shadow Settings from view. click the Solar Angles tab.Select the render scene settings 2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. 17 In the Environment dialog box. verify that Daylight Savings Time is selected. 482 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and click Sun. and click OK. m_Cohouse. TIP Use the left and right arrow keys to precisely adjust the minutes. select Summer for Plant Season. 8 Under Date. 14 Click Save. 24 Under Scene Settings. enter 6 (June) for Month and 6 for Day. Dark. Rye. such as windows and doors. select Interior. 6 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog box. USA. Defining Daylights and Rendering the View. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. double-click {3D}. as daylight sources. 16 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. click OK. under 3D Views. select New. under Scene Settings. on the Main tab. Notice that the name of the tab changes to Date and Time. specify a file location and name for the scene settings. under Background Color. 12 Scroll down. The Ground Plane tab displays. Defining Daylights and Rendering the View In this exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. you define daylights for the glazed panels of the curtain wall and render the view. click Settings. 22 Click OK twice. click Site. 15 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog box. you allow sunlight to pass through the panels when you render the view. The 3D view of the building model with the section box is displayed. and select Boston. 7 Select By Date. and enter Interior Scene for Name. Define daylights for the glazed panels of the curtain wall 1 In the Project Browser. 10 Click the Place tab. You can select families with transparent materials. Time. 11 Click in the Cities list. click Environment. under Use View’s Section Box. under accurender. verify that Automatic Sky is selected. 3 In the Scene Selection dialog box. MA. select Grass. 20 In the Material Library. and enter bo. 21 In the Name list. When you define daylights for the curtain wall panels. 23 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. and Place from the Specify Solar Angles list. and drag the slider to set the time to 8:30 PM. 13 Click the Settings tab. select Ground Plane. and click OK. under Scene Settings. 5 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box.

3 Select the curtain wall on the second floor (Walls: Curtain Wall. 6 In the Radiosity Information dialog box. the following rendered view is displayed. Rendering an Interior View | 483 . click OK. 8 On the Options Bar. 7 On the Design Bar. begins. Curtain Wall 1).2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. . double-click Interior. which can take several minutes. and click The raytraced perspective view is displayed and now includes the RPC people. 5 On the Design Bar. click Raytrace. The radiosity process. The RPC people do not display in the view until you raytrace them in the next steps. click Radiate. Light bounce is calculated for each individual light. Render the perspective view 4 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. select Medium (150 dpi) for Resolution. click Daylights. When radiate completes.

You can edit the walkthrough path by selecting and moving the key frames. on the File menu. click Save As. you can record the walkthrough by exporting it to an AVI file that you can play with any available video player independent of your Revit Building software. You learned to use both the Radiosity and Raytracing features included in the AccuRender render engine. By completing the two rendering lessons included in this tutorial. you rendered an exterior and an interior view. 484 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Recording a Walkthrough After you create a walkthrough. 10 Close the exercise file. you learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of your building model in Autodesk Revit Building. In a plan view. you can select one of the following display options for the building model in your walkthrough: ■ ■ ■ ■ Wireframe Hidden Line (wireframe view with hidden lines) Shaded or Shaded with Edges AccuRender (Raytrace) IMPORTANT If you record your walkthrough AVI with the AccuRender display option. you learn how to create and edit a walkthrough of the first floor of a townhouse. Each point becomes a key frame in the walkthrough. elevation. you must select or define a scene. A walkthrough is created in a 3D perspective view by default. When you export your walkthrough to an AVI. and save the exercise file with a unique name. or section view. Creating a Walkthrough In this exercise. but you can also create it in a 3D orthographic view. Usually you define the walkthrough path in a plan view. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs In this lesson. which is the path that a camera will follow through your building model. you can also specify the height of the camera along the walkthrough path. Additional frames that comprise the walkthrough are created between the key frames. but you can also define it in a 3D. The walkthrough path is a spline. and you create it by specifying points that create the spline. Creating and Editing a Walkthrough The first step in creating a walkthrough is to define the walkthrough path.9 If you want to save your changes.

verify that Perspective is selected to create the walkthrough in a 3D perspective view. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. Open c_Townhouse. click the Training Files icon. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. The floor plan of the first floor of the townhouse is displayed. of the walkthrough. proceeds through the dining room. Create a walkthrough of the first floor of the building model 1 In the Project Browser.rvt located in the Common folder. click Settings ➤ Project Units. NOTE Some Imperial values are used by default in this exercise. 4 Move the cursor under the text label in the Breakfast room. 5 Specify four additional points to define key frame positions on the walkthrough path as shown in the following illustration. or the first key frame. and ends in the far corner of the living room. and click to specify the start point. expand Views (all). right-click in the Design Bar. and click the tab in the context menu. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. expand Floor Plans. and change unit formats as desired. 3 On the Options Bar. click Open. click Walkthrough.You create a walkthrough that begins in the breakfast room of the townhouse. If you prefer to use Metric values. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs | 485 . and double-click 1st Floor.

12 On the View menu. 11 Under Change. Edit and play the walkthrough 7 In the Project Browser under Views (all). expand Walkthroughs. and select the crop boundary. Your frame may look a bit different from the frame in the illustration because the walkthrough path is not precisely the same. Two options are displayed on the Options Bar: Edit Walkthrough and Size. and double-click Walkthrough 1. surrounded by a crop boundary with grips as shown in the following illustration. click the dimensions for Size to change the size of the walkthrough frame crop region. select the crop boundary. 10 In the Crop Region Size dialog box. verify Field of view is selected. 486 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . If it is not. 9 On the Options Bar. on the Options Bar. and click OK. The last frame of the walkthrough is displayed. click . enter 16" for Width and 9" for Height. click Zoom ➤ Zoom Out (2x).6 After you specify the final point of the walkthrough path in the Living room. 8 Verify that the crop boundary of the walkthrough frame is selected and is displayed as red with blue grips.

NOTE To stop playing the walkthrough at any time. you learn how to edit the walkthrough path and change the camera position in the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise. The frame that is displayed is frame 300 of 300 frames in the walkthrough. enter 60 to reduce the total number of frames in the walkthrough from 300 to 60. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. The walkthrough plays.rvt. and press ENTER to set the walkthrough to play from the beginning (the key frame). Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position. click Edit Walkthrough. enter 1 for Frame. c_Townhouse.13 On the Options Bar. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs | 487 . The walkthrough controls are displayed on the Options Bar. 15 In the Walkthrough Frames dialog box. 14 Click . press ESC. 18 When the walkthrough stops playing. 16 On the Options Bar. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position In this exercise. and click OK. 17 Click . proceed to the next exercise. The current display is wireframe with hidden lines.

488 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . The camera is displayed at the first key frame position on the walkthrough path in the breakfast room. Edit the walkthrough path 4 On the Options Bar. select Path for Controls. and click OK. Blue grips are displayed at each key frame. 5 Select the target point of the camera (the magenta grip). 2 On the Options Bar. under Extents. 6 On the Options Bar.Change the properties of the camera 1 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. click . 3 In the Element Properties dialog box. Your walkthrough path may vary from the one in the illustration so do not be concerned if the camera displays at a slightly different location. click Edit Walkthrough. You can move any camera target or key frame position. double-click 1st Floor. and adjust it to view the kitchen as shown in the following illustration. Clearing this option disables the far clipping plane of the camera. The walkthrough path is displayed in the floor plan of the first floor. clear Far Clip Active.

1 On the File menu. specify 10 for Frames per Second. under Walkthroughs. 5 In the Video Compression dialog box. 3 Under Output Length. Play the walkthrough to view the changes that you made 8 In the Project Browser. c_Townhouse. to play the walkthrough. 8 If you want to save this exercise. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs | 489 . 6 Double-click the AVI file to play the walk-through from the location that you specified in step 3. on the File menu. specify a path and a file name for the AVI. and with a frame rate of from 15-30 frames per second. shaded. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 2 In the Save As dialog box. The AVI is recorded.7 Click the third key frame position. When you export the walkthrough. or with AccuRender raytracing. If you had 150 frames and a frame rate of 15 seconds. If you are unsure of what option to use. and click OK. select any codec (compression/decompression) that is available on your system for Compressor. double-click Walkthrough 1. then you are moving from the breakfast area to the living room window in 10 seconds. perhaps to 6” wide x 4” height. click Save As. and click Save. reducing the size of the image. the Full Frames (Uncompressed) option is available to all users. and drag it to the location shown in the following illustration. select <Shading> for Display mode. 4 Under Format. Reducing the size of the output images and managing the frame rate lets you create realistic and smooth movement. specifying the number of frames. hidden line. you record the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise by exporting it to an AVI. It produces files that are larger than compressed files. Recording the Walkthrough.rvt. but that do not suffer loss due to compression quality. click Edit Walkthrough. and save the exercise file with a unique name. without opening Autodesk Revit Building. Recording the Walkthrough In this exercise. click Export ➤ AVI. NOTE The available Compressor options are specific to your current computer system. and then click 10 Proceed to the next exercise. 9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. you can select to display the walkthrough in wireframe. shaded with edges. 9 On the Options Bar. 7 Try creating other walkthroughs.

490 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .

you learn various methods of effectively communicating your design intent to your audience by creating presentation views. 491 . tutorials on the Accurender features of Revit Building can be found under Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs. Using the pre-built building model. type. Co-house." The analytique is a classic Beaux Arts method of representing a work of architecture for analysis by graphically showing the relationship among plans. length. Whether the audience is the general contractor. you organize an analytique by creating and modifying several views. For the realistic approach. In this series of exercises. There remain many options in the software that do not quantify specific dimensions so much as they explain the subjective complexity of the work. In this tutorial. To express texture beyond material specifics. or the client. tailoring the presentation is just as important as the accuracy of the content. elevations. the Linework Tool. You can use the analytique to graphically compare the organization and forms of a particular building or space by superimposing and overlapping measured drawings at multiple scales. you learn several graphic techniques using these above mentioned tools to create an "analytique. and other quantifiable elements within the context of contract documents. there are several options for expressing the architecture. There are two directions you can choose when organizing presentation graphics: realism and stylistics. The architect's primary goal in documentation is to communicate the intent of the design.Presentation Views 17 In this tutorial." In Revit Building. an outside reviewer. and details. and line quality without the measurement of its thickness is to transcend "building" and to recognize the "architecture. and Section Boxes. you explore the stylistic approach. A majority of tools in Autodesk Revit Building are intended to describe number. sections. They include the Accurender® Plug-in for Rendering. Advanced Model Graphics. a consultant.

Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique In this lesson. you create a presentation floor plan. you create a copy of a floor plan in preparation for the analytique. change the visibility settings to remove unwanted documentation. 492 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . In order for the floor plan to fit into the analytique. click the Training Files icon. and place the plan on a dark background for contrast. right-click 2nd Flr. A copy of the floor plan is created and opened. Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Open m_Cohouse. expand Floor Plans.rvt located in the Metric folder. Copy the floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. Cnst. expand Views (all). click Open. and click Duplicate. you create a copy of the plan. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu.

enter Presentation Second Floor Plan. click the Annotation Categories tab. sections. right-click Copy of 2nd Flr. UP Text. click Save As. 7 Under Visibility. dimensions. click the Scale control and select 1: 100. elevations. 6 Click the Model Categories tab.2 In the Project Browser. 5 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog box. Down Arrow. this represents the view getting smaller. This turns off the visibility of all tags. and so on in this view. 8 Click OK. and click OK. and Up Arrow. and clear DOWN Text. Using Advanced Model Graphics.rvt. name the project m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. navigate to the folder of your choice. Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique | 493 . Notice the immediate change in the line weights. Cnst. 3 In the Rename View dialog box. and click Save. Modify view scale 9 On the View Control Bar at the bottom of the frame. and click Rename. NOTE Stair text is considered part of a stair component rather than an annotation. Modify visibility/graphics 4 On the View menu. under Floor Plans. 11 In the Save As directory. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. Notice that no annotations display in this view. click Visibility/Graphics. expand the Stairs category. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. 10 On the File menu.

NOTE Shadows can be cast in all view styles except Wireframe.Using Advanced Model Graphics In this exercise. MA. Time and Place. under Sunlight Settings. 494 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . you can specify one place where the project resides within the world. modify. and delete multiple locations in order to analyze a single prototype. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows and add a sense of texture to the new floor plan view. click for Place. Within a Project. and click OK. 2 On the View Control Bar. click the Place tab. click . specify 35 for Shadow. Under Intensity. 7 Select Boston. select Cast Shadows. The higher the number. ■ ■ Under Sun and Shadows Settings. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. and click Advanced Model Graphics. you can create. The Sun and Shadows Settings are shared with Accurender and can also be used when rendering. the darker the shadows.rvt. Changes made within the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box are applied only to the active view. 5 Under Sunlight Settings. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. The Shadow intensity dictates the darkness of the shadow display. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. At that place. specify the following: ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. Under Shadows Properties. Modify advanced model graphics settings 1 If the Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan is not the active view. USA for City. select By Date. double-click it in the Project Browser. 6 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog box. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.

Cnst. for At Level. . This gives the plan depth and creates a sensation of space beyond what you can normally express in a plan view. 17 Proceed with the next exercise. click OK. clear Ground Plane. 14 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. be aware that if you enter a different city. 15 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. 8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. most of the images in the remainder of this tutorial may differ from those on your screen depending on the settings that you choose. click This turns off the shadows cast on the ground. click OK. 9 Under Sunlight Settings. and click OK. select Ground Plane and select 1st Flr. however. and click Advanced Model Graphics. This plan view is now ready to be added to a sheet.NOTE For this step. Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique | 495 . Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet. 11 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. under Sunlight Settings. 16 On the File menu. you can enter any city you wish. Turn off the ground plane shadows 12 On the View Control Bar. 13 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. Notice the series of shadows based on the specified sun angles. click Save. 10 Click OK. This is the level the shadow will be cast upon. under Sun and Shadows Settings. specify 10/27/2004 for Date and 1:00:00 PM for Time.

2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. Create a new sheet 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click Add View to Sheet. select Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan. and notice a view title displays. click Add View. The viewport displays at the tip of the cursor. TIP If the View tab is not available. select Arch Portrait. 7 Zoom in around the viewport. 6 On the Design Bar. click Modify.Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet In this exercise. and click to place it. and click View. right-click the Design Bar. 4 In the Views dialog box. 5 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet as shown. and click OK. you add the floor plan to a sheet and modify the view to enhance the contrast. click Sheet. Notice the blank sheet is portrait oriented. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 496 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views .

you need to create a base of contrast for the centered plan. 13 In the Type Properties dialog box. Notice the viewport no longer displays a view title. For this analytique. Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique | 497 . you will create a dark filled region for the floor plan view. To accomplish this. enter Presentation.Because the view title needs to be removed for the analytique. 14 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Duplicate. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Edit/New. and click OK. 11 In the Type Properties dialog box. and click OK. click OK. Create a new viewport type 8 Select the viewport in the center of the sheet. you need to create a new viewport type that does not display the view title. 9 On the Options Bar. click . select No for Show Title. 12 In the Name dialog box. under Graphics.

click . The lines shown below are enhanced for training purposes. and you should take advantage of endpoint snapping when available. 498 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . This activates the Presentation Second Floor Plan within the context of the sheet. select Invisible Lines. 16 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. use the Trim tool to clean up gaps or overlapping intersections. If necessary. click Filled Region. and draw a rectangle around the view as shown.Create a solid fill background for contrast 15 Right-click the viewport. you must define the inner perimeter by drawing a chain of lines around the perimeter of the building model. 20 Starting at the upper-left corner of the building model. You enter sketch mode where you define the line type. Now that you have defined the outer perimeter of the filled region. and click Activate View. 18 On the Options Bar. click . 17 In the Type Selector. The space between the perimeter of the building model and each line should be equidistant. and the boundary of the region. draw a chain of lines around the exterior face of the building model as shown. 19 On the Options Bar. fill properties. You may want to zoom in while sketching some details. TIP Use care when sketching this chain. and select Chain.

29 On the Design Bar. and click Properties. 26 In the Fill Patterns dialog box. 22 In the Element Properties dialog box. 24 In the Name dialog box. and click OK. enter Presentation for Sheet Name. enter Solid Black. 34 Proceed with the next lesson. create the interior chain of lines using Medium or Wide lines. under Name. click Edit/New. Notice how the filled region enhances the view contrast. verify that the Background is Opaque and the Color is Black. select the entire chain (use TAB ) and change the line type back to Invisible lines by selecting it from the Type Selector. and click Deactivate View. you create an elevation and add it to the Presentation sheet that you created in the first exercise. 28 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK. 25 In the Type Properties dialog box. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique | 499 . and click OK. click OK. 33 On the File menu. click Region Properties. scroll down.TIP If you have difficulty sketching using invisible lines. 32 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Duplicate. under Graphics. 23 In the Type Properties dialog box. 30 Right-click anywhere on the sheet. When you are finished drawing the chain. and click OK. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique. click the Fill Pattern value and the arrow that displays within it. click Save. 27 In the Type Properties dialog box. select Solid Fill. Name the sheet 31 Right-click the edge of the sheet. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique In this lesson. under Identity Data. 21 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch.

under Views (all).Preparing the Elevation View for the Analytique In this exercise. expand Elevations. A copy of the south elevation view becomes the active view. 500 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . Copy and rename the elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. you copy an elevation view and use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the view. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise.rvt. and click Duplicate. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. right-click South.

Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique | 501 . 11 Under Shadow Properties. click Visibility/Graphics. 3 In the Rename View dialog box. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Elevation. click . and click OK. under Elevations. under Visibility. 12 Under Intensity. under Sunlight Settings. 8 Click OK. and clear Elevation Swing. on the Model Categories tab. 17 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box.2 In the Project Browser. you can create more interesting shadows on the elevation view. scroll down. By changing the angle of the sun. select Cast Shadows. verify that Hidden Line is the selected Style. 16 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. and click OK. and clear Surface Pattern. scroll up. 14 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. click Duplicate. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog box. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. expand the Walls category. expand the Doors category. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. click OK. and click Advanced Model Graphics. Apply advanced model graphics 9 On the View Control Bar. and click Rename. 13 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. and click OK. 7 Click the Annotation Categories tab. specify 35 for Shadow. enter Presentation South Elevation. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 4 On the View menu. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. Changes made within the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box are applied only to the active view. 15 In the Name dialog box. specify 2:30:00 PM for Time. 6 Under Visibility. right-click Copy of South. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view.

expand Sheets. 502 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views .rvt. Adding a Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet In this exercise. select Elevation: Presentation South Elevation. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 3 In the Views dialog box. and click Add View to Sheet. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 19 Proceed with the next exercise. click Add View. under Views (all). TIP Use the snap feature to snap the viewport to the center reference plane. you add the Presentation South Elevation view to the Presentation sheet. click Save. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Adding a Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet. Add view to sheet 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click A105 . 4 Center the viewport above the presentation plan view as shown.18 On the File menu.Presentation.

Notice the view title no longer displays. 5 In the Type Selector.Notice the viewport displays a view title. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique | 503 . select Viewport: Presentation.

you create section and callout views and place them in the analytique. click Modify. You add silhouette edges and filled regions to the views. 8 On the File menu. Adding Section Views to the Analytique In this lesson. You also create a view template for presentation views and apply it to other views. 7 On the Design Bar. Adding Section Views to the Analytique. 504 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . 9 Proceed with the next lesson.6 Drag the Presentation South Elevation viewport downward until it shares an edge with the presentation floor plan. click Save.

4 Add the section shown below. Cnst. and use the flip arrows if necessary. you create and modify the section view that you later add to the analytique. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.rvt.Preparing a Section View for the Analytique In this exercise. under Floor Plans. click Section. Adjust the controls to modify the extents. TIP You can also change the scale of the section view after you create it. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 505 . The section should cut through the center of the building model and extend past the front of the building (lower wall). Add a section in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. double-click 1st Flr. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 3 On the Options Bar. select 1: 100 for Scale.

Create a callout of the section view 5 In the Project Browser.Section 2 is added to the building model. 7 On the Options Bar. and double-click Section 2. To fit correctly in the analytique. 8 Draw a callout around all the building model components within the section view as shown. 506 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . select 1: 100 for Scale. expand Sections (Callout 1). click Callout. you will create a callout around the building model components within the section view. To accomplish this. Use the controls to adjust the precise location of the boundary and to move the callout head so it is readily identifiable. this view needs to be rotated 180 degrees. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

16 Under Visibility.Rename the callout 9 On the Design Bar. scroll up. expand the Walls category. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 507 . enter Presentation Section 2. and clear Elevation Swing. double-click Presentation Section 2. and clear Surface Pattern. under Sections (Callout 1). Modify Visibility/Graphic Overrides 13 On the View menu. 15 Under Visibility. click the Model Categories tab. right-click Callout of Section 2. and click Rename. TIP You can also open the callout in the Project Browser by double-clicking Callout of Section 2 under Sections (Callout 1). 11 In the Rename View dialog box. expand the Doors category. click Visibility/Graphics. under Sections (Callout 1). click Modify. scroll down. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog box. 12 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 10 In the Project Browser.

under Extents. clear Crop Region Visible. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View. and click OK. 24 Proceed with the next exercise.17 Turn off the visibility of the following model categories: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Casework Ceilings Furniture Lighting Fixtures Specialty Equipment 18 Click the Annotation Categories tab. 23 On the File menu. Hide the crop boundary 20 Select the crop boundary. 508 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . 21 On the Options Bar. Notice the crop region no longer displays. 22 In the Element Properties dialog box. 19 Click OK. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. click . click Save.

enter Sun and Shadow Settings Section. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. double-click Presentation Section 2. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. specify 35 for Shadow. Notice the shadows on the view provide more contrast and a sense of depth. select Directly. In addition. you apply silhouette edges to contrast the edges of the view. Notice that the shadows displayed do not offer much contrast. open the Project Browser and. TIP You may need to move the dialog box off to the side in order to see the view. 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. 5 In the Name dialog box. specify an Azimuth of 135 degrees. Click Apply. click Apply. specify an Altitude of 70 degrees. select Cast Shadows. select Relative to View. click . In the steps that follow. Under Intensity. Under Shadows Properties. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 509 . 2 On the View Control Bar. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. and click Advanced Model Graphics. and click OK.Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View In this exercise. click Duplicate. Add shadows to the section view 1 If Presentation Section 2 is not the active view. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. under Sunlight Settings. ■ Under Sun and Shadows Settings.rvt. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. you create a new Sun and Shadow setting in order to make a presentation view with more contrast. under Sections (Callout 1). and click OK. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the section view.

Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique In this exercise. NOTE The line style. You can modify this line style by selecting Line Styles from the Settings menu. was added to this dataset for training purposes.TIP The current view of your model may vary from the illustrations in the tutorial based on the placement of the section line in the previous exercise. TIP You can also use the linework tool to emphasize individual surface edges. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique. 11 Proceed with the next exercise. click Save. 9 Under Silhouette Edges. 10 On the File menu. Notice application of heavy line weights to the edges of the building model. and click OK. Apply silhouette edges 8 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style. 510 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . Silhouette Edges. you add the Presentation Section 2 view to the analytique and rotate the view 180 degrees. select Override Silhouettes. under Silhouette Edges.

Add the view to the presentation sheet 1 In the Project Browser. and click to place the selected view.rvt. The view title no longer displays. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 511 . click Modify. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. and click Add View to Sheet. click Add View. 4 Move the cursor under the centered plan view as shown. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Sheets (all).Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 3 In the Views dialog box. double-click A105 . select Section: Presentation Section 2. 6 On the Design Bar.Presentation. 5 In the Type Selector. select Viewport: Presentation.

you accomplish this by rotating the callout within the section view. under Sections (Callout 1). and enter 180 to specify the number of degrees of rotation. To rotate an object.Notice the section needs to be rotated 180 degrees. 8 Select the callout that you added previously. you click to specify the start radius. and press ENTER. click . 512 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . Rotate the callout view 7 In the Project Browser. and either enter the degrees of rotation or click to specify the end radius. specify 3 o’clock as the rotation start point. move the cursor in the direction of the rotation. In the steps that follow. double-click Section 2. 11 Move the cursor a slight distance counter-clockwise. 9 On the Edit toolbar. 10 Specify the start radius to the right of the callout. Using a clock as a reference.

After you enter the rotation value and press Enter. double-click A105 . under Sheets (all). Reposition the viewport 13 In the Project Browser. the callout rotates 180 degrees. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 513 . Notice that the extents need to be adjusted to fit around the edges of the building model. 12 Drag the callout extents until they extend just past the perimeter of the edges of the building model as shown. Notice the Presentation Section 2 view has rotated 180 degrees and now needs to be repositioned.Presentation.

Working with a Presentation View Template In this exercise. Working with a Presentation View Template. click Modify. 514 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . you add the modified view to the presentation sheet.14 Select the Presentation Section 2 viewport. you create a view template for presentation views in order to reduce repetitive work while creating subsequent views. After applying the view template to a new section view. and drag it up and to the left as shown. 16 On the File menu. click Save. 15 On the Design Bar. 17 Proceed with the next exercise.

right-click Section 1.rvt. you can simply apply the presentation view template. under Sections (Type 1). right-click Copy of Section 1. Apply presentation view template 8 On the View menu. enter Presentation. and click Rename. Create a new presentation view 5 In the Project Browser.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. and click OK. click Apply View Template. and click OK. under Sections (Type 1). m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 3 In the New View Template dialog box. click OK. 7 In the Rename View dialog box. 2 On the View menu. rather than repeat numerous steps to prepare this view for the analytique. and click Duplicate. Now. 6 In the Project Browser. 4 In the View Templates dialog box. under Sections (Callout 1). enter Presentation Section 1. Create a presentation view template 1 In the Project Browser. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 515 . click Save as View Template. double-click Presentation Section 2.

select Presentation. 14 In the Type Selector. and click Activate View. 13 Place it to the left of the plan view. and click OK. 516 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . 12 In the Views dialog box. Add the view to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. under Sheets (all). you can use a view property to accomplish the same thing. Rather than use a callout to rotate this view after it is added to a sheet. double-click A105 . and click OK. 17 In the Element Properties dialog box. 15 Right-click the viewport. click Add View. lighting fixtures. and click Deactivate View.9 In the Select View Template dialog box. and click Add View to Sheet. select Section: Presentation Section 1.Presentation. 16 On the View menu. and elevation swings no longer display. under Graphics. select 90 degrees Counterclockwise for View Rotation on Sheet. 19 Move the view so the walls line up similar to the image shown. select Viewport: Presentation. Notice the furniture. click View Properties. 18 Right-click the viewport. annotations. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

21 Proceed with the next exercise.20 On the File menu. you create a wall section and add it to the right side of the analytique. In this exercise. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 517 . such as a tracery window or column capital. click Save. Working in a Callout Analytique. Working in a Callout Analytique Traditional analytiques typically contain a detail.

rvt. After you add the callout. click Callout. and click OK. double-click Section 1. under Sections (Type 1). m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 3 Draw a callout around the front balcony as shown. and click Rename. 5 In the Rename View dialog box. right-click Callout of Section 1. click Modify. enter Presentation Callout. and modify the extents and the callout head location as shown. select the callout. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Sections (Callout 1). Create callout 1 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Project Browser. 518 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views .

and click OK. under Extents. This gap is used later in the exercise to place a fill region. and click View Properties. 9 In the Element Properties dialog box. double-click Presentation Callout. 7 Select the crop boundary and adjust the bottom so that there is a small gap as shown. 8 Right-click. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 519 . under Sections (Callout 1).6 In the Project Browser. clear Crop Region Visible.

11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Add View. and click OK. and move it into the position shown below. 14 In the Type Selector. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. specify a value of 22 for Scale Value 1. 17 On the View menu. and click Add View to Sheet. under Sheets (all). click Modify.Presentation. select Section: Presentation Callout. Modify presentation callout on sheet 16 Right-click the presentation callout viewport. 12 In the Views dialog box. 20 Select the callout presentation viewport.Add callout to presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. and click Activate View. 19 Right-click the callout presentation view. 520 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . select Viewport: Presentation. double-click A105 . 15 On the Design Bar. and click Deactivate View. select Custom for View Scale. click View Properties. 13 Place it on the right side of the presentation sheet.

Click Finish Sketch on the Design Bar when you are finished. The intent of the analytique is not so much a measured construction document as it is a stylized representation of the architectural forms. Apply filled regions to presentation callout 21 In the Project Browser. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 521 .NOTE If the presentation callout view does not fit properly on the sheet. under Sections (Callout 1). 23 On the Design Bar. select Solid Black for Type. and make adjustments as necessary. In the steps that follow. the easiest method is to apply filled regions to the presentation callout. You can sketch all of them at once or one filled region at a time. Although there are several methods you could use to create these areas of contrast. click Region Properties. 25 Using the drawing tools on the Options Bar. click Filled Region. When finished. hide the crop region and deactivate the viewport. activate the viewport. and click OK. 24 In the Element Properties dialog box. sketch the filled regions on the floors and roof shown below. you add a heavy base to the floors and a poche to the base. double-click Presentation Callout. You do not have to replicate the image exactly. The composition set for the analytique is now complete. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. turn on the crop region from the view properties dialog box.

Presentation. 522 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . under Sheets (all). 29 On the Options Bar. and sketch the rectangle shown below. click . Add poche region 27 Right-click the presentation callout viewport. and click Activate View. double-click A105 .26 On the Project Browser. 28 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Filled Region.

click Finish Sketch. select Crop Region Visible. and click OK. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 523 . Notice the entire poche region does not display because the crop region does not encompass the new filled region. under Extents. 33 Select the crop region. 32 In the Element Properties dialog box. click View Properties. 31 On the View menu.30 On the Design Bar. and drag the left and bottom extent until the entire poche region displays.

35 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click Deactivate View. clear Crop Region Visible. 38 Proceed with the next lesson. 524 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes. under Extents. click Save. click View Properties. and click OK. 36 Right-click the presentation callout viewport. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes In this lesson. You then add perspective views to the presentation and annotate the sheet. 37 On the File menu.34 On the View menu. you create isometric 3D views and use section boxes to create cutaways with shadows.

click Orient ➤ Southwest. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. and click Advanced Model Graphics. under 3D Views.s and apply shadows to the views. Create southwest isometric view 1 In the Project Browser. click the Scale control. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 525 . You then add each view to the presentation sheet. double-click Isometric.rvt. 3 On the View Control Bar. 2 On the View menu. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. you create three similar isometric views with different cutaway. Apply advanced model graphics 4 On the View Control Bar.Creating Cutaway Isometric Views In this exercise. and click 1: 200.

under 3D Views. Specify an Altitude of 45 degrees. under Silhouette Edges. for At Level. 19 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK. 8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. and click OK. select Section Box. click View Properties. under 3D Views. Add a section box to Isometric 2 17 In the Project Browser. specify 35 for Shadow. and click Rename. 526 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . and click OK. under 3D Views. Rename and duplicate isometric views 12 In the Project Browser. right-click Isometric. 15 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of Isometric 1. 16 In the Rename View dialog box. Select 1st Flr. Specify an Azimuth of 135 degrees. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Directly. Under Shadows Properties. 9 Click OK. and click Rename. under Extents. Select Relative to View. 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. click Duplicate. Cnst. 14 In the Project Browser. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. under Sunlight Settings. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. and click Duplicate. select Override Silhouettes. double-click Isometric 2. right-click Isometric 1. click . and click OK. and click OK. 11 Under Silhouette Edges. 13 In the Rename View dialog box. Select Ground Plane. enter Isometric 1. Notice the section box that displays around the building model. enter Isometric 2. select Cast Shadows. Under Intensity. select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style. Under Sun and Shadows Settings. 7 In the Name dialog box. under 3D Views. 18 On the View menu.5 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box.

These allow you to modify the extents of the section box. TIP Notice there is also a rotation symbol. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the second floor as shown.20 Select the section box. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 527 . When you are finished. Notice the grips that display on each face of the section box. You can use this to rotate the section box. click Modify on the Design Bar. 21 Select the controls for the top plane of the section box.

under 3D Views. under Extents. click View Properties. the stairs and railings may display. and click Rename. NOTE Depending on the precise location of the top plane of the section box. and click OK. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the first floor as shown. When you are finished. select Crop Region. under Extents. 528 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . and click OK. click Modify on the Design Bar. and click OK. under 3D Views. clear Crop Region Visible. and click Duplicate. 23 In the Project Browser. 25 In the Project Browser. Notice the section box no longer displays. 27 In the Element Properties dialog box. under 3D Views. either adjust the plane location. right-click Copy of Isometric 2. 32 In the Element Properties dialog box. 30 Select the controls for the top plane of the section box. Modify the section box of Isometric 3 28 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. 26 On the View menu. 24 In the Rename View dialog box.Before turning off the visibility of the section box. right-click Isometric 2. double-click Isometric 3. make a copy of the view. click View Properties. In such a case. 22 In the Project Browser. 31 On the View menu. select Crop Region. clear Crop Region Visible. 29 Select the section box. enter Isometric 3. double-click Isometric 2. or turn off the visibility of railings and stairs using the Visibility/Graphics dialog box.

drag Isometric 3 underneath the left section view as shown and. select Viewport: Presentation. You resolve this problem in the steps that follow. under 3D Views. drag Isometric 2 underneath Isometric 3 as shown and. under Sheets (all). Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 529 . in the Type Selector. in the Type Selector. 35 In the Project Browser. drag Isometric 1 underneath Isometric 2 as shown and.Presentation. you stack the three isometric views in a vertical column on the presentation sheet to show the continual erosion of the structure. 36 In the Project Browser. select Viewport: Presentation. under 3D Views. under 3D Views. in the Type Selector. double-click A105 . select Viewport: Presentation. Notice the filled region partially covers the view. Add isometric views to the presentation sheet 33 In the Project Browser. 34 In the Project Browser.Next.

40 In the Element Properties dialog box. 38 Select the poche filled region. You may need to use the split tools and trim tools to modify lines along the way. 530 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . click Edit. This will make it easier to draw lines. You change this back to solid fill when you are done. The image below shows the lines redrawn. 43 On the Design Bar. select Concrete for Type. select Transparent for Background. click Lines. and on the Options Bar.Modify filled region boundaries 37 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. 42 Click OK twice. 44 Using the drawing tools. 39 On the Design Bar. click Region Properties. and click Activate View. 41 In the Type Properties dialog box. redraw the portion of the filled region so it follows the boundary of Isometric 1. under Graphics. and then click Edit/New.

Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 531 . Creating Cutaway Perspective Views. click Save. a cutaway perspective view. 47 On the Design Bar. click Region Properties. 48 Right-click the Presentation Callout view. you create the final view for the analytique. and click OK.45 On the Design Bar. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views In this exercise. select Solid Black for Type. and click Deactivate View. you add it to the presentation sheet. 46 In the Element Properties dialog box. After adding shadows and silhouette edges to the view. 50 Proceed with the next exercise. 49 On the File menu. click Finish Sketch.

click Camera. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. then you specify the eye direction and range. under Floor Plans.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 532 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views .rvt. double-click 1st Flr. Create a perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Place the camera in the southwest corner of the view as shown. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and specify the range and direction just outside the upper right corner of the building model. Cnst. Adding a camera is a two-click process: first you specify the eye location. The view opens immediately.

Under Shadows Properties. click .4 Adjust the crop boundary so the entire building model fits within it. Under Intensity. 6 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. select Cast Shadows. and click OK. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 533 . and click Advanced Model Graphics. 7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. and click OK. 9 Under Silhouette Edges. select Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric for Name. select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style. 5 On the View Control Bar. specify 35 for Shadow. select Override Silhouettes. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. 8 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. under Silhouette Edges. Under Sun and Shadows Settings.

534 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . 13 Use the section controls to modify the location of each respective plane until your view resembles the following image. select Section Box. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box. A section box now cuts through the building model. 12 Select the section box. Notice the controls that display on each plane. You may need to adjust the location of the crop boundary as well. and click OK. click View Properties. under Extents.Add a section box 10 On the View menu.

18 On the View menu. clear Crop Region Visible. and click OK. under Change. double-click A105 .Presentation. enter 165 mm for Width. drag 3D View 2 onto the presentation sheet. click View Properties. 15 On the Options Bar. click Size. 19 In the Element Properties dialog box. you must specify the actual size of the image. Add the view to the presentation sheet 20 On the Project Browser. After placing it. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 535 . go to the Type Selector and select Viewport: Presentation. under Extents. select Scale (locked proportions). and place it in the upper-left corner as shown. Because scale does not apply to perspective views. under 3D Views. under Sheets (all). and click OK.14 Select the crop boundary. 17 Under Size. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog box. 21 In the Project Browser.

5 In the Name dialog box. 13 Add a title to the analytique as shown. 7 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK.rvt. click Edit/New. 4 In the Type Properties dialog box. and click OK. 3 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Duplicate. select a font. Add a title and description 12 In the Type Selector. and click OK. under Text. 23 Proceed with the next exercise. 10 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Text. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. Annotating the Analytique. 9 In the Name dialog box. Annotating the Analytique In this exercise. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box. 2 On the Options Bar. click OK. click Save. select Title. 536 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . and click OK. enter Title. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Create new text types 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 6 In the Type Properties dialog box.22 On the File menu. select the same font as the title. you complete the analytique by adding text to the presentation sheet. click Duplicate. click Edit/New. under Text. enter Description. specify a text size of 6 mm. specify a text size of 40 mm. 8 In the Type Properties dialog box. click .

select Description.14 Click in the drawing window to complete the title text. 17 On the Design Bar. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 537 . This completes the Presentation Views tutorial. 15 In the Type Selector. click Save. click Modify. 16 Add a description of your choosing and add it to the analytique as shown. 18 On the File menu.

538 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views .

they are still related and come from a single source.” The term family describes a powerful concept used throughout Revit Building to help you manage your data and make changes easily. or other parameter variables as designed by the family creator. Each family element can have multiple types defined within it. material set. Changes to a family type definition ripple through the project and are automatically reflected in every instance of that family or type within the project. In this tutorial. This keeps everything coordinated and saves you the time and effort of manually keeping components and schedules up to date. Even though various types within a family can look completely different. 539 . thus the term family. you learn about the various types of families and the Family Editor. shape. each with a different size.About Families and the Family Editor 18 All elements in Autodesk Revit Building are “family based.

Revit Building has three types of families: ■ ■ ■ System Standard Component In-place System Families System families are pre-defined within Revit Building and comprise principle building components such as walls. while many more are stored in component libraries. if you create a family called "double-hung window" that includes types with several sizes. because there is only one file to track. exceptions to this rule. floors. foundation. you create a family within predefined templates that contain the intelligent objects needed to create the particular family type.rfa extension. Some family types are pre-defined within Revit Building and cannot be created or modified outside of the project environment. exterior. The basic walls system family. You also learn about the Family Editor. and partition wall styles.Using Families and the Family Editor One of the many advantages of using Revit Building is the ability to create your own families of components without having to learn a complex programming language. You work with the Family Editor to create and modify components. There are. Introduction to Families Most families are created in the Family Editor and saved as separate files with an . and roofs. You can either duplicate and modify an existing component family or create a new component family based on a variety of family templates. you learn about the three types of families and how they are used within a project and how they are created. however. In addition. has wall types that define interior. You can duplicate and modify existing system families. and when and how to use it. such as a dome roof. the types would all be saved as one file which can then be loaded into any project. Standard Component Families Standard component families are loaded by default in project templates. The following illustration shows different types within the basic walls family. but you cannot create new system families. Using the Family Editor. there is another type of family that allows you create any shape or form required for a particular project and have Revit Building recognize it as a particular component type. For example. The following dialog box shows how you can select a specific family template to start your family design project. floors. NOTE You can use “Transfer Project Standards” to copy system families from one project to another. for example. All different types that you create are stored with the master family file. 540 | Chapter 18 About Families and the Family Editor . and roofs are examples of these types of families. In this lesson. You provide the information necessary to uniquely describe the family geometry. This makes file management much easier. generic. Walls.

rfa extension. An example is a door family hosted by a wall family. You have a choice of categories when you create in-place families. transfer them from one project to another.Family templates are either host-based or standalone. The following illustration shows a building model of the Pantheon without a roof and with an in-place roof family. and save them from a project file to your library if needed. so they are useful for objects unique to that project. and also a standalone furniture family component. You can load them into projects. Using Families and the Family Editor | 541 . Family templates assist you in creating and manipulating component families. and furniture. trees. and the category that you use determines the component’s appearance and display control within the project. for example. Standalone families include columns. Host-based families have components that require hosts. In-place Families In-place families are either model or annotation components in a particular project. Standard component families can exist outside of the project environment and have an . The following illustration shows host-based window and door family components in a wall. You create in-place families only within the current project. custom wall treatments.

how to access it. 3 Navigate to the library or location of the family. You can have a project open and the Family Editor open simultaneously. how to access it. You do not have to carry the original family file along with the project. such as plan. it opens within the Family Editor. if you have exhausted your external resources. With Revit Building open. open it in the Family Editor. It is far easier to modify an existing component within the Family Editor than to create it from scratch. 4 If you can’t find the component you require. and click Open. In this case. Family element visibility can be dependent of your viewing direction. or 3D. There is a logical thought process that you should follow: 1 Is there a component of this type already loaded into this project? If so. and then load it into the project. navigate to a family file. If you find a close match. elevation. 542 | Chapter 18 About Families and the Family Editor . you learn when to use the Family Editor. In this section. and when to use it. 2 On the File menu. click File ➤ New ➤ Family. or you can load it using the Load From Library.Adding a family to a project 1 Open or start a project. and click Open. you can click File ➤ Open. 5 Finally. When to use the Family Editor During the design process. and the general procedure for creating a standard component family. Within the Windows® environment. you can drag it into the document window. presume it is a bay window that you require. modify it as needed. you learned about the different types of Revit Building families and when to use them. To start a new family. Families are listed in the Project Browser under their respective component category. click Load From Library ➤ Load Family. it should be available within the Type Selector. Families store all of the necessary geometry to display the two-dimensional (2D) and three-dimensional (3D) versions of particular objects. When the family opens. you can double-click any file with an . you will inevitably come to a point where you need a specific component for your design. you should then try to find the component that most closely resembles it. This will be apparent because the only Design Bar tab available is Family. To add a family to your project. it is saved with the project. Introduction to the Family Editor You can use the Family Editor to create both real-life building components and graphical/annotation components. if you change the original family. How to use the Family Editor You can access the Family Editor in several ways. you can search the component library loaded on your local hard drive. you should create a new component family using one of the family templates as a starting point. such as newsgroups. you need to reload the family in the project to see the updated family. select the appropriate template. as well as the level of detail associated with that view. 4 Select the family file name and click Open. Also consider any internal family libraries that may exist on the network. consider checking the web library and other web resources. Load Family command on the File menu. you learn about the Family Editor. 3 Next. After the family has been loaded in the project. 2 If there isn’t a component family loaded in the project. In the final exercise. In this exercise. However.rfa extension and it will open Revit Building in the Family Editor.

Using Families and the Family Editor | 543 . 6 Flex the new model to verify correct component behavior. 5 Add label dimensions to create type or instance parameters. 4 Add dimensions to specify parametric component geometry. 8 Define family type variations by specifying different parameters. 7 Specify 2D and 3D geometry display characteristics with sub-category and entity visibility settings. 3 Lay out reference planes to aid in drawing component geometry. 9 Save the newly-defined family.General procedure for creating a standard component family 1 Select the appropriate family template. and then load it into a new project and see how it performs. 2 Define sub-categories for the family to aid in controlling visibility of the object.

544 | Chapter 18 About Families and the Family Editor .

545 . You create a furniture family. In each lesson. you start with a simple door family and then move onto a window family. a lighting fixture. This allows you to create the family in the context of the current project. you create it within the project file. you create an in-place family. you learn how to create specific Autodesk Revit Building families. Using the installed templates.Creating Components in the Family Editor 19 In this tutorial. In addition. you learn how to create a different type of component. and several annotation families. not within the Family Editor. When you create an in-place family.

height. After you create the door leaf as an extrusion. The door type has a variable height and width. you draw the plan view components for the new door family. 546 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .Creating a Door Family In this lesson. you create a custom door family based on the definition of a flush exterior door. and thickness. You also learn how to constrain the door design by adding labelled dimensions to specify values for the door width. Drawing the Door Plan View Components In this exercise. you create new door types based on size and assign parameters respectively.

9 In the Type Selector. The reference planes that display are part of the default door template. Draw the door panel plan view representation 8 On the Design Bar. Notice the four tiled views. Select Metric Door. are also displayed. select Training Files and navigate to the Metric ➤ Metric Families and Templates ➤ Templates folder. 10 On the Options Bar. The door opening is aligned and locked to the reference planes. 6 Maximize the window. and click Open. select Doors [projection]. 11 Starting at the door hinge point on the lower left corner of the door opening. this is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit. Floor Plan: Ref. 4 On the View menu. click . click New ➤ Family.rft. Creating a Door Family | 547 . 2 On the File menu. 5 On the Window menu.Create a new family based on the default door template 1 Close any open projects or families. click Symbolic Lines. Labelled dimensions. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit. and represent the door opening profile. click Tile. 7 Enter ZF. sketch a 1000 mm x 50 mm rectangle for the door leaf as shown. part of the door properties. Level. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog box.

13 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge to the right edge of the door panel as shown. 548 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .Dimension the door panel 12 On the Design Bar. 14 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge of the door panel to the bottom edge as shown. click Dimension.

18 Select the horizontal dimension that references the door thickness. Creating a Door Family | 549 . 19 On the Options Bar. select Thickness for Label. NOTE This same label is applied to the dimension referencing the door opening. click Modify. a user can change the value of the Width parameter and all dimensions labelled with it change accordingly. Because labelled dimensions are parameters.Add dimension labels to the door leaf 15 On the Design Bar. 16 Select the vertical dimension that controls the door width. 17 On the Options Bar. select Width for Label.

23 On the Options Bar. as shown. the arc is selected so you can see the arc center and each end point. When drawing an arc from center and end points. click . and select the intersection at the upper left corner of the door opening for the arc center point. TIP If the Arc from Center and End Points command is not visible on the Options Bar. and select the command from the menu. Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry. then you specify each end point. so it doesn’t visually interfere with the door swing location. you create the solid geometry of the door leaf with an extrusion. 21 On the Design Bar. click Symbolic Lines. select Plan Swing [cut]. In the image below. 550 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 24 Enter SI. 26 Select the upper left corner of the door leaf for the arc endpoint. you first specify the arc center. 25 Select the upper right corner of the door opening for the arc start point. click the down arrow button.Draw the door opening plan view arc 20 Select the dimension with the two EQ symbols and move it. along with the witness line controls. 22 In the Type selector. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry In this exercise.

enter 50 mm for Depth.1 In the Project Browser. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. under Specify a new Work Plane. click Lines. and click . 2 On the Design Bar. 6 On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. under Elevations. 3 On the Design Bar. 7 Select the upper left corner of the door opening for the first corner of the rectangle. double-click Left. select Reference Plane: Exterior for Name. and then select the lower right corner of the door opening for the second corner of the rectangle. 4 In the Work Plane dialog box. 5 On the Design Bar. 8 On the Design Bar. 9 In the Project Browser under Elevations. double-click Exterior. click Set Work Plane. and click OK. Creating a Door Family | 551 .

Specify the visibility of the door leaf in plan view 15 On the Design Bar. select Thickness for Label. 13 On the Options Bar. double-click Ref. under Floor Plans. click Modify. then click to specify the dimension witness line. 14 In the Project Browser. TIP When you add the witness line to the exterior face of the extrusion. click Modify and select the dimension. 552 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Level. 11 Add a horizontal dimension from the exterior face of the door extrusion to the interior face of the door extrusion. click Dimension. 12 On the Design Bar.10 On the Design Bar. use the TAB key to toggle to the extrusion reference.

select Oak Door.No Gloss. under Materials and Finishes. and Fine are selected. click Modify. click Materials. 21 In the Element Properties dialog box. click 11 In the Materials dialog box. Medium. select Panel for Subcategory. click Duplicate. and click OK. Creating a Door Family | 553 . 5 In the Material Library dialog box. under View Specific Display. for Material. click OK. click OK. Assign the Oak Door material to the door frame 14 Select the interior door frame extrusion. 9 On the Options Bar.16 Select the door leaf extrusion. 12 In the Element Properties dialog box.Red/Stained. 22 Proceed to the next exercise. and click OK. 18 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. 17 On the Options Bar. click . The solid geometry of the door is now complete. 6 Click OK.Dark. 3 In the New Material dialog box. Assign the Oak Door material to the door leaf 8 Select the door leaf extrusion. click for Texture. under AccuRender. and When cut in Plan/RCP. This material designation controls how it displays in shaded and hidden line views. 2 In the Materials dialog box. 7 In the Materials dialog box. Assigning Materials to the Door Components. 4 In the Materials dialog box. under Name. and clear Plan/RCP. Left/Right. and click OK. navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Oak. enter Oak Door for Name. and click OK. Create a new material based on the existing red oak material 1 On the Settings menu. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. select Front/Back. click . click Visibility. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. Assigning Materials to the Door Components In this exercise. It also defines its appearance when rendered. 20 On the Options Bar. you assign a material to the door leaf. 19 Under Detail Levels. 13 On the Design Bar. The door leaf is assigned the new Oak Door material. verify that Coarse.

22 Zoom in on a door corner. View the new door 20 In the Project Browser. click OK. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box.15 On the Options Bar. under Views (all). 19 Repeat the previous five steps for the exterior frame extrusion. click . for Material. and click OK. The door frame is assigned the new Oak Door material. double-click View 1. click 17 In the Materials dialog box. under 3D Views. click the Model Graphics Style control. and select Shading with Edges. select Oak Door for Name. 554 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 21 On the View Control Bar. 16 In the Element Properties dialog box.

do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions.The Oak Door material is now assigned to the door leaf and door frame. 28 Proceed to the next exercise. Try to move the dialog box off to the side so you can still see the door family next to it. enter 2500 mm for Height. 26 Return the door parameters to their original values. Click Apply. Under Other. click Family Types. Enter 1500 mm for Width. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. By flexing the new component. In the Family Types dialog box. 25 In the Family Types dialog box. enter 125 mm for Frame Width. Notice the door geometry adapts to the new dimension values. you ensure it adjusts to the changes it may encounter once loaded into a project. 24 On the Design Bar. Under Other. enter 75 mm for Frame Width. enter 2000 mm for Height. Click Apply. 27 Click OK. Flexing the new family is an important part of the design process. Enter 1000 mm for Width. Defining New Door Types Creating a Door Family | 555 . Flex the door model 23 Zoom out to view the entire door. This allows you to apply changes made in the dialog box and see how the new door reacts.

Use the default wall selection in the Type Selector. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Save. select it. select Project. and click Open. Click Apply. Under Create new. 17 On the Options Bar. Click Apply. enter 750 x 2100mm for Name. navigate to the location where you saved the door family. Enter 925 mm for Width. 5 Under Family Types. enter 2100 mm for Height.rfa. and click OK. Load the new door family into a new project 14 On the File menu. 20 Draw a wall segment 8000mm long. click Load. enter 925 x 2000mm for Name. under Family Types. 2 In the Family Types dialog box. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 10 In the Family Types dialog box. click Family Types. verify that DefaultMetric. enter 2134 mm for Height. Define the third new door type. click New ➤ Project. Place new door types in the project 19 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 4 In the Family Types dialog box. 556 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 8 Under Family Types. enter 2000 mm for Height. Training Door.Defining New Door Types In this exercise. and click OK. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 15 In the New Project dialog box. You now have three new door types defined within your door family. you define new door types based on the door model that you have created. Click Apply. Enter 750 mm for Width. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 11 Click OK. Define new door types with various heights and widths 1 On the Design Bar. click Wall. and click OK. 3 In the Name dialog box. Training Door. under Template file. Define the second new door type. 7 In the Family Types dialog box. 6 In the Name dialog box. 18 In the Open dialog box. click New. 9 In the Name dialog box.rte is the Template file. click New. 13 Navigate to the folder of your choice and save the new door family with the name. 12 On the File menu. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions.rfa. enter 1220 x 2134mm for Name. click New. Enter 1220 mm for Width. click Door.

click Door. and select Shading with Edges. 27 Add this door to the center of the wall as shown.21 On the View toolbar. select Training Door : 750 x 2100mm. click . Creating a Door Family | 557 . 24 In the Type Selector. 26 In the Type Selector. click the Model Graphics Style control. 25 Add the door to the left side of the wall as shown. 22 On the View Control Bar. select Training Door : 925 x 2000mm. 23 On the Design Bar.

Creating a Door Family. select Training Door : 1220 x 2134mm. Creating a Window Family In this lesson. You then assign parameters to the window family to allow for the creation of different-sized versions of the nine-light prototype. glazing and mullions as extrusions. and create the window sash as a sweep. This completes the lesson. height. You create the window frame. Finally. 29 Add the third door type to the right side of the wall as shown. you create a custom window family based on the definition of a fixed rectangular window with nine lights. you assign new dimension values to the window to create new types within the window family. and mullion offset. You now have three new flush exterior doors based on the new door family prototype. default sill height. and specify values for the window width. 558 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .28 In the Type Selector. 30 You can close all files without saving.

7 Enter ZF.Specifying the New Window Parameters In this exercise. click New ➤ Family 3 In the left pane of the New dialog box. are also displayed. 6 Maximize the exterior elevation view. 5 On the View menu. Select Metric Window. Create a new family based on the default window template 1 Close any open projects or families. select Training Files and navigate to the Metric ➤ Metric Families and Templates ➤ Templates folder. click Tile.rft. and the height of the top and bottom row of lights is adjustable. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit. The reference planes that display are part of the default window template and represent the window opening profile. Creating a Window Family | 559 . The window opening is aligned and locked to the reference planes. equally spaced vertical mullions. and click Open. The window type has a variable height and width. Labelled dimensions. you specify the parameters for the new window family. 4 On the Window menu. part of the window properties. Four views are tiled on your display. 2 On the File menu. this is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit.

Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry. The label name. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Click Apply. then sketching the sweep profile. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. The profile is swept along the path to create the solid geometry. 560 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . This process is called “flexing the model. This is the starting point for the new window.8 Two dimension strings display with their labels. Notice how the window opening adapts to the changing dimension values. Modify the new window type height and width parameters 9 On the Design Bar. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry In this exercise. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. When you add labels to dimensions. these specific type parameters are adjustable once the window is part of a project. is one of the type parameters. and click Apply. enter 1300 mm for Height.” and it is done to avoid conflicts and to ensure that all model geometry adjusts to changes as designed. 10 In the Family Types dialog box. click Family Types. 11 Enter 1000 mm for Height and 2000 mm for Width. 12 Click OK. Change the height and width values again. Creating sweep geometry requires first sketching the sweep path. Height and Default Sill Height. also one of the window properties. and click Apply. you create the solid geometry of the window frame with a sweep. Move the dialog box off to the side so you can see the window opening. Enter 1800 mm for Width.

4 On the Options Bar. 10 Zoom in on the red dot in the middle of the wall. and specify an offset of 50 mm. click . Creating a Window Family | 561 . click . 3 On the Design Bar. The red dot indicates the intersection of the sweep path and the profile plane. 13 Pick the exterior wall face so that a reference line is offset 50 mm to the left of the exterior wall face as shown. 9 On the View Control Bar. 5 Sketch a rectangle to represent the sweep path starting at the upper left corner of the opening and ending at the lower right corner. click Finish Path. 12 On the Options Bar. click the Scale control. and click Open View. 11 On the Design Bar. and select 1:10. select Elevation: Right. 6 On the Design Bar. Add a reference plane for the sweep profile 7 On the Design Bar. 8 In the Go To View dialog box. click Sketch 2D Path. 2 On the Design Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Sweep. click Sketch Profile.Create a sweep path for the window frame solid geometry 1 On the Design Bar. click Lines. click Ref Plane. Snap the cursor to each corner.

under Identity Data. and select the dimension. 21 In the Element Properties dialog box. 562 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Dimension. 23 On the Options Bar. select Prefer: Wall faces. and click OK. and select the reference plane. click Modify. click Lines. 18 Drag the value control off to the side as shown. click Modify. click . sketch the frame profile approximately as shown. 17 On the Design Bar. 19 On the Design Bar. Sketch the window frame profile 22 On the Design Bar. 16 Add a dimension between the exterior wall face and the new reference plane. 15 On the Options Bar.14 On the Design Bar. 20 On the Options Bar. select Chain and click . enter Sash for the Name. 24 Below the red dot.

NOTE When you sketch the frame profile. click Modify. the frame profile should extend beyond the edges of the wall. 26 Select the right edge of the frame section. 25 On the Design Bar. However. 27 Select the left edge of the frame section. Creating a Window Family | 563 . and drag it to the interior face of the wall. and drag it to the exterior face of the wall. When the lock displays. When the lock displays. Precise dimensions are assigned to the frame profile in subsequent steps. the exact dimensions are not critical. click it to constrain the frame to the exterior wall face. click it to constrain the left edge of the frame to the interior face.

29 On the Design Bar. select the line you want to move. 30 Add a vertical dimension of 40 mm to the left side of the frame and another vertical dimension of 20 mm to the right side of the frame. 564 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click it to lock the line to the reference plane. click Modify. and specify the dimension value.28 Select the short line parallel and to the right of the Sash reference plane. When the lock displays. click Dimension. Drag it to the left and align it with the Sash reference plane. TIP After adding the dimension. as shown.

When the lock displays. click Finish Sweep. Align the new profile to the window opening edge 31 Select the 40 mm dimension.Modify each dimension if necessary. click Finish Profile. spin the model so you can see the interior of the frame. expand 3D Views. The window frame profile is swept around the window opening. 33 On the Tools toolbar. click the lock to constrain the present value. this is the top of the window opening. click . select the top horizontal line of the frame profile. Creating a Window Family | 565 . 37 In the Project Browser. 32 Select the 20 mm dimension. 35 On the Design Bar. 34 Select the horizontal reference plane that intersects the red dot. 36 On the Design Bar. Lock the alignment when the lock icon displays. and double-click View 1. When the lock displays. zoom out until it displays. under Views (all). Next. TIP If you don’t see the lock icon. If necessary. click the lock to constrain the present value.

select Reference Plane: Sash for Name. 4 On the Design Bar. under Specify a new Work Plane. 2 On the Design Bar. Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry. 566 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 39 Proceed to the next exercise. and select the option. click Lines. you create the solid geometry of the window sash with an extrusion. Pick the sash profile lines 6 Place the cursor over the left side of the frame. Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry In this exercise. and click OK. Specify the window sash extrusion parameters 1 On the Design Bar.38 In the Project Browser. Chain of walls or lines. 5 On the Options Bar. click Set Work Plane. and enter . under Elevations. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 3 In the Work Plane dialog box. press TAB to cycle through the selection options.45 mm for Depth. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. click . and select Lock. double-click Exterior.

and then specify the lower right inside corner for the second corner of the rectangle.50 mm for Offset. 8 Specify the upper left inside corner of the window frame for the first corner of the rectangle. and lock icons display on each line. Enter . You specify a negative offset value to indicate an extrusion direction inside of the window frame.The entire sash outline is selected. ■ Click . Creating a Window Family | 567 . set the following options: ■ ■ Click . Draw offset extrusion lines 7 On the Options Bar.

Notice the sash is aligned with the Sash reference plane. Spin the model if necessary to view the sash and frame at various angles. under 3D Views. double-click View 1.9 On the Design Bar. Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. double-click Right. click Finish Sketch. 10 In the Project Browser. under Elevations. The window sash extrusion is now complete. 11 In the Project Browser. 568 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

click . double-click Right. Creating a Window Family | 569 . Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 2 On the Design Bar. you create the solid geometry of the window glass with an extrusion. 3 On the Options Bar. under Elevations. click Ref Plane. as shown. 4 Select the left edge of the sash so that a vertical reference plane is added 30 mm to the right.Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry In this exercise. and enter 30 mm for Offset. Add a reference plane to specify the glass work plane 1 In the Project Browser.

5 On the Design Bar. 570 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 6 Add a horizontal dimension of 30 mm between the left edge of the sash and the reference plane. click Dimension.

11 In the Project Browser. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. 9 On the Options Bar. enter 12 mm for Depth. click . Pick lines to define the glass extrusion 12 On the Design Bar. 15 On the Design Bar. and click OK. and click to create the glass boundary. and click OK. click Set Work Plane. 13 On the Design Bar. 17 Place the cursor on one of the sash extrusion lines. click . click Modify. enter Glazing for the Name instance parameter. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. under Elevations. 8 Select the reference plane. press TAB until the chain of lines is preselected. under Specify a new Work Plane. and select Lock. double-click Exterior. under Identity Data.7 On the Design Bar. 16 On the Options Bar. select Reference Plane: Glazing for Name. Creating a Window Family | 571 . click Lines. 14 In the Work Plane dialog box.

click Modify. you can control subcategory visual style using the Objects Styles dialog box. 572 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . View the window model with frame. click Finish Sketch. NOTE Assigning subcategories to model elements is important. double-click View 1. specify Glass for the Subcategory instance parameter. under 3D Views.18 On the Design Bar. 20 Select the glass extrusion. and click OK. double-click Right. under Identity Data. 21 On the Options Bar. click . under Elevations. 24 In the Project Browser. After the family is loaded into a project. sash. 23 On the Design Bar. and glass 19 In the Project Browser. Spin the model if necessary to view the sash and frame at various angles. 22 In the Element Properties dialog box.

enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height. Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters. For example. 26 In the Family Types dialog box. Click OK. Enter 1500 mm for Width. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 27 In the Family Types dialog box. it is important to verify that all model elements adapted to the changes as expected. make sure the window frame stretched with the opening and that the glass extrusion remains attached to the interior edge of the sash. Click Apply. Click Apply. Creating a Window Family | 573 .Flex the window model 25 On the Design Bar. Move the Family Types dialog box off to the side so you can see the window model. return the window to its original dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. You should flex the model at regular intervals to catch problems early. Under Other. Under Other. enter 1000 mm for Height. Enter 2000 mm for Width. 28 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry. click Family Types. enter 800 mm for Default Sill Height. Most problems can be resolved by aligning and locking lines. enter 1500 mm for Height. NOTE After flexing the model.

Add reference planes to specify the location of the new window mullion centerlines 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Add two horizontal and two vertical reference planes inside of the window opening to approximate the mullion centerline locations as shown. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 2 On the Design Bar. the exact location is not critical. double-click Exterior. you create the solid geometry of the window mullions based on reference planes and extrusions. NOTE When you draw each reference plane. click the EQ symbol to make the dimension segments equal. 4 On the Design Bar. Precise dimensions are assigned to the reference planes in subsequent steps. After adding the dimension. under Elevations. Add a multi-segmented dimension referencing all of the vertical reference planes except the center (Left/Right) as shown.Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry In this exercise. click Ref Plane. 574 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Dimension.

as shown. 8 Select the dimension on the upper-right that references the top two horizontal reference planes.5 Add a dimension between the top of the window opening (top reference plane) and the horizontal reference plane below it. Add a mullion offset family parameter 7 On the Design Bar. Creating a Window Family | 575 . 6 Add a dimension between the bottom of the window opening (bottom reference plane) and the horizontal reference plane above it. select <Add parameter. as shown. click Modify.> for Label... 9 On the Options Bar. Do not be concerned with dimension values. Do not be concerned with dimension values.

TIP Due to the length of the dimension label. specify the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Type. under Dimensions. enter 350 mm for Mullion Offset. Under Parameter Data.10 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. and click OK. click Family Types. select Dimensions. 16 Select the dimension on the lower-right. 576 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . enter Mullion Offset for Name. click Modify. select Family parameter. Select Instance. you may want to drag the dimension value as shown. 13 Select the horizontal reference plane second from the bottom. Click OK. Notice the dimension value becomes editable. and enter 350 mm as the new value. 12 In the Family Types dialog box. Under Group parameter under. 11 On the Design Bar. 15 On the Design Bar. 14 Click the dimension value.

under Specify a new Work Plane. Do not be concerned with precise dimensions. click Set Work Plane. select Reference Plane: Glazing for Name. and click OK. and click . 23 On the Options Bar. move the dimension value as shown. notice lock icons display on the interior horizontal edges of the sash. However. select Mullion Offset for Label. 22 On the Design Bar. Watch the Status Bar to be sure that the lines are snapping to the sash. Creating a Window Family | 577 . enter 14 mm for Depth. As you did before. After you complete the sketch. 21 In the Work Plane dialog box. click Lines. 24 Sketch a rectangle centered on the left vertical mullion reference plane approximately as shown. 18 On the Design Bar. 20 On the Design Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. click Modify. Create the vertical mullion extrusions 19 On the Design Bar. it is critical that the short horizontal lines align with the horizontal edges of the sash. 25 Click both of the locks so the mullion adapts to changes in window height.17 On the Options Bar.

select <Add parameter> for Label. and place it above the dimension you placed in the previous steps. 27 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge of the mullion extrusion to the reference plane centered between the vertical mullion extrusion sketch lines. and to the right edge of the mullion extrusion. 29 On the Design Bar. 28 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge to the right edge of the mullion extrusion. 578 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Click the EQ symbol to make both horizontal dimensions equal.26 On the Design Bar. and select the dimension you added in the previous step. 30 On the Options Bar. click Modify. click Dimension. Move the dimension values as shown.

enter Mullion Width for Name. Under Group parameter under. select Family parameter. Click OK. select Mullion Width for Label. Creating a Window Family | 579 .31 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. follow these basic steps: ■ Sketch the rectangle similar to the mullion on the left. ■ ■ ■ Do not be concerned with the value of the mullion width. This is changed in later steps. Select the dimension. click Finish Sketch. NOTE Do not lock the lines to the sash edge as you did previously. Select Type. Dimension mullion edges and the reference plane at the center of the mullion and click the equality constraint. select Dimensions. specify the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Type. and on the Options Bar. Move the Mullion Width value to the left as shown. 33 On the Design Bar. Under Parameter Data. Remember. Add a dimension between the left and right mullion edges. 32 Repeat the previous steps to create an identical mullion centered on the right vertical reference plane as shown.

enter 40 mm for Mullion Width. 35 In the Family Types dialog box. NOTE After flexing the model. enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height. Flex the window model 36 In the Family Types dialog box. and click Apply. and the mullions stretch with the new window height. Enter 1500 mm for Width. it is important to verify that all model elements adapted to the changes as expected. Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters. and aligned with the sash edge. Click Apply. Notice the mullions remain centered and equally spaced on the reference planes. you should pay close attention to the new mullions and make sure they remain centered. click Family Types. Most problems can be resolved by aligning and locking lines. Under Other. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 580 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . You should flex the model at regular intervals to catch problems early.Specify the mullion width parameter 34 On the Design Bar. or undoing the same. enter 1500 mm for Height. evenly spaced. Move the dialog box off to the side so you can see the window in the drawing area. In this case.

and move the EQ values off to each side as shown. 47 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge to the bottom edge of the mullion extrusion. 46 On the Design Bar. click Lines. 44 On the Design Bar. as shown. Notice the Depth value on the Options Bar remains at the previously specified value. 41 On the Design Bar. enter 800 mm for Default Sill Height. Under Other. and click OK. 39 On the Design Bar. 40 In the Work Plane dialog box. under Specify a new Work Plane. Do not be concerned with the dimension value. 45 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge of the mullion extrusion to the reference plane at the center of the mullion. click . click Dimension. Enter 2000 mm for Width. click Set Work Plane. and then click the lock icons to lock the left and right edges to the edge of the sash. return the window to its original dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Click the EQ symbol to make both vertical dimensions equal. select Reference Plane : Glazing for Name. 42 On the Options Bar. Click Apply. Sketch the horizontal mullion extrusions 38 On the Design Bar. Click OK. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 43 Sketch a rectangle centered on the upper horizontal mullion reference plane approximately as shown. Creating a Window Family | 581 . enter 1000 mm for Height.37 In the Family Types dialog box. click Dimension. and then to the bottom edge of the mullion extrusion.

Select the dimension. 582 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . follow these basic steps: ■ Sketch the rectangle similar to the mullion you just completed. Add a dimension between the upper and lower mullion edges. 50 Repeat the previous steps to create an identical mullion centered on the lower horizontal reference plane as shown. select Mullion Width for Label.48 On the Design Bar. Remember. click Modify. Dimension mullion edges and the reference plane at the center of the mullion and click the equality constraint. and on the Options Bar. 49 On the Options Bar. ■ ■ ■ 51 On the Design Bar. and select the dimension you added in the previous step. Move the dimension value as shown. NOTE Do not lock the lines to the sash edge as you did previously. select Mullion Width for Label. click Finish Sketch.

you can still see the window. If necessary. so when you open the Family Types dialog box. double-click View 1. 54 In the Project Browser. Flex the window model 55 Adjust the location of the window model within the drawing area. Join the mullion geometry 52 On the Tools menu. Creating a Window Family | 583 .The horizontal mullion extrusions are now complete. spin the model to get a good view of the mullions. 56 On the Design Bar. and select the vertical mullions. click Family Types. 53 Select the horizontal mullions. under 3D Views. click Join Geometry. Notice the mullion extrusions are joined.

58 In the Family Types dialog box. Under Other. and mullions that you want to display in renderings of the new window. you assign materials to the frame. Click Apply. enter 800 mm for Default Sill Height. Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters and the mullions stretch with the new window height. enter 1000 mm for Height. Under Other. Assigning Materials to the Window Components In this exercise. Enter 2000 mm for Width.57 In the Family Types dialog box. Click OK. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Assigning Materials to the Window Components. Click Apply. return the window to its original dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 59 Proceed to the next exercise. sash. enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height. Enter 1500 mm for Width. enter 1500 mm for Height. 584 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

click the Model Graphics Style control. and select Shading with Edges. 2 In the Materials dialog box. and click OK. 5 In the Material Library dialog box. the sash. under AccuRender. and the mullions. Dark. click for Texture. navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Pine. and click OK. select Stained.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. No Gloss. double-click Exterior. TIP Hold the CTRL key down as you select the sweep and various extrusions. click OK. Assign the Pine Frame material to the frame. click Materials. and mullions 7 In the Project Browser. 8 On the View Control Bar. 9 Select the window frame sweep. under Elevations. Creating a Window Family | 585 . 4 In the Materials dialog box. Yellow/. 6 In the Materials dialog box. enter Pine Frame for Name. Create a new material based on the existing yellow pine material 1 On the Settings menu. sash. 3 In the New Material dialog box. click Duplicate.

clear the other view options. The window frame is assigned the new Pine Frame material. 23 Under Detail Levels. 22 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box. under 3D Views. under Graphics. select Frame/Mullion for Subcategory. 15 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. select Front/Back and When cut in Plan/RCP (if category permits). and click OK. 14 In the Element Properties dialog box. double-click View 1. and Fine are selected. 18 On the Design Bar. select Edit for Visibility. verify that Coarse. and click OK. and Fine are selected. 12 Under Materials and Finishes. Medium. 16 Under Detail Levels. under Identity Data. and click OK. click OK. Modify the glass visibility 19 In the Project Browser under Elevations. select Front/Back and When cut in Plan/RCP (if category permits). select Pine Frame for Name. 21 On the Options Bar. 13 In the Materials dialog box. click . under View Specific Display. 24 In the Project Browser. double-click Right. verify that Coarse. click Modify. 20 Select the glass extrusion. 17 In the Element Properties dialog box. 586 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click for Material. click Visibility. Medium.10 On the Options Bar. under View Specific Display.

and glass display their assigned materials. mullions. sash. Defining New Window Types In this exercise. 26 Proceed to the next exercise. The window frame. Creating a Window Family | 587 . Defining New Window Types. you define new window types based on the window model that you just created. You then create multiple window types that will be available to the user after the family is loaded into a project. You begin by adding a formula to the mullion offset parameter to specify horizontal divisions of one third the overall height of the window.25 Zoom in on a window corner.

it is also a good idea to flex the model after a new formula is applied. and click OK. enter 2000 mm for Height. and click Apply. In the Family Types dialog box. The horizontal mullions are now spaced apart at one third the height of the window. 3 In the Family Types dialog box.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 2 On the Design Bar. Flex the window model 4 In addition to flexing the model after the addition or modification of model geometry. Add a mullion offset formula to the family type 1 Zoom to fit and move the window model off the side of the drawing area so it will be visible after you open the Family Types dialog box. 588 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Family Types. enter Height/3 in the Formula column for Mullion Offset.

9 Under Family Types. Click Apply. click New. and click OK. Creating a Window Family | 589 . and click OK. enter 1000 mm for Height. but the one third height spacing is maintained in the horizontal mullions. 8 In the Family Types dialog box. 7 In the Name dialog box. click New.The window height is doubled. enter 2500 w x 1250mm h for Name. and click Apply. 5 In the Family Types dialog box. specify the following parameter values: ■ ■ ■ Enter 2500 mm for Width. enter 2600 w x 1300mm h for Name. Enter 1250 mm for Height. 10 In the Name dialog box. Define new window types with various heights and widths 6 In the Family Types dialog box. under Family Types.

select Training Window : 2500 w x 1250mm h. 32 On the View menu. Place new window types in the project 21 On the Design Bar. specify the following parameter values: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 1800 mm for Width. 22 Draw a generic wall segment 12000 mm long. select Training Window : 1800 w x 1500mm h. click Save. Load the new window family into a new project 17 On the Standard toolbar. 15 On the File menu. and click Open. enter 1800 w x 1500mm h for Name and click OK. Click Apply. 33 Zoom in on the center window. select it. You now have three new window types defined within your window family. click Thin Lines. Define the final window type 12 Under Family Types. This is because you set the visibility values to display when cut in plan/RCP. 28 Add this window to the center of the wall. click Modify. 31 On the Design Bar.rfa file. 20 In the Open dialog box. 26 Add the window to the left side of the wall. Notice the detail that displays. Enter 1500 mm for Height. Click OK.11 In the Family Types dialog box.rfa. click to start a new project based on your default template. specify the following parameter values: ■ ■ ■ Enter 2600 mm for Width. click Wall. click Window. select Training Window :2600 w x 1300mm h. 16 Navigate to the location of your choice and save the new window family with the name. click Window. 18 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. navigate to the location of your Training Window. 27 In the Type Selector. 23 On the Design Bar. click Load. click New. Click Apply. Training Window. 590 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 25 In the Type Selector. 24 On the Options Bar. 14 In the Family Types dialog box. 30 Add the third window to the right side of the wall. 29 In the Type Selector. clear Tag on Placement. Enter 1300 mm for Height. 19 On the Options Bar. 13 In the Name dialog box.

You begin by creating the desktop. Creating a Furniture Family | 591 . drawer base. Finally. rolltop. and specify values for the furniture length and depth. You then assign parameters to the furniture family to allow for the creation of different-sized versions of the prototype. you assign new dimension values to the furniture to create new types within the furniture family. 35 On the View Control Bar. you create a custom furniture family based on the definition of a rolltop desk. click . You have three new fixed nine-light windows based on a new window family prototype. and select Shading with Edges. click the Model Graphics Style control. and drawers as extrusions. This completes the Creating a Window Family lesson. Creating a Furniture Family In this lesson.34 On the View toolbar.

click Dimension. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. 2 On the File menu. they represent the furniture centerline axes. 9 On the Design Bar. one to the left and one to the right of the existing vertical centerline reference plane as shown. Create a new family based on the default furniture template 1 Close all open projects or families. one above and one below the existing horizontal centerline reference plane as shown. Floor Plan: Ref. their exact location is not critical. you add reference planes and specify the parameters for the new rolltop desk furniture family. 5 On the View menu. Select Metric Furniture. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog box. Precise dimensions are assigned to the reference planes in subsequent steps. click New ➤ Family. 4 Maximize the view. 592 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 8 Draw two vertical reference planes. 6 On the Design Bar.Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters In this exercise. NOTE When you draw the reference planes. 7 Draw two horizontal reference planes. The reference planes that display are part of the default furniture template. and click Open. Level. select Training Files and navigate to the Metric ➤ Metric Families and Templates ➤ Templates folder. click Ref Plane.rft.

10 Near the bottom of the drawing area. 11 Add an overall horizontal dimension underneath the dimension you just added. add a horizontal dimension string beginning at the left reference plane. Click the EQ icon to make the segments equal. as shown. click Modify. and ending at the right reference plane. proceeding to the centerline reference plane. 13 Select the left reference plane. 12 On the Design Bar. Creating a Furniture Family | 593 . It should reference the left reference plane and the right reference plane as shown. 14 Change the horizontal dimension to 2000 mm.

as shown. add a vertical dimension string beginning at the upper reference plane. 594 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . add an overall vertical dimension from the upper reference plane to the lower reference plane.15 On the Design Bar. proceeding to the centerline reference plane. Click the EQ symbol to make both segments equal. click Dimension. 16 On the right side of the drawing area. 17 To the right of the dimension you just created. and ending at the lower reference plane. as shown.

18 On the Design Bar. select each reference plane and drag the extents to the new position. horizontal reference plane. 20 Change the vertical dimension to 1000 mm. 22 Clean up the extents of the reference planes and the dimension witness lines as shown. 21 On the Design Bar. Afterwards. TIP To do this. 19 Select the upper. Creating a Furniture Family | 595 . click Modify. select each dimension and drag the witness line controls as needed. click Modify.

specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. Select Type..> for Label. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. Select Type. 27 On the Options Bar. select <Add parameter. enter Length for Name. For Group parameter under.> for Label. 25 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. Click OK.23 Select the 2000 mm dimension. select Dimensions. enter Depth for Name. Click OK.. select Family parameter. select Family parameter. Under Parameter Data.. select Dimensions. 596 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Under Parameter Data. 26 Select the 1000 mm dimension. 24 On the Options Bar. select <Add parameter. 28 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. For Group parameter under..

you should flex the design now to ensure the reference planes and labelled dimensions adapt to changes as expected. Creating a Furniture Family | 597 . return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry In this exercise. enter 2000 mm for Length. you create the solid geometry of the desktop with an extrusion. Flex the design 29 Adjust the location of the reference planes within the drawing area. Click Apply. Enter 1000 mm for Depth. it will also adapt to the same changes. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. When the solid geometry is snapped to the reference planes. 32 In the Family Types dialog box. Enter 1500 mm for Depth. Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry. enter 3000 mm for Length. Click Apply. click Family Types. you can still see the model. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. so when you open the Family Types dialog box. Click OK. 31 In the Family Types dialog box.These reference planes will be the skeleton that you snap the solid geometry to. 30 On the Design Bar. Therefore. Notice the reference planes adapt to the new dimension parameters.

and enter 100 mm for Depth. and click OK. and then select the lower right reference plane intersection for the second corner of the rectangle. the symbolic line thickness was modified for training purposes. press TAB until the chain of lines is offered as a selection option. double-click Front. click Finish Sketch. 4 On the Design Bar. 6 In the Work Plane dialog box. click . click Symbolic Lines. under Elevations. Create the desktop using an extrusion 1 On the Design Bar. 10 On the Design Bar. click Set Work Plane. 8 On the Options Bar. 11 In the Project Browser. and click to select all four symbolic lines. Your lines may have a lighter weight. 2 On the Options Bar. click . 3 Select the upper left reference plane intersection for the first corner of the rectangle. under Specify a new Work Plane.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 5 On the Design Bar. 598 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 9 Move the cursor over one of the symbolic lines. select Level: Ref. Level for Name. 7 On the Design Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. NOTE In the image below. click Lines.

The desktop extrusion extends 100 mm above the reference level. 13 Move the cursor over the top edge of the desktop. 22 On the Options Bar.. 21 Select the 750 mm dimension. click Dimension. 12 On the Design Bar. Creating a Furniture Family | 599 . 14 Drag the top edge of the desktop upward until the temporary dimension value is 750 mm. and select the top edge. 16 Drag the bottom edge of the desktop up until the desktop is 100 mm thick. press TAB until Extrusion : Shape handle displays in the Status Bar.. 15 Move the cursor over the bottom edge of the desktop. click Modify. press TAB until Extrusion : Shape handle displays in the Status Bar. click Modify. Add height and thickness dimensions 17 On the Design Bar. as shown.> for Label. and select the bottom edge. Add height and thickness family parameters 20 On the Design Bar. 19 Add a vertical dimension from the bottom of the desktop to the top edge. select <Add parameter. 18 Add a vertical dimension from the reference level to the top edge of the desktop.

32 Proceed to the next exercise. Enter 150 mm for Thickness. 31 In the Family Types dialog box. Click OK. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry In this exercise. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Notice the desk top adapts to the new dimension parameters. enter 2000 mm for Length. select Dimensions. and click Apply. Flex the design 28 Adjust the location of the model within the drawing area. you can still see the model. Select Type. 30 In the Family Types dialog box. so when you open the Family Types dialog box. Enter 1200 mm for Height. 24 Select the 100 mm dimension. 27 On the Design Bar. select Family parameter. Enter 750 mm for Height.. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. For Group parameter under. Click Apply.23 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. and click Apply. 25 On the Options Bar. Click OK. select <Add parameter. 600 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . enter Height for Name. Select Type. Under Parameter Data. select Family parameter. click Modify. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type.. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. enter 4000 mm for Length. and click Apply. you create the solid geometry of the desk drawer base. 29 On the Design Bar. select Dimensions. enter Thickness for Name. Under Parameter Data. 26 n the Parameter Properties dialog box. For Group parameter under.> for Label. Click OK. click Family Types.

6 On the Design Bar. Creating a Furniture Family | 601 . Click the lock icon as shown. click Ref Plane.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. and click to locate a new vertical reference plane offset 100 mm to the right. 7 Add a dimension referencing the left vertical reference plane and the offset plane you added. double-click Ref. 2 On the Design Bar. Level. and enter 100 mm for Offset. click Dimension. 4 Move the cursor over the left vertical reference plane. and click to locate a new horizontal reference plane offset 100 mm below it. 5 Move the cursor over the upper horizontal reference plane. 3 On the Options Bar. click . under Floor Plans. Offset two reference planes to locate the first drawer base corner 1 In the Project Browser.

12 On the Design Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 602 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and then specify a point 300 mm to the right and 800 mm down for the second corner of the rectangle. click Set Work Plane. and click OK. select Level: Ref. as shown. Sketch the left drawer base 9 On the Design Bar. Level for Name. click . Lock the dimension as shown. 11 In the Work Plane dialog box. click Lines. 13 On the Options Bar. 10 On the Design Bar. 14 Select the intersection of the new offset reference planes for the first corner of the rectangle. under Specify a new Work Plane.8 Add a dimension to the top horizontal reference plane and the offset plane below it.

17 Add a vertical dimension from the lower reference plane to the lower edge of the drawer base.After you complete the rectangle. Creating a Furniture Family | 603 . 16 On the Design Bar. two lock icons display. 15 Click both of the lock icons to lock the edges of the extrusion to the reference planes. click Dimension. and then click the lock icon to lock the dimension.

22 On the Tools toolbar. 21 Select the vertical centerline reference plane as the mirror axis. select the horizontal reference plane second from the top. You can also highlight the entire line chain. 604 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . . as shown below at the cursor. click . 19 Select the four sketched lines.18 On the Design Bar. TIP You can select multiple elements by holding the CTRL key down. 20 On the Tools toolbar. A duplicate of the left drawer base is mirrored to create the right drawer base. click the Mirror tool. click Modify. 23 For the align-to reference. using the TAB key.

Add a dimension from the lower reference plane to the lower edge of the drawer base. and then click the lock icon to lock the dimension. 26 On the Design Bar. and then click the lock icon to lock the dimension.24 Select the top horizontal line of the right drawer extrusion as shown. 25 Click the lock icon to lock the extrusion edge to the reference plane. A lock icon displays. 27 Add and lock the following two dimensions to the right drawer extrusion: ■ Add a dimension from the right vertical reference plane to the right edge of the drawer base. click Dimension. ■ Creating a Furniture Family | 605 .

Click OK.28 Add two final dimensions. enter Drawer Base Width for Name. 32 Select the dimension referring to the drawer width on the right extrusion. 31 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. select Dimensions. 34 On the Design Bar. Select Type.> for Label. click Modify. 33 On the Options Bar.. 30 On the Options Bar. one on each extrusion that references the width of the drawer base. select Drawer Base Width for Label. select Family parameter. Under Parameter Data.. For Group parameter under. 29 Select the dimension referring to the drawer width on the left extrusion. 606 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . as shown. select <Add parameter. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type.

39 Select the upper edge of the drawer base. click Finish Sketch.35 On the Design Bar. click it to lock the alignment. 37 On the Tools toolbar. Extend the drawer base extrusions up to the desktop 36 In the Project Browser. double-click Front. under Elevations. a lock icon displays. After the alignment. click . Creating a Furniture Family | 607 . 38 Select the lower edge of the desktop as the align-to reference.

However. Flex the design 46 Adjust the location of the model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog box. and click Apply. Enter 1200 mm for Height. 43 Click the Annotation Categories tab. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. enter 2000 mm for Length. click Family Types. 45 On the View Control Bar. Notice the desk adapts to the new dimension parameters. click Visibility/Graphics. 50 Proceed to the next exercise. Enter 750 mm for Height. Click OK. 608 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and click OK. you can still see the model. Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry. 42 On the View menu. 41 On the View toolbar. 47 On the Design Bar. 48 In the Family Types dialog box. click Modify. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. 49 In the Family Types dialog box.40 On the Design Bar. and click Apply. click the Scale control and select 1:20. enter 4000 mm for Length. and click Apply. Enter 150 mm for Thickness. 44 Clear Show annotation categories in this view. Click Apply. notice that annotations display in this view. The solid geometry for the desk drawer base is now complete. click .

as shown. 2 On the Design Bar. Creating a Furniture Family | 609 . and click to specify the upper left corner. and click OK. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. double-click Right. select Reference Plane: Center (Left\Right) for Name. Create the rolltop extrusion 1 In the Project Browser. then move the cursor up 300mm and to the left 400mm. under Specify a new Work Plane. 5 On the Design Bar. click Lines. click . 4 In the Work Plane dialog box. 7 Sketch the rectangle beginning at the intersection of the desktop and the right reference plane. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. under Elevations. click Set Work Plane. you create the solid geometry of the desk rolltop. 6 On the Options Bar.Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry In this exercise. 3 On the Design Bar.

9 Select the desk top. 10 Select the right vertical edge of the desktop extrusion. 610 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click . then select the right parallel sketch line. click Dimension. and lock it. and lock the alignment. 12 Add one dimension referring to both vertical sketch lines.8 On the Tools toolbar. then the lower horizontal sketch line. and click the lock icon to lock the alignment. 11 On the Design Bar. Add another dimension to both horizontal sketch lines. and lock it.

13 On the Design Bar. click Lines. the upper sketch line. The rolltop extrusion outline is complete. and then move the cursor down and to the right until you create and arc similar to the image below. click the Fillet arc tool. click Finish Sketch. Creating a Furniture Family | 611 . and then select the fillet arc tool from the menu. 15 Select the left vertical sketch line. Do not be concerned with the precise dimension of the arc radius. . 14 On the Options Bar. TIP You may need to click the down arrow button. 16 On the Design Bar.

Align the left and right edges of the rolltop with the drawer bases 17 In the Project Browser. 20 Select the right edge of the right drawer base. double-click Front. select the right edge of the rolltop. 19 Select the left edge of the left drawer base. select the left edge of the rolltop. and click the lock icon. click . 612 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . under Elevations. and click the lock icon. 18 On the Tools toolbar.

The desk should adapt to all the changes. Flex the design 22 Adjust the location of the desk model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog box. 24 In the Family Types dialog box. you may need to align and lock problematic edges that did not remain aligned. and click Apply. Enter 200 mm for Thickness. 23 On the Design Bar. You can also use dimension constraints. and click Apply. and click Apply. and click Apply. enter 4000 mm for Length. If not. The solid geometry of the rolltop is now complete. click Family Types. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. click . Enter 1500 mm for Depth.21 On the View toolbar. Creating a Furniture Family | 613 . Enter 1500 mm for Height. you can still see the model.

25 In the Family Types dialog box, return the parameters to their original values:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Dimensions, enter 2000 mm for Length. Enter 1000 mm for Depth. Enter 750 mm for Height. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. Click Apply. Click OK.

26 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry.

Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry
In this exercise, you create the solid geometry of the drawers and apply material to the desk.

Dataset
Continue using the family file from the previous exercise.

Create the desk drawer extrusions
1 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 2 On the Design Bar, click Set Work Plane. 3 In the Work Plane dialog box, under Specify a new Work Plane, select Pick a Plane, and click OK. 4 Select the front plane of the right drawer base.

5 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Front. 6 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 7 On the Options Bar, click .

8 Sketch six drawers similar to the image below.

614 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

NOTE The exact configuration of the rectangles representing the drawer fronts is not critical. 9 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 10 Add a dimension between the vertical edges of the drawer base and the vertical lines of each bottom drawer. Lock each dimension as you add it. There should be four dimensions as shown.

NOTE Adding and locking these dimensions is very important. If you modify the desk length or the drawer base width, these locked dimension assure that the drawers flex as expected. If you cannot see the locks on the dimensions, zoom the view until you do.

11 On the Tools toolbar, click

.

12 On the Options Bar, select Multiple Alignment. 13 To constrain the four upper drawers, select the left vertical line on the left lowest drawer first, and then select the corresponding left vertical lines of the two drawers above it. After selecting the line of an upper drawer, click the lock that displays to lock the alignment. 14 On the Tools toolbar, click set on the left. 15 On the Tools toolbar, click , and repeat the previous step by selecting the right vertical lines of the drawer

, and repeat the previous two steps on the right set of drawers.

These steps ensure the top drawers remain aligned and flex with the constrained bottom drawer. 16 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 17 On the Design Bar, click Extrusion Properties. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Constraints, enter 20mm for Extrusion End, and click OK. 19 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 20 On the View toolbar, click .

Creating a Furniture Family | 615

Apply material to the desk
21 Draw a pick box around the entire desk to select all the extrusions. 22 On the Options Bar, click . for Material.

23 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Materials and Finishes, click 24 In the Materials dialog box, click Duplicate. 25 In the New Material dialog box, enter Desk - Wood, Cherry, and click OK. 26 In the Materials dialog box, under AccuRender, click for Texture.

27 In the Material Library dialog box, navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Cherry and select Stained, Dark, Polished. 28 Click OK. 29 In the Materials dialog box, click OK. 30 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK. 31 On the View Control Bar, click the Model Graphics Style control, and select Shading with Edges.

Flex the design
32 Adjust the location of the desk model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog box, you can still see the model. 33 On the Design Bar, click Family Types.

616 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

34 In the Family Types dialog box, do the following:
■ ■ ■

Under Dimensions, enter 4000 mm for Length, and click Apply. Enter 1500 mm for Depth, and click Apply. Enter 200 mm for Thickness, and click Apply.

The desk should adapt to all the changes. If not, you may need to align and lock problematic edges that did not remain aligned. You can also use dimension constraints. 35 In the Family Types dialog box, return the parameters to their original values:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Dimensions, enter 2000 mm for Length. Enter 1000 mm for Depth. Enter 750 mm for Height. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. Click Apply. Click OK.

36 Proceed with the final exercise in this lesson, Defining New Furniture Types.

Defining New Furniture Types
In this exercise, you define new furniture types based on the rolltop desk model that you just created.

Dataset
Continue using the family file from the previous exercise.

Creating a Furniture Family | 617

Define new furniture types with various widths and depths
1 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 2 In the Family Types dialog box, under Family Types, click New. 3 In the Name dialog box, enter Rolltop Desk 2000 x 1000mm for Name, and click OK. 4 In the Family Types dialog box, verify that Length is 2000 mm and Depth is 1000 mm, and click Apply. 5 Under Family Types, click New. 6 In the Name dialog box, enter Rolltop Desk 2100 x 1100mm for Name, and click OK. 7 In the Family Types dialog box, enter 2100 mm for Length and 1100 mm for Depth, and click Apply. 8 Under Family Types, click New. 9 In the Name dialog box, enter Rolltop Desk 2250 x 1250mm for Name, and click OK. 10 In the Family Types dialog box, enter 2250 mm for Length and 1250 mm for Depth, click Apply, and click OK. You now have three new furniture types defined within your furniture family. 11 On the File menu, click Save. 12 Navigate to the folder of your choice and save the new furniture family project with the name, Training Furniture.rfa.

Load the new window family into a new project

13 On the Standard toolbar, click 14 On the View toolbar, click .

to start a new project based on your default template.

15 On the View Control Bar, click the Model Graphics Style control and select Shading with Edges. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Component. 17 On the Options Bar, click Load. 18 In the Open dialog box, navigate to the location of your Training Furniture.rfa file, select it, and click Open. 19 In the Type Selector, select Rolltop Desk 200 x 100mm. 20 Specify a point in the drawing area to add the first desk.

21 In the Type Selector, select Rolltop Desk 2100 x 1100mm. 22 Specify a point to the right of the first desk, and add the second desk.

618 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

23 In the Type Selector, select Rolltop Desk 2250 x 1250mm. 24 Specify a point in the drawing area to the right of the previous two desks, and click to add the third desk.

You now have three new rolltop desks based on the new rolltop desk furniture family prototype. This completes the Creating a Furniture Family lesson.

Creating a Baluster Family
In this lesson, you create a custom baluster and apply it to a set of stair railings. Balusters are simply profile extrusions with an assigned height family parameter.

Drawing a Baluster
In this exercise, you draw a baluster with an extrusion.

Dataset
■ ■

On the File menu, click New ➤ Family. In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files and navigate to the Metric ➤ Metric Families and Templates ➤ Templates folder. Select Metric Baluster.rft, and click Open.

Create a new family based on the default profile template
1 Expand the left elevation view. 2 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit.

Creating a Baluster Family | 619

The reference planes that display are part of the default baluster template. The bottom of the baluster is at the reference level and the baluster has an assigned default height of 750mm. Top and bottom cut angles for the baluster are also displayed.

Draw the baluster plan profile
3 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Ref. Level.

4 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form  ➤  Solid Extrusion. 5 On the Design Bar, click Set Work Plane. 6 In the Work Plane dialog box, select Ref. Level for Name, and click OK. 7 On the Design Bar, click Lines. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs, their exact location is not critical. However, the baluster profile should be centered on the vertical and horizontal reference planes. Draw your profile approximately 30mm wide by 60mm deep. 8 Draw the closed baluster plan profile as shown.

9 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 10 In the Project Browser under Elevations, double-click Front.

620 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

By default, the extrusion has a height of 250mm. 11 On the Design Bar, click Modify and select the extrusion. 12 On the Options Bar, click .

13 Select the top reference plane and select the top edge of the extrusion. 14 Click the lock icon.

15 Save the new baluster family with the name Training Baluster.rfa. The new custom baluster is now complete.

Assigning the New Baluster to a Stair Run
In this exercise, you assign the new baluster that you just created to a stair run.

Load the new baluster family into a new project
1 On the File menu, click New ➤ Project. 2 In the New Project dialog box, click Browse, and in the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files. Navigate to the Metric ➤ Metric Families and Templates ➤ Templates folder. Select the DefaultMetric.rtefile, and click Open. In the New Project Dialog box, click OK.

Draw a straight stair run
3 On the Design Bar, click the Modelling tab. 4 On the Design Bar, click Stairs. 5 Draw a straight stair run as shown.

Creating a Baluster Family | 621

6 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 7 On the File menu, click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 8 In the Open dialog box, navigate to the location of your Training Baluster.rfa file, select it, and click Open. 9 On the View toolbar, click .

10 On the View menu, click Orient ➤ Southwest. 11 On the View menu, click Shading with Edges.

Apply the custom baluster to the stair run
12 On the Design Bar, click Modify and select the existing railing. 13 On the Options Bar, click .

14 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 15 In the Type Properties dialog box, click Edit for Baluster Placement. 16 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box, under Baluster Family, select Training Baluster : Training Baluster for the Regular baluster.

17 Clear Use Balusters Per Tread on Stairs. 18 Specify Start and End posts as Training Baluster. 19 Click OK. 20 In the Type Properties dialog box, click OK. 21 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK. 22 Zoom in on the new balusters.

622 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

The stair run is now assigned the new baluster that you created. This completes the Creating a Baluster Family lesson.

Creating Profile Families
A profile is a series of closed two-dimensional lines and arcs. Use profiles to define object cross sections such as railings, balusters, soffits, cornices, and other sweep-defined objects. Create profiles to define frequently used shapes in your details. In this lesson, you create five different profiles: a sweep, a railing, a stair nosing, a reveal, and a host sweep. You then create an in-place sweep based on a 2D path and apply the host sweep to a wall.

Drawing a Sweep Profile
In this exercise, you draw a sweep profile.

Dataset
■ ■

On the File menu, click New ➤ Family. In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files and navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. Select Metric Profile.rft, and click Open.

Create a new family based on the default profile template
1 On the Design Bar, click Lines. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs, their exact location is not critical. However, the sweep profile should begin at the reference plane intersection. 2 Starting at the reference plane intersection, draw the sweep profile with line and arc segments as shown.

3 Save the new profile family with the name Profile - Sweep.rfa. The new sweep profile is now complete.

Creating Profile Families | 623

Drawing a Rail Profile
In this exercise, you create a rail profile.

Dataset
■ ■

On the File menu, click New ➤ Family. In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files and navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. Select Metric Profile-Rail.rft, and click Open.

Create a new family based on the default rail profile template
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, verify that Ref. Level is open. The reference planes that display are part of the default rail profile template, with the vertical reference plane labeled as the rail centerline and the horizontal reference plane labeled as the rail top. The rail height is measured from the floor elevation to the rail top.

Draw the rail profile
2 On the Design Bar, click Lines. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs, their exact location is not critical. However, the top of the rail profile should coincide with the rail top reference plane. 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection, draw the rail profile with line segments as shown.

4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile - Rail.rfa. The new rail profile is now complete.

Drawing a Stair Nosing Profile
In this exercise, you create a stair nosing profile.

624 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

Dataset
■ ■

On the File menu, click New ➤ Family. In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files and navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. Select Metric Profile-Stair Nosing.rft, and click Open.

Create a new family based on the default stair nosing profile template
1 Notice the existing planes and text provided within the template. The reference planes that display are part of the default stair nosing profile template, with the vertical reference plane labeled as the riser face and the horizontal reference plane labeled as the tread surface. Additional text specifies the lower-left quadrant as the location for the stair nosing.

Draw the stair nosing profile
2 On the Design Bar, click Lines. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs, their exact location is not critical. However, you must draw the stair nosing in the lower-left quadrant. In addition, the top of the stair nosing profile should coincide with the tread surface reference plane and the right edge of the stair nosing profile should coincide with the riser face reference plane. 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection, draw the stair nosing profile with line and arc segments as shown.

4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile - Stair Nosing.rfa. The new stair nosing profile is now complete.

Drawing a Reveal Profile
In this exercise, you create a reveal profile. Reveal profiles are used with the Reveal tool in the project environment to define a wall cutout.

Dataset
■ ■

On the File menu, click New ➤ Family. In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files and navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. Select Metric Profile-Reveal.rft, and click Open.

Creating Profile Families | 625

Create a new family based on the default reveal profile template
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, verify that Ref. Level is open. The reference planes that display are part of the default reveal profile template, with the vertical reference plane labeled as the wall face, and the wall body indicated to the right of the wall face reference plane. The horizontal reference plane represents the offset from floor level to the reveal.

Draw the reveal profile
2 On the Design Bar, click Lines. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines, their exact location is not critical. However, the left edge of the reveal profile must coincide with wall face reference plane and the reveal must be drawn within the wall body (to the right of the wall face reference plane). 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection, draw the reveal profile with line segments as shown.

4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile - Reveal.rfa. The new reveal profile is now complete.

Drawing a Host Sweep Profile
In this exercise, you create a host sweep profile. Host Sweep profiles are similar to reveal profiles and are used with the Host Sweep tool in the project environment to define a shape to add to a host surface, which may be any vertical surface.

Dataset
■ ■

On the File menu, click New ➤ Family. In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files and navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. Select Metric Profile-Hosted.rft, and click Open.

626 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

Create a new family based on the default host sweep profile template
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, verify that Ref. Level is open. The reference planes that display are part of the default host sweep profile template, with the vertical reference plane labeled as the host face and the host body indicated to the left of the host face reference plane. The reference plane intersection is the origin of the host sweep profile.

Draw the host sweep profile
2 On the Design Bar, click Lines. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines, their exact location is not critical. However, the left edge of the host sweep profile must coincide with the host face reference plane, and the host sweep profile must be drawn outside of the host body (to the right of the host face reference plane). 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection, draw the reveal profile with line and arc segments as shown.

4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile - Host Sweep.rfa. The new host sweep profile is now complete.

Applying a Sweep Profile to a 2D Path
In this exercise, you apply the sweep profile that you just created to a 2D path.

Create a new project
1 On the File menu, click New ➤ Project. 2 In the New Project dialog box, click Browse, and in the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files. Navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. Select the DefaultMetric.rte file, and click Open. In the New Project Dialog box, click OK.

Creating Profile Families | 627

Specify the family category
3 On the Modelling menu, click Create. 4 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog box, select Generic Models for Family Category, and click OK. 5 In the Name dialog box, enter Sweep for Name, and click OK.

Sketch the 2D sweep path
6 On the Family tab of the Design Bar, click Solid Form  ➤  Solid Sweep. 7 On the Design Bar, click Sketch 2D Path. NOTE When you sketch the 2D path, the exact location of the path is not critical. 8 On the Design Bar, click Lines and sketch the 2D path approximately as shown.

9 On the Design Bar, click Finish Path.

Apply the sweep profile to the 2D path
10 On the Options Bar, click Load Profiles. 11 In the Open dialog box, navigate to the location of Profile - Sweep.rfa, select it, and click Open. 12 In the Type Selector, beside Load Profiles, select Profile - Sweep. 13 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sweep. 14 On the Design Bar, click Finish Family. 15 On the View toolbar, click .

Modify the sweep profile configuration
16 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Elevations, and double-click South.

628 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

17 Zoom in on the right end of the sweep.

18 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Ref Plane. 19 Draw a vertical reference plane coincident with the left edge of the profile as shown.

20 Select the sweep profile and, on the Options Bar, click Edit. 21 Select the sweep profile again and, on the Options Bar, click 22 In the Element Properties dialog box, do the following:
■ ■ ■

.

Under Constraints, enter 600 for Vertical Profile Offset. Enter 25 degrees for Angle. Under Other, select Profile Is Flipped.

23 Click OK. 24 On the Design Bar, click Finish Family.

25 On the View toolbar, click

.

The sweep profile application is now complete.

Applying a Host Sweep Profile to Walls
In this exercise, you apply the host sweep profile that you created to a group of walls.

Create a new project
1 On the File menu, click New ➤ Project.

Creating Profile Families | 629

2 In the New Project dialog box, click Browse, and in the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files. Navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. Select the DefaultMetric.rte file, and click Open. In the New Project Dialog box, click OK.

Draw a wall group
3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. NOTE When you draw the walls, their exact location is not critical. 4 Draw four walls as shown.

5 On the View toolbar, click

.

6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Host Sweep ➤ Wall Sweep. 7 On the Options Bar, verify that Horizontal is selected. 8 Select a point on the left wall for the wall sweep.

9 Select a point on the right wall for the next wall sweep.

630 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

10 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Replace the default wall sweep with the new host wall sweep
11 On the File menu, click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 12 In the Open dialog box, navigate to the location of Profile - Host Sweep.rfa, select it, and click Open. 13 Select the wall sweep and, on the Options Bar, click 14 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 15 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, select Profile - Host Sweep : Profile - Host Sweep for Profile, and click OK. 16 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK. 17 On the View toolbar, click . .

18 In the Dynamic View dialog box, click Spin [Shift]. 19 Move the cursor to rotate your viewpoint to view the host sweep from underneath.

The default wall sweep is replaced with your host sweep profile. This completes the Creating Profile Families lesson.

Creating a Room Tag
In this lesson, you create a room tag which displays room name, floor and ceiling finish, and area with labels added to extract project data.

Specifying Room Tag Parameters
In this exercise, you specify the room tag parameters.

Dataset
■ ■

On the File menu, click New ➤ Annotation Symbol. In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files, and navigate to the Metric ➤ Metric Families and Templates ➤ Templates folder. Select M_Room Tag.rft, and click Open.

Creating a Room Tag | 631

Create a new tag based on the default room tag template
1 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit.

The reference planes that display are part of the default room tag template.

Edit the 3mm label
2 On the Family tab of the Design Bar, click Label. 3 On the Options Bar, click .

4 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 5 In the Type Properties dialog box, select Underline, and click OK.

Add a 2mm label
6 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 7 In the Type properties dialog box, click Duplicate. 8 In the Name dialog box, enter 2mm for Name, and click OK. 9 In the Type Properties dialog box, enter 2 for the Text Size parameter, clear Underline, and click OK. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK.

Combine labels into a room tag
11 On the Design Bar, click Label. 12 In the Type Selector, verify that Label : 3mm is displayed. 13 On the Options Bar, verify that Center and Middle are selected for Text Alignment. 14 Specify the location for the first label as shown.

15 In the Select Parameter dialog box, select Name, and click OK. 16 Zoom in on the label.

The name label is displayed with the text underlined. 17 In the Type Selector, select Label : 2mm. 18 Specify a point below the Name label for the next label location. 19 In the Select Parameter dialog box, select Floor Finish, and click OK.

632 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

In the left pane of the New dialog box. Creating an Annotation Symbol In this lesson. notice that there is only one view available. and click OK. 22 Specify a point below the Ceiling Finish label for the last label location. and navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. and click OK. Create a new annotation symbol based on the default generic annotation template 1 In the Project Browser. The new room tag is now ready for use. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. you create a custom north arrow annotation symbol with a circle and lines. and click Open. select Area. Creating an Annotation Symbol | 633 . 24 Save the new room tag with the name Finish Area Tag.rft. The Area label has a predefined value of 150 SF. Select Generic Annotation. you create a custom north arrow annotation symbol and place it in a new project. 21 In the Select Parameter dialog box. 23 In the Select Parameter dialog box.20 Specify a point below the Floor Finish label for the next label location. This completes the Creating a Room Tag lesson. The reference planes that display are part of the default generic annotation template. Notes included with the template specify annotation parameters. select Ceiling Finish. select Training Files. click New ➤ Annotation Symbol.rfa. Creating a Custom North Arrow Annotation Symbol In this exercise.

click . 3 On the Options Bar. click Lines. 8 Draw a vertical line from the top to the center point of the circle. 5 Drag the cursor and specify a radius of 8mm. 4 Specify the reference plane intersection for the circle center point. click . 6 On the Options Bar. 634 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 7 Draw a horizontal line from the left side to the right side of the circle through the center point.Sketch a north arrow symbol 2 On the Design Bar.

click New. Apply the new line weight to the upper vertical line 15 On the Design Bar. and select the upper vertical line. click Modify. 14 In the Object Styles dialog box. 17 On the Design Bar. click Modify. in the North Line row. 13 In the New Subcategory dialog box. Creating an Annotation Symbol | 635 . 10 On the Design Bar. 12 In the Object Styles dialog box. verify that Generic Annotations is selected for Subcategory of. enter North Line for Name. under Modify Subcategories. and click OK. and click OK. select North Line. select 3 for Line Weight. click Modify. The new north arrow annotation symbol is ready to edit.9 Draw a vertical line from the center point to the bottom of the circle. click Object Styles. Add an annotation objects subcategory 11 On the Settings menu. 16 In the Type Selector.

rfa. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. Creating a Titleblock Family In this lesson. Navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. select A1 metric. 4 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box.18 Select the template notes and press DELETE. and click Open. navigate to the location of Training North Arrow.rte file. The north arrow annotation symbol is now complete. Load the new north arrow into a new project 1 On the File menu. 8 In the Open dialog box. select Training Files. 12 On the Design Bar. 19 Save the new north arrow with the name. In the New Project Dialog box. select Training North Arrow. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. This completes the Creating an Annotation Symbol lesson. select it. 636 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 10 In the Type Selector. click Sheet. click New ➤ Project. 9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Select the DefaultMetric. Adding the New North Arrow to a Project In this exercise. 7 On the File menu. click OK. and in the left pane of the New dialog box. you add the new north arrow annotation symbol that you created to a project. click Modify. click Symbol. 5 Click OK.rfa. and click Open. you create a custom titleblock sheet based on the A0 metric titleblock template. 11 Specify a point in the lower right corner of the sheet to place the symbol. 6 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet. click Browse. Training North Arrow. 2 In the New Project dialog box.

click New ➤ Titleblock. 3 On the Options Bar. 4 Specify the upper left corner of the sheet for the first rectangle corner. and click Open. and then specify the lower right corner of the sheet for the second corner of the rectangle. click . You customize the titleblock with a new text style. Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet In this exercise. and enter -25 for Offset. and your project data. text.rft. click Lines. Sketch the inside border 2 On the Design Bar. Create a new family based on the default titleblock template 1 The default titleblock template consists of 4 border lines. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. Creating a Titleblock Family | 637 . In the left pane of the New dialog box. select Training Files and navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. Select A0 metric. and labels. graphics.The titleblock has linework. you draw all of the linework necessary to create a custom A0-size sheet.

10 Draw a horizontal line 120mm below the last horizontal line as shown. and enter 140 for Offset. 9 Draw a horizontal line 140mm below the upper inside border as shown. 6 Move the cursor over the right inside border line. click 8 Enter 0 for Offset. 7 On the Options Bar. and click to draw a new vertical line. 638 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . .Add vertical and horizontal lines 5 On the Options Bar. 11 Draw a horizontal line 120mm above the lower inside border as shown. and click . click .

and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the existing line. click . and enter 20 for Offset. and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the existing line. and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the existing line. 13 In the Type Selector. press CTRL. click Lines.12 On the Design Bar. 21 On the Options Bar. 14 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet. select Title Blocks. select Wide Lines. 15 On the Design Bar. click Modify. and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the existing line. 24 Move the cursor over the eighth horizontal line. 20 Move the cursor over the fifth horizontal line. and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the existing line. 23 Move the cursor over the seventh horizontal line. 22 Move the cursor over the third horizontal line. and select the second and third horizontal lines. and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the existing line. 18 Move the cursor over the third horizontal line. Creating a Titleblock Family | 639 . 17 On the Options Bar. 16 In the Type Selector. enter 30 for Offset. 19 Move the cursor over the fourth horizontal line.

jpg. 2 In the Open dialog box. text notes. 640 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and click Open.25 On the Design Bar. and labels to your titleblock. navigate to Training Files/Common. The titleblock linework is now complete. you add a company logo. select Company Logo. click Import/Link ➤ Image. click Modify. Add a company logo 1 On the File menu. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock In this exercise. 26 Zoom out to view the entire sheet. 3 Place the image in the upper right corner of the sheet as shown.

enter 10mm Bold for Name. and select Bold. and click OK. click . 8 In the Type Properties dialog box. Creating a Titleblock Family | 641 . 13 Enter Arch Design Inc. 10 In the Type Properties dialog box. 11 Click OK twice.4 Zoom in on the logo. Add company name text 12 Draw a text box under the first horizontal line as shown. under Text. 6 On the Options Bar. 9 In the Name dialog box. click Duplicate. 7 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Edit/New. 14 Click outside of the text box to complete the text. Create a new 10mm text style 5 On the Design Bar. enter 10 for Text Size. click Text. in the text box.

and select the last text note. 21 Draw a text box below the second horizontal line. Add consultant name. Press ENTER to add each new line of text and click outside of the text box to complete the text.Add company address and phone number text 15 In the Type Selector. click Text. select Text : 8mm. and phone number text 20 On the Design Bar. 19 Click outside the text box to complete the modification. address. 17 On the Design Bar. and add an address and phone number as shown. and drag the text note down as shown. 18 Select the drag handle. 16 Draw a text box below the initial text. click Modify. and enter the following text: ■ ■ ■ ■ Consultant: Address: Address: Telephone: 642 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

Creating a Titleblock Family | 643 . select Constrain and Multiple. click . 23 On the Edit toolbar. 25 Click inside the Consultant text group.22 On the Design Bar. and select the consultant text note. 26 Move the cursor down 120mm and click to specify the first copied text note position. 24 On the Options Bar. click Modify.

644 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .27 Move the cursor down another 120mm and click to specify the second copied text note location.

41 On the Options Bar. select Text : 5mm. 34 Click OK twice. and click to specify the label location. Add drawing data labels 40 On the Design Bar. 30 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK. and enter Date:. 42 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Date field. click Edit/New. 29 On the Options Bar. 38 Draw a text box in the next space up. 33 In the Type Properties dialog box. select Project Issue Date. click . and enter Checked By:. Creating a Titleblock Family | 645 . and enter Drawn By:. click Label. enter 5 for Text Size.Create a new 5mm text style 28 On the Design Bar. 37 Draw a text box in the next space up. under Text. click Duplicate. 39 Draw a text box in the next space up. and click OK. 31 In the Type Properties dialog box. 32 In the Name dialog box. The label displays a default value wrapped to 3 lines. select Right and Bottom for Text Alignment. Add drawing data text 35 In the Type Selector. 36 Draw a text box in the lower right space of the titleblock. click Text. 43 In the Select Parameter dialog box. and enter Sheet Number:. enter 5mm for Name.

NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. and click OK. and click to specify the label location. select Drawn By. 48 In the Select Parameter dialog box. select Checked By and click OK. NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. 45 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Drawn By field. 646 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .44 Select the left drag handle on the label. and click to specify the label location. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. 47 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Checked By field. 46 In the Select Parameter dialog box.

click Center and Middle. click Duplicate. and click OK. 58 In the Select Parameter dialog box. Create a new 15mm label style 49 On the Design Bar. 60 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Date field. 55 Click OK twice. and click to specify the label location. and click OK. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. 50 On the Options Bar. enter 15mm Label for Name. click Label. 54 In the Type Properties dialog box. Add sheet number and project data labels 56 In the Type Selector. select Project Number. 61 In the Select Parameter dialog box. 53 In the Name dialog box. click Edit/New. and click OK. Creating a Titleblock Family | 647 . enter 15 for Text Size. and click to specify the label location. 59 On the Options Bar. 51 In the Element Properties dialog box.NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. 52 In the Type Properties dialog box. 62 Select the left drag handle on the label. select Sheet Number. under Text. select Label : 15mm Label. 57 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Sheet Number field. click .

and click OK. 648 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 75 Click OK twice. 70 On the Options Bar. enter 4 for Text Size. click Edit/New. and click OK. select Project Name. click Label. 68 Select the left drag handle on the label. click . Create a 4mm label style 69 On the Design Bar. 74 In the Type Properties dialog box. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. 71 In the Element Properties dialog box.63 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Number field. 65 Select the left drag handle on the label. 72 In the Type Properties dialog box. under Text. enter 4mm Label. select Client Name. 66 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Name field. 67 In the Select Parameter dialog box. 73 In the Name dialog box. and click to specify the label location. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. and click to specify the label location. and click OK. 64 In the Select Parameter dialog box. click Duplicate.

you add the titleblock that you created to a new project. In the New Project Dialog box. click Modify. navigate to the location of Training A0Horizontal Titleblock. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. click New ➤ Project. and then adjust the width of the File Path field so that it is approximately equal to the width of the Sheet Number field. Creating a Titleblock Family | 649 . 6 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. and click to specify the label location. and click Open. select Training A0Horizontal Titleblock. Adding the Titleblock to a New Project In this exercise. click Left and Middle. select 4mm Label. 77 On the Options Bar. Load the new titleblock family into a new project 1 On the File menu. select Training Files. click Sheet.rfa. select it. The titleblock graphics. click Load. 78 Place the cursor in the border area below the left side of the Sheet Number field. click Browse. text. click OK. select File Path. and labels are now complete. Select the DefaultMetric. 79 In the Select Parameter dialog box. 7 Click OK. 80 On the Design Bar. Navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder.rfa file.rte file. and in the left pane of the New dialog box. 81 Save the new titleblock family with the name Training A0Horizontal Titleblock. and click Open. 2 In the New Project dialog box. 4 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box.Add Project Path label 76 In the Type Selector. 5 In the Open dialog box.

enter Name for Drawn By. 2005 for Project Issue Date. under Other. click Modify and select the titleblock. Creating In-Place Families In this lesson. Enter Office Building for Project Name. click . 650 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Enter 2005-01 for Project Number. 9 On the Options Bar. and add a dome roof and a concave floor with revolved forms as in-place families. 14 Click OK. you start with an incomplete building information model of the Pantheon. 12 On the Settings menu. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter January 1. 13 In the Type Properties dialog box. In-place families interact with the building model according to their assigned family category.Modify titleblock properties 8 On the Design Bar. Enter Jane Smith for Client Name. This completes the Creating a Titleblock Family lesson. and click OK. You create an in-place family in your current project rather than in the Family Editor. 11 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet. click Project Information. Enter In Progress for Project Status. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box.

Open the existing Pantheon building model 1 On the View menu.rvt. Next. and double-click South. and click Open. Select c_Pantheon. 2 In the Project Browser. click Orient ➤ Southeast. you add a dome roof with oculus (circular opening) to the Pantheon building model. Creating In-Place Families | 651 . Set the Length units to millimeters. Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family In this exercise. Sketch the roof cross-section with a closed profile in an elevation view. and set the suffix to None. format the Area to use 2 decimal places. click Open. expand Views (all). select Training Files and navigate to the Common folder.NOTE This project was created using an imperial template and components. To change the units of measurement to meters. click Project Units. on the Settings menu. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. set the Area to Square meters. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. expand Elevations. you create the dome roof with a revolved form.

10 In the Go To View dialog box. enter Dome for Name. 652 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . select Section: Wall Section . 5 In the Name dialog box. click Axis. click . click Solid Form  ➤  Solid Revolve. and click OK. select Roofs for Family Category. and click OK. Specify the dome roof revolved form parameters 6 On the Design Bar. select Pick a Plane. 12 On the Options Bar. click Set Work Plane. and click OK. 7 On the Design Bar. and click Open View. click Create. 8 In the Work Plane dialog box.Specify the Roofs family category 3 On the Modelling menu. 4 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog box.Center. The center wall section view is displayed. 13 Specify the bottom endpoint of the Center East/West reference plane for the start point of the axis. and then specify the top endpoint of the reference plane for the endpoint of the axis. 9 Select the Center East/West reference plane as shown. Draw the axis of rotation for the dome roof revolved form 11 On the Design Bar.

Creating In-Place Families | 653 . click . 17 Move the cursor out. click Lines. until it creates an intersection with the level 1 reference plane.Draw the lower face of the dome roof 14 On the Design Bar. 16 Specify the intersection of the Upper Cornice horizontal reference plane and vertical axis as the circle center point. 15 On the Options Bar.

and draw the five rim profile line segments in the shape of a reverse C as shown. 20 Specify the reference plane intersection for the start point of the rim profile as shown. 21 Snap to reference plane intersections. and select Chain. click . 654 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Draw the oculus rim profile 18 Zoom in on the top of the circle. The reference planes that display are guides for drawing the oculus rim profile.The circle is tangent to the interior wall face and the level 1 reference plane at the floor line. 19 On the Options Bar.

24 Select a point on the circle to the right of the rim profile. click . The circle is trimmed between the rim profile and the first split point. 25 Select the intersection of the circle and the lower left vertical line of the profile as shown. click Lines. 23 On the Options Bar. 28 Specify the endpoint of the upper left rim profile line segment as the arc start point. 27 On the Options Bar. select Delete Inner Segment.Split the circle 22 On the Tools toolbar. Creating In-Place Families | 655 . click . Draw the upper face of the dome roof 26 On the Design Bar.

656 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .29 Specify the top of the stairs in the wall section as the arc endpoint. 32 On the Options Bar. click and select Chain. click Lines. and then draw a vertical line down the interior wall face to the lower dome roof face tangent point. 33 Draw a horizontal line from the arc endpoint to the interior edge of the wall. Draw two lines to close the dome roof profile 31 On the Design Bar. 30 Specify a point on the arc approximately as shown.

38 In the Materials dialog box. 42 On the View toolbar. 35 Select the interior face of the wall.Cast-in-Place Lightweight Concrete for Name.Trim the arc below the tangent point 34 On the Tools toolbar. under Materials and Finishes. click OK. click Finish Sketch. Specify lightweight concrete for the dome roof material 36 On the Design Bar. and click OK. select Concrete . 41 On the Design Bar. click . 40 On the Design Bar. click for Material. click Revolution Properties. 39 In the Element Properties dialog box. and then select a point on the arc above the tangent point as the segment to keep. 37 In the Element Properties dialog box. The dome roof in-place family is now complete. The dome roof closed profile is now complete. click Finish Family. click . Creating In-Place Families | 657 .

click Create. you create the concave floor slab for the Pantheon building model. click Axis. click . and click Open View.Center. enter Concave Floor for Name. 9 In the Go To View dialog box. 658 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 6 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 3 In the Name dialog box. select Floors for Family Category. click Set Work Plane. and click OK. 7 In the Work Plane dialog box. and click OK. Specify the concave floor revolved form parameters 1 On the Modelling menu. double-click South. select Pick a Plane.Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family In this exercise. 11 On the Options Bar. click Solid Form  ➤  Solid Revolve. 2 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog box. 4 In the Project Browser under Elevations. select Section: Wall Section . Draw the axis of rotation for the floor revolved form 10 On the Design Bar. 5 On the Design Bar. 8 Select the Center East/West reference plane as shown.

click . 16 Drag the cursor up 800 mm. and specify the next point for the floor profile as shown. Draw the concave floor profile 13 On the Design Bar.O. for the start point of the floor profile as shown. 15 Specify the intersection of the T. 14 On the Options Bar. Footing level line and the axis. NOTE You may need to zoom in closer to the intersection to select the first point. Creating In-Place Families | 659 .12 Specify the bottom endpoint of the Center East/West reference plane for the start point of the axis. and then specify the top endpoint of the reference plane for the endpoint of the axis. click Lines. and select Chain. 17 Specify the intersection of the level 1 reference plane and the interior wall edge for the next point of the floor profile as shown.

25 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 21 In the Element Properties dialog box. Footing level line and the interior wall edge for the next point of the floor profile. Footing level line and the axis for the last point of the floor profile. double-click 3D Section View.O. click OK.18 Specify the intersection of the T. 26 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. 24 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch.O. 660 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 19 Specify the intersection of the of the T. click Revolution Properties. click for Material. The concave floor closed profile is now complete. Specify cobblestone for the concave floor material 20 On the Design Bar. 22 In the Materials dialog box. select Cobblestone for Name. This completes the Creating In-Place Families lesson. click Finish Family. 23 In the Element Properties dialog box.

Parametric Component Design Techniques 20 In this tutorial. In this case. you will understand the process. In the center of the truss is a mechanical service clearance to accommodate HVAC systems. The parametric component that you design in this tutorial is an open-joist wood floor truss. not specifically how to make a floor truss. In exercises that become increasingly complex. formula-based parameters. 661 . At the end of this tutorial. During this tutorial. This type of component uses a broad spectrum of design techniques within the Family Editor. you create a new parametric component within the Family Editor. you learn specific techniques and best practices that you can apply broadly when creating other families in Autodesk Revit Building. and the specific techniques for creating a parametric component. the length of the trimmable truss determines the size and grade of the truss chords. you learn the process and methodology of creating a new family. The truss also has multiple types. assigned subcatecories. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you the proper approach to parametric component creation. methodology. and detail level controls.

you determine the requirements of the new component. Knowing why you are creating a particular family and what you need it to do will drive the specific design process. beams. a generic floor-based component might work. Determining Component Needs In this exercise. For every complexity added to a family. 2 What additional design requirements affect the design plan for this beam family? ■ ■ ■ The truss should automatically adjust depth as the length changes. For training purposes. Using the new family within a project 3 How will you use the family within a project? 662 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . it is not the best solution. then you should design only what is needed to satisfy the requirements. a 2x3 truss and a 2x4 truss. and structural walls. The design requirements dictate how simple or complex a family must be. you accomplish two main tasks: you determine the component needs and select the family template that is suited to those needs. Decide component type and design requirements 1 What type of component are you designing? In this case. In this case. imagine that your firm specializes in light commercial and residential design. you select the best available template with which to begin the new structural beam family. Take this into consideration during your design planning. Two types should be created. the beam design must be advanced in order to have the flexibility that the specs require. there is a computing performance cost that must be paid within the project. It should also be an available option within a beam system. you should avoid over-designing the component. it is an open-joist wood floor truss. the design spec requires that the floor truss snaps to columns. planning ahead is one of the most important steps. this must be a structural beam component. In addition. Your assignment is to create a truss that adapts parametrically to changes in the building design. This decision dictates which family template you begin with. Because this component has to interact closely with other structural components. the component should use the point-to-point insertion method with the joist web members adjusting parametrically. A rectangular mechanical clearance opening must be centered within the beam. If the component did not have to interact so closely with other structural components. and also works intuitively with them. If the design requirements can be met with a simple design. Although this solution is possible.Planning a Parametric Component Family Creating a new parametric component family is no different than any other design process. In this lesson. In the next exercise. In this case. NOTE When creating a new family.

This critical decision reduces the quantity of template options. Depending on the family you are designing. the planning stage and questions may differ. In the previous exercise.■ What materials need the most control? These materials. such as wood type. Planning a Parametric Component Family | 663 . What types are most commonly used? In this training case. Selecting the Family Template In this exercise. you determined that the component type is a structural beam. In addition. 4 Continue with the next exercise. especially if you are going to be nesting subcomponents that may require separate scheduling. the means in which to gather the information you require within the schedule needs to be built into the component. ■ ■ ■ You have completed the planning stage for the new family. you determine which family template provides the best starting point for the new beam family. would require Instance or Type parameters. What materials remain constant throughout a project? The chord and web material will always be wood. only the 2x3 and 2x4 trusses with wood web members are required. Selecting the Family Template. These materiails can be applied using Object Styles. How will the component need to be scheduled? This is an important question.

For training purposes. There are two structural framing templates provided. it is not the best starting point for the beam family.Beams and Braces. and notice the preview. If you are not in this folder. These planes are designed specifically to accommodate point-to-point beam insertion and the special snapping and display requirements of beam components. 6 Select Metric Structural Framing . and display functions required by structural beams. ■ Metric Structural Framing . The New dialog box opens to the templates folder that is specified in your Settings ➤ Options dialog box. Because of its simplicity.rft. do not open this template. this template resides within the training folders and should be opened from there. NOTE Although this is the template you use to start the tutorial. notice the preview. it is not designed to create a component capable of point-to-point insertion. This template is the best starting point for the new family. Like most generic family templates. You should be in the Metric Templates folder.rft This template is designed for complex framing components and trusses. Select it so that the preview displays. spacing. Notice that most of the template names include the component type.rft. 7 Select Metric Structural Framing . for example: wall based or floor based. 5 In the New dialog box. select Metric Generic Model floor based. Notice this template offers three horizontal planes on each side of the center (left/right) reference plane. navigate to it. It provides two intersecting reference planes: Center (left/right) and Center (front/back).rft and notice the preview.Complex and Trusses. 664 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . the template name often includes information how the component would be used with a project.rft This template is design specifically to accommodate point-to-point insertion and the specific snapping.Complex and Trusses. scroll to the structural framing templates.Review the template options 1 Close any open projects or families. 3 In the New dialog box. In addition. 2 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 4 In the New dialog box. ■ Metric Structural Framing . NOTE Do not double-click the template or open it. On the right side of the New dialog box.Beams and Braces. Although the template name suggests this is the appropriate template. it provides two intersecting reference planes: Center (left/right) and Center (front/back). scroll through the various template options.

it is not necessary to create a skeleton of reference planes or lines and then align and lock the solid geometry to it. you snap and lock the solid geometry to these reference planes and lines. Notice that the beam extrusion is centered on the level line. Level. you can see the rectangular beam extrusion and a symbolic line. 11 In the Project Browser. As you add solid geometry later in the tutorial. Floor Plan: Ref. however. using reference planes and lines is considered more reliable and is therefore a best practice. double-click Front. under 3D Views. and dimensions that provide a skeleton for the solid geometry. Creating the Component Skeleton | 665 . the top of the beam extrusion is aligned to the associated level of the plan view.rft located in the Metric  ➤ Metric Families and Templates ➤ Templates ➤  folder. double-click View 1. Creating the Component Skeleton.Open the family template 8 In the left pane of the New dialog box. under Elevations. you add the reference planes. 13 Proceed to the next lesson. Creating the Component Skeleton In this lesson. click the Training Files icon. 9 Open Metric Structural Framing . lines. creating a skeleton to build upon is the foundation of a new component family. Dimensioning the solid geometry directly also works. Floor Plan: Ref. Like many templates. Level In this view. the geometry supplied can be used or discarded as needed. This beam extrusion is supplied within the template as a starting point. Therefore. When a beam family based on this template is added to a project. 10 Maximize the view. 12 In the Project Browser. NOTE When creating or modifying a family.Beams and Braces.

These reference planes act as part of the skeleton to which the solid geometry will align and lock. In the project plan view image below. double-click Ref. NOTE The reference planes shown in the project image below were added as a training reference. notice the location of the beam extents. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you started in the previous exercise. they do not display when the family is loaded into a project. The two arrows point to the snap points that the left and right reference planes refer to. ■ Member Left and Member Right: These two planes refer to the left and right extent of the beam solid geometry when displayed in a medium or fine display view of a project. ■ Left and Right: These two planes mark the points where the beam intersects with other columns. Reference Plane: Left. In the image below.Adding Reference Planes In this exercise. under Floor Plans. 2 Place the cursor over the leftmost vertical reference plane until the tooltip displays the name of the plane. 666 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . The reference planes and their respective explanations are listed below. you add reference planes to the beam design. Review existing reference planes 1 In the Project Browser. The reference planes in this template are designed to accommodate the point-to-point insertion of a beam component. 3 Repeat this step for the other two vertical planes on the left side. Reference planes that display within a family file do not display within a project. TIP The name also displays on the Status Bar. The six reference planes shown in the project below were added as a training reference. two steel columns and a steel beam have been added to a project. Level.

Creating the Component Skeleton | 667 . click . Add new reference planes 6 On the Design Bar. In a later exercise. Each family template has a different set of reference planes established within it. 7 Add a reference plane approximately 50 mm above the horizontal reference plane: Center (Front/Back). NOTE Be careful not to select the symbolic line. it is important to be familiar with the template so you do not create duplicate or conflicting planes.■ Stick Symbol Left and Stick Symbol Right: These two planes refer to the extents of the stick symbol when it is loaded into a project and the plan view display setting is coarse. Delete existing solid geometry 4 Select the rectangular beam extrusion. 5 On the Edit Toolbar. click Ref Plane. you add the solid geometry for the truss as a sweep. Before adding new reference planes.

10 On the Design Bar. Level. To do this. click Ref Plane.8 Add a reference plane approximately 50 mm below the horizontal reference plane: Center (Front/Back). 12 Add a reference plane approximately 150 mm above the Level: Ref. Level as the mirror axis. Add ref. double-click Front. 11 Add a reference plane approximately 150 mm below the Level: Ref. Level. and select the Level: Ref. planes to control beam depth 9 In the Project Browser. click on the Edit toolbar. TIP You can also use the mirror tool to accomplish this task. select the lower horizontal reference plane. 668 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . under Elevations. You will use these two reference planes to control the beam width and keep it centered on the reference plane: Center (Front/Back).

17 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Member Left. This beam requires additional reference planes to complete the truss skeleton. 16 Place the cursor over the lower horizontal reference plane and when a copy of the reference plane displays above it. 15 Place the cursor over the top horizontal reference plane. TIP You can control the direction of the offset by moving the cursor slightly to either side of the line you intend to pick. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the right of it. click to place it. 14 On the Options Bar. 18 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Member Right. click . click Ref Plane. Creating the Component Skeleton | 669 . click to place it as shown.These two reference planes mark the top and bottom extents of the beam. click to place it as shown. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the left of it. 13 On the Design Bar. When a copy of the reference plane displays below it. The next four reference planes that you add mark the thickness of the truss chords. click to place it as shown. and specify an Offset of 38 mm.

Before you move on to the next exercise. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the left of it. Level. 19 On the Options Bar. 21 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right). Notice the reference planes that you added in the elevation view. specify an Offset of 238 mm. which you do in the next exercise. 670 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 23 Use the Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right) to add reference planes to the left and right of it as shown below. 22 On the Options Bar. 20 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right).You have completed the reference planes that make up the skeleton of the chords. double-click Ref. click to place it as shown. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the right of it. click to place it as shown. specify an Offset of 200 mm. under Floor Plans. Although there is nothing technically incorrect regarding the reference planes in this view. 24 In the Project Browser. cleaning up some of the extents would make the view easier. you must add four additional reference planes to accommodate the center chase.

It allows you to dimension between parallel lines. click Modify.rfa. Creating the Component Skeleton | 671 . you add some of the dimensions and constraints that control how the open web floor truss adapts to changes in its geometry. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. 3 Select each of the horizontal reference planes and place the dimension to the left as shown. Adding Dimensions and Constraints.25 On the Design Bar. By applying dimensions and constraints directly to the skeleton of the family. navigate to the folder of your choice. enter Wood Floor Truss for File name. NOTE You use this family for the remainder of this tutorial. separate the overriding values by dragging the value controls as shown. Wood Floor Truss. 27 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Dimension. Make sure you remember where you saved it. 28 In the Save As dialog box. Dimension chord width 1 On the Design Bar. click . and click Save. Adding Dimensions and Constraints In this exercise. After adding the dimension. TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings during this procedure. 2 On the Options Bar. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset. you can make sure the new family adapts to changes in geometry as expected before adding solid geometry to it. This tool is the aligned dimension tool.

and click the EQ symbol when it displays. click Modify. 7 Add a dimension referring to the upper horizontal reference plane and the lower horizontal reference plane. Add the depth dimension and equality constraint 8 In the Project Browser. Place the dimension as shown. and click the EQ symbol to apply the equality constraint. 672 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . under Elevations. NOTE The center horizontal reference plane overlaps the level line: Ref. 9 On the Design Bar. 5 Select the dimension you added in the previous step. Level. This ensures that changes to the chord width are distributed equally across the center reference plane.4 On the Design Bar. double-click Front. the Center reference plane. and the lower horizontal reference plane. You may need to use the TAB key to toggle the selection to the reference plane. 6 On the Design Bar. 10 Select the upper horizontal reference plane. click Dimension. place the dimension to the left as shown. click Dimension.

and place it below the dimension you added previously. Creating the Component Skeleton | 673 .11 Add a dimension referring to the upper horizontal reference plane and the lower horizontal reference plane and move it to the left of the equality constrained dimension you added previously. These dimensions refer to the chord thickness. Dimension chord thickness 14 On the right side of the model. 13 Add a dimension referring to the reference planes to the left and right of the Center (Left/Right) reference plane. add two dimensions as shown. place the dimension under the lines as shown and click the EQ symbol to apply the equality constraint. Dimension and constrain the center chase width 12 Add a dimension referring to the three vertical reference planes in the center of the model.

consider making it an instance parameter. Level. consider making it a type parameter. you label the dimensions to create instance and type parameters. When you label a dimension in the Family Editor. You choose whether to make it an instance or type parameter. you label the dimensions that you added in the previous exercise. You should lean towards simplicity whenever possible. Throughout the tutorial. it is important to decide how much control over the component will be required after the component is loaded into a project. they allow you to “flex” the model in order to test your design. Wood Floor Truss. consider making the material parameter an instance parameter. In this exercise. In addition. Creating New Length Parameters In this exercise. and constraints as needed. These dimensions refer to the chord thickness of the vertical members and the members that border the center chase. Things to consider when deciding “instance” or “type:” ■ ■ If the component comes in standard sizes that must be maintained. In the next exercise. The parameters that you create when designing a family are the same parameters used within a project to control the instance and type parameters of that family. 674 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . If the component has material that varies per component. consider making it a type parameter. There are many types of parameters and various ways to create them. If the parameter controls something that usually remains constant by its nature. If the component is something that is cut or otherwise extremely flexible. Create the chord width parameter 1 In the Project Browser. You have finished adding the dimensions and constraints that control how the truss skeleton adapts to changes.15 Add four dimensions as shown. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. When you design a new family. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. dimensions. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. Creating New Length Parameters. These parameters are the key to providing flexibility within a project.rfa. you will add additional reference planes. under Floor Plans. it becomes a parameter. you create new length parameters that control the basic dimensions of the floor truss. ■ ■ Dataset Continue to use the dataset. double-click Ref.

Select Type. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. double-click Front. select Family parameter. enter Chord Width for Name. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. select Add parameter for Label.2 Select the dimension that refers to the width of the chord as shown. 3 On the Options Bar. Under Parameter Data. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. enter Depth for Name. Under Parameter Data. Click OK. 7 On the Options Bar. Select Type. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. Creating the Component Skeleton | 675 . 6 Select the dimension on the left that refers to the depth of the truss. under Elevations. select Family parameter. ■ Create truss depth parameter 5 In the Project Browser. select Add parameter for Label. Click OK. This indicates whether the parameter is a type or instance parameter.

Click OK. 10 On the Options Bar. Under Parameter Data. 14 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. Click OK. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. enter Chord Thickness for Name. select Family parameter. enter Center Chase Width for Name.Create center chase width parameter 9 Select the dimension that refers to the width of the center chase interior. select Family parameter. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. Create chord thickness parameter 12 On the right side of the model. 676 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. 13 On the Options Bar. select Add parameter for Label. Select Type. Under Parameter Data. Select Type. select Add parameter for Label. select the dimension that refers to the thickness of the lower horizontal truss chord as shown. 11 In the Parameter Properties dialog box.

select Chord Thickness for Label. Creating the Component Skeleton | 677 . Apply chord thickness label to other dimensions 15 On the right side of the model. select the dimension that refers to the thickness of the upper horizontal truss chord. 16 On the Options Bar. 17 Apply the Chord Thickness label to the vertical chords and the vertical members on the left and right side of the center chase as shown.TIP You may need to drag the text label downward as shown.

Adding or modifying a parameter. rather than by manually stretching or manipulating the objects within the family. Even though you have yet to add any model geometry to the family. Nesting a component. Flexing the model means to change parameter values. Wood Floor Truss. click Family Types. you need to be able to see the model within the drawing area and also apply new values within the Family Types dialog box: ■ Maximize the Revit window and adjust the zoom settings so the model is in one corner of the drawing area.rfa. In the Family Types dialog box. click Save. Flexing the Component Model One of the most important steps in the process of creating a new parametric component is the flexing of the model. thus forcing the model to adapt to the changes. you can add the model geometry to the skeleton and be relatively certain that it will also flex as expected.18 On the Design Bar. Adding or modifying a parameter formula. You should flex the model after any major change to the design. it is important to verify that the reference lines adjust to changes as constraints are maintained. you should always do it from the Family Types dialog box. this is the most accurate way of testing how the family will behave within a project. You should flex a new family after: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Adding or modifying an element. these parameters will be available within the Type Properties dialog box for the beam. When you open the Family Types dialog. Dataset Continue to use the dataset. In this exercise. you can drag it off the Revit window as shown. ■ 678 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Adding a new constraint. When you flex a family. 20 On the File menu. Preparing the family for flexing 1 When flexing the model. you can drag it to the opposing corner. notice the labelled dimensions display under the list of parameters and under the group. When you load this family into a project. Flexing the Component Model. or Reduce the Revit window and keep the model centered in the drawing area. you should also test it to make sure it works as expected. This is not limited to length parameters. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. When you change a parameter value and apply the change. When you open the Family Types dialog box. After you verify this. If you add a new material parameter. you flex the model to test the various length parameters that you added in the previous exercise. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. Dimensions. 19 Click Cancel.

In addition.Adjust your display using one of the two methods before opening the Family Types dialog box. 2 On the Design Bar. Creating the Component Skeleton | 679 . Verifying that the entire model adapts to changes and making sure nothing “breaks” is the essence of flexing. and click Apply. notice that the reference planes marking the chord thickness adapted to the change in depth while maintaining their specified value. 800 mm for Center Chase Width. 80 mm for Chord Thickness. and drag the dialog box so that you can view the model. 4 Enter 450 mm for Depth. enter 600 mm for Depth. Level. Notice the depth of the truss adapts to the change in dimension value. Also notice the equality constraint spreads the additional depth evenly above and below the Ref. click Family Types. under Dimensions. and click Apply. Flex the truss depth 3 In the Family Types dialog box. Notice that the model adapts to all of the changes.

Click Apply. 7 Proceed to the next lesson. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. you constrain them using a combination of locked alignments and labelled dimensions. Enter 38 mm for Chord Thickness. After adding the chords. Add chord extrusions 1 In the Project Browser. you align and lock their position. Wood Floor Truss. Dataset Continue to use the dataset. 6 On the File menu. Creating Solid Extrusions In this exercise. you add the solid geometry using extrusions for the chords and trimmable plywood ends. you load the truss into a project to verify that it works as designed.rfa. under Elevations. 2 Zoom in around the center of the truss design. When working within the Family Editor. Click OK. click Save. 680 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Adding Solid Geometry. you should always flex the design after you add new elements or modify the existing design in any way. Enter 400 mm for Center Chase Width. Adding Solid Geometry In this lesson. After creating the extrusions. you create the top and bottom chords of the truss. double-click Left.Reset parameters 5 In the Family Types dialog box. reset the parameters back to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 300 mm for Depth. After flexing the design.

8 On the Tools toolbar. the lines will no longer overlap. click Lines. 10 On the Design Bar. and click OK. NOTE A warning dialog displays notifying you that there are overlapping lines. click the part of the line you want to keep.3 On the Design Bar. 5 On the Design Bar. and select Lock. 6 On the Options Bar. click Name. 4 In the Work Plane dialog box. You can ignore this warning because after you finish trimming. click . click . When using the Trim tool. select Reference Plane: Member Left. click Lines. Notice that the sketch lines are automatically locked to the reference planes. 12 Select the four reference planes that border the bottom chord as shown. 11 On the Options Bar. and verify that Lock is selected. 7 Select the four reference planes that border the top chord as shown. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 9 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the top chord sketch as shown. Adding Solid Geometry | 681 . click .

14 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the bottom chord sketch as shown.rfa. 15 On the Design Bar. Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry In this exercise. this is the keyboard shortcut for Shading with Edges. 17 On the File menu. under 3D Views. 2 Enter SD.13 On the Tools toolbar. Wood Floor Truss. click . Dataset Continue to use the dataset. This makes the chord extrusions more visible within the view. click Save. double-click Front. under Elevations. 682 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . The chords need to be aligned and locked to the correct reference planes in order for them to flex with changes in the geometry. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. 16 In the Project Browser. Constrain the extrusion ends 1 In the Project Browser. double-click View 1. you add constraints to the chord extrusions and then flex the family to verify that it works as designed. Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry. Notice the chord extrusions and the symbolic line. click Finish Sketch. 3 Select the chord extrusions. 18 Proceed to the next exercise.

Click the lock symbol to lock the dimension value. Adding Solid Geometry | 683 . enter 3000 for Length. click Family Types. not the member right or member left reference planes. This is because the length dimension references the extreme left and right reference planes. enter 6000 for Length. and click OK.4 Drag the right arrow control to the right until it snaps to the reference plane: Member Right. 10 Add a dimension between the reference plane: Left and the reference plane: Member Left as shown. Click the lock symbol to lock the extrusion edge to the reference plane. Flex the design 6 Prepare the view for flexing in the same way you did during the flexing exercise. 8 In the Family Types dialog box. as shown. 5 Drag the left arrow control to the right until it snaps to the reference plane: Member Left. click Dimension. as shown. Add a new dimension and constraint 9 On the Design Bar. Click the lock symbol to lock the extrusion edge to the reference plane. you must add a new constraint before flexing the length. click Apply. Therefore. 7 In the Family Types dialog box. You’ll want to set up your screen so you can see the model truss while the Family Types dialog box is open. and click Apply. Notice that the extrusions did not move or change their length. On the Design Bar.

and thickness 15 In the Project Browser.11 Add a dimension between the reference plane: Right and the reference plane: Member Right as shown. you add the web members. depth. you load this family into a project to test how it works within a project environment. 14 Click OK. Flex the chord width. Flex the length 12 On the Design Bar. Afterwards. This is a two-point placement beam family that uses the member left and member right reference planes as the determining extents of this component. adding this constraint to the model has no impact on how it works within a project. 13 In the Family Types dialog box. enter 6000 for Length. TIP If one of the extrusion ends did not adjust as expected. click Family Types. In this particular case. you need a truss long enough to add web arrays and do not need to return the truss back to its original length value. In a later exercise. flex the model once again to make sure the fix works as expected. under 3D Views. This tells you that the constraints on the extrusion ends are working. and click Apply. Click the lock symbol to lock the dimension value. double-click View 1. 684 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Therefore. use the Align tool and add the constraint. Notice that the extrusions adjusted to the change in length. Later in this lesson.

rfa. Adding Solid Geometry | 685 . ■ The chords should adjust to each of the new values. you add the extrusions for the truss ends and the center chase. that allows you to easily return to the original values. click Save. Dataset Continue to use the dataset. 18 In the Family Types dialog box. Wood Floor Truss. Enter 89mm for Chord Width. Enter 76mm for Chord Thickness. 17 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 19 Specify the beam values shown below: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 286mm for Depth. Creating Additional Solid Geometry. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. 20 On the File menu. click Family Types.16 Enter SD for Shading with Edges. such as doubling. Creating Additional Solid Geometry In this exercise. Therefore. Enter 38mm for Chord Thickness. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. TIP When flexing. Click Apply. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter 600mm for Depth. it is important to remember the original values so you can reset them afterwards. Click Apply. try picking a method. Enter 200mm for Chord Width.

10 On the Design Bar. 9 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the left. 13 On the Tools toolbar. and verify that Lock is selected. and click Hide Object. This will make it easier to sketch the center chase extrusions. click . Notice that the sketch lines are automatically locked to the reference planes. 2 Zoom in on the center of the truss and select the model line that represents the beam stick symbol. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. NOTE A warning dialog displays notifying you that there are overlapping lines. You can ignore this warning because after you finish trimming.Add the center chase extrusions 1 In the Project Browser. 12 Select the four reference planes that border the right. 686 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 4 On the Design Bar. vertical member of the center chase as shown. under Floor Plans. Level. click . 7 Select the four reference planes that border the left. 11 On the Options Bar. 14 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to complete the center chase sketch as shown. click . click Lines. click Lines. double-click Ref. click the Hide/Isolate control. 8 On the Tools toolbar. 6 On the Options Bar. the lines will no longer overlap. 3 On the View Control Bar. vertical member of the center chase sketch as shown. vertical member of the center chase as shown. click . 5 On the Design Bar. and verify that Lock is selected.

19 For the align-to reference. Align and lock the new extrusions 18 On the Tools menu. 16 In the Project Browser. and after the alignment. You may need to press TAB to toggle the selection options.15 On the Design Bar. 17 Zoom in on the center chase. select the reference line on the top of the lower chord as shown. Adding Solid Geometry | 687 . Although you can align and lock extrusion to extrusion. click the lock symbol to lock the alignment. click Align. click Finish Sketch. 21 Align the top edge of the chase extrusions with the reference line coincident with the lower edge of the upper chord. 20 Click the bottom edge of one of the chase extrusions. The ends of the chase extrusions must be aligned and locked to the horizontal reference planes coincident with the interior edges of the chords. it is considered a best practice to align and lock to reference planes. This next process is very important. and lock the alignment as shown. under Elevations. double-click Front.

Add the truss end extrusions 28 Select the Chord Thickness dimension in the lower-left corner as shown. 688 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Enter 400mm for Center Chase Width. Flex the center chase 23 On the Design Bar. reset the values as follows: ■ ■ ■ Enter 286mm for Depth. If it does not. click Modify. The truss should adapt to all the changes. Click Apply. 29 On the Options Bar. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter 486mm for Depth. select Add Parameter for Label. Clean up the view 26 Zoom to Fit.22 On the Design Bar. This will make subsequent work much easier. Enter 800mm for Center Chase Width. 25 In the Family Types dialog box. click Family Types. 24 In the Family Types dialog box. Click Apply. 27 Clean up the view by moving the dimensions off to the side as shown. and click OK. redo any problematic alignments and constraints.

Click OK. Adding Solid Geometry | 689 . click Family Types. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. 31 Select the Chord Thickness dimension in the lower-right corner of the view. double-click Right. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 38 In the Work Plane dialog box. 33 On the Design Bar. select the upper horizontal reference plane. select Trimmable End Length for Label. select the lower horizontal reference plane. under Elevations. enter 300mm for Trimmable End Length. enter19mm for Offset. click Apply. and click OK. select Reference Plane: Member Right for Name. click . 39 On the Design Bar. click Lines. and click OK. 43 Select the Center (Front/Back) reference plane twice to add a sketch line to each side as shown. Select Instance. Sketch the right end extrusion 35 In the Project Browser. These two lines represent the upper and lower boundary of the sketch. and verify that Lock is selected. on the lower chord. under Dimensions. 42 On the Options Bar. 40 On the Options Bar. 37 On the Design Bar. 36 Zoom around the truss elements. 34 In the Family Types dialog box. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter Trimmable End Length for Name. 41 On the upper chord. 32 On the Options Bar. under Parameter Data.30 In the Parameter Properties dialog box.

click Lines. 54 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 46 On the Design Bar. select the lower horizontal reference plane. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 45 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to complete the end sketch as shown. 50 Zoom around the truss elements. under Elevations. select Reference Plane: Member Left for Name. click Extrusion Properties. 48 On the Design Bar.44 On the Tools toolbar. double-click Left. Sketch the left end extrusion 49 In the Project Browser. 47 In the Element Properties dialog box. under Constraints. click . 690 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . on the lower chord. 55 On the upper chord. select the upper horizontal reference plane. 51 On the Design Bar. enter 19mm for Offset. click . and click OK. and verify that Lock is selected. 53 On the Design Bar. These two lines represent the upper and lower boundary of the sketch. 52 In the Work Plane dialog box. 57 Select the Center (Front/Back) reference plane twice to add a sketch line to each side as shown. 56 On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. verify that 300mm is specified for the Extrusion End value.

click . and click OK. 59 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to complete the end sketch as shown. specify -300mm for the Extrusion End value. double-click Front. click Align. NOTE This extrusion value must be negative in order to push the extrusion towards the center of the truss. click Extrusion Properties. click Finish Sketch. Add alignment constraints 63 In the Project Browser. 65 On the Tools menu. Although the truss ends line up with the reference planes controlling the length of the trimmable ends. Adding Solid Geometry | 691 . 62 On the Design Bar. 64 Zoom in on the left end of the truss. 60 On the Design Bar. under Constraints. 61 In the Element Properties dialog box. 66 Select the Member Left reference plane as the align-to point. they are not aligned and locked to those reference planes and would not pass a flex test.58 On the Tools toolbar. under Elevations.

specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter 486mm for Depth. TIP When you finish the alignments. 68 Select the reference plane coincident with the right edge of the left end extrusion. 74 In the Family Types dialog box. Click Apply. reset the values as follows: ■ ■ ■ Enter 286mm for Depth. and lock the alignment.67 Select the left edge of the left end extrusion. fix any problematic alignments and constraints. 69 Select the right edge of the left end extrusion. click Family Types. if you select the end extrusion. The truss should adapt to all the changes. double-click View 1. and lock the alignment. Make adjustments to account for the right side. Enter 300mm for Trimmable End Length. this is the align-to point. Click Apply. 692 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 71 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 70 Repeat the previous five steps for the right end of the truss. If it does not. Enter 600mm for Trimmable End Length. 73 In the Family Types dialog box. under 3D Views. 75 In the Project Browser. Flex the design 72 On the Design Bar. a lock displays on each side indicating the constraints to the reference planes. and click OK.

It is identical to the truss you have been designing. you add several beam instances and then modify the shape of the foundation to see how the beams adapt. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Although you could continue using the previous family. NOTE Close any open families or projects. Loading a Family into a Project In this exercise. click Open. If you are comfortable with your design. Testing the Family in a Project. After you load it into the project. it is recommended that you use the new family in order to ensure consistency. Datasets Open the truss family ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. click the Training Files icon. you should close the file and begin with a fresh dataset. A new dataset is provided for you beginning with the next lesson. Open the m_Wood Floor Truss_1. 77 Proceed to the next lesson.76 Save the Family. The truss family that you use in this lesson is identical to the truss you have created in the previous exercises. Testing the Family in a Project In this lesson. If you have experienced any errors or have deviated from the exercises in any way.rfa file located in the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Families folder. you load the truss family into a project that consists of foundation walls. a sill. and a rim joist. Testing the Family in a Project | 693 . you can continue using it in the next lesson. you load the family into a project to test it in a real-world environment.

Notice that the project file is now active. Load the truss family into the project 1 On the Window menu. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 3 In the Project Browser. click Load into Projects. and notice that the Wood Floor Truss_1 family has been loaded. you add several instances of the truss family to the project. a dialog box would have displayed asking for you to specify which projects you wanted to load the family into.rfa. Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you used in the previous exercise.rvt file located in the Metric folder. click the Training Files icon. 2 On the Design Bar.Open the project file ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. 4 Proceed to the next exercise. Open the m_WWF1. expand Families. click Open. and then modify the project to see how the beams adapt. If you had multiple projects or families open. The truss family is loaded directly into the only other open file. click m_Wood Floor Truss_1. expand Structural Framing. Testing a Family Instance in a Project In this exercise. Testing a Family Instance in a Project. 694 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques .

and a wood rim joist.Add beams to project 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. NOTE Do not be concerned with the exact location of the three beams. 4 In the Type Selector. and double-click 3D . 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. a slab. expand Views. a wood sill. 2 In the Project Browser. the truss family you loaded will interact with it as one beam does to another. double-click Level 1. expand 3D Views. therefore.Southeast Isometric. Testing the Family in a Project | 695 . 5 Using point-to-point insertion. click Beam. select m_Wood Floor Truss_1.Southeast Isometric. double-click 3D . under 3D Views. Try to make them approximately equidistant as shown. 6 In the Project Browser. add three vertical beams that snap to the rim joist at each end. The rim joist was added as a beam. This project consists of foundation walls.

You do not need to be precise.Notice the wood truss sits on top of the sill and attaches to the rim joist as expected. NOTE Make sure you drag the grid line. under Floor Plans. double-click 3D . double-click Level 1. not the wall or rim joist. under 3D Views. 696 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 9 In the Project Browser.Southeast Isometric. you are merely testing the new floor truss to verify that it adapts to the changes. 8 Select Grid 2 and drag it downward until the walls form an approximate square. 7 In the Project Browser.

14 On the Options Bar. 10 On the Edit menu. 15 When prompted to open the truss family for editing. 11 On the File menu.Notice the wood truss adjusted to the changes. 16 Proceed to the next lesson. ■ ■ The truss ends remained constant and adapted to the new beam length. The project and family need to interact based on a consistent file name. Working with Nested Subcomponents. and create a formula controlled array to fill in the truss. Because the family is already open. click Edit Family. the wood floor truss family becomes the active view. you nest wood web members into the floor truss. Working with Nested Subcomponents In this lesson. Edit a family from within a project 13 Select one of the wooden truss components. IMPORTANT Do not change the name of the family. navigate to a folder of your choice and save the project with its existing name. Working with Nested Subcomponents | 697 . you nest the web components into the truss and create an array that adapts to changes in length. This should return the project to its original dimension. click Save as. 12 In the Save as dialog box. In the next lesson. click Yes. click Undo Drag. The center chase remained the same width while remaining centered.

Leave a slight gap between the chase and the web. ■ ■ In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Place one wood web on each side of the center chase. IMPORTANT Make sure you snap the center line of the web components to the center reference line of the truss. Dataset Continue to use the datasets from the previous exercise. verify that m_Wood_Web: Wood Web is selected.rfa file located in the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Families folder. click the Training Files icon. 8 Add two instances of the wood web component as shown. click Component. 5 On the File menu. Add two wood web components 6 On the Design Bar. You then align and lock the web extents before applying a formula-controlled array. click Hide/Isolate. 7 In the Type Selector. 2 In the Project Browser. Open the m_Wood_Web.rfa is the active file. Prepare the view for nesting 1 Make sure that m_Wood Floor Truss_1. 4 On the View Control Bar. Level. The geometry is driven by formula-based parameters that link to the host family. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family.Adding a Nested Component In this exercise. double-click Ref. This will aid in the placement of the wood web. 698 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . and click Hide Object. Snap the center line of the web to the center reference plane of the truss. under Floor Plans. you nest two wooden web members into the truss. This family is a single extrusion as shown. This will make aligning the wood web easier. 3 Select the symbolic line in the center of the truss. The extrusion is aligned and locked to invisible model lines that make it easier to array within the truss.

Align the nested web components 12 Enter . click Modify.9 On the Design Bar. Notice the model lines that surround the web component. Also notice that the depth of the web members needs to be changed. select the reference plane that is coincident with the left edge of the left center chase extrusion. 13 For the align-to point. This will be accomplished in the next exercise when you link the nested parameter with the host parameter. IMPORTANT Do not lock the alignment 15 Repeat the previous two steps to align the left edge of the right web component to the right edge of the center chase as shown. Working with Nested Subcomponents | 699 . You will align the left web component first. under Elevations. this is the keyboard shortcut for Align. double-click Front. 11 Place the cursor over the left wood web. they are visible only when you place the cursor over the component. In the following steps. you align the web panel using these lines rather than the extrusion edges. 10 In the Project Browser. Do not select it. 14 Select the right vertical model line of the left web component as shown.

700 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . The reference plane you added in the previous step represents half the web width. 18 Add two reference planes as shown. 19 On the Tools menu. click Modify. In the steps that follow. 16 On the Design Bar. NOTE You do not have to align the top or bottom the web components because the height of the web members will adapt to the truss height after you create and link the parameters in the next exercise. click Ref Plane. 22 Click the lock to lock the reference plane to the centerline of the web component.Each of these web components represents the starting point of the web arrays that you add later in this lesson. you align the reference planes to the center of the web components. 21 Select the reference plane that you added to the left of the web components center as shown. Add reference planes for array anchors 17 On the Design Bar. click Align. it is important to note that you should avoid adding unnecessary constraints. In addition. Place each reference plane just to the outside of the center of the web components. 20 Select the center of the left web component as the align-to point.

Dimension and label array anchors 24 On the Design Bar. 25 Add the following two dimensions: ■ ■ Select the reference plane that you aligned to the center of the left web component. Select the reference plane that is coincident with the right edge of the left web component and the outside edge of the center chase. Place the dimension as shown. Select the reference plane that is coincident with the left edge of the right web component and the outside edge of the center chase. click Dimension. ■ ■ ■ Select the reference plane that you aligned to the center of the right web component.23 Repeat the previous two steps to align and lock the right web component and the reference plane as shown. Place the dimension as shown. ■ Working with Nested Subcomponents | 701 .

4 In the Family Types dialog box. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. Creating Formula-controlled Parameters. 27 On the File menu. click Edit/New. TIP You can expand the width of the Family Types dialog box to facilitate typing within the formula field. Creating Formula-controlled Parameters In this exercise. under Other. Select Common for Discipline.In the next exercise. NOTE Formulas are case sensitive. and click OK. Select Constraints for Group parameter under. under Parameters. In the Type Parameter dialog box. click the button to the right of the WebHeight value. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. When you refer to another parameter within a formula. notice that “= “displays within the WebHeight button. 9 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog box. and click Properties.(Chord Thickness * 2) for the WebDepth Formula. click OK. 28 In the Save As dialog box. you add new parameters to control the web components. under Parameter Data. 8 In the Type Properties dialog box. Click OK. 2 In the Family Types dialog box. under Constraints. Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you saved in the previous exercise. 5 Click OK. 10 In the Type Properties dialog box. click OK. click Family Types. 12 On the Design Bar. select WebDepth. You then link the nested web parameters to the new host parameters. Create a new parameter for web depth 1 On the Design Bar. 7 In the Element Properties dialog box. you label these dimensions. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter WebDepth for Name. Select Length for Type. click Modify. This formula ensures that the web depth will account for any changes in the chord thickness or truss depth. 702 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . enter Depth . Link the nested component to the new parameter 6 Right-click the left web component. or the width of the center chase. Select Type. click Add. length. click Modify. 26 On the Design Bar. navigate to the same directory in which you saved the project file and save this family there with its current name. click Save As. You also add a formula to the parameter in order to maintain the web position as the truss changes depth. ensure you enter it exactly as it is named.

notice the center of each nested web component is locked to the reference plane that bisects it. 16 Under Other. Select Instance. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Other for Group parameter under. click Add. Create WebArrayNum formula-controlled parameter 20 In the Family Types dialog box. Working with Nested Subcomponents | 703 . 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. It will use a formula to add the center chase width and the thickness of the two bordering chords. 19 Under Constraints. Create new formula-controlled parameter for center chase 13 On the Design Bar. Create WebArrayLength formula-controlled parameter 17 In the Family Types dialog box. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter WebArrayLength for Name. Select Length for Type. under Parameters. In addition. Select Common for Discipline. This formula subtracts the length of the center chase and its two bordering chords plus an additional 300mm before dividing it in two to specify the length of each array. Select Length for Type. This parameter is primarily for convenience. under Parameters. which must remain at least 150mm long. enter Center Chase Width + (2*Chord Thickness) for CC Formula. the resulting value is displayed as an inactive field. click Family Types. Select Constraints for Group parameter under. enter (Length . under Parameter Data.(CC+300))/2 for WebArrayLength Formula. under Parameters. Select Common for Discipline. under Parameter Data. After you enter the formula. 18 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. click Add.Notice the web members are resized to fit more precisely between the chords. The additional 300mm is to account for the ends. click Add. Select Instance. Click OK. Click OK. 14 In the Family Types dialog box. do the following: ■ Enter CC for Name.

25 On the Options Bar. 27 Select the dimension that refers to the midpoint of the right web. Add parameter to anchor web array 24 Select the dimension that refers to the midpoint of the left web as shown. 704 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 23 Click OK. 29 On the Design Bar. Select Constraints for Group parameter under. Select Instance. click Modify. under Parameter Data. Select Common for Discipline. Add formula for Webhalflength 30 On the Design Bar. Click OK. select Webhalflength for Label. 28 On the Options Bar. under Parameter Data. 32 Click OK. click Family Types. enter WebArrayLength/(2*WebDepth) for WebArrayNum Formula. Select Instance. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter WebArrayNum for Name. 26 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. Select Constraints for Group parameter under. 22 Under Constraints. Notice the location of the web components has adapted to the formula. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter Webhalflength for Name. select Add parameter for Label.21 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. Select Integer for Type. Click OK. 31 Under Constraints. enter (WebArrayLength/WebArrayNum)/2 for Webhalflength Formula.

click Edit/New. 35 In the Type Properties dialog box. and click Properties. click Family Types. Working with Nested Subcomponents | 705 . 34 In the Element Properties dialog box. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter 686mm for Depth. It is especially important to flex the model before arraying the truss so that you don’t multiply any existing problems. and click OK. the button next to the WebArrayLength value should have an equals sign within it. 36 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog box. double-click View 1. it is very important that you flex the model to ensure the nested components and the formulas that controls them work as expected. In the Type Properties dialog box. click the button to the right of the WebArrayLength value.Associate web component parameters 33 Right-click the left web component. fix any problematic alignments and constraints. under 3D Views. The truss should adapt to all the changes. 39 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 37 In the Type Properties dialog box. 43 In the Family Types dialog box. Flex the design 41 Adjust the view so you can flex the truss while in the Family Types dialog box. Because you have added and constrained new components. 40 In the Project Browser. select WebArrayLength. If it does not. 38 In the Element Properties dialog box. Enter 76mm for Chord Thickness. click OK. click OK. Click Apply. 42 On the Design Bar. under Other.

you array the nested web components. 706 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 5 Select the bottom-right corner of the nested web extrusion as the move start point. 46 Proceed to the next exercise. Enter 3 for Number. Arraying Nested Subcomponents In this exercise. Array the left web component 1 In the Project Browser. Select Constrain. 45 On the File menu. you specify the move start point.44 In the Family Types dialog box. use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family. click Array. click Save. Click Apply. Select 2nd for Move to. 4 On the Options Bar. under Elevations. Enter 38mm for Chord Thickness. 3 On the Edit menu. Creating an array requires two basic steps. reset the values as follows: ■ ■ ■ Enter 286mm for Depth. add alignment constraints. Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you saved in the previous exercise. When picking the corner. 2 Select the nested web component left of the center chase. and click OK. You must use precision when arraying because any error is multiplied as the array grows. and link the arrays to the WebArrayNum parameter. Arraying Nested Subcomponents. double-click Front. First. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Group and Associate is selected. then you specify the move end point.

place the cursor over the boundary between the two left web components until the reference highlights. use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family. click Modify. 15 On the Design Bar. 13 Select the bottom-right corner of the nested web extrusion as the move end point. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Group and Associate is selected. use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family. When picking the corner. Select Constrain. 14 Press ENTER to complete the array. 12 Select the bottom-left corner of the nested web extrusion as the move start point. 10 On the Edit menu. 11 On the Options Bar. When picking the corner. click Modify. 16 Zoom out to view the truss. Array the right nested web component 9 Select the nested web component right of the center chase. Select 2nd for Move to. 8 On the Design Bar. 18 On the Tools menu. then select the line twice. click Align. click Array. use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family. Working with Nested Subcomponents | 707 .6 Select the bottom-left corner of the nested web extrusion as the move end point. Enter 3 for Number. 7 Press ENTER to complete the array. Align and lock the arrays 17 Zoom in on the left array of web components. 19 In the left array. When picking the corner.

22 Within the right array. click Modify. If you do not lock the edges of the array. select WebArrayNum for Label. NOTE This step is very important. 28 On the Options Bar.Because there are two overlapping lines at this location. align and lock the two boundaries between the three web components. you are aligning the two bordering web components to each other. 29 On the Design Bar. 708 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Label the arrays 23 Select the middle web component of the left array. the web components overlap each other when you change the depth of the truss. Place the cursor over the array line as shown and select it. 20 Click the lock symbol to keep the web components locked at their edges. align and lock the two right web components. 27 Select the array line over the web components on the right. Use the same techniques as you did in the previous three steps. 24 Notice the array line displays above the components with the array value. 25 On the Options Bar. NOTE Do not select the array value. 21 Within the left array. 30 Zoom out until you can see the entire truss. select WebArrayNum for Label. 26 Select the middle web component of the right array.

Working with Nested Subcomponents | 709 . Member Left. 31 Zoom around the left side of the truss. This is because earlier in the tutorial. Notice the end of the array still overlaps the trimmable end. 32 Select the dimension between reference plane Left and Member Left as shown. as the align-to point. You will fix this in later steps by changing the parameter value. 36 Select the reference plane. 35 Select the reference plane. Left. 33 Delete the dimension.Notice the arrays appear to be too long. 34 On the Tools menu. and lock the alignment as shown. The primary reason for this was to allow for flexing the length. you added a dimension to lock the Member Left and Member Right reference plane to the outer Left and Right reference planes. click Align.

click Family Types. under Dimensions. you would not want to align and lock these two reference planes. If it does not. Therefore. this solution has little. 41 Zoom out until you can see the entire truss. Flex the design 45 In the Project Browser. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 686mm for Depth. and click OK. Enter 900mm for Center Chase Width. and prepare the view for flexing. 44 Click Apply. under 3D Views. however. 39 Delete the dimension between reference plane Right and Member Right. Enter 12000mm for Length. 40 Align and lock reference plane Right and Member Right. 38 Zoom in around the right side of the truss. 46 On the Design Bar. enter 150mm for Trimmable End Length. Change trimmable end length value 42 On the Design Bar. click Modify. fix any problematic alignments and constraints. Notice the web arrays fit within the truss without overlapping the ends.NOTE With most beam families. click Family Types. in this case. Click Apply. 43 In the Family Types dialog box. 47 In the Family Types dialog box. if any. significant impact. double-click View 1. 37 On the Design Bar. the wood floor truss normally sits on a sill bordering a rim joist. The truss should adapt to all the changes. 710 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques .

the project. 48 In the Family Types dialog box. Enter 6000mm for Length. 1 Verify that the truss family is active and the 3D View. select Override parameter values of existing types. and click Yes. these steps have been reduced. however. Click Apply. click Load into Projects. Reloading a Family into a Project. 50 Proceed to the next exercise. should be open. you reload the truss family into the project. for training and time purposes. View 1. Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you saved in the previous exercise. reset the values as follows: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 286mm for Depth. 2 On the Design Bar. 3 In the Reload Family dialog box. Working with Nested Subcomponents | 711 . click Save. Notice the project file becomes active and the beam has updated with the latest changes. You then increase the distance between the foundation walls to see how the truss adapts to the changes in length. 49 On the File menu. you should flex the model in as many ways as possible to verify it is working correctly. displays.rvt. Reloading a Family into a Project In this exercise. In addition to the truss family. and click OK.TIP When flexing a complex model such as this. Enter 400mm for Center Chase Width. You have completed the design of the primary components of the truss. m_WWF1. Reload the truss into the project.

Applying Subcategories. you create and apply subcategories and materials. 8 Save and close the project file and the family file. click Undo Drag. Materials. 712 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques .Southeast Isometric. you begin with a new dataset which is identical to both of these files. 9 Proceed to the next lesson. In the next lesson. Materials. under 3D Views. double-click 3D . 7 On the Edit menu. and Parameters. Notice the truss has adapted to the changes. 6 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 5 Drag Grid 2 downward until the shape of the building footprint is almost square.4 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. and Parameters In this lesson. You then create a parameter to specifically control material application. Applying Subcategories.

rvt file located in the Metric folder. you create new subcategories within the truss family. click Open. four instances of the floor truss were added to the other end of the structure. You then reload the family into the project and apply a material to the subcategory. click the Training Files icon. the material values were set to By Category by default. In this dataset. the truss was added to a beam system that occupies approximately half the building footprint. Applying Subcategories. Apply Object Styles 1 Zoom in around beam system. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Datasets ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. In addition. Notice no material has been applied to the truss. Within the family. and Parameters | 713 . Open the m_WWF2. Materials.Creating and Applying Subcategories In this exercise.

10 On the Options Bar. 6 In the Materials dialog box. click in the material field until the button displays as shown. 14 In the New Subcategory dialog box. click Object Styles. 5 Click the button that displays in the Structural Framing Material field. 12 On the Settings menu. 3 In the Object Styles dialog box. 13 In the Object Styles dialog box. click New. Notice that the Structural Framing category and all of the subcategories have no material value defined. under Modify Subcategories. and expand the category Structural Framing. When you apply a material to the Structural Framing category. enter Wood Floor Truss for Name. 714 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . click OK. Notice the Wood . notice that the subcategories do not apply to the wood floor truss that you have designed. it would also have the wood material applied to it. 11 Click Yes to open the family for editing. all subcomponents of that category are assigned that material.Timber for Name. and click OK. verify that the Model Objects tab is selected. 4 On the Structural Framing category line. 7 In the Object Styles dialog box. click Wood . If there was a metal beam in this building model. 8 On the Edit menu. click Undo Object Styles. you have more control over component visibility within a project.Timber material has been applied to all Structural Framing components. If you create subcategories as you design in the Family Editor.2 On the Settings menu. click Edit Family. Create subcategories within the truss family 9 Select a truss that is not part of the beam system. In addition. click Object Styles. and click OK.

27 On the Design Bar. navigate to _accurender\Wood\Pine.No Gloss for Name. 21 In the Object Styles dialog box. and click OK. click Modify. The web component family opens in a 3D view. click . under AccuRender. Apply the subcategory to the truss components 22 Draw a pick box around the entire truss. click Check None. press TAB to toggle to the web component and click to select it. 16 In the Materials dialog box. and click OK. 29 On the Options Bar. 17 In the New Material dialog box. select Other. Apply a subcategory to the nested web components 28 Place the cursor over one of the arrayed web components. Notice the chords and end extrusions remain selected. select Natural. 20 In the Materials dialog box. click Edit Family. Materials. 19 In the Material Library dialog box. select Wood Floor Truss for Subcategory. 23 On the Options Bar. click OK. click Duplicate. and Parameters | 715 . Applying Subcategories. and click the button to open the Materials dialog box. 26 In the Element Properties dialog box. enter Wood Floor Truss. 30 Click Yes to open the family for editing.Apply material to subcategory 15 Click in the Material field for the Wood Floor Truss subcategory. click . 18 In the Materials dialog box. 25 On the Options Bar. under Identity Data. and click OK. click . Yellow. and click OK. click OK. 24 In the Filter dialog box.

rvt. click . select m_Wood Floor Truss_1.Webs subcategory. 38 In the Material Library dialog box. you can apply a different material to all web components when using this truss within a project. click Object Styles. 36 In the New Material dialog box. 35 In the Materials dialog box. 37 In the Materials dialog box. click New.Webs. 40 In the Object Styles dialog box.rfa. enter Wood Floor Truss . enter Wood Floor Truss . By creating a separate subcategory for the web components. 45 In the Load into Projects dialog box. click Duplicate. under Identity Data. and click OK. and click Yes. 716 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Reload truss into project 47 On the Design Bar. click OK. 34 Click in the Material field for the Wood Floor Truss . 42 On the Options Bar. 32 In the Object Styles dialog box. navigate to _accurender\Wood\Pine. and click OK.No Gloss for Name. select Wood Floor Truss . under Modify Subcategories. select Natural. 33 In the New Subcategory dialog box. and click the button to open the Materials dialog box.Webs for Subcategory. click Load into Projects. 46 In the Reload Family dialog box. and click OK. click OK. under AccuRender. 48 In the Load into Projects dialog box. click Load into Projects. and click OK. click . 41 Select the web extrusion. Yellow. and click OK.31 On the Settings menu. 43 In the Element Properties dialog box. 39 In the Materials dialog box.Webs for Name. and click OK. Reload web component into truss family 44 On the Design Bar. select Override parameter values of existing types. select m_WWF2.

Materials. however. 54 In the Visibility Graphics dialog box. and click OK. click Edit Family.49 In the Reload Family dialog box. and Parameters | 717 . select Override parameter values of existing types. under Categories. 53 On the View menu. 55 On the Edit menu. Notice the new object subcategory styles are applied to the truss components. 57 In the Save as dialog box. 56 On the File menu. click Visibility/Graphics. click Object Styles. you add a new material parameter that allows you to specify a material for each truss instance. and click Yes. You can change the style of only the wood truss components without impacting other structural framing components. expand Structural Framing. expand Structural Framing. Applying Subcategories. clear Wood Floor Truss Webs. Dataset Continue to use the dataset that you saved in the previous exercise. navigate to a folder of your preference and save the project with the current name. the stick symbols continue to display. under Visibility. click Undo Visibility/Graphics. Creating Material Parameters. 3 Click Yes to open the family for editing. Notice the web extrusions not longer display. 58 Proceed to the next exercise. 2 On the Options Bar. Creating Material Parameters In this exercise. Open truss family for editing 1 Select a truss that is not part of the beam system. click Save As. 52 Click OK. 51 In the Object Styles dialog box. 50 On the Settings menu. Notice the two new subcategories are listed.

click Load into Projects. 30 In the Element Properties dialog box. 718 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 14 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog box. 27 On the Options Bar. select Floor Truss Material. 25 In the Reload Family dialog box. Notice the appearance of the floor trusses has not changed. Notice the chords and end extrusions remain selected. and click OK.Create material parameter 4 On the Design Bar. click the Floor Truss Material field and click the button that displays. 12 On the Options Bar. 10 On the Options Bar. 17 On the Options Bar. and click Yes. press TAB. click Family Types. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box. do not assign a material to the parameter. notice the default material is By Category. click . under Materials and Finishes. 19 In the Type Properties dialog box. click . click Modify. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter Floor Truss Material for Name. Reload truss into project 23 On the Design Bar. click Add. 20 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog box. and select the component. 15 In the Element Properties dialog box. select Structural Framing (Wood Floor Truss). 22 On the Design Bar. 26 Select a floor truss that is not part of the beam system. under Other. 11 In the Filter dialog box. click the button to the right of the Material value field. click . 8 Click OK. Click OK. and click OK. click OK. select m_WWF2. under Materials and Finishes. Select Material for Type. and click OK. under Parameters. click OK. Select Materials and Finishes for Group parameter under. select Override parameter values of existing types. Link truss extrusions to material parameter 9 Draw a pick box around the entire truss. Select Instance. select Metal . and click OK. click Check None. click . 21 Click OK twice. and click OK. under Parameter Data.Steel for Name. 5 In the Family Types dialog box. In this case. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Edit/New. select Floor Truss Material. 29 In the Materials dialog box. 28 In the Element Properties dialog box. 6 In the Parameter Properties dialog box.rvt. 7 In the Family Types dialog box. When reloaded into a project. This material parameter allows you to assign a material on an instance parameter. Select Common for Discipline. this component will continue to use the material assigned to the subcategory by default. 16 Place the cursor over one of the web components. click the button to the right of the WebMaterial value field. 24 In the Load into Projects dialog box.

However. click Save. Change detail levels 1 On the View Control Bar. click Modify. all elements display at all times in all views. Assigning Detail Level and View Controls In this exercise. 34 Close any open files. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click Close. Notice the material is applied only to the selected beam. Notice the rim joist no longer displays. and click Coarse. 33 On the File menu. click Open. Controlling Component Visibility | 719 . You can save the open files if you wish. you add controls to specify the views in which each element displays and at what detail level. because you have yet to assign a detail level to each of the elements within the truss family. 35 Proceed to the next lesson.rvt file located in the Metric folder. Controlling Component Visibility. click Detail Level. 32 On the File menu. Datasets ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. notice the floor truss has not changed appearance. you designate the display of elements in specific views and at specific detail levels. In the next lesson.31 On the Design Bar. Currently within the truss. Open the m_WWF3. a new dataset is supplied. click the Training Files icon. Controlling Component Visibility In this lesson.

Under Detail Levels. 6 On the Options Bar. 18 On the Options Bar. click Visibility. 8 Select the web extrusion. 16 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. clear Plan/RCP. Under Detail Levels. clear Plan/RCP. Click OK. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under View Specific Display. clear Coarse. 4 Click Yes to open the family for editing. click Visibility. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under View Specific Display. Under Detail Levels. Assign detail level to center chase extrusions 14 Select the center chase extrusions. click Visibility. Clear Left/Right. 9 On the Options Bar. 720 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . click Edit Family. 11 On the Design Bar. 10 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. 13 In the Reload Family dialog box. Assign detail level to truss ends 17 Select the end extrusions. 3 On the Options Bar.rfa. select Override parameter values of existing types. select m_Wood Floor Truss_1. and click Yes.2 Select a floor truss. Clear Left/Right. 15 On the Options Bar. 7 Click Yes to open the family for editing. clear Coarse. Notice the appearance of the floor trusses has not changed. Click OK. Apply detail level controls to web components 5 Select a web component. click Load into Projects. clear Plan/RCP. clear Coarse. and click OK. Click OK. 19 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under View Specific Display. click Edit Family. 12 In the Load into Projects dialog box.

Reload truss into project 23 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. and click Yes. Notice that the floor truss solid geometry is not displayed. 25 In the Reload Family dialog box. Notice the floor truss solid geometry is displayed. 26 On the View Control Bar. specify the following: ■ ■ Under Detail Levels. select m_WWF3. 22 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. double-click Level 1. click Load into Projects.rvt. click Detail Level.Assign detail level to truss chords 20 Select the truss chords. 21 On the Options Bar. and click Coarse. Click OK. 24 In the Load into Projects dialog box. 27 In the Project Browser. click Visibility. clear Coarse. click Detail Level. Notice the symbolic representation of the beams. and click Medium. and click OK. Controlling Component Visibility | 721 . 28 On the View Control Bar. select Override parameter values of existing types.

Open the truss family for editing 1 Select a floor truss. NOTE When creating new components. click Save As. and click Apply.29 On the File menu. and click OK. under Dimensions. 3 Click Yes to open the family for editing. under Family Types. The truss returns to its original designed value. navigate to your preferred location and save the project with the current name. Create new types 4 On the Design Bar. 11 Click OK. Creating Component Types. 30 In the Save As dialog box. click New. create types for those most frequently used in your projects. enter 64mm for Chord Width. 5 In the Family Types dialog box. 6 In the New dialog box. Creating Component Types In this lesson. and click Apply. you create multiple types for a 89x38 truss and a 64x38 truss. under Family Types. 8 In the New dialog box. you create multiple floor truss types to speed up the design process when working in a project. click Edit Family. 31 Proceed to the next lesson. 722 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 9 In the Family Types dialog box. 7 In the Family Types dialog box. click Family Types. you create a conditional formula that adjusts the truss depth based on the truss length. Although you can change the parameters of a truss within a project. enter 64x38 for Name. and click OK. In the final exercise. click New. 2 On the Options Bar. 10 Select 89x38 for Name. Creating Multiple Component Types In this exercise. TIP You can also use new types to flex the model. creating predefined types can speed up the design process. enter 89x38 for Name. Notice the chord changes width.

click Family Types. under Dimensions. 19 Add a beam next to the 64x38. click Beam. 18 In the Type Selector.rvt. 286. 350. 21 In the Project Browser. click Apply. if(Length < 7500. select 64x38. click Load into Projects. select 89x38. you create a conditional formula that changes the depth automatically as the truss increases in length. Creating Component Types | 723 . and click Apply. under 3D Views. if(Length < 9000. 2 On the Options Bar. click Modify. select Override parameter values of existing types. 15 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 16 In the Type Selector. 3 Click Yes to open the family for editing. 23 Proceed to the final exercise. enter 6000 for length. 17 Add a beam in the center of the open space. click Save. enter 8000 for length. Notice the two beam types. 400. Creating Conditional Formulas. 14 In the Reload Family dialog box. <result-if-true>. 8 In the Family Types dialog box.Southeast Isometric. 22 On the File menu. You are going to enter a conditional formula that follows this basic rule: IF ( <condition>. and click Yes. 400))) 6 Click Apply. Flex the design 7 In the Family Types dialog box. 13 In the Load into Projects dialog box. double-click 3D . enter the follow formula for Depth: if(Length < 6600. Adding a conditional formula 4 On the Design Bar. <result-if-false>) 5 In the Family Types dialog box.Load new types into the project 12 On the Design Bar. and click OK. and click OK. Open the truss for editing 1 Select a floor truss. click Edit Family. select m_WWF3. 20 On the Design Bar. Creating Conditional Formulas In this exercise. Notice the truss depth increases.

IMPORTANT When you changed the width of the building footprint. double-click 3D . 15 Notice the change in floor truss depth. click Save. 14 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1.Load the truss into the project 9 On the Design Bar. 11 In the Reload Family dialog box. and click OK. 17 Close any open files. under Floor Plans. NOTE You would have to change the depth of the sill and rim joist to accommodate this change. Test the conditional formula within a project 12 In the Project Browser. You have completed this tutorial. you probably noticed a change in the amount of time the view needed to regenerate.rvt. under 3D Views. select m_WWF3.Southeast Isometric. 724 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 13 Select Grid 2 and drag it downward until it is between 8000-9000mm from Grid 1. 16 On the File menu. 10 In the Load into Projects dialog box. Regeneration time and overall performance can be affected by over-designed families. and click Yes. select Override parameter values of existing types. click Load into Projects.

You can edit the rentable scheme and create additional schemes. you create area schedules and color fill plans based on the area schemes and plans. 725 . You then create area plans for each scheme as needed. Each area scheme can have multiple area plans. Two schemes are provided by default: Gross Building and Rentable.Area Analysis 21 In this tutorial. you learn how to use area analysis tools to define and label spatial relationships. The first step in area analysis is the definition of area schemes. Finally.

select Millimeters. you create a color fill plan and area schedule based on the area schemes and plans. TIP If the Area Settings tab is not visible. For Unit Suffix. Although you can create new schemes that are based on the Rentable scheme. For Unit Suffix. You add and modify the area boundaries and apply area tags.rvt file located in the Common folder. select m2 Click OK. Creating Area Schemes and Plans In this exercise. expand Floor Plans. click Project Units. 6 On the Area Analysis tab of the Design Bar. click the Training Files icon. 726 | Chapter 21 Area Analysis . NOTE Images in this exercise reflect Imperial values. If you are using metric units. 2 In the Project Units dialog box. select mm. there are two schemes currently defined: Gross Building and Rentable. select 2 decimal places. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click Format and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Units. 3 Under Area. For Rounding. your values will be different.Using Area Analysis Tools In this lesson. You add and modify the area boundaries and apply area tags. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. under Length. it is not necessary in this exercise. These schemes define spatial relationships. In the Area Settings dialog box. In the final exercise. Set units of measurement to metric 1 On the Settings menu. Open the c_Area. expand Views (all). right-click in the Design Bar. click Open. click OK. ■ ■ Gross Building: Total constructed area of a building. 4 In the Project Units dialog box. Click OK. select Square meters. click Format and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Units. Rentable: Area measurements based on the standard method for measuring floor area in office buildings. and verify that Level 1 is the active view. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. View predefined area schemes 5 In the Project Browser. click Area Settings. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. and click Area Analysis.

10 In the New Area Plan dialog box. NOTE If you clear Do not duplicate existing views. At Specified Height: You specify the height above the level that area is calculated. click Area Tag. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Gross Building for Type. Expand Area Plans (Gross Building). you can create a copy of the area plan with subsequent changes to the original area plan duplicated in the copied plan. ■ 8 Click Cancel. Click OK. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. When you select Yes in this dialog box.7 In the Area Setting dialog box. You can specify the height where the room area is calculated. forming a closed loop. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. the system-computed height defaults to the level. click Area Plan. or 0. ■ At System Computed Height: Generally defaults to or 1000 mm above the level. 12 In the Project Browser. click the Room Calculations tab. 14 Click in the middle of the room on the lower left corner of the building model to place the tag. under Views (all). Using Area Analysis Tools | 727 . area boundary lines are automatically placed on the exterior walls of the building model. notice there is a new view type called Area Plans (Gross Building). you must manually add these boundary lines. click Yes to create the boundary lines automatically. NOTE If the room area includes a room separation line. 13 On the Area Analysis tab of the Design Bar. If you select No. ■ 11 When the informational dialog box displays. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. Create a gross building area plan 9 On the Area Analysis tab of the Design Bar.

click Area Plan. NOTE The area lines follow some of the windows hosted by the exterior wall. click Area Boundary. Although the rule for these lines is to follow the inside face of the wall. if the window glass is greater than 50% of the wall height. Click OK. common areas. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. You add and use area boundary lines to define the office areas. Add area boundary lines 19 On the Design Bar. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. Notice that there is a new view type called Area Plans (Rentable).NOTE An area tag measures area based on the area plan boundary lines. and store area. Expand Area Plans (Rentable). Create a rentable area scheme and plan 15 On the Area Analysis tab of the Design Bar. Next. A room tag measures the area enclosed within the exterior face of room-defining walls. the area boundary lines are placed on the face of the glass. 728 | Chapter 21 Area Analysis . 16 In the New Area Plan dialog box. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Rentable for Type. Notice that the area boundary lines are on the inner face of the exterior walls. 17 Click Yes to automatically define the area boundary lines. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. you create a new area plan for rentable space. 18 Zoom out until you can see the entire building model.

verify that Pick Lines and Apply Area Rules are selected. 22 On the Design Bar. 24 On the Design Bar. click Modify. When you add area boundary lines. 26 On the Options Bar. If you do not select this option. click inside the middle of the room to place the tag. 21 Select all the interior walls by clicking them one at a time. you can select the option "Apply Area Rules" so that the area boundary lines adjust to the area type. click Area Tag. 25 Select the area tag you added to the room in the upper left corner of the building model. the area boundary lines do not update automatically. Using Area Analysis Tools | 729 .20 On the Options Bar. click . you can either draw them or pick them. 23 In the upper left corner of the building model. When you pick the walls.

31 On the Options Bar. Click OK. In the Element Properties dialog box.27 In the Element Properties dialog box. 33 Using the techniques learned in previous steps. 32 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Area Tag. Select Building Common Area for Area Type. add a tag in the common area to the right of the double doors hosted by the west exterior wall. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Circulation for Name. Click OK. 30 On the Design Bar. 730 | Chapter 21 Area Analysis . 28 On the Design Bar. click . Click OK. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Tenant 2 for Name. click Modify and select the tag. 29 Add the tag to the room on the lower left corner of the building model. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Tenant 1 for Name. Select Office area for Area Type. Select Office area for Area Type.

and select Store Area for Area Type. and Tenant 4 in the lower right. Using Area Analysis Tools | 731 . Notice that within the two store areas. the area boundary lines have adjusted to the new area type. Tenant 3 should be in the upper right. 35 Add the last two area tags to the two areas on the right side of the building model. and select Major Vertical Penetration for Area Type. Name the areas Tenant 3 and Tenant 4. enter Core for Name.34 Add an area tag to the building model core.

37 Navigate to your preferred directory. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule.36 On the File menu. You added and modified the area boundaries and applied area tags to define spaces. name the project Area-in progress. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. you used the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. click Color Fill. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. NOTE This project is required in its current state if you intend to continue with the next exercise. In the next exercise. 732 | Chapter 21 Area Analysis . click to place it. In this exercise. Create a color fill plan 1 On the Area Analysis tab of the Design Bar. click Save. and click Save. 2 Move the cursor under the left corner of the building model.rvt. and when the color legend displays. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans In this exercise.

select Areas (Rentable). select Area Type and click Add. under Category. 5 In the New Schedule dialog box.3 When the dialog box displays. Using Area Analysis Tools | 733 . 8 Add the fields Area and Name. and click OK. Create an area schedule 4 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 6 In the Schedules Properties dialog box. click OK to make the required visibility setting changes. click Schedule/Quantities. 7 Under Available fields. click the Fields tab.

The fields you selected in the Schedule Properties dialog box are displayed as column headings within the schedule.9 Click OK. 734 | Chapter 21 Area Analysis .

You can create and modify the geometric shapes that aggregate to form the building model shell. Massing elements and building elements are not linked automatically. you can pick massing faces and make building model elements such as walls. If you modify a massing face. and roofs. you can specify the view to display massing elements. curtain systems.Massing 22 You can use massing tools during the initial design process to convey a potential design concept without the level of detail usually found in a project. You then modify the building model in both the massing view and the shell view to see how changes propagate throughout the project. 735 . building elements. At any time. you then need to update the building face. After you make building elements. you convert to the basic shell elements of the building model. or both. After you create the basic geometric shape of the building model. floors. you create a new building model using the various massing tools to add and cut mass. In this tutorial.

and cutting geometry. on the Options Bar. Open the m_Massing_Start. right-click anywhere over the Design Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. The Design Bar title changes to Mass. 4 On the Design Bar. and floors. click Open. click Lines. and click Massing. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model In this exercise. the building model uses those element types to define the walls. double-click Level 1. you create the basic geometric shape of the building model using various massing tools. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 736 | Chapter 22 Massing . 3 Click OK in the Name dialog box to accept the default name Mass 1. You assign the default wall. Adding a mass element 1 In the Project Browser. roofs. sweeps. 5 On the Sketch Design Bar. TIP If the Massing tab is not available on the Design Bar. click the Training Files icon. and roof types so that when you convert the massing elements to shell elements in the final exercise.Using Massing Tools In this lesson. floor.rvt file located in the Metric folder. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. under Views (all). and click 6 Sketch the shape as shown using the exact values. under Floor Plans. you create the basic geometric shape of a building model by adding solid and void extrusions. click Create Mass. TIP You may want to dimension and constrain the lines to maintain the exact dimensions. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar.

and click OK. 20 In the Element Properties dialog box. Be sure to click to the inside of the extrusion. click Extrusion Properties. and then click . 8 In the Element Properties dialog box. click . 14 On the Design Bar. Watch the Status Bar in the lower-left corner of the screen to be sure you are highlighting the Form : Extrusion : Reference. and click OK. click the Value for Material. 9 In the Materials dialog box. click the Value for Material. and click OK. under Materials and Finishes. 19 On the Design Bar. enter 25000 for Extrusion Start and 27500 for Extrusion End. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. 12 On the View toolbar. Using Massing Tools | 737 . select Mass (Opaque) for Name. under Materials and Finishes. 17 Place the cursor in the drawing area on an edge of the existing form so that the edge is highlighted. and click 16 On the Options Bar. and then click . click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. click Finish Sketch. This means the sketch line is placed 1550 mm from the position you pick with the cursor. under Constraints. click Lines. enter 25000 for Extrusion End. 22 In the Element Properties dialog box. 11 On the Design Bar. Create next extrusion form 13 In the Project Browser. click Finish Sketch. double-click Level 1. 23 On the Design Bar. click Extrusion Properties. under Views (all). enter 1550 mm for the Offset. on the Options Bar. 18 Click the edges of the form to create sketch lines as shown. select Mass (Transparent) for Name. and click OK. 15 On the Sketch Design Bar.7 On the Design Bar. 21 In the Materials dialog box. under Constraints.

click Lines. 30 On the Sketch Design Bar. under Views (all). and click on the Options Bar. and click OK. 26 On the Design Bar. under Elevations (Building Elevation). click Solid Form ➤ Solid Blend. 738 | Chapter 22 Massing . double-click {3D} to see the results. press TAB to highlight the entire face. Sketch the blend base 31 Select the top of the larger extrusion as shown. 27 In the Work Plane dialog box. Continue creation of next massing form 25 In the Project Browser. 29 Click to select the face. TIP If necessary. The second form is on top of the first form. select Pick a plane. under Views (all). 28 In the drawing area. double-click West. highlight the larger form.24 In the Project Browser.

click the arrow next to the drawing options. and delete the vertical construction line. 38 Select the arc and the horizontal line. click . and click to select the line start point. 37 On the Design Bar. 33 Place the cursor at the midpoint of the sketch line as shown. click . Using Massing Tools | 739 . Next. and click Arc passing through three points from the menu. 34 Sketch a line 6000 mm up as shown. TIP If you do not see this option. click . 39 On the Edit toolbar. you draw a sketch line that acts as a construction line to create an arc. 36 Sketch the arc as shown with the top of the arc snapping to the top of the construction line. The triangle indicates that the cursor is at the midpoint.32 On the Options Bar. click Modify. 35 On the Options Bar.

40 Click the cursor at the midpoint of the horizontal sketch line as shown. click 47 Create an arc as shown. double-click East. Sketching the blend top 42 On the Design Bar. 49 In the Element Properties dialog box. 51 On the View toolbar. under Views (all). . on the Options Bar. under Elevations (Building Elevation). click Lines and. 46 On the Options Bar. click . and click OK. 48 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. . 43 In the Project Browser. 50 On the Design Bar. click 45 Sketch the horizontal line as shown. 740 | Chapter 22 Massing . 41 Move the cursor straight up and click at the top horizontal line of the smaller extrusion as shown. 44 On the Design Bar. click Blend Properties. click Edit Top. verify that Mass (Opaque) is selected for Material and that -92000 is specified for Second End.

6 Place another reference plane 15000 mm to the right of the first reference plane. click and enter 15000 for Offset. Add reference planes 3 On the Mass tab of the Design bar. place three more reference planes 15000 mm apart from left to right. you created two extrusions and a blend that form the basic geometric shape of the building model. m_Massing_Start.52 Proceed to the next exercise. Using Massing Tools | 741 . double-click Level 1. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model. as shown. 2 In the drawing area. 4 On the Options bar. you use a void extrusion to cut geometry from one of the massing shapes you added in the previous exercise. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and place the first reference plane 15000 mm to the right. under Views (all). In the next exercise.rvt. In this exercise. select the mass. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model In this exercise. you use the massing tools to cut geometry from the shapes you have created. 5 Place the cursor near the left edge of the massing element so that the edge is highlighted. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the resulting building model. 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. click Ref Plane. 7 Using the same technique.

click Void Form ➤  Void Extrusion. 17 On the View toolbar. 9 On the Design Bar. snap the corners to the intersections. 16 On the Design Bar. enter 12000 for Extrusion End. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box. 19 On the File menu. and 0 for Extrusion Start. 12 On the Design Bar.When sketching the void extrusions in the steps that follow. 11 Sketch two additional void extrusions as shown. 742 | Chapter 22 Massing . specify Mass (Transparent) for Material. 18 On the Mass Design Bar. 14 Under Constraints. click Finish Mass. When sketching each extrusion. click NOTE If the file is currently in shaded mode. click . click Extrusion Properties. In this exercise. and sketch the first void extrusion as shown. 20 Save the file as m_Massing_Complete. you cut voids through an extrusion you added in the first exercise. under Materials and Finishes. These reference planes act primarily as sketching aids. 10 Enter SI for intersection snap. on the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. on the View Control Bar. click Lines and. you specify the intersection of the reference planes and the top and bottom edges of the massing element.rvt. Sketch extrusion voids 8 On the Design Bar. click Save As. 15 Click OK. and then click Hidden Line. click and select Chain.

you create new family types from a mass family file. 11000 mm for Height. 8 Enter 46000 mm for Width. You place several instances of the mass families into the project.Using Mass Family Files in a Project In this lesson. and 9000 mm for Depth. and click OK. you use the Join Geometry command to join several instances of the mass elements. Creating New Mass Family Types In this exercise. Dataset ■ ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. and click OK. click New. you open a predefined mass family file and create new types from it. Finally. 5 Click New and enter 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm for Name. enter 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm for Name. Open Box. Using Mass Family Files in a Project | 743 . and click Apply. Navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Families\Massing folder. 3 In the Name dialog box. 12000 mm for Height. and click OK. In this exercise. 7 Click New and enter 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm for Name. click the Training Files icon. and 6000 mm for Depth. 18000 mm for Height. 10 On the File menu. Creating three new family types 1 On the Design Bar.rfa. 9 Click OK. and click Apply. You then load that mass family file and others into a project. you opened a mass family file and created three new types of this family file. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. and 18000 mm for Depth. click Save As. click Open. enter 15000 mm for Width.rfa. click Family Types. under Other. 11 Save the file as Box-Training. and click Apply. 2 In the Family Types dialog box. 4 In the Family Types dialog box. 6 Enter 68000 mm for Width.

4 On the File menu.rfa.Loading and Placing New Mass Families In this exercise. double-click Site. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to accurately place the mass families. 8 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. click the Training Files icon. under Views (all). In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Semi Barrel Vault. 2 In the Project Browser. 6 Navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Families\Massing folder.rfa family files. 9 In the Type Selector. click Place Mass. You also load other existing mass families and place them. click the Training Files icon. you load and place the new family types that you created from the previous exercise. Arc Dome. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. 7 Open the Box-Training. 1 If not already selected. 3 On the View Control Bar. select Box-Training: 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm. 10 Place the box mass family on the in-place mass family as shown. under Floor Plans. click on the View toolbar to show the massing model. and Triangle.rfa.rvt file located in the Metric folder. click Open. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 744 | Chapter 22 Massing . Open the m_Massing_In-place. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe.rfa. 5 In the left pane of the Open dialog box.

select Triangle: 15000 x 45000 x 10500. 17 On the Design Bar. 16 Place 3 of these box families on the larger box family as shown. 19 Specify Mass (Opaque) for the Material instance parameter. select the 3 boxes. enter 90 for Angle. 18 Press CTRL.11 On the Design Bar. select Rotate after placement. 23 Place the cursor in the drawing area. click Modify. 13 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material instance parameter. and use the Move command on the Edit toolbar to place the triangle as shown. 20 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 26 In the drawing area. 15 In the Type Selector. and click to place the mass. Using Mass Family Files in a Project | 745 . 25 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click Place Mass. and click . 22 On the Options Bar. 24 On the Options Bar. 14 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. and click OK twice. and click . click Place Mass. 21 In the Type Selector. click Modify. 12 Select the box. select the triangle. select Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm. and click OK twice.

In the next exercise. 746 | Chapter 22 Massing . you loaded and placed the new family types that you created in the previous exercise. 33 Specify Mass (Opaque) for the Material instance parameter. click . and click OK twice. 35 On the View menu. and click OK twice. 29 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. and click . 28 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material instance parameter. 30 In the Type Selector. In this exercise. Notice that the triangle and the box masses that you just placed all overlap. you join these mass elements. select Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm. 31 Place the box mass family as shown. 32 Select the box and click .27 Select the triangle. click Orient ➤ Northeast. click Place Mass. You also loaded other existing mass families and added them to the building model. 34 On the View toolbar.

4 Select the triangle.Joining Mass Elements In this exercise. you join and modify the mass elements you placed from the previous exercise. . Join geometry 1 On the View toolbar.rvt file. the first mass element selected cuts volume from any subsequently selected mass element. Using Mass Family Files in a Project | 747 . click 2 On the Tools toolbar. click . Dataset ■ Continue using the m_Massing_In-place. NOTE When you join geometry. and then press ESC to see the result. 3 Select the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm mass element as shown.

Mirror the modified mass element 7 With the smaller box still selected. enter SM. 6 Select the right edge of the Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm and drag it to the left edge of the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm as shown. 9 Position the cursor over the upper edge of the middle box. TIP Pressing SHIFT while dragging the cursor locks the axis orthogonally. click 8 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. under Views (all). 748 | Chapter 22 Massing . double-click Site. click for Axis.Modify existing massing elements 5 In the Project Browser. 11 Drag the cursor down to create a vertical axis of reflection as shown. on the Edit toolbar. 10 Click to select the mirror axis start point. and snap to the midpoint of the edge.

Using Mass Family Files in a Project | 749 . The first selected mass element cut geometry from the subsequently selected mass element. Join geometry 13 On the View toolbar. 16 Repeat for the other instance of the modified mass element and the triangle. . and then select the triangle.12 Click to mirror the existing massing element. In this exercise. click 14 On the Tools toolbar. 15 Select one instance of the modified Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm first. You also modified and mirrored a mass element before joining its geometry with that of another element. you joined mass elements together. click . 17 Press ESC to see the result.

You add mass elements to design options to experiment with different versions of the design. 8 On the Options Bar. select Semi Barrel Vault: 10000 x 15000 x 7500. under Views (all). select Rotate after placement. you place the mass elements from the previous exercise into Design Options. enter 90 degrees for Angle. under Floor Plans. you continue using the same file from the previous lesson. select Sloped (primary). 11 Place a semi barrel vault where shown.Using Mass Elements with Design Options In this lesson. click Toolbar ➤ Design Options. 1 On the Design Bar. 7 In the Type Selector. and select the triangle mass element. and then click OK. 2 On the Window menu. click Modify. 4 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog box. You then make one of the design options the primary one for the model. click Place Mass. 9 Place the cursor in the drawing area and click to place the mass. 3 On the Design Options toolbar. Placing semi barrel vaults 6 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. You then switch between different design options to get different versions of the design. 5 In the Project Browser. Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_In-place. clear Curved. click . TIP You may want to use the Move tool to place the mass precisely. Mass Elements in Design Options In this exercise. 12 Place another semi barrel vault as shown.rvt. 10 On the Options Bar. 750 | Chapter 22 Massing . double-click Site.

20 On the Design Bar. under Views (all).13 On the Design Bar. under Elevations. 25 Move the three arc domes to the position shown. select Arc Dome: 6000R x 2750H. and click Wireframe. 24 On the View Control Bar. 15 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material property. and click OK twice. click . 16 On the View Control Bar. double-click North. click Modify. Using Mass Elements with Design Options | 751 . 14 In the drawing area. TIP Use the snap control lines to assist in placing the domes. click Modify. 22 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material property. click Place Mass. Placing arc dome mass elements 17 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. and click Wireframe. 21 In the drawing area. click . 23 In the Project Browser. select the 2 semi barrel vaults. 19 Place 3 arc domes as shown. select the three arc domes. and click . and click . and click OK twice. 18 In the Type Selector.

34 In the Design Options dialog box. under Views (all). click Visibility/Graphics. click Make Primary. and click OK. In this exercise. 29 In the Project Browser. click Save As and save the file as m_Massing_Design_Options. You can now see the shapes that are part of the curved design option. 36 On the File menu. Because it is likely that your client prefers the design option with curved shapes. click . 33 On the Design Options toolbar. you placed mass elements into Design Options. and click OK. You then switched between different design options to get different versions of the design.rvt. 30 On the View menu.Create a Design Option set 26 Select the three arc domes and the two semi barrel vaults. select Curved from the Design Option menu. 32 Click the value for Design Option. 28 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog box. select Curved. you can make it the primary option. 35 Click Close and close the warning that displays. click . double-click {3D}. select Curved and. 31 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. clear Sloped. 752 | Chapter 22 Massing . Creating Building Components from Mass Elements In this lesson. under Option. you use building component creation tools to make building components from mass faces. 27 On the Design Options toolbar. click the Design Options tab.

7 Place the cursor in the drawing area and select the face of the in-place mass family as shown.Brick on CMU. 1 In the Project Browser. 3 On the View menu. 2 On the View toolbar. click . double-click {3D}. you pick massing faces to create walls. click the Training Files icon. click to show the massing model.Creating Walls by Picking Faces In this exercise.rvt file located in the Metric folder. 5 In the Type Selector. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. The southeast wall of the mass model is now Brick on CMU. Creating walls 4 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. select Basic Wall: Exterior . click Wall by Face. and select Wall Centerline for Loc Line. Open the m_Massing_Building_Components. click Open. under Views (all). 6 On the Options Bar. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 753 . In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click Orient ➤ Southeast.

double-click Level 3. 13 Select the face indicated by the arrow as shown. 14 In the Project Browser. click Wall by Face. under Views (all). select Curtain Wall : Storefront. NOTE If a Warning dialog box is displayed. 16 In the Type Selector. alerting you that the highlighted walls overlap. under Floor Plans. 12 On the Design Bar.8 In the Project Browser. 15 On the Design Bar. 17 Select the 3 faces shown in red. click Wall by Face. 9 On the Design Bar. Click Wall by Face. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 5. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 1. under Views (all). 11 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). ignore the warning and continue selecting wall faces. 754 | Chapter 22 Massing . 10 Select all the faces shown in red.

18 Select all the faces shown in red. under Floor Plans. If desired. and click Wireframe. You can then edit the profile to clean up the overlapping geometry. In this exercise. You can ignore the warnings about walls overlapping. 20 On the View Control Bar. click Wall by Face. Creating Floors by Picking Faces In this exercise. under Views (all). 21 On the Design Bar. you can select the overlapping curtain wall. 19 In the Project Browser. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 755 . you picked several massing faces and created both basic walls and curtain walls. 22 Select all the faces shown in red. click . double-click Level 9. you pick massing faces to create floors. 23 Open the 3D view to see the results. and click Edit Profile on the Options Bar.

Curtain Systems. 4 Click OK.Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. 756 | Chapter 22 Massing . 2 On the View menu. double-click {3D}. and click OK. under Views (all). and Walls. click Visibility/Graphics. 1 In the Project Browser. 6 On the Options Bar. select all levels. click Floor Area Faces. 3 On the Model Categories tab. 7 In the Floor Area Faces dialog box. clear Curtain Panels.rvt. Creating floors 5 Select the in-place mass family Mass 1.

12 On the Options Bar.8 On the View menu. clear Exclude Options. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 757 . and select the three 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements and the mirrored 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box masses as shown. 10 On the Options Bar. 9 Press CTRL. and click OK. 11 In the Floor Area Faces dialog box. select Levels 1-4. click Floor Area Faces. click Orient ➤ Northeast.

21 On the View toolbar. under Views (all).13 Press CTRL. 22 In the Project Browser. under Schedules/Quantities. This shows you the gross floor area of each mass. 20 On the Options Bar. verify that Select Multiple is selected. click Floor by Face. 19 Drag a pick box over the entire model to select all the floor area faces. 15 In the Floor Area Faces dialog box. click Create Floors. select Level 1. and select the semi vault barrel mass elements and the 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm box mass element as shown. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 1. 14 On the Options Bar. click Floor Area Faces. 17 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. double-click Mass Schedule. 758 | Chapter 22 Massing . 18 On the Options Bar. 16 In the Project Browser. click . and click OK.

3 Select the top face of the left 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element as shown. You then viewed a massing schedule that listed the gross floor area of each mass in the model. 1 In the Project Browser. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 759 .In this exercise.rvt. click Roof by Face. Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. double-click {3D}. you pick massing faces to create roofs. Creating roofs 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. you created floors by first creating floor area faces and then picking those faces to create floors. under Views (all). Creating Roofs by Picking Faces In this exercise.

click Create Roof. select Curtain Panels. click Visibility/Graphics. 11 On the View menu.400mm. Curtain Systems. NOTE Each time you select a face on an instance of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element family.4 In the Type Selector. and Walls. select Basic Roof : Generic . and also on the top faces of the 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box mass elements. Your model should now look as shown. 12 Click the Model Categories tab. click Create Roof. and then click OK. 7 With the Roof by Face command still selected. 6 Create the same roof on the remaining 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. This creates the roof and lets you pick another face to create a new roof. select Sloped Glazing in the Type Selector. 5 On the Options Bar. 9 On the Options Bar. 10 Repeat these steps to create a sloped glazing roof on the other semi barrel vault mass element. click Create Roof. 760 | Chapter 22 Massing . 8 Select the left semi barrel vault mass element.

double-click {3D}.rvt. 5 Press CTRL. Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. and select both halves of the left arc dome mass element as shown. 4 On the Options Bar. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 761 . be sure that Select Multiple is selected. Creating Curtain Systems In this exercise. select Curtain System: 1500 x 1500mm. 3 In the Type Selector. under Views (all). 1 In the Project Browser. click Curtain System by Face. you created roofs by picking faces of massing families.In this exercise. you create curtain systems by picking non-planar massing faces.

7 Repeat the same steps for the two other domes. click Create System. 762 | Chapter 22 Massing .6 On the Options Bar.

Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 763 . you created curtain systems on non-planar faces. 10 Click Modify to exit the command. click Create System. you create curtain systems by picking non-planar massing faces.8 With the Curtain System by Face command still selected. Editing Elements Created from Massings In this exercise. In this exercise. 9 On the Options Bar. select the blended form on the in-place mass.

under Views (all). and Walls. 4 Select the box mass family as shown and click . and click OK. click Duplicate. 9 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK. 6 In the Type Properties dialog box. Curtain Systems. Next. and then click OK. enter 30000 for Width.rvt. Roofs. 2 On the View menu. click OK. you resize one of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. click Visibility/Graphics. 7 Enter Larger Size for Name. 8 In the Type Properties dialog box. double-click Site. 1 In the Project Browser. 764 | Chapter 22 Massing . clear Curtain Panels.Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. click Edit/New. 3 On the Model Categories tab. under Floor Plans. Floors. 5 In the Element Properties dialog box.

clear Exclude Options.10 On the Design Bar. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 765 . 13 Use the Move tool to position the box and dome families as shown. click Modify. 11 On the Options Bar. 12 Drag a selection box over the box family and the dome family. 14 Open the 3D view to see the result.

you remake several of the building elements to fit to the new size of the massing family. 766 | Chapter 22 Massing . click Remake. under Views (all). 18 In the Exclude Hosts dialog box. TIP To select the curtain wall. 16 Zoom in to the upper right-hand portion of the model and select the three walls shown. 17 On the Options Bar. remember that there are two curtain walls of this type that are overlapping here. 15 In the Project Browser. click . double-click Level 1. Also. under Floor Plans. 19 On the View toolbar. In the next steps. press TAB several times until the Status Bar indicates you are highlighting the Walls : Curtain Wall : Storefront. click OK. you want to select the smaller one.The curtain system is no longer aligned with the dome family.

click Remake. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 767 . 21 On the Options Bar.TIP If you temporarily hide one of the resized walls. you will notice that Revit Building resized the floors. 20 Select the roof as shown.

Turn off massing 2 Click on the View toolbar to turn off massing.22 Select the arc dome curtain system. In this exercise. you switch the visibility of the view between the massing elements and the model (shell) elements. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility In this exercise. you changed the size of an existing mass family. The 3D view now shows only the building shell. You then modified building elements to resize with the new mass family.rvt. and click Remake. 768 | Chapter 22 Massing . Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. 1 Open the 3D view.

4 Rename the view 3D . 6 On the Model Categories tab. such as columns and an extruded roof. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 769 . If desired. 9 Select Mass.Now you create a 3D view that shows only the massing. 5 On the View menu. 7 Clear one of the check boxes. and click Duplicate. You might create the model shown.Massing only. In this exercise. click Visibility/Graphics. click All to select all categories. This concludes the massing tutorial. right-click on the 3D view. to the building shell. 8 Click None to clear the selection. 3 In the Project Browser. you switched the visibility of the 3D view to show either the building shell or the mass model. you can continue adding additional Revit modeling components. and click OK.

770 | Chapter 22 Massing .

you use the site tools in Autodesk Revit Building to add and modify site components within a project. 771 .Site 23 In this tutorial.

convert the data to a table. click Toposurface. expand Floor Plans. 772 | Chapter 23 Site . click the Training Files icon. The scale of this view is 1 : 100. you use site tools to add and modify site components within a project. Creating a Toposurface In this exercise. 5 Click in the drawing area to specify a point. 4 On the Options Bar. Create a toposurface by adding elevation points 1 In the Project Browser. The exercises are sequential and must be done in order.rvt file located in the Metric folder. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Open the m_First_Project. you add parking and planting components and create a parking space schedule. click Point. you import contour data from a DWG file and use it to create the project toposurface. click Open. This project file was created using the default metric template. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed. In the second part of this exercise. After grading the topography to create a slightly elevated and flat surface. enter an absolute elevation of 3000 mm. and walkways. islands. In the final exercises. You add subregions to the area to define parking areas. and then modify the data. you create a toposurface by manually placing elevation points in the site plan. You add property lines manually. and click Site. right-click in the Design Bar.Using Site Tools In this lesson. 3 On the Design Bar. You start by importing the site contour data and converting it to 3D contour data. you add a building pad to the site. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Using the first method. and double-click Site. expand Views (all). 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. you create a toposurface using two different methods.

enter an absolute elevation of 6000 mm. TIP Do not be concerned with the exact quantity or placement of the points. A toposurface must have at least three elevation points. Triangulation boundaries display only after you add the third elevation point. Use the following illustration as a reference. The circle should be approximately 55000 mm wide.6 Add two additional points to create a triangle. 8 On the Options Bar. Using Site Tools | 773 . 7 Add additional points to create a contour circle similar to the following illustration. 9 Add a concentric circle of 6000 mm elevation points inside the 3000 mm contour.

click Site Settings. under Increment. click Model Graphics Style. 11 On the Design Bar. 15 On the View Control Bar. 12 On the Settings menu. enter 1500 mm. and 18000 mm absolute elevations.10 Repeat the previous step for 9000 mm. click . Use the following illustration as a reference. 774 | Chapter 23 Site . 13 In the Site Settings dialog box. and click Shading with Edges. 14 On the View toolbar. under Additional Contours. This setting reduces the quantity of contour lines in the view. Try to add each circle concentrically inside the previously created circle. 12000 mm. click Finish Surface. 15000 mm. and click OK.

under Views (all). 20 Zoom in around the Level 2 head. rename the level Base Site Elevation.16 On the View toolbar. Under Layer/Level Colors. it is considered an import symbol. and press ENTER. Under Import or Link. on the Standard toolbar. DGN. Using Site Tools | 775 . 29 Select the imported topography. Use imported contour data to create a toposurface 17 Select the toposurface and. Until it is exploded. modify the level names and elevations. click Yes. 26 In the Import/Link dialog box: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. and double-click South. 23 Click the Level 1 text. and press ENTER. double-click Site. 19 On the Design Bar. under Views (all). under Floor Plans. click Modify. click the Training Files icon. and press ENTER. 24 In the Project Browser. click and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. clear layer 0 and layer C_bench_mark. SAT. 25 On the File menu. Before importing the contour data. 21 Click the Level 2 text. click Import/Link ➤ DWG. select Current view only and choose Select for Layers. 28 On the Design Bar. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). DXF. select Preserve colors. click to delete it. 22 When you are asked if you want to rename corresponding views. You are immediately prompted to select the layers you want to import. Click Open. 27 In the Select Layers/Levels to Import/Link dialog box. click the elevation value. and click OK. and zoom out until you can see the entire topography within the view. click Modify. 18 In the Project Browser. Click Yes when prompted to rename corresponding views. enter 1000 mm. Select the c_Import_Site file located in the Common folder. rename the level Basement.

click Modify. 38 In the Add Points from Selected Layers dialog box. This ensures the import symbol is not accidently moved. 33 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. click Pin Position.30 On the Edit menu. When you select the import symbol. 35 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. Notice the elevation symbols are displayed. 32 On the View menu. 31 On the Design Bar. when the edges highlight. you are prompted to select the layer that will generate the elevation points. and then click OK. clear C_INDX. 776 | Chapter 23 Site . click Toposurface. click the Annotations Categories tab. 34 Under Visibility. select it. 37 Place the cursor over the imported symbol and. click Visibility/Graphics. The import symbol is converted to elevation points and contours. clear Elevations. and click OK. click Use Imported ➤ Import Instance. 36 On the Design Bar.

this project file is required in its current state. Using Site Tools | 777 . NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. you sketch the property lines and then convert the sketch into survey data.39 On the Design Bar. 43 On the File menu. Notice the change in this toposurface elevation is minor. 42 On the View toolbar. click Finish Surface. name the project Site-in progress. you add property lines using two methods. Using the second method. 44 Navigate to your preferred folder. you create property lines by entering survey data into a table of distances and bearings. Adding Property Lines. click Save As. click and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. 40 On the View toolbar.rvt. Adding Property Lines In this exercise. 45 Proceed to the next exercise. click . and click Save. 41 Enter ZF to zoom to the extents of the image. Using the first method.

3 In the Property Line Creation dialog box. and click OK. sketch the shape shown in the following illustration. Although you can use your preferred sketching method. Sketch property lines 1 In the Project Browser. Select and delete the right vertical line. under Floor Plans. do so before continuing. select Create property lines by sketching. On the Design Bar.rvt. click Finish Sketch. NOTE The weight of the sketch lines has been increased in the illustration for training purposes. Site-in progress. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. Click Modify. If you have not completed the previous exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. add an arc line on the right. click Property Line. click Lines. The property lines are displayed with a dash-dot line type on the topography. 778 | Chapter 23 Site . click Lines. 6 On the Design Bar. double-click Site. 4 On the Design Bar. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. you can quickly create the shape by doing the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Sketch the rectangle first.This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the project file in its current state. Using the 3-point Arc tool.

on the Standard toolbar. select the lines. 9 In the warning dialog box. 8 On the Options Bar. click OK. Create property lines using a table of distances and bearings 11 Select the property lines and. click Insert three times until there are four rows of deed data. select Edit Table. to delete them. 10 In the Property Lines dialog box.7 Move the cursor over the property lines and. 13 In the Property Line Creation dialog box. and click OK. when they highlight. 15 Starting in Row #1. enter the following deed data for rows 1 through 4: ■ ■ ■ ■ 100000 S 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" W 100000 N 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" E Using Site Tools | 779 . 14 In the Property Lines dialog box. informing you that converting a property line sketch to a table cannot be undone. click OK. NOTE The values displayed in the Property Lines dialog box depend on the exact dimensions and location of your sketch. select Create property lines by table of distances and bearings. click Property Line. click 12 On the Design Bar. A warning dialog box is displayed.

Tag property lines 18 On the Settings menu. clear Leader. click Tag. 26 Under Visibility. 19 In the Tags dialog box.dwg and click OK. NOTE If the Drafting tab of the Design Bar is not visible. the visibility of the imported symbol needs to be turned off. 28 On the Options Bar. open the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Families\Annotations folder. 22 Select M_Property Line Tag. click to place it. If the gap is not closed. 24 On the View menu. right-click in the Design Bar. and click Shading with Edges. click to place the property lines. Before adding property line segment tags. and open the folder. click Model Graphics Style. clear the checkbox for c_Import_Site. the distance that displayed under From last to first point now displays Closed. 30 Tag the three remaining property lines. click Training Files. 20 Click Load. the original DWG file remains visible in the view. The property lines are displayed at the tip of the cursor. review your data entry and make necessary corrections. click Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 23 In the Tags dialog box. 16 Click OK. The tags display more prominently in this view. 25 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. This means there is no gap in the property lines. 17 Move the cursor over the topographic surface and using the following illustration as a reference.Notice that after you complete the last line. 780 | Chapter 23 Site . click Visibility/Graphics. and click Drafting. scroll down the list of categories until you find Property Lines and notice there are no tags loaded for Property Line Segments. 29 Zoom in and place the cursor over the center of the north property line. Even though you converted the symbol to elevations points and contours. 27 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. When the tag displays at the tip of the cursor. and click OK.rfa and click Open. 31 On the View Control Bar. click the Imported Categories tab. 21 In the left pane of the Open dialog box. notice a tag is now loaded for property line segments.

click Save. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. Using Site Tools | 781 . In the final step. Create an object style subcategory for specific elevation 1 On the View Control Bar. Site-in progress. this project file is required in its current state. and click Wireframe. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 3 On the Model Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog box. In the Object Styles dialog box. you created two sets of property lines.32 On the File menu. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. In the next exercise. You created the second set of property lines directly from deed data and located it on the topography. enter the name Working Contour. 2 On the Settings menu. click Object Styles. The first set you sketched and then converted into deed data. click Model Graphics Style. and click OK. click New.rvt. you loaded and tagged the property line segments. 4 Under Modify Subcategories. the new object style subcategory is displayed under Topography. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings. you modify site settings and contour line visibility. you create a new object style subcategory to mark a specific elevation. scroll down the list of categories and expand Topography. verify that it is a subcategory of Topography. You also modify the site settings so that the new subcategory is displayed at the specific elevation. 5 In the New Subcategory dialog box. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings In this exercise. In this exercise.

12 On the File menu. Working Contour. The next exercise requires a new dataset. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. specify the following settings for the Working Contour subcategory: ■ ■ ■ Verify that the Line Weights are 1. 11 Click OK. click Site Settings.6 In the Object Styles dialog box. Click Yes when prompted to save changes. click Close. enter 1000. Under Range Type. select Dash dot. 782 | Chapter 23 Site . The object style subcategory. select Single Value. Under Line Pattern. Creating Topographic Subregions. 10 Under Additional Contours. select a shade of Brown. Under Line Color. 9 In the Site Settings dialog box. under Contour Line Display. Modify site settings 8 On the Settings menu. select Working Contour. Under Subcategory. 7 Click OK. In this exercise. displays on the topography only at the elevation you specified. specify an interval of 1000 mm passing through elevation 0.0 mm. you created a new object style subcategory for topography. You then modified the site setting to distinguish a specific contour interval using this subcategory. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ Under Start.

Sketch initial parking area 1 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. Although the exact dimensions are not important. try to replicate the location and proportion. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. and use the fillet arc sketching tool to add the curved corner. TIP You can either sketch the shape freehand or draw two perpendicular rectangles. use the trim tool to create just one closed loop. click the Training Files icon. parking areas. Creating Topographic Subregions In this exercise. Using Site Tools | 783 . click Subregion. and islands. you may see fewer contour lines than in the images shown in this exercise. Creating a subregion does not result in separate surfaces. such as material. it merely defines an area of the surface where you can apply a different set of properties. parking areas. NOTE In the Metric dataset.rvt file located in the Metric folder. 3 Using the sketching tools on the Options Bar. sketch the shape highlighted in the illustration below. you create subregions in order to define roads. 2 On the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. you create topographic subregions to define roads. the vertical rectangle is approximately 19500 mm wide.In the next exercise. The horizontal rectangle is approximately 7500 mm wide. click Lines. and islands. click Open. Open the m_Site.

the subregion will end at the edge of the defined topography. and double-click Topography Schedule. click the Value for Material. You can create a toposurface schedule to report information regarding each toposurface region. Although you can select each toposurface region separately and apply different properties to each. Open the topography schedule 10 In the Project Browser. select Site . click Shading with Edges. and click OK. Notice that the new subregion uses the material Site . enter Parking for Name. 784 | Chapter 23 Site . Specify subregion properties for parking area 4 On the Design Bar. expand Schedules/Quantities.Tarmacadam for Name. click Properties. and then click the down arrow to open the Material dialog box. 9 On the View menu.Notice that the left edge of the subregion overhangs the site topography. under Materials and Finishes. 8 On the Design Bar. When you finish the sketch in a later step. 5 In the Element Properties dialog box.Tarmacadam. click Finish Sketch. 6 In the Materials dialog box. under Identity Data. 7 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK. the toposurface and its contour data remain one element.

The two additional parking areas in the top portion of the sketch must be at least 5500 mm deep to accommodate parking spaces. 21 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. click Subregion. double-click Site. In this training project. 16 On the Design Bar. double-click Topography Schedule. This topography schedule uses a filter to omit unnamed topographic regions. and use the split and trim tools to clean up the sketch. Mirror the arc line to create an exact duplicate. Delete overlapping lines. Modify the subregion 11 In the Project Browser. Using Site Tools | 785 . additional subregions are required to create a more attractive parking area. 22 In the upper-right parking area. 15 Add new lines and modify the existing lines to create a boundary similar to the one shown in the following illustration. 14 On the Options Bar. As you create new subregions. 18 In the Project Browser. double-click Site. 13 Select the subregion you created in the previous steps. you apply different materials such as grass and concrete. under Floor Plans. use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the parking island shown in the following illustration. click Finish Sketch. and click Shading with Edges. they display within this schedule.NOTE Your values may differ depending on your sketch. and click Hidden Line. Add additional subregions 19 In the Project Browser. Precise dimensions are not important at this time. 12 On the View Control Bar. Within each subregion. click Edit Boundary. click Model Graphics Style. Notice that the project area has increased. 17 On the View Control Bar. click Lines. under Schedules/Quantities. click Model Graphics Style. TIP Add the two upper parking areas as rectangles. 20 On the Design Bar.

24 In the Element Properties dialog box. under Identity Data. click Finish Sketch. click the Value for Material. select Site . under Floor Plans. Using the techniques learned in previous steps. add the three additional subregions shown in the following illustration.Grass. You must sketch each region separately. click Properties. double-click Topography Schedule. and then click the down arrow to open the Material dialog box. enter Island . 25 In the Materials dialog box. 29 In the Project Browser. double-click Site. and click OK. 27 On the Design Bar.23 On the Design Bar. Notice that the schedule has been updated with the new information. and apply the material Site . under Schedules/Quantities.Grass for Name. 786 | Chapter 23 Site . and click OK. under Materials and Finishes.Grass for Name.Grass. 26 In the Element Properties dialog box. 28 In the Project Browser. Name each region Island .

under Schedules/Quantities. Notice that the schedule has been updated. double-click Site. 34 Use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the new concrete walkway shown in the following illustration.Cast-in-Situ Concrete . Add the concrete walkway 31 In the Project Browser. Name the subregion Walkway. double-click Topography Schedule. Using Site Tools | 787 . and apply the material Concrete . click Lines. click Finish Sketch. 33 On the Design Bar.walkway. click Subregion.30 In the Project Browser. 32 On the Design Bar. 35 On the Design Bar. WARNING Subregions cannot intersect. so you need to offset coincident lines between the subregions by 100 mm. under Floor Plans.

there is still only one toposurface. you must either edit the entire toposurface or split the toposurface. Notice that the schedule has been updated.rvt. Site tutorial-in progress. this project file is required in its current state. 36 In the Project Browser. and click Save. 788 | Chapter 23 Site . 39 Proceed to the next exercise. When you use the grading tool.rvt. 38 Navigate to your preferred folder. Grading the Toposurface In this exercise. Grading the Toposurface. name the project Site tutorial-in progress. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. If you want to modify the elevation points of a particular subregion. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Save As. you grade the toposurface to create a slightly elevated and flat parking area. the existing topography is demolished and a new toposurface is created where you can edit the elevation points. under Schedules/Quantities. double-click Topography Schedule. 37 On the File menu.NOTE Although several toposurface subregions now exist within this project.

2 Select the toposurface. and click OK. 7 In the Graded Region dialog box. 3 On the Options Bar. under Phasing. see the tutorial. The display settings are controlled by the phase filter. Copying internal points lets you delete only the points in the parking area without altering the remaining elevation points. select Copy Internal Points. select Existing for Phase Created. Notice that the toposurface displays differently. click Graded Region. 5 On the Design Bar.Modify toposurface phase assignment 1 In the Project Browser. and click Select and Edit. 6 On the Design Bar. double-click Site. Using Phasing. RELATED For more information regarding phasing. 4 In the Element Properties dialog box. click . stating that subregions must have the same Phase Created parameter and the same Phase Demolished parameter as the host toposurface. Using Site Tools | 789 . click Modify. A warning dialog box is displayed. under Floor Plans. Click OK to set the subregion phase to match the toposurface. 8 Select the topographic surface.

790 | Chapter 23 Site . The intent is to select all the elevation points inside and around the parking area. demolished. Make sure the pick box allows a significant buffer around the area.Delete elevation points 9 Draw a pick box outside the main parking area as in the following illustration. Notice the toposurface displays with different colors representing the different phases: existing. and new. 10 Press DELETE.

16 Add elevation points outside the perimeter of the entire parking area and walkway as in the following illustration. 12 Draw another pick box around the driveway and remaining parking area as in the following illustration. 13 Press DELETE. Using Site Tools | 791 . Place the points until there are no contour lines crossing the parking area or walkway. Add new elevation points 14 On the Design Bar. 15 On the Options Bar. click Point. specify an Absolute Elevation of 5500 mm. and click Hidden Line. click Model Graphics Style.11 On the View Control Bar.

and click Shading with Edges. The phase filter for this view allows both the new and demolished surfaces to display. and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. This accounts for the red surface that you see in this view. click Model Graphics Style. 792 | Chapter 23 Site . 18 On the View toolbar.17 On the Design Bar. click View Properties. 19 On the View Control Bar. click . click Finish Surface. The parking and walkway areas are now elevated and flat. 20 On the View toolbar. Delete the demolished toposurface from the project 21 On the View menu. click .

Using Site Tools | 793 . 27 Proceed to the next exercise. nor can you add it without first adding a topographic surface. specify Existing for Phase. 4 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. Only the components created in or assigned to the Existing phase display in this view. this project file is required in its current state. 23 Select the toposurface. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. If you have an existing building model. specify New Construction for Phase. because you assigned it to the Existing phase before grading. Adding a Building Pad In this exercise. When you add a building pad. Add a building pad to the project 1 In the Project Browser. you can delete it. click Lines. and click OK. the Pick Walls command is active. Therefore. double-click Site. under Phasing. NOTE By default. you can pick the exterior walls to define the building pad.22 In the Element Properties dialog box. sketch an approximate replica of the outline shown in the following illustration. Because this toposurface is no longer required for this project. A building pad is a toposurface hosted element and cannot be added to any other element. click View Properties. you create a building pad. 26 On the File menu. under Floor Plans. The building pad should border the concrete walkway on the right and the upper parking area. Site tutorial-in progress.rvt. under Phasing. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. and delete it. 25 In the Element Properties dialog box. 24 On the View menu. click Save. Adding a Building Pad. it automatically cuts a hole in the toposurface and places it at the depth you specify. only the original toposurface displays. and click OK. 3 On the Design Bar. click Pad. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. Only the graded topography displays.

click Finish Sketch. and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. . click pad. 7 On the View toolbar.5 On the Design Bar. and click Shading with Edges. 6 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style. click 8 On the View toolbar. . Notice the new building 794 | Chapter 23 Site .

click Save. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. this project file is required in its current state. 6 Use the flip arrows so it displays as shown below and move it toward the lower left corner of the parking area. double-click Site. Adding Site Components.rvt. Adding Site Components In this exercise. Site tutorial-in progress. click Modify. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. 3 In the Type Selector. 5 On the Design Bar. you add parking and planting components to the site surface. 4 Zoom in on the upper parking area that borders the building pad and add a parking component to the area. Using Site Tools | 795 . click Parking Component. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Add parking components 1 In the Project Browser. select M_Parking Space: 4800 x 2400mm .9 On the File menu. and select the parking space. under Floor Plans.90 deg. NOTE Make sure you place the parking space a slight distance above the building pad. 10 Proceed to the next exercise.

8 On the View toolbar. 11 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. . click spaces. and add a tree to each of the two round parking islands as shown below. 796 | Chapter 23 Site . under Floor Plans. and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. . click Site Component. click 9 On the View toolbar. Verify that the spaces are horizontally aligned and the left edge of each space is aligned with the right edge of the previous space.7 Add 6 additional parking spaces to the right of the first space. TIP You could also use the Array tool to accomplish this task. double-click Site. 12 In the Type Selector. choose any tree type. Notice the new parking Add planting components to the site 10 In the Project Browser.

15 On the View toolbar. click . click . Using Site Tools | 797 . Notice how the trees vertically attach to the toposurface. 14 On the View toolbar.13 Add some more trees outside the parking area as shown below. and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles.

16 On the File menu. In the following exercise. 4 Select the line for the category Planting Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Planting Tag: Boxed. the landscape shown in the previous illustration has been rendered. Tagging Site and Parking Components In this exercise. 6 Zoom in to the upper parking area and around the trees. click Hidden Line. Site tutorial-in progress. Notice each is tagged with no instance mark. this project file is required in its current state. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. select the line for the category Parking Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Parking Tag: Boxed.rvt. In the following illustration. 3 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog box. double-click Site. and click OK. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 798 | Chapter 23 Site . click Tag All Not Tagged. click Apply. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans.NOTE Plants are displayed as simple geometry unless rendered. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. Tag site components 1 In the Project Browser. click Save. and click Apply. 5 On the View menu. you use a parking schedule to number the parking spaces. Tagging Site and Parking Components. you tag the planting and parking components that you added previously.

7 Under Fields. Using Site Tools | 799 . 8 Under Fields. and under Heading. click Save. 2 In the New Schedule dialog box. Create a parking schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Mark. select Type. enter Space. and click Add. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 5 Under Available fields. you can resize the column width by dragging the column edges. and under Heading.NOTE Site components can also be numbered by clicking the tag number and changing the value. Creating Parking Space Schedules. You can use a parking schedule to report the quantity and area of each type of parking space. select Type. you create a parking schedule. this project file is required in its current state. and click OK. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. select Mark. 6 Click the Formatting tab. Creating Parking Space Schedules In the final exercise of this tutorial. click Schedule/Quantities. click the Fields tab. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. and click Add. 7 On the File menu. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. select Parking for Category. 4 Under Available fields. and click OK.rvt. enter Size. If necessary. Site tutorial-in progress. The parking schedule is displayed.

the selected space highlights in the Site plan. This allows you to know which space you are numbering. double-click Site. 12 In the Site plan. zoom in around the upper parking lot where you previously added the parking spaces. 15 On the File menu. Notice that the parking spaces in the Site plan update automatically. 800 | Chapter 23 Site .9 On the Window menu. 11 On the Window menu. under Space. 14 In the Parking Schedule. click Save. Also notice that when you place the cursor in the parking schedule. click Tile. number the first three spaces consecutively. under Views (all). 13 In the Parking Schedule. under Floor Plans. This closes all the views except the parking schedule. finish numbering the remaining spaces. This tiles the Site plan next to the parking schedule. click Close Hidden Windows. under Space. 10 In the Project Browser.

you create a model group for a typical hotel guest room. 801 . Saving a group to a library gives you the ability to share the group with other team members working on the same project. and modify repetitive units. all instances in the building model are updated. creating a library of groups for your office can reduce the amount of work needed to create. you can create reusable entities that represent layouts common to many building projects. For example. You can also nest groups within other groups. and then you create a group for a typical toilet room that is nested within the guest room group.Grouping 24 Using the grouping functionality in Autodesk Revit Building. Modifications to the nested group are automatically included in the host group. In this tutorial. Because existing groups can be duplicated and then customized for another purpose. By grouping objects. This functionality ensures consistency within and across projects. or with those working on a different project. you also simplify the modification process. you not only simplify their placement. and all new instances that you place contain the modifications. It also gives all those with access to the library the ability to load any group from the library into their project drawing. place. when you make changes to a single instance of a model group.

11 Proceed to the next exercise. 5 On the Edit toolbar. Examples of the types of units for which groups are intended include hotel rooms. and press ENTER. you create a model group for a typical hotel room. You zoom in so that you can select objects in the room accurately. 9 On the File menu. click the Training Files icon. click Save As. classrooms. and click Save. 10 Navigate to your preferred directory. and click Rename. Open the m_Grouping. 802 | Chapter 24 Grouping . Create a group from drawing objects 4 Press and hold CTRL. 7 Right-click Group 1. expand Groups. Specify a view 1 In the Project Browser. and two nightstands. 2 Enter ZR to zoom to a specific region. and expand Model. The objects are now grouped and can be placed in the drawing as a single entity. click . Creating a Group In this exercise. 6 In the Project Browser.rvt. 8 Enter Typical guest room. you learn how to use model groups to collect related elements to simplify placement of repetitive units. The view is zoomed in to the selected room. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. desk. and double-click Level 2.Creating Groups In this lesson. You can also update all instances of a group in the building model by editing a single instance of the group and saving the changes. Placing a Group. expand Views (all). You create the group by selecting drawing objects and grouping them as a single entity. and select the bed. and typical office layouts. name the file Grouping-in progress. chair. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. click Open. After you create a model group. you can place instances of the group in the building model using various methods.rvt file located in the Metric folder. 3 Draw a rectangle around the populated room. expand Floor Plans.

8 Select the wall abutted by the desk and tub of the original instance as the axis of reflection. select the original instance of the group.Placing a Group In this exercise. 2 Drag the group origin to the wall intersection directly below the entry door. Drag a group into position 3 In the Project Browser. Mirror a group 6 In the drawing area. you use drag and drop functionality to place a new instance of a group in the floor plan. Creating Groups | 803 . Modify the origin of a group 1 In the drawing area. select the group. click . Grouping-in progress. A second instance of the group is added to the drawing. as shown. 5 On the Options Bar. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise.rvt. click Finish. 7 On the Edit toolbar. 4 Snap the origin to the wall intersection below the entry door. using an adjacent wall as the axis of reflection. select Typical guest room and drag it to the room below the original instance of the group. You also mirror an existing instance of a group.

all instances of the same group in the drawing are updated. When you finish the editing routine. select the mirrored instance of the Typical guest room group. 9 On the File menu. Modifying a Group In this exercise. click Save. you make changes to a single instance of a group. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. 1 In the drawing area.rvt.You should now have three instances of the Typical guest room group in your model: two with the original orientation and one mirrored. 2 On the Options Bar. 804 | Chapter 24 Grouping . Grouping-in progress. as shown. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. Modifying a Group. click Edit Group.

All instances of the Typical guest room are updated to reflect the change. 6 Click the exterior wall as the move end point. and is contained in every new instance of the host group that you place in the building model. When you make changes to a nested group. Creating Nested Groups | 805 . Creating Nested Groups. The edge of the desk is aligned with the exterior wall. Creating Nested Groups In this lesson. 8 On the File menu. the host group is also updated. 4 On the Edit toolbar. This ensures that the modifications are propagated when each new instance of the host group is added to the building model and also when each stand-alone instance of the nested group is added.The elements in this instance of the group remain displayed in their object style. All other elements in the model are grayed out. you create a group that you add to a previously created group. and select the desk and chair. click . click Save. 7 On the Design Bar. 3 Press and hold CTRL. 9 Proceed to the next lesson. click Finish Group. The new group is considered nested within the host group. 5 Click near the left edge of the desk as the move start point.

expand Model. and the wall separating the bathroom and closet. Change the origin of a group 5 Select the original instance of Typical guest room. 806 | Chapter 24 Grouping . 6 Drag the origin of the group to the intersection of the corridor wall and the guest room wall nearest the tub. click . Grouping-in progress. and press ENTER. all instances of the host group are updated to contain the nested group. In the selection. 3 In the Project Browser.Creating a Nested Group In this exercise. and click Rename. expand Groups. 2 On the Edit toolbar. right-click Group 1. Create a group 1 In the original instance of the Typical guest room group. When you nest the toilet room in the guest room.rvt. The new group is then nested within the original group. you create a group for a toilet room that you add to the guest room group. make sure you also include both doors and their host walls. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous lesson. select all the elements that make up the toilet room and closet. 4 Enter Typical toilet room. which acts as the host.

The elements of the group are grayed out in every instance. Add a component to the model 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and all instances are updated to include the nested group. verify that Multiple is clear. click Add To Group. click Component. select m_Pedestal_Sink-3D.Create a nested group 7 On the Options Bar. 8 On the Design Bar. The Typical toilet room group is nested in the Typical guest room group. 9 On the Options Bar. click Finish Group. you add a component to a single instance of the nested toilet room group. When you edit the group to add the component. Modifying a Nested Group. 10 In the drawing area. click Save. 2 In the Type Selector. click Edit Group. Because the modified group is nested. 11 On the Design Bar. all instances of the nested group are updated in the building model.rvt. Modifying a Nested Group In this exercise. the host group is also updated so that new instances of either group contain the new component. place the cursor over one of the toilet rooms and press the spacebar three times to rotate the sink to the orientation shown. select the Typical toilet room group. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. everything else is available for selection. Grouping-in progress. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 In the drawing area. Creating Nested Groups | 807 . 12 On the File menu.

click Edit Group. 9 On the Design Bar. 7 Press TAB.4 Place the sink on the wall with the toilet in any instance of the Typical toilet room. click Finish Group. Edit a nested group 6 Move the cursor over the same instance of the toilet room group in which you placed the sink. 11 On the Design Bar. 5 On the Design Bar. 8 On the Options Bar. 10 In the drawing area. 808 | Chapter 24 Grouping . and select the nested toilet room group. select the sink. click Modify. click Add To Group.

rvt. you use the Duplicate command to create a group based on an existing group. When you load the group from the library into a new project. you draw an axis of reflection at the midpoint of the building model so that the group is mirrored from its location at the top of the building model to a location at the bottom. you save it to a library where it can be accessed by other team members for use in other projects. You then place the new group in the building model. Working with Groups In this lesson. and click Rename. Working with Groups | 809 . and then save the tags as an attached detail group. you add door tags to a group. you can then work with it in the context of the new project. right-click Typical guest room. because attached detail groups require more manual manipulation. You then customize the new group for use in the current building model. Duplicating a Group In this exercise. Grouping-in progress. Use Project Browser to duplicate a group 1 In the Project Browser. but automatically create a new group as part of the process to fix the group. you work with groups in order to use them in the most efficient manner within and across projects. In subsequent exercises. and click Duplicate. 13 Proceed to the next lesson. After you finish the modified group. click Save. having created a group that represents a typical layout. You create a group based on an existing group by using the Duplicate command. 2 Right-click Typical guest room 2. Working with Groups. You work with the attached detail group in a different way than you had previously worked with host and nested groups. Lastly. 3 Enter Corner guest room. and press ENTER. under Groups.All instances of the nested group are updated with the change. 12 On the File menu. and customize it so that it fits in the available space and has the correct group nested within it. A new group definition (Typical guest room 2) is displayed in the Project Browser. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous lesson. You also create a detail group in the level 2 floor plan that you add to the building model in a different floor plan view. You use functionality that allows you to not only fix inconsistencies among instances of a group.

select Corner toilet room. 9 On the Options Bar.Place a duplicated group 4 Drag Corner guest room from the Project Browser to the vacant room in the northwest corner of the building. click OK. 12 Move the desk and chair so that they are within the room. This is because the corner room is smaller than the interior rooms. click Remove From Group. click Finish Group. 13 On the Design Bar. 11 On the Edit toolbar. and drag it into the corner guest room. 810 | Chapter 24 Grouping . where the corridor wall and the exterior wall intersect. Nest a group 17 In the Project Browser. 16 Select the same toilet room group. 5 Click at the upper-right corner of the room. and select the desk and chair. 10 Press and hold CTRL. click . Edit a duplicated group 8 In the drawing area. 14 Select the toilet room. Notice that the desk overlaps the exterior wall. 15 On the Design Bar. click Edit Group. 7 After a warning message displays. click Finish. and press DELETE. to specify the group origin. select the Corner guest room group. 6 On the Options Bar.

25 On the Edit toolbar. TIP If a warning appears indicating that there are errors that cannot be ignored. select the Corner guest room group. Mirror along a drawn axis of reflection 24 In the drawing area. click Finish to finish placing the group. 21 On the Design Bar. 27 Click the midpoint of the corridor wall as the start point of the axis of reflection as shown. 20 On the Options Bar. 22 In the drawing area. 19 In the drawing area. click Save. past the exterior wall. A new instance of the Corner guest room group is added to the southwest corner of the building model. click Add To Group. 30 Proceed to the next exercise. 18 On the Options Bar. staying perpendicular to the corridor wall. select the Corner guest room group. and click to specify the end point. for Axis. 29 On the File menu. click 26 On the Options Bar. Working with Groups | 811 . Creating a Detail Group. enter SM on your keyboard to limit snaps to midpoints. click Finish Group. click . select the Corner toilet room group. 28 Drag the cursor to the left. click Edit Group.Use the inside corner of the exterior wall and the corridor wall as the origin of the group. TIP To help find the midpoint of the wall. click Unjoin Elements to resolve the errors. 23 On the Design Bar.

You can add the detail group to other views of the building model. 2 On the Options Bar. 8 Click in the filled region to specify the leader start point. 3 Click the lower-left endpoint below the elevators as the start point of the rectangle. click Text. click Finish Sketch. 812 | Chapter 24 Grouping . and select a point on the interior of the vertical wall. click to add an arc leader. 7 On the Options Bar. Grouping-in progress. 4 Move the cursor down and to the right. The text note with arc leader is added to the building model. and click Modify on the Design Bar. A rectangular region with a diagonal cross hatch pattern is added in front of the elevator doors. you sketch and annotate a rectangular filled region that represents an area of tiled flooring in front of the elevators in the building model. 5 On the Design Bar. Draw a filled region 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.rvt. You then save the region and the text note as a detail group.Creating a Detail Group In this exercise. Add a text note 6 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click to draw a rectangular region. 10 Enter Tile. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. 9 Click below the filled region to end the leader and specify the text start point. click Filled Region.

select the instance of the Elevator lobby tile group. click Save. click Tag. under Floor Plans.Create a detail group 11 Press and hold CTRL. 15 Enter Elevator lobby tile. as shown. 3 On the Options Bar. and select the note and the filled region. double-click Level 2. 12 On the Edit toolbar. and then use the door tags to create an attached detail group. you must manually attach it to each instance of the Typical toilet room group. expand Groups. and click Rename. it cannot be added to a group in the same manner that a drawing component can be added. and press ENTER. under Floor Plans. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous lesson. Using Attached Detail Groups. 17 Move the origin of the group to the corner of the elevator shaft. Using Attached Detail Groups In this exercise. Add a group instance to a different drawing view 18 In the Project Browser. Grouping-in progress. you add door tags to the Typical toilet room group. double-click Level 3. Because the detail group contains variables. 20 On the File menu. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 19 Drag an instance of the Elevator lobby tile group from the Project Browser into the level 3 view. clear Leader. click . Modify a group origin 16 In the drawing area. and expand Detail. 14 Right-click Group 1. as shown. 13 In the Project Browser. 4 Place two door tags in the original instance of the Typical toilet room. 21 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. Working with Groups | 813 . Place door tags 1 In the Project Browser.

7 On the Edit toolbar. and expand Typical toilet room. select Door tags. 9 Right-click Group 1. (this group is just below the original instance of the Typical guest room group). 8 In the Project Browser. click Modify. and click Rename. Create an attached detail group 6 In the drawing area. click . informing you that an attached detail group has been created for the Typical toilet room group. press TAB. 814 | Chapter 24 Grouping .5 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. Place a detail group in another group instance 11 Move the cursor over the Typical toilet room group. and select the nested Typical toilet room group. and click OK. 10 Enter Door tags. The new instance of the attached detail group is added at the same relative position and orientation as in the original instance of the model group. press and hold CTRL. 13 In the Attached Detail Group Placement dialog box. expand Groups. 12 On the Options Bar. click Place Detail. expand Attached Detail. A warning dialog box is displayed. and select the two door tags.

click Browse. click Wall. Save a group to a library 1 On the File menu. 7 In the Load Group dialog box. 8 In the Duplicate Types dialog box. and click Open. you save a group to a library so that you can use the group in a new project. and click Open. Select the m_Tutorial_Default. 6 On the File menu. the doors are numbered based upon the order in which you placed each group. This enables you to create a library of groups that can be shared with other team members and used on multiple projects. therefore. Load the group in a new project 4 On the File menu. click Load from Library ➤ Load Group.rvg. navigate to the directory where you saved the group. Sketch walls 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.NOTE Component instance numbering is sequential. as shown. expand Groups. 5 In the New Project dialog box. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. and then drag the cursor so that all the walls in the square are 6000 mm long. Working with Groups | 815 . Grouping-in progress.rte file located in the Metric folder. click New ➤ Project. under Template file. drag it into the drawing area. 14 On the File menu. click Save. ■ ■ ■ In the New Project dialog box. Saving and Loading Groups. click Save to Library ➤ Save Group. click to specify the start point of the square. 13 Select Typical toilet room. click the Training Files icon. select Typical toilet room. In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog box. 10 On the Options Bar. 3 Click Save.rvt. Saving and Loading Groups In this exercise. Using groups from a library ensures consistency and increases productivity for projects that reuse similar typical layouts for repetitive units. and expand Model. select Typical toilet room for Group To Save. click to draw a square. 11 In the drawing area. and place it in the upper-right corner of the square. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous lesson. NOTE Groups containing nested groups cannot be saved. Place an instance of the loaded group 12 In the Project Browser. click OK. click OK. 2 In the Save Group dialog box.

click Save. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. so it is important to place the group accurately in order to use the walls you sketched. the software gives you the option of fixing the inconsistency by creating a new group. The toilet and the tub are wall-hosted components whose hosts are not part of the group. The new group is created automatically and contains the same components as the existing group. 816 | Chapter 24 Grouping . you mirror the instance of the Typical toilet room group you added to the new project in the previous exercise. and click Save. 3 Select the wall shared by the toilet and the sink as the axis of reflection. Loaded_Group. 2 On the Edit toolbar.IMPORTANT Be sure to line up the outline of the group with the exterior surface of the walls. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. click . 16 Enter Loaded_Group for File name. 15 On the File menu. except for the wall-hosted component for which there is no wall. Automatically Creating a Group In this exercise. select the instance of Typical toilet room. The Typical toilet room model group is added to the new project. Because one of the wall-hosted components in the group does not have a wall in the mirrored group. 14 On the Options Bar. click Finish. 1 In the drawing area. Automatically Creating a Group.

The Typical toilet room model group is mirrored. a warning dialog box is displayed. 5 In the Fix Inconsistent Groups dialog box. click Fix Groups. and a new group (Typical toilet room 2) is created. click Create new group types.Because there is no wall to host the tub in the mirrored instance. click Close. The tub component is not included in the new group because there is no wall to host it. 6 On the Design Bar. and click OK. Working with Groups | 817 . Click Yes when prompted to save the drawing. click Modify. 7 On the File menu. 4 In the warning dialog box.

818 | Chapter 24 Grouping .

columns. you copy the entire structure and use the paste-align command to add the structure to the three levels above it.Structural 25 In this tutorial. In the final lesson. You begin by adding the structural walls. and beams to Level 1. you create framing elevations and add structural braces to the building model. 819 . you use the structural tools in Autodesk Revit Building to create a building model skeleton. After completing level 1.

Adding Structural Walls In this lesson. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. you import a DWG file into the Level 2 floor plan. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click Open. you add structural walls to a project file where only the grid lines have been added. Open the m_Structural. The DWG file contains walls that you trace in the next exercise to create the structural walls. You use an imported DWG file as an underlay to trace the initial outline of the structural walls. You then sketch additional walls to which you add dimensions and constraints.rvt file located in the Metric folder. 820 | Chapter 25 Structural . Importing a DWG for Use as an Underlay In this exercise. click the Training Files icon.

This file is used in the next exercise. click the Training Files icon. DGN. expand Views (all). 3 In the left pane of the Import/Link dialog box.Import the DWG file 1 Before importing the DWG file. select Automatically place. 7 Click Open. under Import or Link. Select Current view only. Sketching Structural Walls.rvt. you imported a DWG file. select Invert colors. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Link (instead of import). The DWG file is displayed on the Level 2 floor plan. 2 On the File menu. 6 Under Positioning. After you trace the walls. and add the remaining structural walls to the building model. and select m_wall-import. Adding Structural Walls | 821 .dwg from the Metric folder. Sketching Structural Walls In this exercise. 5 Under Layer/Level Colors. 9 Navigate to a folder of your choice and save the project as Structural_tutorial. SAT. expand Floor Plans. If necessary. click Save As. This project file is required for all subsequent exercises in this tutorial. 8 On the File menu. you use the linked DWG file to trace the initial set of structural walls. and double-click Level 2. to trace the initial set of structural walls. Select All for Layers. you turn off the visibility of the DWG file. go to the Project Browser. In this exercise. click Import/Link ➤ DWG. and select Origin to origin. verify that the Level 2 floor plan is open. 4 In the Import/Link dialog box. DXF.

click Structural Wall. Sketch structural walls by tracing the DWG 2 On the View menu. Right-click the Design Bar. 4 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. proceed to Step 2. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. rather than the height. Display the Structural tab of the Design Bar 1 If the Structural tab already displays on the Design Bar. 5 In the Type Selector. their Structural Usage parameter is automatically set to Bearing. and click Structural. This requires the bottom of the primary view range to be set to the level below in order to see the walls as you sketch them.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.Dataset This exercise requires the project file.200mm. Structural_tutorial. select Basic Wall: Generic . Structural walls differ from non-structural walls in several ways. 3 Draw a zoom region around the upper set of lines. First. you can add a structural wall by specifying the depth of the wall. 822 | Chapter 25 Structural . In addition.

specify the following: ■ ■ Select Depth. Specify Level 1. 10 Move the cursor to the right. ■ ■ ■ Select Chain. Adding Structural Walls | 823 . In the steps that follow. and click the next line intersection.6 On the Options Bar. and click to specify the next wall endpoint. 7 Begin the first wall by selecting the intersection of the upper left corner of the line chain. and click to specify the wall endpoint. Select Finish Face: Exterior for Loc Line. 8 Move the cursor over the top right intersection of the line. you sketch a chain of walls over the path highlighted in the following illustration. 9 Move the cursor downward to the next line intersection. Click .

click Modify to finish the sketch. expand Floor Plans. 824 | Chapter 25 Structural . click . expand Views (all). you can spin the model in a 3D view by clicking the 3D view. TIP If necessary. in the View toolbar. and click to complete the chain of walls. 13 On the View toolbar. Use the tools to modify 14 In the Project Browser. 15 Zoom around the second chain of lines.11 Move the cursor to the top of the line chain until a reference plane displays indicating the cursor is on a parallel plane with the slanted wall on the left. 12 On the Design Bar. and double-click Level 2.

sketch a chain of walls over the path highlighted in the following illustration. Adding Structural Walls | 825 . click Modify to end the wall chain. click Structural Wall. Click each exterior line intersection in a clockwise direction.16 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. you may want to zoom in to ensure you select the intersection of the imported lines and grid C. click . On the Options Bar. ■ ■ 18 On the Design Bar. 17 Using the bulleted steps below. ■ Begin the wall chain by clicking the lower left intersection where the end of the line chain adjoins grid C. 19 On the View toolbar. When you reach the endpoint on the lower right corner of the chain. notice that the wall options you used previously are still selected.

Click to create a three-point arc. 826 | Chapter 25 Structural .dwg. clear m_wall-import. click the Imported Categories tab. Select the right endpoint of the horizontal wall. click . 22 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. specify the following: ■ ■ Clear Chain. This is the right extent of the arc.Turn off the DWG visibility 20 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. Select Wall Centerline for Loc Line. click Visibility/Graphics.200mm. 23 Under Visibility. ■ 27 Follow the sequence of steps in the illustration below to add a 180 degree three point arc. 28 On the Options Bar. Unselected categories are not visible in the referenced view. Move the cursor upward and specify an arc radius of 180 degrees. select Basic Wall: Generic . 25 In the Type Selector. Sketch additional structural walls 24 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 26 On the Options Bar. and click OK. This is the left extent of the arc. ■ ■ ■ Select the endpoint of the left vertical wall. click Structural Wall. 21 On the View menu. double-click Level 2.

and press ENTER. 32 On the Design Bar. click Modify.29 Add a horizontal wall beginning at the midpoint of the left vertical wall as shown. If it is not. click the value. enter 1500. 31 Add a vertical wall between the two horizontal walls as shown. Adding Structural Walls | 827 . 33 Select the vertical wall you added in the previous step and make sure the temporary dimension between the wall and the centerline of the left vertical wall is equal to 1500 mm. 30 Move the cursor to the right until it intersects with the slanted wall on the right.

34 Select the lower horizontal wall. click Structural Wall and on the Options Bar. Both walls are 1200 mm long. 35 Zoom around the upper set of walls as shown. enter 1500. you create the final structural walls for the project. 828 | Chapter 25 Structural . In the steps that follow. clear Chain. and press ENTER. 36 On the Design Bar. Create the final structural walls 37 Begin the first wall on the endpoint shown in the illustration below. click the temporary dimension value between it and grid C.

click Modify. click . Begin the wall at the top of the right vertical wall and draw it inward so that it is parallel with the wall you sketched in the previous steps. 39 Create an additional 1200 mm wall as shown. Adding Structural Walls | 829 . 41 On the View toolbar. 40 On the Design Bar.38 Draw the 1200 mm wall parallel to the adjoining wall as shown.

in its current state. 830 | Chapter 25 Structural . Structural_tutorial. click Save. This project file is required. You also reposition the walls to see how they adapt to changes in the design. In the next exercise. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. You then make minor modifications to their position. Dimensioning and Modifying Walls. you dimension the structural walls and add an equality constraint to the dimension to keep the walls equidistant. Dimensioning and Modifying Walls In this exercise. click Dimension. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. you add dimensions and equality constraints to the walls. In this exercise.42 On the File menu. you used the DWG file to trace the initial set of structural walls.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. Add an aligned dimension 1 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. After turning off the visibility of the linked DWG. double-click Level 2. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. 2 Zoom around the lower set of walls. you added the remaining structural walls required for this building model.

In the Auto Dimension Options dialog box. 6 Move the cursor to the left. and click to place the dimension as shown. and when it highlights. After you select Entire Walls. the Options button becomes available. Adding Structural Walls | 831 . and click OK. Create an equality constraint 7 On the Design Bar. select Intersecting Walls. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Select . click Modify. ■ ■ 5 Move the cursor over the left vertical wall. select it. click Options to specify the wall pick options. On the Options Bar. Select Entire Walls for Pick.4 On the Options Bar. Select Wall Centerlines for Prefer. 8 Select the dimension you added in the previous steps.

11 Click the temporary dimension value.9 Click the EQ symbol to make each of the segments equal. 832 | Chapter 25 Structural . and enter 4000 for the distance between the wall centerline and grid B. Modify wall position 10 Select the upper horizontal wall as shown.

you add structural columns. click Save. and purlins to complete the Level 1 structure. click Undo Edit dimension length. you add structural columns and different beam types to the building model. to continue with the next lesson in this tutorial. This project file is required. you added a dimension to the structural walls and used an equality constraint to keep the walls equidistant. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 833 . In the next lesson. Adding Structural Columns and Beams. in its current state. In this exercise. several different beam types. joists. Adding Structural Columns and Beams In this lesson. You also repositioned the walls and observed how they adapted to the change in the design. 12 On the Edit menu.Notice the horizontal walls remain equally spaced. 13 On the File menu.

select M_W-Wide Flange-Column: W250x80. under Floor Plans. 834 | Chapter 25 Structural .rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. 5 On the Options Bar.Adding Structural Columns In this exercise. TIP When adding the column. zoom in to place the column. click Structural Column. 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. Add columns to grid intersections manually 1 In the Project Browser. press the SPACEBAR to rotate the column. you use the grid intersection tool. double-click Level 1. 2 On the View menu. Structural_tutorial. if the column orientation is not similar to the callout shown below. 6 Add a column to C1 as shown. select Height. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. you use several different methods to add structural columns: you manually select grid intersections. and Level 2. In addition. If necessary. and you place a column outside of the grids. 4 In the Type Selector. you rotate columns by pressing the SPACEBAR when necessary.

click Grid Intersection.7 Add similar columns to C2. and A. C3. 9 Use a crossing selection. TIP To create the crossing selection. This option allows you to place columns at the intersections of selected column grids. and C5. and drag your cursor up and to the left as shown below. and select grids 1-5. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 835 . specify a point under grid A and to the right of grid 5. Add columns using selected grid intersections 8 On the Options Bar.

Columns A3-5 are shown below. 836 | Chapter 25 Structural . This completes this set of columns. 13 Press the SPACEBAR until the columns return to their original position. Notice the columns rotate until they are parallel with grid A.10 Notice columns are added to A1-5. 15 On the Options Bar. Rotate the columns 11 Press the SPACEBAR. click Finish. All of the columns on grid A rotate until they are parallel with the vertical grids. 14 If necessary. 12 Press the SPACEBAR again. zoom out until you can see all the grids.

24 On the Design Bar. the columns on A1-5 do not rotate. 21 Select column A5 and delete it. you could not have rotated them independently of each other. click Grid Intersection. click Structural Column. Add a column outside of the grid 22 On the Design Bar. 17 Create a crossing selection that includes B1-5. click Modify. and 6900 mm below the exterior face of the horizontal wall above it.Add columns B1-5 16 On the Options Bar. press the SPACEBAR to rotate them. 20 On the Design Bar. click Finish. TIP Notice that as you rotate these columns using the SPACEBAR. 18 If the columns are not aligned as in the illustration below. That is why you finished the first set and then reentered the grid intersection mode to add columns B1-5. B3-5 are shown below. click Modify. Although you could have added columns B1-5 with the first set of columns. The column should be 4200 mm to the left of grid 5. 23 Add a M_W-Wide Flange-Column: W250x80 between B4 and C5. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 837 . 19 On the Options Bar.

To add a beam using point-to-point insertion. click Beam.25 On the View toolbar. 4 In the Type Selector. Start the beam at the column and move your cursor up until it connects with the wall. and you rotate the columns using the SPACEBAR. expand Views (all). expand Floor Plans. In the next exercise. double-click Level 2. in its current state. Different structural conditions exist within the building model that require specific beam conditions. Adding Structural Beams and Girders In this exercise. you add beams manually. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. 838 | Chapter 25 Structural .rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. 2 On the View menu. you specify the start and endpoint of the beam. 26 On the File menu. 6 Add a beam between the column shown below and the horizontal wall above it. you add structural beams to the building model. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67. you learn how to work with these varied conditions. Structural_tutorial. you used various methods to add structural columns. click Save. click . As you use the beam tool. This project file is required. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. and use the grid tools to add beams automatically. Add beams using point-to-point insertion 1 In the Project Browser. In this exercise. 5 Zoom around the right side of the building model. Adding Structural Beams and Girders.

9 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar.7. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 839 . 8 Zoom around the upper set of walls as shown. click Beam. TIP Select the midpoint of the wall first. 11 On the Options Bar. select Girder for Usage. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x32. 10 In the Type Selector. and then move the cursor up to grid A.7 On the Design Bar. 12 Add a beam between the midpoint of the structural wall shown and grid A. click Modify.

840 | Chapter 25 Structural . Use the following table for other conditions.Use the grid tool to add beams between columns 13 In the Type Selector. For example. When you use the grid tool to place beams. 15 Create a crossing selection that includes grids 1 and 2. Column Brace Ho o tal riz n Bracing Other Girder Joist Purlin Other Column* Girder Horizontal Bracing Other Horizontal Bracing Girder Joist Purlin Other Brace Horizontal Brace Girder Joist Purlin Other Other Other Horizontal Bracing Joist Other Horizontal Bracing Joist Purlin Other Horizontal Bracing Purlin Purlin Purlin Other Other Other Other Other Other *Structural walls produce the same result as columns. the Structural Usage parameter is automatically set to Girder. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67. 14 On the Options Bar. if a beam is joined column-to-column. click Grid. the Structural Usage parameter of each beam is automatically specified depending on the join conditions.

select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67. click Finish. click Beam. and select grid C. 21 On the Design Bar. 22 In the Type Selector. Add beams to an intersecting structural wall 20 Select the structural wall that spans grids 3 and 4. click Grid. click the temporary dimension value.16 Notice that beams are added at the grids and connected to each column. 18 On the Design Bar. press and hold CTRL. 24 Select grid 3. 23 On the Options Bar. enter 8200. 17 On the Options Bar. click Modify. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 841 . 19 Zoom in the upper-right quadrant of the building model. and press ENTER.

842 | Chapter 25 Structural . select Girder for Usage. Click column B5 to add the first beam. Press ESC to end the chain. Add a chain of beams 26 On the Options Bar.Notice beams are added between columns. select Chain. ■ ■ ■ ■ Click column C5 to start the beam chain. and for Usage. 25 On the Options Bar. In addition. select Girder. 27 Using point-to-point insertion. click Finish. 28 On the Options Bar. Click the intersection of grid 5 and the structural wall as shown to add the final beam in the chain. refer to the following steps and illustration to add two beams to grid 5. notice that beams connect to the structural walls that intersect grids.

Add beams that intersect other beams 32 On the Options Bar. You can also use the shortcut key. click Grid. connecting the column at B4. 35 Zoom around the beam between A3-4. 33 Select grid A. and ending with the structural wall that intersects grid 4 as shown. You may need to zoom in significantly to accomplish this. click Finish. select Girder for Usage. NOTE When you begin the beam chain at C4. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 843 . 31 Add a chain of beams beginning with the end of the structural wall at C4. 34 On the Options Bar.29 Add a beam between A4 and the structural wall that intersects grid 4 as shown. to snap only to intersections. make sure you select the intersection of the grid lines. Press ESC to end the chain. SI. 30 On the Options Bar. Press ESC to end the chain.

37 Select grid B. If the W310x32. 844 | Chapter 25 Structural . and the W310x67 beam spanning A3-4 would have been two separate beams. click . click Finish. click Grid.7 beam that intersects it perpendicularly. 39 On the View toolbar. 38 On the Options Bar.7 beam had crossed grid A. it would have become the supporting beam because it was placed first.The W310x67 beam spanning A3-4 supports the W310x32. 36 On the Options Bar.

44 On the Options Bar. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 845 . you use point-to-point insertion to add the beam between the two short wall segments that adjoin grids 4 and 5. 46 Move the cursor to the right. double-click Level 2. click . In the steps that follow.Add a concrete beam 40 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. click Beam. select M_Concrete-Rectangular Beam: 200 x 500mm. 45 Specify the beam start point at the centerline and endpoint of the short wall segment adjacent to grid 4 as shown below. click Modify. 42 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 41 Zoom around the upper structural walls between A4-5. 47 On the Design Bar. select Girder for Usage. 43 In the Type Selector. and click the endpoint of the short wall segment adjacent to grid 5 as shown below. enter SE (shortcut key for endpoints). 48 On the View toolbar.

55 Move the cursor to the left and parallel to the wall and grid A. click Beam. you add two W310x67 beams parallel to the wall that intersects grid 3. and select Chain. 52 In the Type Selector. Add remaining girders 49 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans.Notice the concrete beam you added in the previous step. 50 Zoom around the A1-B3 region. 51 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. and click when it intersects grid 2. select Girder. In the steps that follow. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67. 54 Begin the beam chain by selecting the intersection of the wall centerline and grid 3. 53 On the Options Bar. for Usage. 846 | Chapter 25 Structural . double-click Level 2.

56 Move the cursor to the left and parallel to the wall. click . 57 On the View toolbar. and click when it intersects grid 1. Press ESC twice to end the beam placement mode. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 847 .

you replace some of the existing girders with trusses. Adding Joists and Purlins In this exercise. This project file is required. You also add joists and purlins to the building model. under Families. click Beam. in its current state. click W310x32. Adding Joists and Purlins. you added beams and girders using the point-to-point insertion method. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial.58 On the File menu. For example. Add a W-Wide Flange joist 1 In the Project Browser. 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. Add the beam a few feet to the right of grid 1. 4 In the Project Browser. 848 | Chapter 25 Structural . You then create a joist array. You used the grid tool to add beams to selected grids and learned how varied structural conditions affect the outcome of the automatically placed beams. under Floor Plans. M_W-Wide Flange. In this exercise. click Save. the structural usage of the beams is automatically set to purlin. 5 Add one beam between the A1-2 girder and the parallel girder below it. and purlins to the building model. In the next exercise. Structural_tutorial.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.B3 quadrants. double-click Level 2. 2 Zoom around the A1 . Do not worry about the exact placement at this time. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. and their display within the plan view adjusts accordingly. while allowing the automatic beam tool to assign the Structural Usage parameter value depending on the join conditions. when you use the automatic beam tool to add beams between joists.7. Structural Framing. You begin by adding W-Wide Flange joists. you add joists.

The beam needs to be 1250 mm right of grid 1. 10 Click OK. notice that the Structural Usage parameter value is Joist. click Modify. the Automatic option was selected by default in the Options Bar. Create a joist array 11 On the Edit menu. In addition. click on the Options Bar. any beam added between two girders becomes a joist when the Automatic option is selected. This value was set automatically because when you created the beam. 9 In the Element Properties dialog box. 8 With the beam selected.6 On the Design Bar. 7 Select the beam you added in the previous steps. according to the table shown at the beginning of this lesson. Modify the temporary dimension value if necessary. click Array. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 849 .

14 Click the intersection of the upper extent of the joist and grid A as shown to specify the array start point. Make sure the cursor is over grid A. enter 1250 and press ENTER. This creates an array of 14 joists that are parallel to grid A. 850 | Chapter 25 Structural .12 On the Options Bar. Enter 14 for Number. 15 Move the cursor to the right and parallel to grid A. Once the direction is set. Clear Group and Associate. Select 2nd for Move to. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click . 13 Enter SI to snap only to intersections.

Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 851 . click Beam.7 beam from the midpoint of the first joist to the right of grid 2 that stretches perpendicularly to the next joist on the right as shown. 18 Zoom in around the area surrounding the purlin. 17 Add a W310x32.Add purlins 16 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar.

click Array. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click . This is the array start point. Their display in plan view is dependent on their Structural Usage value. style. joists. 22 Click the endpoint of the left joist as shown. 19 Select the purlin you created in the previous steps. 23 Move the cursor to the endpoint of the next joist on the right. 852 | Chapter 25 Structural . Select 2nd for Move to. 20 On the Edit menu. Enter 7 for Number. Clear Group and Associate. 21 On the Options Bar. and color within the Object Styles dialog box. and purlins. NOTE You can control the structural framing line weight. and click.Notice the difference between the line weights and patterns of the girders.

click .The purlins array along the midpoints of the joists. Turn on connection symbol visibility 24 Zoom in around the structural framing below A1-2. and create a crossing selection that includes all the structural framing members in this portion of the view. 25 On the Options Bar. click . 27 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 26 In the Filter dialog box. clear all options except Structural Framing. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 853 .

You then copy the entire structure that you have designed up to this point and use the paste-align command to create the structure on the upper levels. 854 | Chapter 25 Structural . In the next lesson. 30 On the View toolbar. 29 On the Design Bar. you create new levels. and adjust the view until it resembles the image below. in its current state. click . This project file is required. you added different joist types and allowed the automatic beam tool to assign the Structural Usage parameter value depending on the join conditions. click Modify. This technique saves significant design time and ensures consistency on each level.28 In the Element Properties dialog box. 31 On the File menu. Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels In this lesson. change the following instance parameters: ■ ■ ■ Select Moment Connection Last Select Moment Connection First Click OK. In this exercise. you create new levels and copy the level one structure to the upper levels of the building model. and notice the connection symbols display. click Save.

and double-click Building Elevation. Move the cursor over the right extent of Level 2. under Views (all). You need at least 3 meters of space. Structural_tutorial.Defining New Levels In this exercise. expand Elevations. 3 Drag the upper grid control up to move the grid heads out of the way of the new levels. 2 Select grid 1. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Click to add Level 3. 6 Sketch the new level line 3000 mm above Level 2 as shown below using the following steps: ■ ■ ■ Click the level line starting point 3000 mm above the left extent of Level 2. Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels | 855 . click Level. you create several new levels. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. select Make Plan View.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. These levels are required in the next exercise where you copy the existing structural components to the new levels. Create three new levels 1 In the Project Browser. 5 On the Options Bar.

8 On the File menu. you created three new levels. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. you copy the structural elements and use the paste-align command to add them to the new levels. click Save. This technique saves you significant time compared to manually recreating the design on each level. These levels that are required in the next exercise. Copy the structural elements 1 On the View toolbar.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. Duplicating the Existing Design In this exercise. 7 Repeat the steps above to create Levels 4 and 5 as shown. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. Each level is 3000 mm high. In this exercise.In the Project Browser. click . in its current state. Duplicating the Existing Design. 856 | Chapter 25 Structural . Structural_tutorial. where you copy the structural elements and paste align them to the new levels. notice that the Level 3 floor plan is displayed. This project file is required.

3 On the Edit menu. and select Levels 3 and 4. click Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels | 857 . select Level 2. Make sure the entire building model is included. press and hold CTRL. click OK. Paste the structural components on the new levels 4 On the Design Bar. click Copy to Clipboard. click Modify. it is often easier and more certain to copy from a 3D view if your intent is to select the entire building model. click Modify. 6 In the Select Levels dialog box. 5 On the Edit menu. Although you can select and copy the components from any view. 7 In the Select Levels dialog box. 8 On the Design Bar.2 Draw a selection box around the entire design.

You copied the Level 1 structure elements and use the paste-align command to create the structure on the upper levels. Creating a Framing Elevation In this exercise. you create a framing elevation in order to provide a view in which to place structural bracing members. In the next lesson. You use this elevation view in the next exercise to place structural braces. you create a framing elevation in order to add structural braces. double-click Building Elevation. In this exercise. Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation In this lesson.9 In the Project Browser under Elevations. 10 On the File menu. you create a framing elevation. click Save. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation. This project file is required. You then add C-channel bracing to one level and array it to the remaining levels. in its current state. 858 | Chapter 25 Structural .

click Modify. Elevation 1-a. Structural_tutorial. double-click Level 2. in the Project Browser.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. under Floor Plans. Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation | 859 . You can now view the new elevation. make sure Attach to Grid is selected. at the midpoint between grids 2 and 3. 3 On the Options Bar. 4 Place the cursor over grid C. and click.Dataset This exercise requires the project file. 5 On the Design Bar. 6 Double-click the elevation head in order to open the view. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. Create a framing elevation 1 In the Project Browser. click Framing Elevation.

click Save. Adding Structural Braces. In this exercise. Adding Structural Braces In the final exercise of this tutorial. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. 860 | Chapter 25 Structural . This project file is required. You are ready to add the structural braces. You then array the braces to the remaining levels. You begin by adding a set of braces to level 4.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. in its current state. you created an elevation view design specifically to add structural braces. you add structural braces to the building model. This is because the Detail Level of this view is automatically set to coarse. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. you add c-channel bracing to the building model.Notice the stick framing representation. Structural_tutorial. Also notice that grid 3 is identified within the view. In the next exercise. 7 On the File menu.

5 Enter SM and click the midpoint of the girder located on Level 5. 4 Enter SE and click the beam endpoint at the intersection of grid 2 and Level 4. SE: Snap only to endpoints of objects. select M_C-Channel: C75x7. drag the left and right extents until you can see the grid heads for 2 and 3 as shown. select the view crop box. you should use the following snap shortcut keys when applicable. select the grids and drag the grid heads above level 5.4. When adding the braces. Because it is often necessary to make sure you snap to the endpoints and midpoints. click Brace. 3 In the Type Selector. NOTE If necessary. Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation | 861 . 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. and using the shape grips. you use point-to-point insertion.Expand the view extents 1 Before adding the braces. ■ ■ SM: Snap only to midpoints of objects.

Select 2nd for Move to. Select Constrain. click Modify. Enter 4 for Number.The brace displays. The second brace is displayed. click Array. 11 On the Options Bar. The braces are arrayed to Level 1. 9 Select both braces on Level 4. 862 | Chapter 25 Structural . 6 Enter SM and click the midpoint of the girder located on Level 5. 12 Click the intersection of Level 5 and grid 2 to specify the array start point. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click . 10 On the Edit menu. Clear Group and Associate. 7 Enter SE and click the beam endpoint at the intersection of grid 3 and Level 4. Array the braces 8 On the Design Bar. 13 Click the intersection of Level 4 and grid 2 to specify the array endpoint.

click . Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation | 863 . 15 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog box. select Structural Framing Tags. 16 On the View toolbar. click Tag All Not Tagged. and click OK.14 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

864 | Chapter 25 Structural .17 On the File menu. click Save. you added structural braces to the design and created a brace array. In this exercise.

This involves simultaneously working on and saving different portions of the project at the same time. You can enable Worksharing for any project. doors. If you need to modify an element that belongs to a workset that someone else is actively working on. Using Worksharing. and so on. Only one user can edit each workset at a given time. however. They can update their local files at any time in order to see the changes other team members have published. team members adding and changing elements in worksets can save their work to a local file on the network or their own hard drive and publish work to a central file whenever they choose.Sharing Projects 26 When working with large building projects. floors. you learn how to use Worksharing to divide a project into worksets so multiple users can access the project and have all their changes coordinated by Autodesk Revit Building®. 865 . All other team members can view this workset. stairs. In this tutorial. architects commonly work in teams with each person assigned to a specific functional area. This prevents possible conflicts within the project. they cannot make changes to it. called Worksharing. you can borrow that element without requiring the workset owner to relinquish control of the entire workset. A workset is a collection of building elements. such as walls.

Overview Sharing a project for the first time To share a project. each building element in the project is contained in exactly one workset. To make a workset editable. Using Worksharing in a Project In this lesson. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals In this conceptual exercise. you learn some of the strategies that maximize your use of worksets. 866 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . Instead. you can select which worksets are open or closed. ■ Project size The size of your building may affect the way you decide to segment the worksets for your team. you may want to create separate worksets for each portion. After the project is shared. In a multi-story structure. When you are working on a shared project. Elements specific to a view. If you only need to modify a single element within a workset that someone else has checked out. you do not need to make separate worksets for each floor of the building. In the lessons and exercises that follow. The first time you activate worksets within a project. you could create separate worksets for a set of building elements that will only appear on one floor. Establishing practical policies on how all team members access and create new worksets in the project will maintain performance for existing users and ease the process of introducing new team members to the project. You learn the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. When setting up Worksharing. Increasing performance using selective open When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing. you can only make changes to the worksets that are editable by you. you specify an active workset. You can change the workset assignment of any modeling element within the property dialog box for that element. Any new model elements are automatically assigned to the active workset. Elements in closed worksets are not read from disk until they are required. In the next exercise. a dialog box displays allowing you to set up the initial sharing of the project. you enable Worksharing within a project and set up the initial workset environment. go to the Worksets dialog box. After learning the fundamentals. use Element Borrowing. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing application. you learn how to work as an individual with the central and local project files. You then learn how to work within a Worksharing-enabled project with multiple users and borrow particular elements from other users. such as a tenant interior. such as annotations and dimensions. select the desired workset. you should separate the project into worksets that allow team members to work without interfering with each other. you should take several considerations into account: General Considerations: ■ ■ ■ ■ Project size Team size Team member roles Default workset visibility You can maximize long-term project performance more easily if you plan Worksharing appropriately and use the feature correctly. Each workset can only be editable by one user at a time. Working in a shared project In a shared project. You gain valuable practical experience setting up a project for worksets and working within that project. You can close or open worksets at any time using the Worksets dialog box. You learn what to consider before enabling and using Worksharing. If the project floor plan is so large that you need to split it with match lines to fit it on sheets. This reduces the time it takes to open the file and the amount of memory it uses. Unlike AutoCAD Xrefs. and click Editable. This includes how to plan and execute the use of worksets in a project in order to maximize project and team performance. When planning a Worksharing-enabled project The decisions you make when sharing a project and setting up its worksets can have long-lasting effects on the project team. are automatically assigned to the view workset of the current view. You can improve the display-related performance of Revit Building by opening only those worksets required for your work. you must first enable Worksharing.

the central file is not a file that a team member would open and work in directly. you can change the visibility setting in the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. the worksets they add often do not need to be visible by default. Generally. if a workset named Interior was created. you decide whether or not the elements in that workset are visible by default in each view. Experience has shown that. for a typical project. In most projects. You should have at least one workset for each person. not including the Project Standards. The central file coordinates and propagates the changes of each user and keeps track of which worksets are available. This allows Revit Building to display the view faster because computing time is not spent figuring out if the element belongs to a workset that should be displayed. it is essential that you save the central file to a location accessible to all team members. TIP As new team members create new worksets for their own use.■ Team size You should take into consideration the size of the project team at the time you enable Worksharing. This project file should incorporate as many office/project standards as possible and it should include many of the families required by the project. Using Worksharing in a Project | 867 . a Worksets tab displays on the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. designers work in teams. Step 1: Start the project with one user One user starts to work on the project. the file is saved as the central file. remember to create worksets for functional roles and properly assign default visibility. make sure visibility defaults are set appropriately. Step 5: Create the central file The first time you save a project after Worksharing has been enabled. with each assigned a specific functional task. Shared Levels and Grids. ■ Team member roles Typically. Step 3: Create additional worksets After enabling Worksharing. Notice that the workset names refer to functional roles. Step 2: Activate Worksharing After the building model is ready for multiple user access. A typical scenario for a multi-story commercial building is shown in the following illustration. Team size usually increases as the project progresses from the design stage to the documentation stage. Therefore. the optimum number of worksets is approximately four for each team member. When you create a new workset. If you are sure that the elements of a particular workset should not appear in a view. Default workset visibility After a project has been shared. On this tab. Long-term performance is improved if new worksets are not visible by default unless they need to be. When creating the new worksets. the project coordinator should create the additional worksets required by the team. The building model should also reach a reasonable point of development before you enable Worksharing. you would want to assign the interior walls and other interior components to that workset. greater subdivision improves workflow by reducing interference between team members. you can turn off the visibility of that workset within that view. As new members create worksets for their own use. the project coordinator should enable Worksharing. Step 4: Subdivide the building model into worksets After you have created the initial worksets. ■ Conceptual stages of project sharing The following steps explain the basic stages of project sharing. you must assign building model elements to their respective workset. each team member has control over a portion of the design. and View worksets. For example. you control workset visibility on a per view basis. Regardless of the default setting. By subdividing the project based on these task roles.

Step 8: Check out worksets from the central file When you “check out” a workset. In this situation. you may want to phone them and make arrangements rather than waste valuable work time. You can work on the project from a remote location by doing the following: ■ Before leaving the office and disconnecting from the networked access to the central file. you will lose the changes you made to all your worksets. however. if you know who checked out the required workset. This gives you the right to make changes to the elements in the workset and to add to the workset. you should save the file locally and to the central file at regular intervals. you can select which workset is active. As you work. If you choose Editable at Risk and the owner of the at-risk workset has already published their files to the central file. your changes are saved. When you save locally (to your local file). Local files are user-specific and can only be accessed by the users that created them. your changes propagate to the entire team. you can still work remotely as an individual and as a team. you will not be able to save your changes back to the central file if another user has changed the same workset and already published those changes back to the central file. The tips discussed below provide useful information for working creatively with worksets. You can make a workset active only if it is editable by you. You can also add new elements to any View or Project Standards workset even if they are not editable. save to the central file. Tips and common scenarios 1 When working on a Worksharing-enabled project.” When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. new building elements are assigned to the workset that is active at the moment. ■ If you realize that you need to modify elements in a workset that you did not make editable before going remote. and then save the local file. If the owner of the at-risk workset agrees to relinquish editability of the contested workset. you should save to the central file and relinquish control of all worksets that you set as editable. make any required worksets editable. You can modify any elements in an editable workset and all new elements are added to the active workset. Step 11: Closing a local file At the end of a work session. proceeds as usual. You create a local file by opening the central file and using “Save As” to create a local copy of the central file. On the Options Bar. This makes them available to other team members. you can save your changes back to the central file but then the other owner loses all their work. you should use it only when: ■ You do not intend to save your changes back to the central file. This ensures that your local file is synchronized with the central file. you can make the workset Editable at Risk. When you save to the central file. Step 7: Open worksets Whenever you open a central or local file. you will not only lose the changes to that workset. When working remotely. or 868 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . you should then save to your local file. they are not propagated to the rest of the team. In this instance. you should relinquish any worksets that you no longer need. you have the option to choose which worksets to open. you make that workset editable by you. However. When finished or at regular intervals. each user saves their changes back to the central file where the changes can be propagated to all team members. After saving to the central file. When you save to the central file. Step 9: Work on the project Work on the project. Step 10: Saving your changes As you work on the project throughout the day. This is called “Selective Open. Since making a workset Editable at Risk carries a high risk that work will be lost. no other users can make modifications to any elements in those worksets until you check them back into the central file. Taking your computer to a remote location with the project 2 You do not need to have access to the central file in order to work on the project. you work no differently then you would in the office. Any changes that other users have made to the building model become visible to you after you save to the central file or when you select Reload Latest. There is no limit to the number of worksets you can have editable at one time. you can shorten the time required to open the file by selecting to open only the worksets required to complete your assigned tasks. within the local file.Step 6: Create local files Each team member creates a local file that makes it possible to check out worksets and work on their respective portion of the building model.

Remote rendering 4 While rendering remotely using AccuRender® is supported. In the next exercise. you should check out the Materials workset. reload the latest changes from the central file. A dialog box displays suggesting that any user new to Worksharing should complete this training. It also informs you that existing elements in your project move to default worksets. Open the c_Worksets. it is not recommended unless you understand the implications for the rest of the team. You learned the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios.rvt file located in the Common folder. Using Worksharing in a Project | 869 . You subdivide the project into worksets and save the project as the "Central File. Multiple users working remotely 3 Users can work remotely provided the remote users have high-speed network access to the central file. you will probably be changing material definitions and other project settings. click Open. 2 Click OK to accept the default workset names. This will guarantee that no other user can make it editable during the remainder of your absence. you enable Worksharing within an existing project. click the Training Files icon. This means that other team members will not be able to change any materials while you have the Materials workset checked out. If you have a colleague who is in the office with access to the central file. In this conceptual exercise. WARNING You should avoid editing a workset “at risk” whenever possible. Enable Worksharing 1 On the File menu. using VPN. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets In this exercise. you enable Worksharing in a project and set up some initial worksets." Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. and make that workset editable. change the username to your name under Settings ➤ Options. In the left pane of the Open dialog box.■ You are very confident that no other user will make that workset editable in your absence. Alternatively. for instance. click Worksets. To do this. The Worksets dialog box is displayed. you learned what to consider before enabling Worksharing. you may want to request that someone start a session of Revit Building. a user can transfer a local file to someone with network access who can then publish the changes back to the central file. and transfer the updated local file back to the remote user. If you intend to render the building model while away from the office.

This improves performance since fewer components need to be generated in each view. TIP You can change your username by selecting Options under the Settings menu. 9 Click OK. Notice that Visible by default in all views is checked. click New. 13 Click Rename. You cannot change your username with an unsaved Worksharing-enabled project open. 870 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . a third team member is assigned furniture placement. Because furniture should only be visible in specific views. currently named Workset1. Therefore. and Views. and notice all are editable by you. under Show. you can rename the default workset. 11 Enter Furniture Layout. one user is assigned to the development of the exterior. select: ■ ■ ■ Families Project Standards Views 5 Scroll down the list of workset names. The next workset you create is for the furniture layout. turn off Families. clear Visible by default in all views. select Workset1. another is assigned the interior layout. The final new workset is for the exterior shell of the building model. Because the interior walls appear in many views. you must create worksets that allow each team member to work independently. 8 Enter the name Interior Layout. For training purposes. Only User-Created worksets should display. The project must be subdivided in such a way as to reflect the tasks of each user. 6 Under Show. imagine four users including yourself. 10 Click New. you should turn off Visible by default in all views. Do not change your username during this exercise unless explicitly instructed to do so. In this case. Creating new worksets 7 In the Worksets dialog box. 12 In the Worksets dialog box. it is better to make them visible by default.3 Notice that all worksets are open and editable by you. and click OK. a small number of team members are working on the building model. In this simple training project. Your username displays as the present owner. 4 In the Worksets dialog box. Rather than create a new workset for these elements. Project Standards. and the remainder of the team must work on wall section details.

The easiest way to do this is to drag a pick box beginning inside the lower right corner and up to the upper left corner. TIP You can also hold CTRL down to select multiple elements. select Interior Layout for Workset. In this training file. Using Worksharing in a Project | 871 . and click OK You have created the required worksets for each team member working on this project. 19 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK. under Identity Data. 17 In the drawing area.14 In the Rename dialog box. 18 On the Options Bar. however. expand Floor Plans. Because you renamed Workset1 to Exterior Shell. When you initially activate Worksharing. You do. click . Hold Shift down to deselect an element. 22 On the Options Bar. notice that the Workset parameter is set to Exterior Shell. and walls. Subdividing the project into worksets 16 In the Project Browser. 20 Click OK. This is why all worksets are editable immediately after you enable worksets. 15 In the Worksets dialog box. select any of the exterior walls of the building model. 21 Select one of the interior walls. click OK. all building model elements are placed into Workset1 by default. The next step is to assign elements within the building model to specific worksets. type the name Exterior Shell. 23 In the Element Properties dialog box. click . including the interior doors. and double-click Level 1. 24 Select all of the interior elements. furniture components have not been added to the building model and therefore do not need to be moved to the respective workset. under Identity Data. all building model elements are assigned to that workset. stairs. need to reassign the interior elements to the Interior Layout workset. expand Views (all).

click . 32 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. You can verify that all interior elements have been reassigned to the Interior Layout workset by turning off the visibility of that workset. and click OK. double-click Level 2. click the Worksets tab. select Interior Layout for Workset. 37 In the Element Properties dialog box. 29 Clear Interior Layout to turn off the visibility of that workset in the view. This is because you turned off “Visible by default in all views” when you created the workset. 26 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Visibility/Graphics. under Views (all). 33 Select Interior Layout. 36 On the Options Bar. The Level 1 floor plan should display with only the exterior shell visible. and click OK. 27 On the View menu. The central file is created automatically the first time you save the project after enabling worksets. 30 Click OK. under Identity Data. If any interior elements remain. 872 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . under Identity Data. click the Worksets tab. 34 In the Project Browser.25 On the Options Bar. Notice that the visibility of the Furniture Layout workset is turned off in this view. Create the central file 38 On the File menu. 35 In the drawing area. select Interior Layout for Workset. 28 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. under Floor Plans. click Save As. 31 On the View menu. click Visibility/Graphics. select them and change their workset assignment to Interior Layout. click . and click OK. select all of the interior elements of the building model.

This is imperative if you and another user intend to complete the multi-user exercise later in this tutorial. Creating a local file 1 On the File menu. If you have not yet completed the exercise. click Non Editable. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets. If you do not have access to a network and still want to complete that exercise. Checking out worksets 9 On the File menu. but be sure not to save the file in the training files location. under Open Worksets. and click Save. You then created the central file and checked in all worksets. verify that Make this the Central location after save is not selected. 40 Click Save. and then assigned building model elements to the worksets. 6 In the Save As dialog box. and click OK. If you intend on completing the remaining exercises in this tutorial. You have created a local file which is for your use only. check out worksets. This project is now ready for individuals to access it and check out their required worksets. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file created in the previous exercise. Next. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. 42 In the Worksets dialog box.Navigate to a location on a network drive that all team members have access to. 3 Click Open. 7 In the File Save Options dialog box. In this exercise. please do so before continuing. 44 Click OK. 43 On the right side of the dialog box. and click OK. You must access it in each of the remaining exercises. created new worksets to accommodate each team member. click Open. 8 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. select all the User-Created worksets by pressing CTRL + A. you must relinquish workset editability so that other users can have access to the worksets they need. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. make modifications to the building model. click Close. Checking in the worksets 41 On the File menu. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. select all the User-Created worksets. you enabled Worksharing on a project. In addition. you create your local file. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. 39 In the Save As dialog box. Notice that your name has been removed as the owner of the worksets and all Editable values are set to No. click Options. click Worksets. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. make sure you remember the location of this central file. 45 On the File menu. this can be accomplished by saving the central file to your hard drive and changing your user name before accessing the project. enter Worksets Project-Central as the file name. click Worksets. select the central file and. Working Individually with Worksets In this exercise. select Specify. This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and access to the resulting central file. and publish your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. 5 On the File menu. Using Worksharing in a Project | 873 . Now that you have created the central file. 2 In the Open dialog box. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. click Save As. 4 In the Opening Worksets dialog box.

you can only select editable elements within the drawing area. expand Floor Plans. 17 On the Options Bar. you are assigned the task of designing the interior layout of the building model. 13 On the Worksets toolbar. Because this element is not owned by another user. the Edited by value is now assigned to you. 16 Select the upper exterior wall and notice a symbol displays indicating that the element belongs to a workset that is not currently editable. On the Options Bar. Notice that the wall still belongs to the Exterior Shell workset. If this is selected. Your name displays as the owner of the Interior Layout workset.The project sharing environment allows you to choose which worksets are opened during a working session. expand Views (all). 14 In the Project Browser. select Interior Layout. In this case. 21 Click OK. select Finish Face: Exterior for Location Line. under Identity Data. however. click . 12 On the Window menu. Only the worksets that are opened are visible during that session. 20 On the Options Bar. 22 On the File menu. Revit Building borrows it for you and applies your changes. Verify that it is cleared. you have borrowed the ownership of the upper exterior wall. and click OK. In this case. Before working on the model. click Worksets. Any new elements that you add to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. notice that you do not own the Exterior Shell workset. 15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and select Yes for Editable. In the Worksets dialog box. The upper exterior wall should still be selected. a message would display and you would have the option to cancel the change or make the element editable. but you are listed as a borrower of that workset. select Interior Layout for Name. 10 In the Worksets dialog box. click . notice the Editable Only option. Even though you have not checked out the Exterior Shell workset. If it was owned by another user. click Modify. 19 Under Constraints. you should activate the Worksets toolbar. The Worksets toolbar displays with a drop-down list that allows you to specify the active workset. 11 Click OK. and double-click Level 1. notice that this element is assigned to the Exterior Shell workset and that the Edited by value is blank. 23 Click OK. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. you can still edit this wall. You are now ready to modify the interior layout of the building model. click Toolbar ➤ Worksets. 874 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects .

Modify the building model 24 Select the door on the right side of the corridor. click Door. 29 Using the following illustration as a guide. and extend the lower end until it intersects the horizontal wall you added previously. 25 Delete the door. and modify the length so that the corridor is open. select Basic Wall: Interior . 30 On the Design Bar. 28 In the Type Selector. 26 Select the wall that hosted the deleted door. click Wall. click Modify. Using Worksharing in a Project | 875 . 33 In the Type Selector. add a horizontal wall in the lower right corner.126mm Partition (2-hr). 32 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 27 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select M_Sgl Flush: 864 x 2032mm. 31 Select the vertical interior wall in the upper right corner. The precise location is not important.

If you have not yet completed these exercises. two users access the central file through a network connection. you should relinquish all worksets.34 Using the following illustration as a guide. you can relinquish the user-created worksets as well as any borrowed elements. By default. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. You should check this element back into central so that others can use it if necessary. If you intend to complete the remainder of this tutorial by proceeding to the multi-user exercise. skip the following section. Each modifies the building model within their local file and publishes it back to the central file where the other user can see the changes. When working in your local file. click Save to Central. and borrowed an element from a workset you did not own. All of the new elements that you added were automatically assigned to the Interior Layout workset. save to central. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). In this particular case. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Building and setting the username to User 2. and proceed to Creating a local copy. Saving your work 35 On the File menu. Whenever you save. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the local file after “Save to Central” completes successfully 37 Click OK. please do so before continuing. notice that there is an option to save the local file immediately after the save to central. you borrowed the upper exterior wall in order to modify it. and save locally immediately afterward. This exercise requires the completion of the previous workset exercises and access to the resulting local and central files. a tooltip. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. You modified the building model. add two door openings into the rooms you created. you created your local file. checked out worksets. 876 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . At the end of a work session. If you place the cursor over any of the new elements. you should perform regular saves. and published your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. Using Worksets with Multiple Users In this exercise. It is recommended that you locally save your work approximately every 30 minutes and save to central every 1-2 hours. In this exercise. each user must check out worksets. Throughout the process. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. and reload the latest changes. For training purposes. In addition. Borrowed Elements is selected. make elements editable. which matches the information in the Status Bar. displays the workset as well as the element type. leave this file open in its current state. Although this is not a necessary option if you are in the middle of a work session. The Save to Central dialog box is displayed with the path to the central file automatically filled in. it is recommended. In the following section of this exercise. 36 In the Save to Central dialog box.

8 Click Open. 2 Start a new Revit Building session by double-clicking the Revit Building icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. User 2: Create a local file. 13 Navigate to your preferred location on the hard drive. This is a system setting. If both users have completed the previous worksets exercises and created central files on the network. 11 In the Save As dialog box. You are now the owner of that workset. and check out worksets 6 On the File menu. under Open Worksets. Using Worksharing in a Project | 877 . enter User 2. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. instructions are staggered.rvt. Creating a local copy 5 In this exercise. You now have a local copy of the project. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. 7 In the Open dialog box. select Specify. and click OK. under Username. and click Save. This file is for your use only. and select Yes for Editable. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. 16 Click OK. 3 On the Settings menu. consider that person to be User 1. Throughout the remainder of this exercise. 9 In the Opening Worksets dialog box. 4 Click the General Tab and. 15 Select the Exterior Shell workset. 12 In the File Save Options dialog box. click Save As. In addition. specifically sequenced. and click OK. The next series of steps create a local file for User 2. click Open. verify that Make this the Central location after save is not selected. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. return to the Settings dialog box. click Options. click Worksets.Using a second Revit Building session to mimic User 2 1 Minimize the current Revit Building window. and click OK. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. Regardless of which central file you choose to use. select one of those central files to be used in this exercise. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file named Worksets Project-Central. The user who has not yet created a local file for the chosen central file is User 2. select the central file and. two users work on the building model residing in the central file you created and saved in a previous exercise. and reset the Username to your computer login name. select all the User-Created worksets. click Options. For training purposes. 10 On the File menu. and refer explicitly to User 1 and User 2. one user has already created a local file. 14 On the File menu.

If it is not open. 26 On the File menu. 30 Using the following illustration as a guide. User 2: Modify the building model and publish changes 29 In the Project Browser. and double-click Level 1. open it now. A warning is displayed informing you that a conflict exists. 24 Select the vertical interior wall shown in the following illustration. 878 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . 25 Click anywhere in the empty drawing area to ignore the warning. 27 In the Save to Central dialog box. Notice that the Exterior Shell workset is checked out by User 2. 20 Click OK to return to the Worksets dialog box. and double-click Level 1.User 1: Check out worksets. expand Views (all). Notice that the changes made by User 1 do not immediately display in the local file of User 2. and move it upward approximately 2 meters. 19 Try to change the Editable status for Exterior Shell to Yes. 28 Click OK. expand Floor Plans. click Worksets. expand Views (all). and move it to the left until it approaches the centerline of the exterior double door on the south wall. 23 In the Project Browser. it becomes the active workset. select the lower exterior wall. 22 Click OK. modify the building model. select the option to save the local file after the central file is saved. A warning is displayed informing you that you cannot check out this workset because it is already checked out by another user. 21 Select the Interior Layout workset. and select Yes for Editable. and publish changes 17 User 1 should still have the local file open. If you only have one workset checked out. That is because changes made to the central file display in local files only when the worksets are explicitly updated. expand Floor Plans. click Save to Central. Notice that you own this workset and the active workset is now Interior Layout. 18 On the File menu.

click the Worksets tab. 33 In the Save to Central dialog box. click Reload Latest. you are asked if you want to make the Furniture Layout workset the active workset. 42 On the Project Browser. 41 Select Furniture Layout. 40 On the File menu. 35 Using the following illustration as a guide. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. However. any elements added to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. and move the door to the right in order to avoid the conflict. under Floor Plans. and click Duplicate. Therefore. click Visibility/Graphics. You should turn on the visibility before adding furniture. choose any desk. under Floor Plans. select the option to save the local file after the central file is saved. and check out additional worksets 39 On the File menu. 32 On the File menu. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. The wall conflict with the door opening that User 1 introduced now displays. and click OK. click Save to Central. and click OK. User 1: Reload latest worksets. you publish your changes and load the changes other users have made to the building model. 38 Click OK. you still have complete access to the elements belonging to the Interior Layout workset. delete the left window on the lower exterior wall. the Visible by default option was not selected. click Worksets. 50 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. select Yes for Editable. right-click Copy of Level 1. 43 On the Project Browser. 48 On the Design Bar. Using Worksharing in a Project | 879 . under Floor Plans. Because you now have more than one workset checked out. 47 In the Type Selector. Before adding any furniture. A message displays informing you that the component you are trying to place is not visible in that view. click Save to Central.A message displays warning you that several windows are not cutting anything. When you save to central. click Modify. 44 In the Rename View dialog box. select Furniture Layout to turn on its visibility. and click inside any room. This is because when the Furniture Layout workset was created. you should create a furniture plan view. 34 Click OK. Even though the Furniture Layout workset is active. click Component. 36 On the File menu. and click OK. 46 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 37 In the Save to Central dialog box. 51 Notice that the desk you added previously now displays. Click Yes. the visibility of the workset is not turned on even though it is checked out and is the active workset. The changes User 2 made are apparent. and click Rename. 45 On the Project Browser. right-click Level 1. 31 Click Delete Instances to delete the windows. select the option to save the local file after the central file is saved. 49 On the View menu. under Views (all). This is because windows are wall-hosted components and cannot float in the air without a wall to host them.

59 In the Rename dialog box. leave this file open in its current state. select Save to Central. 64 Click OK. If you intend to complete the final portion of this tutorial by proceeding to the Element Borrowing exercise. 60 Click OK twice. select the following. 62 In the Worksets dialog box. User 2: Make an element editable on the fly 55 On the File menu. This exercise also requires two users and you can skip the first sections of the exercise and proceed directly to the section. 69 On the File menu.52 On the File menu. modified the building model. and click Properties. select Project Standards. 880 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . In the final exercise of this tutorial. two users worked on the same building model using worksets. 53 In the Save to Central dialog box. 66 In the Save to Central dialog box. and click OK. 61 On the File menu. and click OK. click Save to Central. select the option to save the local file after the central file is saved. under Show. 63 Scroll down to the bottom of the list until you see Wall Types. click Rename. User 1: Reload latest. 57 In the Element Properties dialog box. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the local file after “Save to Central” completes successfully 67 Click OK. you learn how to borrow elements from worksets that other users are actively working on. 70 In the Save to Central dialog box. ■ ■ User-created Worksets Save the local file after “Save to Central” completes successfully In this exercise. Checking out worksets. click Edit/New. and published their changes back to the central file. click Reload Latest. 58 In the Type Properties dialog box. enter Exterior Wall . 56 Right-click the upper exterior wall. Notice the new Level 1 Furniture Plan view in the Project Browser. 54 Click OK. Each user checked out worksets. click Save to Central. select Reload Latest. If you intend to complete the final exercise of this tutorial. Notice you have borrowed a portion of the workset. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users. and save 68 On the File menu.200mm. leave this file open in its current state. click Worksets. 65 On the File menu.

At the appropriate point in this exercise. NOTE When you open the training dataset for this tutorial. verify that Make this the Central location after save is not selected. 4 In the File Save Options dialog box. This is the local file for User 1. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. you save the dataset as a central file. Save training file as the central file on the network 1 On the File menu. 7 On the File menu. proceed directly to the section Checking out worksets. perform the following steps to create a session for User 2: ■ Start a second session of Revit Building by double-clicking the icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. click Options. and still have your local files open. and click OK. 8 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. click Save As. 9 In the Save As dialog box. 10 In the File Save Options dialog box. 11 Name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. you may receive a message informing you that the central file has been relocated. click Options. select Make this the Central location after save. User 2: Create local file 12 If you are a single user and want to replicate the multi-user experience. On the Settings menu. If you have not completed the previous workset exercises. and click OK. 5 Click Save. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. Set the Username to User 2. In subsequent steps. Click OK to this message and subsequent messages. Click the General tab of the Options dialog box. Open the c_Worksets Project-Central. you must borrow elements that belong to worksets that the other user has checked out. click the Training Files icon. Each user must have network access to the central file. and click Save. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). 2 Navigate to a directory on the network that both users have access to. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. two users are working on the same project with separate local files.rvt file located in the Common folder. you need to set up your central and local files. The central file should still be open.Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users In this exercise. Only one user needs to open the dataset and save the central file to a network location. There are specific instructions for each user. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Building and setting the username to User 2. click Save As. click Options. click Open. You have created a new central file for User 1 and User 2. You learn how to make borrowing requests and how to grant them. These messages are a result of the central file being relocated (to your PC). ■ ■ ■ Using Worksharing in a Project | 881 . 3 In the Save As dialog box. and click OK. throughout this training. User 1: Create local file 6 For the sake of simplicity. As each of you work. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. finished the previous workset exercises. the user that saved the central file should be User 1. and these problems are rectified. This exercise requires two users and.

select them. and select Yes for Editable. and click Save. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. Next. Checking out worksets 21 Both User 1 and User 2 can check out their worksets at the same time. verify that Make this the Central location after save is not selected. You have created a local file which is for your use only. 19 In the File Save Options dialog box. 31 On the left exterior wall. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. 18 In the Save As dialog box. This is a system setting. if any User-Created worksets are not open. You are now the owner of that workset. and then click OK. select Interior Layout. 28 Under Active Workset. User 2: Check out worksets 26 On the File menu. select the central file and under Open Worksets. click Worksets. 27 In the Worksets dialog box. click Save As. and navigate to the network location where User 1 saved the central file. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. 23 In the Worksets dialog box. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. return to the Settings dialog box. 16 Select all the User-Created worksets. select Exterior Shell.This Revit Building session is now set up for User 2. select the second window from the top. 17 On the File menu. 15 Click Open. 13 On the File menu. 25 Under Active Workset. select Specify. 24 Select the Exterior Shell workset. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. 882 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. and click OK. under Floor Plans. verify that Editable Only is cleared. This allows you to select elements that belong to worksets that you do not own. click Open. click Options. 20 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. and then click OK. 30 On the Options Bar. 14 In the Open dialog box. Afterwards. and click OK. and reset the Username to your computer login name. You are now the owner of that workset. User 2: Borrow an element from User 1 29 On the Project Browser. select the Interior Layout workset. In addition. and select Yes for Editable. click Worksets. User 1: Check out worksets 22 On the File menu. the steps for each user have to be followed in sequence. double-click Level 1. and click Open.

Using Worksharing in a Project | 883 . 35 In the Editing Requests dialog box. and notice the window is in the new location. a message informs you that you are waiting for permission from User 1. 33 Click Place Request to ask User 1 for permission to edit the window.A symbol appears letting you know that it belongs to a workset you do not own. 32 Move the window 500 mm toward the upper exterior wall. and click Editing Requests. A message informs you that your request has been granted. 37 Click Close. 36 Click Grant. At this point. After you submit the request. 39 Click OK. User 2: Check for editability grant 38 In the Check Editability Grants dialog box. You can do this by dragging the window or by modifying one of the temporary dimension values. you should inform User 1 that you are waiting for permission to edit a borrowed element. click the File menu. click Check Now. A warning message informs you that you must obtain permission from User 1. Leave this dialog box open until User 1 grants permission. select the request submitted by User 2. User 1: Grant User 2 permission to borrow element 34 When User 2 contacts you and informs you that a borrowing request is pending your authorization.

User 1 and 2: Save to Central. 41 In the Save to Central dialog box. select Save to Central. click Close. In this multi-user exercise. you requested permission to edit the element. and close 40 On the File menu. select the following. you learned how to borrow elements from another workset even though that workset was actively being edited by another user. ■ ■ ■ User-created Worksets Borrowed Elements (User 2 only) Save the local file after “Save to Central” completes successfully 42 On the File menu. to Local. In this case. and the other user granted it. and click OK. 884 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects .

you create multiple design schemes within a single project file. it is common to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. Because all design options coexist in the project with the main model (the main model consists of elements not specifically assigned to a design option). These schemes can be conceptual or can be detailed engineering designs. Using design options.Creating Multiple Design Options 27 When working with a building model. you learn how to create and manage multiple design sets and options within a single building model. In this tutorial. 885 . you can study and modify each design option and present the options to the client.

make your final design decision. each with multiple design options. With the second option. you can have an option set called roofing with multiple subordinate roofing schemes. This option will be the first structural scheme consisting of 75 mm round columns and 50 mm round bars. After you and the client agree on the final design. under Option Set. click the Training Files icon. In this particular case. the task is to develop two roof schemes for an addition to an existing house. In the final exercise of this lesson. you design each of the structural options. After you create a design option. At any time in the design process. Each option set represents a portion of the building model wherein design alternatives are being considered. Any new elements introduced at that time become part of that option. click Open. and delete the unwanted options from the project. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. 2 In the Design Options dialog box.rvt file located in the Metric folder. Open the m_Urban_House. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. There is no limit to the number of option sets you can create. you can edit it. Notice Option Set 1 has been created with a design option: Option 1 (primary). you learn how to manage and organize the design options. In the second exercise. you can have multiple sets of design options. In the first exercise in this lesson. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. 886 | Chapter 27 Creating Multiple Design Options . In the left pane of the Open dialog box. you can designate a primary design scheme for each option set. you set up multiple design option sets. you can have an option set for the roof structure with multiple subordinate structural design schemes. Creating the Structural Design Options In this exercise. The client has asked you to create various options. you create two roof system design options that work with the structural options. The first time you open the Design Options dialog box within a project.Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project You can use design options to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. In addition. For example. the only available command is to create a new option set. Create first design option 1 On the Tools menu. you create a unique in-place family as the structural system. and each option set can have multiple schemes. These three exercises are designed to be completed sequentially with the second and third exercises dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. you set up the design option names and add the modeling elements to the structural design option set. click New. The client is interested in a pergola and sunshade for the roof terrace but is not sure of the specific layout or materials.

and double-click ROOF TERRACE. Selecting Constrain limits the movement and helps ensure the post-copy alignment of the columns. 14 Click at an identifiable part of the notch construction. the second column directly across from it at the intersection of the two walls. The first click specifies the reference point on the element to be copied. and click Close. you can continue adding new copies without reselecting the reference point (the first click). Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project | 887 . select Round Column: 75mm Diameter. and the third column centered between the two.TIP In this exercise. Any new elements introduced to the building model are added to this option. In this case. You should delete the dimension and unconstrain after adding the column. 13 Zoom in around the left column that is embedded in the notch. TIP You can zoom in and out easily during this process using the wheel on your wheel mouse. each is constructed for interchangeability. In the following illustration. Because it is important that you select the same location on the notches you copy to. Constrain Copy Multiple The Copy command is a two-click process. the three columns need to be copied three times to create a 3 x 4 grid of 12 columns. TIP To center the middle column. 11 On the Edit toolbar. 7 In the Type Selector. the midpoint of the lower notch line is selected. make sure you select a point that is easily recognizable. 9 On the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans. and zoom in on the upper half of the building model. or add a dimension string between the columns. The left column should be centered at the intersection of the notch and the wall. and the second click specifies the point on the building model the reference point is copied to. 3 Select Option 1 (primary). 10 Select the three columns either by dragging a pick box around them or by selecting them individually while holding CTRL. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. therefore. click Edit Selected. expand Views (all). click Column. click Modify. click 12 On the Options Bar. the roof and structure systems must work together. 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 5 On the View menu. select: ■ ■ ■ . and click the EQ symbol to equalize the segments. Arrows and the dimension lines have been added for training purposes only. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. By selecting Multiple. either add a centered reference plane and snap the column to it. 4 In the Project Browser. add three columns.

A copy of the three selected columns is added. 888 | Chapter 27 Creating Multiple Design Options . click Modify on the Design Bar to end the copy process. 17 Zoom out and. Notice the 12 columns that you added. and click in the same location as you did for the previous notch. they are difficult to see in this view. When you are finished. Because of the size of the columns. 16 Zoom in around the notch construction.15 Zoom out and move downward to the notch just below this one. using the same technique. 18 On the View toolbar. add a copy of the columns to the next two notches below this one. click .

click Beam. 22 Add the first beam between the upper left and right columns by using the following steps: ■ ■ ■ Zoom in on the upper-left column. 25 On the Edit toolbar. 23 On the Design Bar. select Round Bar : 50mm. click Modify. The first click specifies the beam start point. In it. Zoom out and move the cursor over the upper right column. you add the beams that span the columns. 24 Select the Beam you added previously. and click at its center to set the beam start point. click . Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project | 889 . 20 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. The second click specifies the end of the beam. 19 In the Project Browser. and click on the center to set the beam endpoint. Adding a beam is a two-click process. The beam needs to be added between the remaining columns. Use the following illustration as a guide. two callouts with thin lines have been added to clarify the location of the start and end points of the beam. 21 In the Type Selector.Next. Zoom in on the upper right column. double-click TOP OF CORE. You can do this manually or use the Copy command.

Notice that the beams complete the bracket structure for the proposed roof. select: ■ ■ ■ Constrain Copy Multiple 27 Zoom in around the upper left column that is embedded in the notch. and select the center of the column to add a copy.26 On the Options Bar. zoom into the left column. This is the reference point for the subsequent copies. move down to the next set of columns. 890 | Chapter 27 Creating Multiple Design Options . click . 30 On the View toolbar. and click the center point. 29 Repeat this step twice more until a beam is added to each set of columns. 28 Zoom out.

under Option. click New. enter Beam for New. under Option Set. 35 Select Option 1 (primary) and. 34 In the Design Options dialog box. enter Brackets for New. click Rename. click Rename. and click OK. Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project | 891 . notice that you are still editing Option Set 1: Option 1 (primary). 36 In the Rename dialog box. under Option. 40 In the Rename dialog box. NOTE Be sure you are creating a new option. 32 In the Design Options dialog box. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. not a new option set. and click OK. under Option. 33 Click Finish Editing. 37 Select Option 2 and.Organize design option sets and subordinate options 31 On the Tools menu. 39 Select Option Set 1 and. enter Structure for New. click Rename. 38 In the Rename dialog box. and click OK.

44 Select the option set Roofing and. click New. 46 Under Option. select Option 1 (primary). 48 Under Option. notice that Structure: Beam is displayed. select Beam. This allows you to more easily manage the project. click New. select Option 2.Logically naming the option sets and relative options allows you to more easily manage them. Design the second structural design option 49 In this section of the exercise. 43 In the Rename dialog box. it will resemble the following illustration. name the option Louvers. name the option Sunscreen. click Rename. under Option. There should now be two roofing design options. and click OK. 45 Under Roofing. and click OK. 50 In the Design Options dialog box. under Structure. Notice that the columns added to the Brackets design option do not display. click Rename. enter Roofing for New. 52 Click Close. 892 | Chapter 27 Creating Multiple Design Options . When finished. 51 Under Edit. 47 Under Roofing. under Option Set. 41 Under Option Set. you create the second design option. Under Now Editing. You have completed the initial setup of the design option sets and their subordinate design option names. 42 Select Option Set 1 and. click Rename. select Edit Selected. and click OK.

click Align. 56 In the Type Selector. Using the Align tool requires two clicks. click Component. Refer to the following illustration. The second click represents the plane that is moved. 54 Zoom in toward the top of the roof terrace near the stairs. double-click ROOF TERRACE. 59 Align the roof beam by clicking the lower edge of the adjacent horizontal wall and then clicking the lower edge of the roof beam. 58 On the Tools menu. select M_Roof Beam. The first click sets the plane that the object will be aligned to. 55 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 57 Place a roof beam into the drawing area as shown.53 In the Project Browser. Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project | 893 . under Floor Plans.

Clear Group and Associate Enter 4 for number Select 2nd for Move To: Select Constrain Using the Array tool requires two clicks. 62 Select the beam and. 894 | Chapter 27 Creating Multiple Design Options .60 After aligning the beam. 65 Move the cursor down to the next intersection of the lower edge of the horizontal wall and the